Home

8510C Network Analyzer On-Site Service Manual

Contents

1. D15 D15 D15 MOTORRTN DGND D13 D13 D13 D11 D11 D11 09 D9 D9 D7 D7 D7 DS DS D5 D3 D3 D3 D1 D1 Di DGND DGND b DGND gt LDG LDG LDG 18 J J A18 J A18 J J DISC DRIVE SECURITY KEY Alu Alu E Alu 10 5 10 10 DGND 8 A8 A8 DENSITY gt J J lt J J lt J lt gt J2 1 lt A6 gt J J lt AG J lt A6 J lt J N gt J2 3 lt PED LATD lt J lt J lt J lt N gt J2 5 lt DGND T lt DGND DGND 5 TN as a S gt J J lt J lt J lt J lt gt J2 9 J lt J17 2 DGND N C N C N C WS gt J J lt J lt NOE
2. v v PROCESSOR MAIN PHASE IF SWEEP ADC A D SAMPLE HOLD PULSE TRACK INTERFACE LOCK PRETUNE COUNTER ADC CONTROL CONVERTER AMP AND HOLD XA24 XA23 XA22 XA21 XA20 XA18 XA18 XA17 16 LHOST 1 23 1 LPRTHLO LHOST 23 1 LPLSHLO 1 23 1 PLSTSTX TEMP LPLSHLO 23 PLSTSTX 1 ABA LOBRD 2 Bae NG LSS s Ne SE SE Bae Nec 10VR Moog Bor uss 2 10VR PLSTSTY 1OVR mE 23 PLSTSTY Aa 15 COM HBUF ENA 3 255 N C N E LENDRA N C 3 N C N lt 25 N C N C 3 N C LHOLO 3 25 HSTART2 LHOLD 3 HSTART2 PLSREFX LHOLO N s 25 PLSREFX N C El 15 DCOM LINLEO 3 269 u m NC mE e FS Nee eee NE LSTARTI 4 2 owe CSTARTI 7 PLSREFY E NCE 21 PLSREFY LINLEO 4 17 35VREG LLOST 5 279 C Lirsgo Lost LIrsRO cost 5520955 26 Lost 227
3. THE PORTION OF ITS RANGE THAT THE UNLEVELED LIGHT 15 TURNED ON SET THE FREQ CAL CONTROL TO THE CENTER OF THIS RANGE FOR SWEEP SPEED 200m SEC NUMEROUS RUNNING ERRORS AND BAND CROSS GLITCHES MAY OCCUR SEE SERVICE MANUAL IF NOT AQJUSTEO 17 CAN CAUSE THE 8510 TO LOSE PHASE FOR DETAILS LOCK AT LOW FREQUENCIES 1 1 2 YELLOW LEO SHOWING TEST SET 15 ACTIVE YELLOW LED SHOWING LINE VOLTAGE IS ON LEDS FOR S PARAMETER TEST SETS SHOWING PORT WHERE POWER 15 APPLIEO 4 GREEN LED S THAT SHOW 5 5 15 15 REGULATED VOLTAGES THAT SHOWS SIGNAL IF POWER IS PRESENT APROXIMATELY 10MH2 TO 0 2 IF GREEN LED IS LIT RF SOURCE 1S PRODUCING RF POWER BY THE 85101 5V SUPPLY POWER AND 4 THAT SHOW UNREGULATED SUPPLIES ARE ON 1 RED LED THAT SHOWS THERMAL SHUTDOWN 8510 SYSTEM LEVEL TROUBLESHO
4. v b v Vv v v v 15VRAW m REFERENCE mieu REGULATOR A2 IF B1 IF B2 IF SYNC TEST SYNC TEST PULSE PULSE MIXER MIXER MIXER DETECTOR DETECTOR DETECTOR MULTIPLEXER XA15 XA13 XA11 Xag XA7 XAS XA3 XA2 TORAN THER2 028 1 DCOM 1 23 23 DCOM DCOM 1 23 1 23 1 23 23 2E 2 MER 24 A DCOM 24 pcom ADCom A 5 se 249 6 18605 Lrsos 349 N C LTSDS scu 240 vc mm 15VUNREG SVREG 3 C SVSEN SVREG K DCOM 3 25 DCOM lt 25 DCOM ADCOM DCOM LRIFWS 3 lt 25 LRIFWS A LTIFWS 31 gt 25 LTIFWS 3 255 MC Le 250 NLC T 9 NE ot m DCOM 4 26 DCOM 26 DCOM DCOM A CRIFRS 4 lt T26 LRIFRS A LTIFRS 26 LTIFRS 255 NC NC 265 ND 26 6 N C 6 2 NC N C 5 27 LIF SRO N C lt 27 LIFSRO N LIFSRO wet o D le 27 LIFSRO A LHOST 51 gt 27 LIFSRO LHOST e TS qS z LIFSRO LHOST LIFSRO 05 N C o 28 LRUS Nc lt 28 LRUS LRDS 6 gt 28 LRU
5. DGND L SHDN LPRST LNMI DGND CLK8MHZ DGND DGND MOTOR 5V MOTOR 5V MOTOR 12V MOTOR 12V 5V 5V 5V 5V DGND DGND LRFRINT LMBMINT LDTACK LGINT LAS LWRITE LLDS LUDS DGND DGND uM M AS AS AN AN IS IS AS IIS IS IS IS ISIN IS HIS IS IS IN IN IS IS IN IN IN IN IN IN IN S AS AN IN IS IS IIS IS HIS IS IS IS IN IIS IN IN IN IN S lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt To Page 20f2 ss425c 85101C A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram LCD 1 of 2 To Page 1 of 2 EGULATOR PUT OUT DRIVE POWER MOTOR SV MOTORRTN SPARES SPARE 3
6. 60 5 51 Replaceable P arts 85102B Replaceable Parts Table 5 19 85102 Cabinet Parts Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number 1 5062 3735 1 COVER TOP 18 28480 5062 3735 2 5062 3757 2 COVER ASSEMBLY SIDE 28480 5062 3757 3 0515 2086 8 SCREW SMM4 0 7 PCFLTX 28480 0515 2086 4 5021 8403 1 FRAME FRONT 28480 5021 8403 5 5041 8801 4 FOOT BOTTOM 28480 5041 8801 6 85102 00061 1 BOTTOM COVER 28480 85102 00061 7 5062 3799 2 HANDLE ASSEMBLY FRONT 28480 5062 3799 8 0515 0396 6 SCREW MACH 8 32 375 IN LG 100 DEG 28480 0515 0396 9 5021 8496 2 TRIM FRONT HANDLE 28480 5021 8496 10 5041 8821 2 FOOT REAR 28480 5041 8821 11 5001 8232 1 GUSSET SIDE 28480 5001 8232 12 5021 5837 4 STRUT CORNER 18 28480 5021 5837 13 5021 5804 1 FRAME REAR 28480 5021 5804 5 52 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable P arts 85102B Replaceable Parts Figure 5 30 85102 Cabinet Parts 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 53 Replaceable P arts 85102B Replaceable Parts 5 54 8510C On Site Service Manual Replacement Procedures 6 1 Replacement P rocedures Overview Overview 85101C Replacement Procedures Theoriginal 85101C Display Processor incorporated a cathode ray tube CRT The current design incorporates a liquid crystal display LCD S
7. 6 8 A2 Disk Drive ae ikea EEG REC EE ed ae HE an Ei ed 6 9 A11 Display Replacement ER eee 6 10 A9 Rear Panel Replacement Cede adu sd e 6 12 A10Preregulator 6 13 Motherboard Card Cage Assembly 6 14 A15 LCD Assembly Replacement 6 16 uu ca ep FERE ROC 6 18 85102B Replacement 6 21 Fronit Panel Replacements ad di dee Fibra e dO 6 22 Rectifier Board 6 23 Capacitor Discharge PEOCEORIER had R 6 24 Power Supply Capacitor Replacement C1 C2 C4 6 26 Capacitor Discharge Procedure p Pede em d e 6 26 Rear Panel 4 6 27 Related Adjustments Procedures esee ase err nme Rr pe ERE Raga 6 28 Contents 6 Contents 7 Adjustments x cut T Tr 7 2 Safety Cone der atl alS eH PR RRO E MIC ORES 7 3 Edcuipment ReQUIFed usse au
8. 4 65 Disc Command 19 Load Program DISC tees pre RERO RR 4 65 Disc Command 20 Record Program Dist OX 4 66 Disc Command 21 Initialize DISC iilius ck he Rh RR RR 4 66 Service Command 22 Run Service 4 66 Service Command 23 Diagnose a 4 66 How to Reload Ehe Operating E ER PRX sas 4 67 Ern pi Error da qua duse bd bl alta 4 69 Running Error Messages as Built In 4 69 Different Types of Running Error 4 69 Error Message C harackeriskies ios asc sasuke x ARR dose RR oed 4 70 EHE Type Messagi RR dos RU eta d dob de CIUS cn 4 70 Prompt Type M ESSages icd sop x RO aca d ded Ce KORG ce RUE a 4 70 TET pe die Saal Pe eee 4 70 Erro Type OS ciue desee et RR ep CR onere dci Re d eee ao De Se 4 70 Things to Remember about Running Error Messages 4 71 Categories of Caution Running Error Messages 4 71 Phase Lock Running Error Messages o
9. al COUPLER re 1 BIAS TEE 1 x b1 gt BIAS 1 Good Bad HP 8514B STANDARD log MAG REF 60 69 48 1 19 0 dB 32 541 eB om 9 4 desee rm MARKE 5 R 1 0 0 GHz START 9 045000000 GHz STOP 20 000000000 GHz PATH 3 b1 Reflected BIAS 2 b2 pe BIAS tapereo 2 PAD E COUPLER ATTEN 2 0 to 90dB SWITCH RF IN SPLITTER TUNE O to 90dB PRETUNE VTO SENSE at COUPLER ATTEN 1 bt BIAS 1 Good Bad log MAG REF 60 69 dB 10 0 32 541 CN MARKER 1 20 0 GHz START 9 045000000 GHz STOP 20 000000000 GHz PATH 4 b2 Reflected TAPERED a2 PAD a2 i L J COUPLER 0 to 90dB SWITCH RF IN SPLITTER TUNE 0 to 90dB PRETUNE TAPERED T VTO SENSE 5 PAD EN 1 al COUPLER al BIAS TEE 1 X bi b BIAS 1 Good p MARKER 1 20 0 GHz START 45009000 GHz STOP 20 e00e000090 PATH 5 b1 Thru BIAS 2 b2 TAPERED PAD a2 52 COLPLER ATTEN 2 0 to 9098 SWITCH RF IN SPLITTER TUNE 0 to 9048 PRETUNE VTO SENSE a1 LJ COUPLE
10. SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY r ue orive E AND REGULATOR MODULE 5V DIGITAL 5V PREREG 2 A10 PREREGULATOR el rO RPG 2 A10W1 LC VALUE OF LINE MODULE FUSE VARIES WITH LINE VOLTAGE 412V 2 KEYBOARD D DISC qe m 7 ma 960 4 95 EARTH P gt 18V E 18V DRIVE if Z 0 09 03 0 LSHON HJ pa N NEUTRAL REAR PANEL 18V PAS 45V DISC d L 0000 T aV 1V to 49V 15VREF DRIVE MOTOR nm I Y Green LED Red LED E Green LED s B Normo ON NormolzOFF 70V Normally on Steady S i U e 65V NOT USED LSHON SS432C 85101C DISPLAY PROCESSOR OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM LCD Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Troubleshooting Outline 4 32 8510C On Site Service Manual LO PHASE LOCK OUT I i HP 85102 IF DETECTOR All bi TF MIXER 20 Mis e mind Al SAMPLE HOLD AMPS OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM TEST SET INTERCONNECT M TEST ser a CRYSTAL num 5 ier 204Hz x gt SAMPLE PULSE X TEST gt ua from A16 mme i 2 204H2 gt 41 204H2 PLI FI ER NORMAL Y TEST PULSE Y TEST m 3 1 7 gt M AS TEST SYNCHRONOUS DETECTOR trom 16 t gt MX F 0 Wiz 10d8 E oe NORMA
11. 1 4 iste Stier Chapter BE sa ket E doped OR cae dca ab de Xd ae EGER ede C 1 5 Preventive Maintenance Chapter 10 1 5 Derinition or am SYS am cero oed dendi dod ed wa 1 5 Servite Tools Aval allg Rub Oo 1 5 Table of Service EQUIPMENT usu ERE Ez ee e x Rice ie rnc e a icd us 1 6 2 Safety Licensing DIO Serv MAIO agas t Ra de iai dd 2 3 Hazardous Instrument Areas with Power 2 3 Compliance with German F TZ Emissions Requirements 2 6 Compliance with Canadian EMC Requirements 2 6 3 Theory of Operation CIUS j T d cox rn do ee E dX opel see a EO P ECC popa be ede eda 3 2 2 24 225 5238 5 Kad Rau 3 3 s ERE EE Ca AEQ Fa ECC ded a EE a ESSEN Ge or qoa a 3 4 Synthesized SWEDES 3 4 Sweep OSC S uou i eire bei ce dre dde ob anl de dcs 3 4 Test Sete EX GER XR ERNE RK WERE c X CX CC 3 5 sompler Based Test SEES Lu oue vd bcr bled X ah ER ORC E CX CR ae E RS 3 5 Mixer Based Test Bets ERU FRAG CORN SEHD OREN TR REO EERE DERE Rw RET 3 5 fou Frequency P des dob d d CE
12. 8 21 Computing Uncertainty Curves 2 8 22 Editing apedticstions EXI GSE Jeers irekit 8 23 Using Custom Calibration Kit Exercise 8 23 Using a Special Test Set EXErciS 8 24 Using Non Standard Test Cables Exercise 8 25 Using a Non Ideal Test Device Exercise 8 27 Answers to Tutorial Questions isi sacando earitana RR RR ERROR 8 28 Operational Chedc Procedures croice PCS XI Ge qae dc e iras 8 35 Environment and Device Temperature 8 35 User Parameters Check Unratioed 8 35 Inspect Clean and Gage 5 8 36 DASU ECKE consu ce duet codec S oan dcc Rat dta acd qoa dod 8 36 Loos pr C aa d dope orar 8 36 Insertion Cables usado lem doen deo e iol pasas as 8 37 Magnitude and Phase Stability of 8 38 Cable Connector Repeateblliby cited ta dns eoe Re acus qu oe 8 39 Dynamic Rene DE a ade ditur dede adr CD eR aci Roa
13. XA3J2 44 XA3J2 99 oeo DD XA4J1 67 XA4J1 12 N C 1 67 XA6J1 12 XA7J1 67 XA7J1 12 1 XA3J2 45 XA3J2 100 XA4J1 55 XA4J1 11 DGND 1 66 XAbJ1 11 XA7J1 66 XA7J1 11 N Cc XA3J2 45 XA3J2 101 4 1 65 XA4J1 10 N C XAbJ1 65 XABJ1 10 XA7J1 65 XA7J1 10 XA3J2 47 XA3J2 102 XA4J1 54 XA4J1 9 N 1 64 1 9 741 64 XA7J1 8 HI0RLU XA3J2 48 XA3J2 103 XA4J1 8 C XAbJ1 63 XAbJ1 8 XA7J1 63 XA7J1 8 XA3J2 49 XA3J2 104 XA4J1 7 1 62 1 7 XA7J1 62 XA7J1 7 HIORL2 g NIC 2 50 XA3J2 105 XA4J1 5 N 1 61 1 6 XA7J1 51 XA7J1 6 HIORL3 N C XA3J2 51 XA3J2 106 XA4J1 5 c XABJ1 50 XABJ1 5 XA7J1 60 XA7J1 5 XA3J2 52 XA3J2 107 XA4J1 4 C 1 59 1 4 XA7J1 59 XA7J1 4 aoe 1 XA3J2 53 XA3J2 108 XA4J1 3 N C 1 58 XABJ1 3 XA7J1 58 XA7J1 3 N c XA3J2 54 XA3J2 108 XA4J1 2 DEND XA6J1 57 XABJ1 2 XA7J1 57 XA7J1 2 06 1 XA3J2 110 XA4J1 1 XAbJ1 56 XA6J1 1 XA7J1 56 XA7J1 1 85101 8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram 2 of 2 ss425c POWER DGND DGND LSHDN SV DIG 5V 5V SENS DIG DGND DGND SENS DGND DGND MOTORRTN MOTORRTN ill POST R EGULATOR J9 56 J9 57 J9 58 gt J J9 59 19 60 gt J J9 61 gt J 19 52 MONGND gt J J9 63 J9 64 MONGNDSENSE gt J pd MON65VSENSE gt J
14. 98 rms Noise Floce L f 3 rms Noise Floor AD 48m Rnfa2 800 00 191 20 RLsiduels cf AT dDm i 140 00 140 00 Fisiduals sf A2 Cony 18 800 00 800 00 of Xtal dB tle 0020 0030 34 46 dbr AZ 98 0050 8850 SB dbm 2 98 iGe2a2 0100 0190 70 dom 2 dB 0150 0150 dom A2 38 gt 0e4a2 0250 0250 Mag error Chase shift A2 dBs Mpa 0030 0030 000 0 009 0 22 0 00 0475 0475 0 0000 2 0900 0173 0172 140 00 140 00 809 09 800 00 0030 0030 Table type specifications of raw errors associated with the A2 channel signal path The system instruments calibration kit and calibration technique selected in the hardware contiguration menu that the specifications have been generated for These specifications refer to the errors contributed from the source to the A2 sampler signal path The tables show values that are already included in the system specifications The symbol for the error terms that is used in the system error model located later in this chapter Refer to the system error model later in this chapter for the association of the error terms with the system error flow graph 8510C On Site Service Manual Example 8 11 NOTES E 8510C On Site Service Manual AW N Performance Verification and Specifications Interpreti
15. asa ubl 4 12 Nob Fallurg pce RAE EG PER Id d be E E Ae ARR 4 20 Verity the 85101C Display Process nak cure sos xx rares SERRE gd aor aera ip c RS 4 20 Verity the 95102 TFIDODSCEDEC iuo cde gs da eon 4 20 Hardware Emulator suas bt eek used DS ROPA Rees 4 22 Tes Se E Gil SEDES c suy supe x kat Iles dub Soi scs 4 22 ZO OS Em cscs aor eR Rap quee pae dut lupe addu Ra dde curd RU 4 22 Other Tests Tor the SOMFEG ius cess Roda eedem doe doe d dedo 4 22 8510C System L evel Troubleshooting Block Diagram 4 25 8510C System L evel Troubleshooting Block Diagram _ 0 4 27 8510C Display Processor Overall Block Diagram 4 29 8510C Display Processor Overall Block Diagram 4 31 85102 IF Detector Overall Block Diagram 4 33 0510C Phase Lock Block Diagrami uiuat gx co opos aen 4 35 85101C A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram 4 37 85101C A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram 1 4 39 85102 A8 Motherboard Wiring 4 41 DOE Pd GE rose Gee dioe X ex x ice Bags a detto sides sus pu Sed su 4 43 ATA GSP D
16. Eur N C N C L un sc N C LDAVPETV LNREDPRIV LSROPRIV 10810 1088 MOTORRTN MOTORRTN 2 N C G O Pas c s N C N C ROJET IO N C LNDACPRIV LIFCPRIV LATNPRIV 1087 J MOTORRTN MOTORRTN Rass Sg Menus abis LSROPRIV LATNPRIV 10055 MOIORRIN MOTORRIN sc yngu2 93 XA4U2 38 5 2 83 512 38 2 83 62 28 a 1089 D ur 77 wp 3 ee N C MARS UB 5 0 1088 1088 DGND TADRS 7 du N C QS OS ne TOBE TxDI TADR3 HDR 7 7 N C jou 2 N C 2 2222 dale 1085 RXD 7 001 TADRO Se N C eee N C MALO Eu 1083 102 H 051 ami us Maca ce cac N C ee uon uc 1081 1080 4 2 8 2 peng 2 90 GND GNE Dc GNL DGND DGND DENG DGND DGND XA4J2 84 4 2 29 DBRU DENG XA5J2 84 5 2 29 DEMB DGND XABJ2 84 2 29 mE BENG N C N C N C N C N C N C N C TADRS TADR4 CRYPTI cRveTa yoso 080 4 TU XA4J2 83 XA4J2 28 XA5J2 83 XA5J2 28 XA6J2 83 XA6J2 28 IADR2 PT3 CRYPT4 DGND LADCINT
17. Internal Input Output J J K Eius reir acket K Keyboard L E Left LB Label eve L eft Bc UTE Long Lock LKWR Lock Washer suite Local Oscillator M Male Metric Mach Machined Manufacturer MISC Miscellaneous V a Millimeter Metal Oxide 5 4 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable P arts Table 5 1 Reference Designations Abbreviations Multipliers and Manufacturer s Code List Mounting REF Reference 5 5 System Metalic Radio Frequency T MX Raine enirn de Mixer RF nune Radio Frequency Thickness Teeth Interference N Red Green Blue Tantalum Mem Number RND nm Round Thermoplastic Negative Positive X RPG Rotary Pulse Generator Thread Negative Transistor Nylon Rear Thick Right 5 Thickness Outside Diameter S TAR se Thermal P SCE s onmia De
18. b2 a2 TAPERED RF IN TUNE PRETUNE VTO SENSE al SWITCH SPLITTER b 5 1 Good Bad START STOP 50 000000000 Gu b2 o2 RF IN TUNE PRETUNE VTO SENSE TAPERED TAPERED PAD at SWITCH SPLITTER b1 BIAS 1 Good Bad Path 2a 2 COUPLER 1 HP 8517 STANDARD PAU a2 TAPERED RF IN TUNE PRETUNE VTO SENSE at b1 BIAS 1 SWITCH SPLITTER Good Bad Poth 3b PATH 4 b2 BIAS 2 Reflected COUPLER 2 b2 TAPERED o2 RF IN TUNE PRETUNE TAPERED VTO SENSE PAD SWITCH SPLITTER 91 bi BIAS 1 Good Bad COUPLER 1 Path 462 PATH 5 b1 Thru COUPLER 2 b2 e BIAS TAPERED TEE 2 PAD 92 SWITCH SPLITTER RF IN TUNE PRETUNE VTO SENSE 1 bi BIAS 1 Good Bad START Q0 042000000 GHz STOP S0 000DXXXXX0 GHz PATH 6 b2 Thru COUPLER BIAS 2 2 b2 92 SWITCH SPLITTER PRETUNE VTO SENSE al TAPERED PAD b1 BIAS 1 COUPLER 1 Path 65 Good Bad 8
19. 4195A 83631A B 85101B C 85309A 8350B 83640A B 85102B R 85106A D 8620C 83642A 8511A B 85108A L 83601A B 83650A B 8512A 8702B 83602A 83651A B 8513A 8703A 83620A B 83420A 8514A B 8719A 83621A B 83421A 8515A 8720A C 83622A B 83422A 8516A 8722A 83630A B 83423A 8517A B 8753B C 83624A B 83424A 85105A 8757C E 83630A B 83425A 85110A L Acoustic Noise Emission Geraeuschemisslon LpA lt 70dB LpA lt 70dB Operator position am Arbeitsplatz Normal operation normaler Betrieb per ISO 7779 nach DIN 45635 t 19 Compliance with Canadian EMC Requirements This ISM device complies with Canadian I CE S 001 Cet appareil ISM est conforme a la norme NMB du Canada 2 6 8510C On Site Service Manual 3 Theory of Operation 3 1 Theory of Operation Overview Overview This chapter describes the operation of the 8510 network analyzer system The Base System describes one complete system in broad terms This is the basis of all 8510 systems Some systems are more specialized and complex such as millimeter systems and pulse systems These are explained in separate system manuals However disconnecting the specialized components of most 8510 systems will reduce them to the base system descri bed here Other parts of this chapter describe the individual instruments within the system in detail sufficient to aid troubleshooting n this manual sources and test sets troubleshot to the instrument level The IF detecto
20. 8 40 Frequency Test Progedures U usss dese bre Re as dos dog 8 42 CW Frequency Acura CERE cuui isani boket des quU OUS TN CCS 8 42 Por ze edi cA ho qr ple Oe a 8 43 goa 3691 8 43 aga s Ta Bi niat a C C 8 44 Swept Frequency Accuracy 8 44 For 6036213151 Seit ES PES oc chute yh duplo ad a usa ka POS da Ga 8 45 For All Other 8360 Series Synthesizers 8 46 For 8340 41 Series Synthesizers 8 46 Por All SVDEIES ERES ursus bd impedi Re dox d dol a aid 8 46 For 8340 41 Series Synthesizer Si PERDU E qu Roe RO 8 47 D accro cR pie d cd 8 47 Total System Uncertainty Test 8 48 Comparing System Measurement Uncertainties for the Performance Verification DEG IET 8 51 Interpreting the Performance Verification Results 8 54 If the System Fails Performance 8 56 How to Run the System Specifications and Uncertainties Program 8 58 Interpreting t
21. PRETUNE VTO SENSE al at bi BIAS 1 Good Bad log MAG REF 10 0 REFERENCE VALUE 0 0 dB START 245002020 GHz STOP 26 9 00 000000 GHz b2 Thru TAPERED PAD a2 RF IN TUNE PRETUNE VTO SENSE TAPERED PAD at b1 559 PORT 2 TRIAX BRIDGE arren 2 0 9048 SWITCH SPLITTER 0 90dB TRIAX BRIDGE BIAS 1 Good Bad 8515A RF Flow Diagrams and Typical Traces TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE Check RF Paths 1 2 3 and 4 These paths are RF Path 1 User 1 a1 RF Path 2 User 3 a2 RF Path 3 User 4 b1 Reflected RF Path 4 User 2 b2 Reflected 1 Do a factory preset of the analyzer and put the source into step mode On the network analyz er press INSTRUMENT STATE MORE FACTORY PRESET STIMULUS MENU STEP 2 Toexamine the four sampler IF signals it is necessary to redefine what port and sampler the analyzer uses for phaselock Press PARAMETER MENU User 3 a2 REDEFINE PARAMETER DRIVE Port 2 PHASE LOCK a2 REDEFINE DONE to redefine a2 Press User 2 b2 REDEFINE PARAMETER DRIVE Port 2 PHASE LOCK a2 REDE FINE DONE to redefine b2 3 Connect an open or sh
22. SYSTEM MORE MENU PULSE CONF IG EDIT MULT SRC DATE TIME FUNCTIONS SYSTEM PHASELOCK POWER LEVELING ANALOG OUT ON OFF SERVICE FUNCTIONS SERVICE FUNCTIONS MENU TEST MENU SYSTEM BUS LOCAL REMOTE IF GAIN PEEK POKE LOCATION PEEK POKE SOF TWARE REVISION rr59c MAIN SERVICE FUNCTIONS MENU LOOPING SELF TESTS SYSTEM COMMANDS 1 AS PROCESSOR EPROM 15 RUN MAIN PROGRAM 2 AS PROCESSOR RAM 16 MEMORY OPERATIONS 3 A7 DATA BUS 17 RERUN SELF TEST 4 A4 DISPLAY PROCESSOR 18 REPEAT TEST LOOP 5 A4 DISPLAY RAM 6 A7 TIMER CLOCK RS 232 7 A7 PUBLIC DISC COMMANDS 8 A7 SYSTEM BUS 19 LOAD PROGRAM DISC 9 INTERRUPT SYSTEM 20 RECORD PROGRAM DISC 10 AS MULTIPLIER 21 INITIALIZE DISC 11 A7 DISC CONTROLLER 12 A6 NON VOLATILE MEMORY 13 IF DETECTOR DATA SERVICE COMMANDS 22 RUN SERVICE PROGRAM 25 DIAGNOSE A FAILURE 14 KEYBOARD ENTER SELECTION THEN PRESS MARKER HP85101 CPU BOARD TESTS 5 DRAM REFRESH TEST READ WRITE SHIFT ACCUMULATOR TEST MULTIPLIER TEST COMPLEX MULTIPLY TEST CIRCLE TEST EXERCISES MULTIPLIER SIGNATURE ANALYSIS MULTIPLIER SIGNATURE ANALYSIS ADDRESS BUS SIGNATURE ANALYSIS DATA BUS RETURN TO 85101 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU For factory use only TO RETURN TO THIS MENU AFTER COMPLETING A TEST PRESS THE MARKER KEY O Q G N HP8510 SERVICE PROGRAM HP85101 DIS
23. S QU D S 9 not visible 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 13 Replaceable P arts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT Figure 5 5 85101C Bottom Internal with CRT Display Ref Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number 1 0515 2086 5 MACH SCREW M4 0 7MM TX 28480 0515 2086 2 0515 0377 4 MACH SCREW M3 5 10MM TX 28480 0515 0377 3 85101 60267 1 MOTHERBD CARD CAGE ASSY 28480 85101 60267 INCLUDES FRAME CORNER STRUTS 4 5180 8500 1 MYLAR DISPLAY INSULATOR 28480 5180 8500 5 0515 1400 2 MACH SCREW M3 5 8MM FLP TX 28480 0515 1400 6 0515 0372 21 MACH SCREW M3 0 8MM PN TX 28480 0515 0372 5 14 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable P arts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT Figure 5 6 85101C Front Panel External with CRT Display NOT VISIBLE Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number 1 85101 40011 1 BEZEL SUPPORT 28480 85101 40011 2 08757 40005 1 LINE SWITCH BUTTON 28480 08757 40005 3 1460 1573 1 SPRING EXTENSION 138 I N OD 28480 1460 1573 4 08753 00048 1 LINE SWITCH ACTUATOR 28480 08753 00048 5 08753 00036 1 SWITCH INSULATOR 28480 08753 00036 6 5062 7208 1 SUBASSEMBLY BEZEL 28480 5062 7208 7 0515 1402 1 SCREW MACH M3 5 8 28480 0515 1402 8 0515 1402 1 SCREW MACH M3 5 8 PCPNTX 28480 0515 1402 9 08757 40012 1 SOFT YS COVER 28480 08757 40012 8510C On Site Servi
24. mark is a registered trademark of the European Community If it is accompanied by a year it indicates the year the design was proven The CSA mark is a registered trademark of the Canadian Standards Association This text indicates that the instrumentis an Industrial Scientific and M edical Group 1 Class A product CISPER 11 Clause 4 This symbol indicates that the power line switch is ON This symbol indicates that the power line switch is OFF or in STANDBY position Safety Earth Ground This is a Safety Class product provided with a protective earthing terminal An uninterruptible safety earth ground must be provided from the main power sourceto the product input wiring terminals power cord or supplied power cord set Whenever it is likely that the protection has been impaired the product must be made inoperative and secured against any unintended operation Before Applying Power Verify that the product is configured to match the available main power source as described in the input power configuration instructions in this manual If this product is to be powered by autotransformer make sure the common terminal is connected to the neutral grounded side of the ac power supply Battery Information The 8510C uses a lithium polycarbon monoflouride battery to power the instrument dock The battery is located on the A7 1 0 board of the 85101C display processor This battey is not field replaceable Replace the A
25. Disconnect the power cords and remove the top and right side covers For an 85101C equipped with an L CD perform the disassembly procedure in A15 LCD Assembly Replacement on page 6 16 followed by step 6 and step 7 below For an 85101C equipped with a CRT continue with step 3 through step 7 Remove the bezel s softkey cover item 1 by sliding your fingernail under the left edge near the top or bottom of the cover Pry the softkey cover away from the bezel If you use another tool take care not to scratch the glass Removethe two screws and washers item 2 exposed by the previous step Remove the bezel item 3 from the frame Removethetrim strip from the top edge of the front frame by prying under it with a flat screwdriver Remove five screws two from the top edge of the frame two from the bottom edge of the frame and one from the side edge of the frame item 4 To Reassemble 7 Disconnect the two ribbon cables from the motherboard by pressing down and out on the connector locks Disconnect the disc drive power cable from the motherboard Remove the front panel by pulling it straight out of the frame Toinstall a front panel reverse the preceding steps Torque all screws to 113 N cm 10 6 6 8510C On Site Service Manual Replacement Procedures 85101C Replacement Procedures Figure 6 1 Disk Drive Jumper Position 8510C On Site Service Manual 6 7 Replacement P rocedures
26. RR ROCK C Gd ben dee 9 9 9 11 Configuring and Connecting the System uius seie eben mi s e oe apu os RR e 9 12 Linge and FUSES neg ode ER re rach beak 9 12 Source Compatibility 9 13 Configuring the System Cabinet 2555 25 hee doe RR e 9 14 VS gt u u l paki ghee doe RCA eked p 9 14 Systems that Are Not 9 14 Recommended Cabinet 9 15 Configuring the System Bench TOp sisi ux gc kp ma hb don SOR 9 16 Making System Connetti S sa Ahead LORE eke 9 17 8360 Series Source GPIB HP IB Language Switch 9 18 Power E ab psu s usu Rae cath bee Kor p ERE ler C 9 19 Reference Port Extension Cables not applicable for 85110 8516 8517 9 19 General Purpose Interface Bus GPIB Cables 9 20 Printer BODL siu ep tm doe doe eere toe dedo Hai led dose eu 9 20 Parallel Lu 9 21 Swing S o ayuy su DAE PS deed Barco eoe png 9 21 Makinga Backup Operating System n e Rn s Ren 9 22 Checki
27. To recall a customized error term table file use the steps below 1 From the Main menu press Edit Specs Recall Eterms 2 Edit the file name and directory if necessary 3 Press Done to retrievethe file At this point the user can make any of the following choices Edit more specifications Return tothe Main menu and choose System Specs System Uncertainty or Verify System To use edited specifications you need to select user parameters The user parameters are available within the following menus n the System Specs menu for table type choose User Parameters In the menu under Compute Using select User Parameters In the Verify System menu press Select Standard then select Verify Using User Parameters 8 20 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Using the Software A Tutorial Using the Software A Tutorial Thetutorial chapter is intended to help you get comfortable using features of the software The features allow you to create your own equipment specifications for a calibration test setup Additional marker features simplify determining the results of these customized setups Answers to the questions are provided in tables at the end Selecting the hardware for an 8510SX system Examining error term tables exercise 1 Computing uncertainty curves exercise 2 Editing specifications exercise 3 Answers totutorial questions Sele
28. add ened esq dra a Fd d ds 7 3 Adjustment TOMS sage seed EE ko 7 3 Relate AOUEOTBUES renee RU yy 7 3 Resealing of ComponenES iusso suuni sassa 7 4 Loading the Controller Basic Language 7 4 Loading Basic 20 ites recs tint tyes EUn raD LORE REL ERR RES 7 4 Loading Basic 3 06r 2 Pia 7 4 Procedure 1 CRT Vertical Position and Focus Adjustments 7 10 Procedure 2 CRT Display Degaussing Demagnetizing 7 12 Procedure CRT Display Intensity lt lt 7 14 Background Intensity Black Adjustment 7 14 Operating Default Intensity Adjustment 7 15 Procedure 4 Sweep ADC Gain lt 7 16 Procedure 5 IF Miker uu pace rk CASE abc d 7 19 Procedure 6 IF Amplifier 7 22 Procedure 7 Synchronous Detector Adjustment 7 25 Procedure Jduskehl 522 u su voe piden dde RR E 7 28 8 Performance
29. 4 75 Faure UM pP LM 4 75 Fall res Ser TEFA E pates ER 4 75 1 4 75 IF uer ter uu uu can oic RU Riese dal Rc ge oua 4 77 qe Uu TEE 4 77 NOTE GRIS pP 4 77 Contents 3 Contents Optional Function Not Installed ca suh RR RR rpari ER 4 78 Phase LOK PAUEBL Li sina tae dE Reed 4p eb o a abd ed ded a 4 78 PhaseLock LOSE ssec sues ko e KR ERREUR QE CR TREES PER 4 79 Pretune Failure Pretune Lost 4 79 Pulse Cal Failure On Test Reference Channel s or Both Channels 4 80 Source GPIB AP Bi Syntax ETTO a ok Ce ee E IR 4 80 Source Sweep Sunc EFFOl Cu ies y apap RR ERROR AW Ka E dra 4 80 TUIS TOT OS uices ee apex E dr 4 81 System Bus Address ErrO ceca caves 955524965 dee bs ieee nire En 4 81 sustenm Bus SPEI ED S 343 acd PEOR d ET P P dex Pedo ataq pees 4 81 Test Set GPIB HP IB Syntax ErrO ii os exo x 4 82 Unable to Lok toExt IO MHZ Ret uu dda asas rbd ax ap ho ERROR EC d 4 82 VTO Over Balijeatssequa ake tarde rop Ra EROR PER RUPEE Lb RR o aea 4 82 FAITUPES iid ceres de acd 4 85 uU i v
30. 5V 5V DGND DGND LRFRINT LMBMINT LDTACK LGINT LAS LWRITE LLDS LUDS DGND DGND N C C N G 215 63 CRYPTI CRYPT2 DGND EXTSYNCRTN I ADR3 gt J15 82 CRYPT3 DGND LADCINT DGND CRYPTS 5V CRYPT6 CRYPT7 gt J15 81 gt 15 80 gt 15 79 gt 15 78 2 15 77 gt 15 76 2 15 75 gt J15 7u gt 15 73 2 15 72 gt J15 71 gt 15 70 gt 15 69 gt J15 68 gt 15 67 gt 15 66 gt 15 65 gt J15 64 gt J15 63 gt J15 62 J15 61 gt 15 60 gt J15 59 gt J15 58 J15 57 2 15 56 UUUUUUU sabor ir ee 40 M Ul uw EP C IADRI LADCINT LIPRST SPARE 1 LIST SPARE 3 SPARE2 SPARES 15V N C DTR2 N C RXD2 N C DSR2 N C CTS2 DGND DGND LSHDN HMUL LPRST LPFA LNMI LPOP DGND CLK8MHZ DGND DGND MOTOR 5V MOTOR 5V MOTOR 12V MOTOR 12V 5V 5V 5V 5V DGND DGND LRFRINT LMBMINT LDTACK LGINT LAS LWRITE LLDS LUDS DGND DGND we z z izizizigiziziziziz izizizizizizioiz iziziziziziziziziziziz O O O O O Z O O O OO OO OO OO ZO O O O O O O OO O OO N N N N N N N N N N N N D N N N N N N N N N N N D N N N N N
31. Configuring and connecting the system Checkingthe system operation Preventive Maintenance Chapter 10 This section details some simple procedures necessary to maintain the system Definition of an 8510 System There are many varieties of systems using 8510 network analyzer the strictest sense a basic 8510 system consists of the following 1 85101 Display Processor 1 85102 IF Detector 1 or more RF Test Set s 1 or more Source s Peripherals such as controllers plotters printers disk drives and millimeter devices may be added to the basic system Service Tools Available Special service tools used in the troubleshooting procedures can be ordered separately These include extender boards source emulator test set emulator cables and so forth The source emulator and test set emulator are used to verify operation of the other instruments in the system by substituting these service tools for the individual instruments they emulate 8510C On Site Service Manual 1 5 Service and Equipment On Site Service Manual Organization Table of Service Equipment Table 1 1 lists the equipment required to verify adjust and troubleshoot the network analyzer Thetable also notes the use and critical specifications of each item and the recommended models In addition to the test equipment listed in the table the following tools are also required 1 2 Pozidrive screwdrivers Flat blade screwdr
32. Cyde power on the 85102 to see if the thermal protection circuit will reset If the heat sink temperature becomes too great the 15 V supply is disabled This causes the 15 V SENSE line to go low and disable or more of the other supplies 5 V 15 V and 45 V Figure 4 18 A15 LEDs and Test Points OVER 5V REG 5 REG 15 REG 15V REG TEMPERATURE 4 112 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure 85102 IF Detector Power Supply Troubleshooting If oneor more of the green LEDs is still off measurethe voltages at the corresponding test points see Figure 4 18 They should measure 15 5 415 V 15 4 15V A15TP3 45 V A15TP1 5V f the 5 V regulator is indicated as the suspected fault the 5 V supply may be loaded down by another assembly Continue to Check the 5 V Test Points on A24 Interface Otherwise continue to Check the LEDs and Output Voltages of A26 Rectifier Check the 45 V Test Points on A24 Interface Measure the voltage at test points A24TP5 TP8 and TP7 on the A24 processor interface board They should all measure 5 225 mV with 10 mV ripple If so the power supply is now verified with a confidence level increased to 10096 If any of the test points does not measure 5 Vdc the supply is probably being loaded down by another assembly Switch off the instrument and try removing assemblies one at a time Switch on power after removing each
33. J13 107 J13 106 J13 105 213 104 2413 1903 213 102 213 101 213 100 gt 413 99 413 98 gt 413 97 gt 413 96 gt 413 95 gt 413 94 gt 413 93 413 92 gt 413 91 2413 90 gt 413 89 413 88 gt 413 87 gt 413 86 413 85 gt J13 84 13 83 gt J1 3 82 gt J1 3 81 gt J1 3 82 gt J13 79 gt J13 78 gt J13 77 gt J13 76 gt J13 75 gt J13 74 gt J13 73 gt J13 72 gt J13 71 gt J13 70 gt J13 69 gt J13 68 gt J13 67 gt J13 66 gt 413 65 J13 64 13 63 13 62 gt J1 3 61 gt J1 3 60 gt J13 59 gt J13 58 gt J13 57 gt J13 56 MONGND MONGNDSENSE MON6SVSENSE MON65V DGND DGND DGND DGND N C MOTORRTN MOTORRTN 0 Ul u MOTORRTN MOTORRTN rrj AN AN 4444444444 VVVVVVVV VV VY N C N C DGN DGN N C N C N C DGND DGND SPARE 1 SPARE 3 SPARES N C N C DGND DGND LSHDN HMUL BSY LPRST LPFA LNMI LPOP FANNEG CLK8MHZ DGND DGND MOTOR 5V MOTOR 5V MOTOR 12V MOTOR 12V 5V 5V
34. MON65V gt J J9 66 J9 67 BEND 19 68 gt J PROC 11 108 11 107 11 106 11 104 11 103 11 102 11 101 11 100 J11 99 J9 69 m gt J DGND gt J J9 70 J9 71 Nets 9 72 MOTORRTN MOTORRTN gt J A A AAA 49 73 49 74 49 75 N C J9 76 gt J J9 77 J9 78 J9 79 mE N C J9 80 DGND J9 81 J9 82 DGND C C C C N C C C N GND gt J J9 83 N C N C J9 84 19 85 gt J J9 86 DGND J9 87 DEND SPARE 1 J9 88 ae SPARE 3 pe SPARES PARE2 15V gt J N C J9 91 J9 92 N C N N N N N N N N N N N N D N N N N N N N N N N N D N N N N N N S N N N C C C C A 5 j9 93 N C gt J J9 9u BEND N C DGND DGND J9 95 esa LSHDN HMUL BSY gt J y ee LPRST LPFA LNMI LPOP gt J pps FANNEG CLK8MHZ J9 99 19 100 DGND DGND 19 101 MOTOR 5V MOTOR 5V MOTOR 12V MOTOR 12V 9 102 19 103 fov lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt 5V gt J 11 98 11 97 gt J11 96 2 J11 95 11 94 gt 411 93 11 92 1591 2
35. Option 002 deletes the programmable step attenuators and the dc bias tees Option 003 reverses the port 2 coupler to provide high forward dynamic range Option 007 adds buffer amplifiers to provide high dynamic range Figure 4 10 shows a simplified diagram of RF signal paths tested in the unratioed power level tests Figure 4 10 Simplified Signal Path of Unratioed Power Test TEST SET HP 85102 Troubleshooting Foldouts The following foldout diagrams correspond to different test sets one each for the 8514B 8515A 8516A and 8517B and Options 002 003 and 007 where appropriate Each foldout shows all the signal paths and corresponding typical traces as well as the troubleshooting procedure L ocate the foldout that corresponds with your test set and follow the troubleshooting procedure 4 88 8510C On Site Service Manual TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE Check RF Paths 1 2 3 and 4 These paths are RF Path 1 User 1 a1 RF Path 2 User 3 a2 RF Path 3 User 4 b1 Reflected RF Path 4 User 2 b2 Reflected 1 Doa factory preset of the analyzer and put the source into step mode On the network analyz er press INSTRUMENT STATE MORE FACTORY PRESET STIMULUS STEP To examine the four sampler IF signals it is necessary to redefine what port and sampler the analyzer uses for phaselock Press PARAMETER MENU User 3 a2 REDEFINE PARAMETER DRIVE Port 2 PHASE LOCK a2 REDEFINE DONE to redef
36. Performance Verification and Specifications Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts Example 8 18 OONO ON 8 74 MEN 17 Nov 1990 13 08 57 511 0 0 512 S21 522 0 2 851 Color Model Test Set 921 DYNAMIC RCCURACY SPECIFICATIONS S21 Dynamic Accuracy Specifications Table Device Length 10 0 HP8517R Z 4mm S Paramster 45MHz 50GHz Source HP83BSIA Synthesizer 45MHz 50 06Hz Calibration Kit 505 2 4mm Slotless Standard Grade Calibration Technique SL Sliding Load Cal Teat Port Cables HPBSI33F pair short cables 2 4mm 7 4ma Level 045 2 2 20 20 40 dB Mag dB Deg Mag dB Oep Mag dB Deg 10 0 0090 060 0278 184 0105 070 5 0 0063 942 0112 074 0085 056 0 2 8054 040 0060 040 0060 040 5 0 00561 040 0095 062 0062 041 10 0 0079 052 0100 0081 054 15 0 0080 053 0102 967 0082 054 20 0 0118 078 0141 033 0085 95 078 0141 082 0171 M 30 0 0212 140 0186 123 0183 4121 35 0 0217 143 9187 123 0217 143 40 0 0230 152 0283 187 0300 198 0285 189 0473 313 50 0 0365 241 0296 186 0804 532 55 0 0553 377 0326 215 1402 932 60 0 0961 638 0404 267 0464 1 649 B5 0 1674 1 115 0583 385 432 2 827 70 0 2839 1 972 0942 625 7545 5 206 75 0 5149 3 507 1606 1 959 1 2890 3 203 80 0 895 5 231 2793 1 8
37. SHUTDOWN 1 MOTHERBOARD AIRFLOW TIMER LED a TEMPERATURE 18V NORMALLY OFF A10P2 es aan 1 MUCH SV I 7 gt n gt SHON FAN TO FAN 1 EE 18V REF 1 i 85101C Power Supply Detailed Block Diagram HP 85102C POWER SUPPLIES DETAILED BLOCK DIAGRAM 15 RECTIFIER 18 7 FLI POWER UNE MODULE mm R3 CR1 CR2 I Ru f same f i SELECTOR lt I I ops i 120 280 1 18 GREEN 2 mi 9 i 27 22v0C l LOW PASS FILTER UNE BRN I 15V RAW I RU cu x 45V RAW Rt V 11 2vDC 5 11 2 0 I 1 I l 5 RAW R2 c2 L E 1 P 15V REGULATOR WITH THERMAL PROTECTION a 15V SENSE 5V REGULATOR 15 SENSE 5V REGULATOR 15V SENSE 1 ost GREEN 15V REG T cs K Qu Z2 dd 18V REG 5V REG R13 5V REG NOTES 1 Q1 Q2 Q3 QU ARE MOUNTED ON A HEAT SINK ATTACHED THE CHASSIS TO 2 OTHER COMPONENTS ARE ON THE A25 MOTHER BOARD EXCEPT WHERE NOTED 7721 jy INTERFACE 5 TP6 TP7 1 5 0 5 06 REAR 2 wes n 1 HPON d or ouem TO 85101 AIAT _ FRONT PANEL I 1 EL 17 M 053 85102 Power Supply Detailed Block Diagram Main
38. green LEDs are off or flashing continue with Inspect M other board Inspect Motherboard Inspect the A8 motherboard for solder bridges and shorted traces 4 110 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure 85101C Display Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting Fan Troubleshooting Fan Speeds The fan speed is continuously variable depending upon temperature It is normal for the fan to be at high speed when the instrument is just turned on and then change tolow speed when the instrument has cooled Check the Fan Voltages If the fan is dead refer tothe 85101 Power Supply Detailed Block Diagram at the end of this section The fan is driven by the 18 V and 18 V supplies coming from the A10 preregulator Neither of these supplies is fused The 18 V supply is regulated on and remains constant at approximately 15 volts t connects to the fan via the A8 motherboard The 18 V supply changes the voltage to the fan depending on airflow and temperature information Its voltage ranges from approximately 1 0 volts to 14 7 volts and it also connects to the fan via the A8 motherboard Intermittent Problems Preset states that appear spontaneously without pressing INSTRUMENT STATE RECALL MORE FACTORY PRESET typically signal a power supply or A5 CPU assembly problem Replace the A5 CPU board assembly as it is the most likely failure If the problem continues replace the A10 preregulator asse
39. 4 This is the same test as self test 10 except for one difference If there is an error it displays the expected and received data rather than just the fact that it is faulty due to an error Circle Test Exercises Multiplier 5 This sets up a data pattern to the multiplier bus in order to troubleshoot the multiplier circuits This test was designed for factory troubleshooting only Signature Analysis Multiplier 6 Signature analysis is intended for factory use only This test generates a pattern that can be used to check math processor signatures on the A5 CPU 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 131 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Service Program Signature Analysis Address Bus 7 Signature analysis is intended for factory use only This test provides a stimulus for checking signatures on the address bus Signature Analysis Data Bus 8 Signature analysis is intended for factory use only Provides a stimulus for checking signatures on the Display Generator data bus 4 132 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Service Program 85101 Board and Front Panel Tests 1 2 A7 71 board is located in the cage The A1 front panel board includes the keyboard and A2 is the disk drive assembly These assemblies work together to perform front panel commands and disk media transfer operations Disc Controller Bus Test A7 1 This test reads and writes to registers t
40. 6 RESISTOR 560 5W MO TC 02200 75042 BWH2 3R3 J R6 0811 1672 RESISTOR 3 3 5W PW TC 0 400 75042 BWH2 3R3 J R7 0811 1672 RESISTOR 3 3 5W PW TC 0 400 75042 BWH2 3R3 J R8 0811 1672 RESISTOR 3 3 5W PW TC 0 400 75042 BWH2 3R3 J R9 0811 2048 RESISTOR 25 15W PW 0 90 91637 RH25 T2 1 4 F R13 0811 1667 RESISTOR 1 2 5W PW TC 0 400 75042 BWH2 1R2 J R15 0811 1672 RESISTOR 3 3 5W PW TC 0 400 75042 BWH2 3R3 J R16 0811 1672 RESISTOR 3 3 5W PW TC 0 400 75042 BWH2 3R3 J RT1 0837 0126 1 THERMISTOR DISC 1K OHM TC 4 4DEG 28480 0837 0126 01 1820 2075 5 LS 01295 SN74LS245N U2 1826 0061 IC TEMP XDCR TO 52 PKG 24355 AD590KH W1 2 8151 0013 2 WIRE 22 1X22 28480 8151 0013 X1 1200 0639 1 SOCKET IC 20 CONT DIP DIP SLDR 28480 1200 0639 XA2 XA24 1251 7882 23 CONNECTOR PC EDGE 2 ROWS 28480 1251 7882 5 48 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable P arts 85102B Replaceable Parts Figure 5 28 85102 Motherboard 1 of 2 R16 R8 R7 10 11 R6 2places MP5 8 R5 2 places R13 W2 R15 Q5 9 RT1 U2 C1 R1 C2 R2 J2 MP4 C8 C6 C5 C7 i MP4 9 2 5 places 5 5 9 x o 9 9 9 5 10 19 o 10 XA9 o XA8 4 xas xas oF 5 XA XAS 2 9 5 o Q ss442c J1 X1 U1 C9 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 49 Replaceable P arts 85
41. 85102 A10 or A121F amplifier 85102 A5 or A7 synchronous detector 85102 A17 sample hold 4 MHz from the 85102 dock assembly to the A7 and A5 sync detector assemblies 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 75 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Running Error Messages Troubleshooting e Run 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode e Run 85102 service program tests 4 A17 5 10 12 and 6 A5 A7 Both thetest and reference channels may appear faulty even though only one channel may have a problem Swap the A5 and A7 boards and also the A10 and A12 boards as they are the same to help determine if one or both of these matched boards are faulty ftheservice program found nofault with any assembly refer to Other Failures and run the 20 Hz Sine Wave Test Further troubleshooting When the IF Cal Failedrunning error message is displayed the 85102 A17 or A5 A7 boards may be faulty Also the A6 A5 A7 and A10 A12 could be faulty because they are also part of the IF section The following tests will help you determine which of these board assemblies is faulty If thereare spikes on the trace greater than 20 dB at bandpass points 2 4 GHz 13 5 GHz and 20 0 GHz suspect a failure the A17 board Press INSTRUMENT STATE RECALL MORE FACTORY PRESET and look for the spikes explained above I f the error message appears and or spikes appear at those points follow the steps below 1 Run the 85102 service program te
42. Faulty 19 9 MHz signal from the A8 LO generator Pretune Phase Lock Test A22 8 This test verifies the ability of the A22 pretune control board to count the 20 MHz signal on the VTO sense line Thetest also verifies that the phase detector on the A22 pretune control is working Refer to Chapter 3 Theory of Operation for moreinformation on how the phase lock system operates Main Phase Lock Test A23 9 This test verifies the operation of the attenuator switches lock indicator search off set DAC and mode switch Refer to Chapter 3 Theory of Operation for more information on how the phase lock system operates IF Counter Test A21 A G n This test verifies the operation of the following circuits on the A211F counter Reference channel select switch Counter circuit Gate generator Amplifier limiter Other causes of failure of this test may be A13 and or A14 mixer boards that provide the 20 MHz signals to the A211F counter Run All the Above Tests B Wu Each test is run sequentially 85102 Front Panel Test C k m This test allows you to check each front panel key You press the key and the test verifies its operation This test is not done in the Run All The Tests selection 4 142 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Service Program Test Set GPIB HP IB Service Program Menu Thetests on this menu verify the ability of the A4 GPIB board in the test set to
43. For measurement calibration 20 C to 26 C 68 F to 79 F For performance verification 1 C 1 8 F of the measurement calibration temperature For storage 40 C to 65 40 F to 158 F Humidity For operation 5 to 95 at 40 C or less non condensing For storage 5 to 95 at 65 C or less non condensing Pressure Altitude For operation less than 4 600 meters 15 000 feet For storage less than 4 600 meters 15 000 feet NOTE Accuracy enhancement is dependent in part on a stable temperature environment If your environmental temperature has a tendency to fluctuate more than 1 C periodically perform a system verification to ensure that the system has been correctly calibrated ATTENTION Static Sensitive Handle only at Static Safe Work Stations 8510C On Site Service Manual 9 3 System Installation Preparing the Site System Heating and Cooling Install air conditioning and heating if required CAUTION Ventilation Requirements When installing the produc in a cabinet the convection into and out of the product must not be restricted The ambient temperature outside the cabinet must be less than the maxi mum operating temperature of the produc by 4 for every 100 watts dissipated in the cabinet If the total power dissipated in the cabinet is greater than 800 watts then forced convection must be used Air conditi
44. HPOS1QC PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION 79 dB Attenuator 5 57 2 4 S N 65 S N 397780013 525 0 S N BL HP95133F 11 MAGNITUOE Clan Sh PHASE deu Ih fr fatai ta Phase Uncert 1A Bb Factory User Total Factory Us Frea Meas d ao Uncect Meas d Me n NOTE lota Uncert Factory System Uncertainty User Uncertasalv 1 ogend Parameter Verification Nut Reunired PASSED 511 Verification Measurement of the 70 Atlemetar Example 8 1 Comparing Measurement Uncertainties Freq GHz Total Uncertainty Factory Uncertainty System Measurement Uncertainty 0 045 0 01348 0 00484 0 00864 1 000 0 01242 0 00378 0 00864 2 000 0 01241 0 00378 0 00863 8 52 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure Example 8 2 Table for Comparing Measurement Uncertainties Freq GHz Total Uncertainty Factory Uncertainty System Measurement Uncertainty 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 53 Performance Verific ation and S pecifications Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure Interpreting the Performance Verification Results Two example Example 8 3 printouts are used to explain the various columns Performance Verification S2
45. PAN HD POZI 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 45 Replaceable P arts 85102B Replaceable Parts Figure 5 26 85102 Left and Right Internal 2 20 places 4 4 places ELI 22 2 2 2 9 2 0 p G42 2 4 e EE e ILLOD e 5 6 places 6 4 places lt n Q U IWAIIA 211111212 TD W WT 2 ee ee 6 2 4 14 UL I pun ee EE EIE Pt am wa x E a w cx OS zu Un 2 2 5 s gp ovo o A 13 2 places 12 W63 NOT VISIBLE Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number El 0360 0009 1 TERMINAL SLDR LUG PL MTG FOR 6 SCR_ 28480 0360 0009 T1 9100 4388 1 TRANSFORMER 28480 9100 4388 W63 85102 60193 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY LINE SWITCH 28480 85102 60193 1 5021 5804 1 FRAME REAR 28480 5021 5804 2 0515 1367 20 SCREW MACH 8 32 25 IN LG 100 DEG 00000 Order by Desc 3 5001 8232 1 GUSSET SIDE 28480 5001 8232 4 5021 5837 4 STRUT CORNER 18 28480 5021 5837 5 2360 0334 6 SCREW SM 632 312FLPD 28480 2360 0334 6 2510 0049 4 SCREW MACH 8 32 5 IN LG PAN HD POZI 00000 Order by Desc 7 2360 0115 36 SCREW MACH 6 32 312 IN LG PAN HD POZI 00000 Order
46. RIV LEOIP RIV LDAVP RIV LNRF D PRIV LNDAC PRIV RIV LSROP RIV LATNP RIV DTR2 RXD2 DCD1 ADRI RTS1 LIST Ril LPRIW CRYPT 0 L IPRST CRYPT 2 LISRO CRYPT m DGND 5V CRYPT6 EL 2 GSP POW DGND DGND DIO3HPIB DIO1HPIB DIO6HPIB DIOSHPIB 0815 0813 0811 DB9 DB7 DBS DB3 5V EXTREDRTN DGND EXTGREENRTN DGND EXTBLUERTN DGND EXTSYNCRTN LADCINT DGND CRYPT7 DGND 85101C A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram LCD 1 of 2 ER EXTRED EXTGREEN EXTBLUE EXTVSYNC EXTHSYNC VGAS To Page 20f2 POWER FAN DGND FANPOS DGND N C LSHDN FANNEG 5V DIG 5V SENS 5V DIG DGND DGND SENS DGND POST REGULATOR PROCESSOR EEPROM INPUT OUTPUT REAR PANEL 1 REAR PANEL 2 GSP POWER J15 DGND DGND DGND DGND EXTBLUE v c yopo Biss DIOSHPIB YW EXTGREEN DIO2HPIB IS do O6HPTB EXTRED D103H 7 EXTHSYNC DIOuH a a OSHPIB EXTVSYNC LEOIH 122105 RENHPIB LRENPRIV IS ida NRF DH
47. TAPERED PAD ai b1 Good Bad TAPERED PAD COUPLER al COUPLER bi Good Bad 8514B Option 002 003 RF Flow Diagrams and Typical Traces TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE Check RF Paths 1 2 3 and 4 These paths are RF Path 1 User 1 a1 RF Path 2 User 3 a2 RF Path 3 RF Path 4 1 User 4 b1 Reflected User 2 b2 Reflected Do a factory preset of the analyzer and put the source into step mode On the network analyz er press INSTRUMENT STATE MORE FACTORY PRESET STIMULUS MENU STEP To examine the four sampler IF signals it is necessary to redefine what port and sampler the analyzer uses for phaselock Press PARAMETER MENU User 3 a2 REDEFINE PARAMETER DRIVE Port 2 PHASE LOCK a2 REDEFINE DONE to redefine a2 Press User 2 b2 REDEFINE PARAMETER DRIVE Port 2 PHASE LOCK a2 REDE FINE DONE to redefine b2 Connect an open or short to port 1 and port 2 This reflects power back to the b1 and b2 samplers through the coupler Find the test set RF paths and example frequency response traces on this foldout Press User 1 a1 User 2 b2 User 3 a2 and User 4 b1 Each trace should be similar to the example traces on this foldout typically within 5 dB Record the results for paths 1 through 4 User 1 through User 4 in Table 4 3 3 Check RF Paths 5 and 6 These paths are RF Path 5 RF Path 6 1 2 b1 Thru b2 Thru User 4
48. TEST SET 8 SYNTAX ERROR SYSTEM BUS ADDRESS ERROR SYSTEM BUS SRQ ERROR UNABLE TO LOCK TO EXT 10 MHz REF ERROR SYSTEM KEY NOT INSTALLED CAUTION OPTIONAL FUNCTION NOT INSTALLED CAUTION TIME DOMAIN KEY NOT INSTALLED DISC HAROWARE PROBLEM DISC COMMUNICATION ERROR INITIALIZATION FAILED DISC MEDIA WEARING OUT REPLACE SOON 8360 SERIES SOURCES RUNNING ERROR MESSAGES FAILURE FAULT INDICATOR ON FAILURE RF UNLOCKED FAILURE OVERMODULATION FAILURE SELF TEST FAILURE INVALID SETUP CHECK SYSTEM BUS CONFIGURATION ossociatad with incorrect power level flatness correction only OTHER TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS Perform the unratioed power test for al o2 bi ond b2 Refer to Unratioed Power Follures in the On Site Service Manual The 11 display must be working in order for a normal display to be on the CRT M self test 11 posses try to blonk disc to further test the A2 disc drive 8510C System level Troubleshooting Block Diagram Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Troubleshooting Outline 4 26 8510C On Site Service Manual HOW TO READ THIS BLOCK DIAGRAM
49. 1 85101 A8 motherboard or connector failure 196 Additional troubleshooting hints Inthe main Service Functions test menu press 2 2 ZMARKER to enter the 8510 Service Program menu Select 85101 Display Processor Service Program and then select the I O Board and Front Panel Tests A1 A2 A7 Run the Keyboard and LEDs Test A1 A7 Self Test 14 Selected from Main Service Functions Test Menu To manually verify the complete operation of each key on the 85101 display processor and 85102 I F detector select test 14 As you press each key the LCD CRT should display a different hex code To exit this test press the recessed TEST button 4 64 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Self Test Failures System Disc and Service Commands System Command 15 Run Main Program The processor runs the self test sequence but disregards does not stop for or report any failures Then it loads the operating system from memory to RAM and begins program execution System Command 16 Memory Operations CAUTION You can destroy the operating system in memory with this selection Agilent recommends that you not use this selection unless assisted by a qualified Agilent customer engineer This routine allows direct access to individual memory locations Thus you can observe or change data If you destroy the operating system in memory reload the operating system with disk command 19 below System Command 17
50. 4 85 Denman o RT rM eng Ree eee eee eda ae 4 85 eas PCM 4 85 auod ee ee ee ee ee ey 4 86 Ratioed and Unratioed 4 86 Troubleshooting with the Service 4 86 Service hola plier Longus enis 4 87 Test Set Unratioed Power Troubleshooting 4 88 Troubles ng PODES uade na 4 88 8514B RF Flow Diagrams and Typical 4 89 8515A RF Flow Diagrams and Typical 4 91 8516A Option 002 003 RF Flow RF Diagrams and Typical Traces 4 93 8517B RF Option 007 RF Flow Diagrams and Typical Traces 4 95 Power Supp Fal ups ouis p Ro debet Whee abd ORE qd dos sassa 4 97 uc cal oH T Erro 4 97 95101C Power Supplies Summary iunc see dece dx tem Rane ER km Rom 4 97 85102 Power Supplies SUNNY ERR ae 4 98 85101C Display Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting 4 101 Check the Green Red LEDs on the A10 Preregulator 4 101 Check the Green LEDs on the Post Regulator 4 101 Measur
51. 4b Opt 007 2 Good Bad PORT 2 PORT 1 PATH 5 b1 Thru BIAS 2 b2 TAPERED a2 RF IN SWITCH SPLITTER TUNE PRETUNE VTO SENSE b1 BIAS 1 Path Sb Opt 007 Good Bad PATH 6 b2 Thru COUPLER BIAS 2 2 b2 TAPERED PAD C a2 SWITCH SPLITTER RF IN TUNE PRETUNE VTO SENSE al bt BIAS 1 COUPLER 1 Path 66 Opt 007 Good Bad 8517B Option 007 RF Flow Diagrams and Typical Traces Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Unratioed Power Failures 4 96 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Power Supply Failures Power Supply Failures Overview NOTE Usethese procedures only if you were directed to this section from the main troubleshooting section and you believethe problem is in the 85101C or 85102 power supply This section consists of procedures to troubleshoot the 85101 display processor and 85102 F detector power supplies to the assembly level The procedures are designed to let you identify the bad assembly in either the 85101C or 85102 power supply in the shortest possible ti me The 85101C and 85102 supplies provide dc voltages to their own units independently It is assumed that you know which unit has the suspected bad supply If they are both suspected
52. 5 52 5 53 cable locations 5 40 front 5 43 front panel 5 47 IF detector assemblies 3 8 F detector tests 4 20 motherboard 5 48 power supply summary 4 97 rear 5 44 rear panel replacement 6 27 rectifier 6 23 replacement procedures 6 2 sides internal 5 46 top internal 5 38 8511 frequency converter test sets 3 5 A A1 front panel 6 6 A10 preregulator 4 101 output voltages 4 107 A10 preregulator replacement 6 13 A11 CRT display 6 10 A14 display processor test 4 62 A14 display RAM test 4 62 A14 GSP 4 44 14 4 pinouts 4 45 A15LCD 4 46 A15LCD replacement 6 16 A16 inverter board troubleshooting 4 50 A16 inverter troubleshooting 4 49 A3 post regulator fuses 4 109 green LEDs 4 101 voltages 4 102 A4 display processor test 4 62 4 display RAM test 4 62 A5 multiplier test 4 63 A5 processor EPROM test 4 61 A5 processor RAM test 4 61 A6 non volatile memory test 4 64 A7 data bus test 4 61 A7 disc controller test 4 63 A7 public HP IB test 4 62 A7 system bus test 4 63 7 timer clock RS 232 test 4 62 A9 interrupt system test 4 63 abbreviation in parts list 5 4 aborting plots and printouts 8 86 accessories 5 6 part numbers 5 6 accessories supplied 9 8 adapters test port 8 85 ADC cal failed 4 73 ADC not responding 4 73 addresses of system instruments 9 17 9 18 adjustments 7 1 background intensity 7 14 equipment required 7 9 equipment required for 7 3
53. 67 99 67 59 40 4 36 142 1 B8 26 87 94 31 4 43 246 1 128 59 126 30 33 5 21 286 170 68 170 93 35 5 63 268 109 85 119 27 42 5 95 280 49 10 49 61 51 5 30 190 8 53 8 81 28 6 54 NOTE Uncert Factory Syston Uncertainty User System Uncertainty PASSEO 521 Verification Measurement of the 20 Attenuator NOTES O O h Q N k 8 54 Time and date of performance verification Verification device and kit identification with the date of the latest kit certification System components identification and calibration technique broadband ioad BL Verification kit test numbers that document the traceable path to a national standard Measurement parameter S21 magnitude and phase Frequency of the data point Results of magnitude measurement as measured at the factory Results of magnitude measurement as measured in the performance verification Difference between the factory and verification measurements this must be less than the total uncertainty to pass Total measurement uncertainty which is the sum of the factory system uncertainty and the uncertainty of the system being verified Result of the performance verification measurement 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure 28 500 03829 04705 00876 03802 8 4 Performance Ve
54. 8510 SYSTEM BUS TEST SET ADDRESS SWITCH REAR PNL ALL MODELS 9 1 2 16 HP8517A TEST SET USED AS AN EXAMPLE LENDRA VP TUNE uu uec 1 l ASSEMBLY A11 SAMPLER ASSEMBLY 16 42 A12 SAMPLER ASSEMBLY 42 A13 SAMPLER ASSEMBLY Ee 85102 TEST SET INTER CONNECT a2 FOR S PARA METER TEST SETS E vtune LENDRA VPTUNE U LO PHASE LOCK OUT USE ONLY WITH HP 8340 8341 83508 SOURCES USE WITH ALL SOURCES USE ONLY WITH HP 8380 SERIES SOURCES UNRATI OED POWER TEST 42 F DETECTOR SYSTEM LEVEL TROUBLESHOOT NG BLOCK DI AGRAM LEDS 27 28 29 NOTE ADDRESSES AND CONF GURATI ON SWI THE HP85102C HAS DUPLICATE BOARDS USE THEM AS A BUILT IN BOARD KIT A7 A5 REF DET 10 12 REF IF AMPL 11 15 14 IF MIXERS 16 A12 REF A3 IF AMPL IF MIXERS 21 23 24 42 42 A10 TEST IF AMPL 21 23 100kHz 24 42 21 IF Counter e 16 17 18 lt E i ALTES Y PHASELOCK 17 18 19 ADC 19 25 26 22 PRETUNE CONTROL 15 18 ANALOG 10MHz 20MHz STOP 410v IN OUT SWEEP 16 38 25 A21 IF COUNTER HAS 1 GREEN LED THAT SHOWS SIGNAL IF POWER IS PRESENT APROXIMATELY 10MHz TO 30MHz GREEN LED IS LIT RF SOURCE PRODUCING RF POWER 85102 60234 A
55. 8510C millimeter wave system In this case the external 10 MHz input on the 85102 is used to lock to the source If this error message occurs when the external 10 MHz input is not used the probable causes of failure are clock assembly erroneously sets LIF SRQ low TheA6 clock LIF SRQ signal is pulled low along the way to the 85101C A5 CPU 45V input tothe 85102 A6 dock is intermittent Troubleshooting Run 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode Check the 10 MHz input signal frequency and amplitude that you are applying to the rear panel of the 85102 VTO Over Range The VTO swept beyond its normal range It is detected by the A3 VTO end of range detector on the test set A3 VTO summing amplifier If this error occurs only when a 8430 41 source is used and is in ramp mode the problem is probably either the 8430 41 source or the 85102 A20 sweep ADC assembly Probable cause of error Test set VTO Test set A3 VTO summing amplifier 4 82 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Running Error Messages 85102 A23 main phase lock 85102 A20 sweep ADC Source is off frequency VTUNE linetotest set A3 summing amplifier from 85102 A23 main phase lock assembly 85102 0 10V swept input BNC cable is not connected not used with 8360 series sources Troubleshooting Run the 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode Run 85102 service program tests 2 A20 and 9 A23 Che
56. A15 LCD assembly and A16 inverter board in the LCD Failures section Also included are the following diagrams for reference in troubleshooting e 8510C System L evel Troubleshooting Block Diagram equipped with CRT display 8510C System L evel Troubleshooting Block Diagram equipped with an LCD e 85101C Display Processor Overall Block Diagram equipped with a CRT display 85101C Display Processor Overall Block Diagram equipped with an LCD 85102 1F Detector Overall Block Diagram 8510C Phase Lock Block Diagram 85101 A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram equipped with CRT display 85101C A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram equipped with an LCD 85102 A25 Motherboard Wiring Diagram This manual provides troubleshooting information for the system and the 8510 network analyzer You may also need to refer to the service manuals for the test set and the source 4 2 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Troubleshooting Outline Troubleshooting Outline WARNING Death or injury can result from voltages inside the instrument when it is connected to ac line power Only qualified personnel who are aware of the hazards involved should perform service on this instrument when its covers are removed CAUTION Turn off the line voltage before removing or replacing assemblies to avoid damageto the instrument Use an antistatic work station to avoid damage from static discharge Thetroubleshootin
57. J15 76 RXD2 2 15 75 gt 15 74 DSR2 N C CTS2 gt J15 73 DGND DGND gt J15 72 L SHDN HMUL BS Y gt J15 71 gt J15 70 LPRST LPFA LNMI LPOP gt J15 69 DGND CLK8MHZ gt J15 68 DGND DGND gt J15 67 gt J15 66 MOTOR 5V MOTOR SV MOTOR 12V MOTOR 12V 2 15 65 5V 5V gt J15 64 5V 5V DGND DGND gt J15 63 J15 62 LRFRINT LMBMINT gt J15 61 LDTACK LGINT gt 15 60 LWRITE gt J15 59 gt J15 58 LLDS LUDS AS AS AN IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IS IN IS IS IS IIS IIS IS IS IN IN IS IIS IIS DGND DGND gt J15 57 gt 15 56 DGND DIOSHPIB EXTGREEN D B EXTBLUE EXTRED REAR PAN EXTHSYNC EXTVSYNC LRENPRIV DIO7PRIV DIOSPRIV DIO2PRIV DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND TXD2 VVVVVVVV VV VY RXDI1 DSR1 CTS1 DGND CRYPTI CRYPT3 CRYPTS EL 1 _ EXTGREENRTN EXTRE UERTN DRTN LATNHPIB LSROHPIB LIFCHPIB REAR PAN EXTSY NCRTN LNDACHPIB VGAS LNRF DHPIB DIOSP DIO6P RIV RIV LDAVHPIB DIOIP RIV DIO3P RIV DIOuP
58. PRIOR MENU 9 qe OY F E 8510C SERVICE PROGRAM MENU CRT 1 OF 2 HP8510 SERVICE PROGRAM HP85101 DISPLAY PROCESSOR SERVICE PROGRAM HP85102 IF DETECTOR SERVICE PROGRAM TEST SET HP 1B SERVICE PROGRAM HP8360 SERVICE PROGRAM RETURN TO MAIN SERVICE FUNCTIONS MENU NOTES 1 Hex digits A thru F ore assigned to G n Ck m X1 1 and respectively then press MARKER 3 The defoult value on data entry is zero Copyright Hewlett Packard 1987 1988 1991 1 See prev page G F see note 1 M u 2 To moke o selection type the number indicoted rr510c TEST SET HP IB SERVICE PROGRAM MENU PRESET TEST SET SWITCH ACTIVE LIGHT SWITCH PORT 1 2 LIGHTS ACTIVATE PORT 1 2 ATTENUATOR INCREMENT ACTIVE ATTENUATOR SELECT NEW ADDRESS RETURN TO 8510 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU For test sets with oppropriote feoture NOTES 1 To repeot o function press MARKER 2 The default Test Set HP IB address is 20 On the HP85102 rear panel connect 20 MHz OUT to J1 TEST SET INTERCONNECT using the service adapter and a BNC cable Also connect ANALOG 10V to SWEEP IN 0 10V using another BNC cable Failure to do so will result in false error messoges PRESS MARKER TO CONTINUE NOTE Disconnect BNC cables from 85102 to source when running tests Failure to do so will result in false erro
59. Rerun Self Test The processor runs the self test sequence once but stops if there are any failures If there are no failures it loads the operating system and begins program execution System Command 18 Repeat Test Loop The processor runs the self test sequence continuously The LCD CRT displays the number of times the sequence has passed run without failure and failed This selection is a powerful mode for troubleshooting intermittent failures Press the recessed TEST button to exit the test loop Disc Command 19 Load Program Disc Usethis selection toload or reload the operating system Slide the operating system disk into the disk drive Press SYSTEM MORE SERVICE FUNCTIONS TEST MENU to enter the Main Service Functions test menu In the Main Service Functions test menu press 1 9 MARKER Select the program file labeled PG 8510c and press LOAD FILE to load the operating system program into the network analyzer from the program file PG 8510 on the disk In about a minute the operating system should be loaded and running Refer to How to Reload the Operating System on page 4 67 for more information on reloading the operating system If the memory board has not been initialized refer to the 85101 Nonvolatile Memory Board A6 Tests part of the Service Program section The program file PG_8360FPE is the 8360 series Front Panel Emulator program It is not necessary to load this program separately as it is loaded
60. S12 DUT length is assumed to be 10 cm the DUT length for the data sheet values and systems using sweepers is 0 cm System instruments selected in the hardware configuration menu Power level the specifications apply to dB Magnitude uncertainty data for each frequency band dB Phase uncertainty data for each frequency band degree Oo00 QON 2 8 72 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts Example 8 17 S21 Dynamic Accuracy Specifications Plots S21 MAGNITUDE DYNAMIC ACCURACY SPECIFICATIONS HP8S1 C 517 HP83651R 85056 SL 51 1 Nov 1998 13 02 16 Freq GHz 045 to 2 2 to 28 28 to 49 48 to 50 DUT Length 18 8 cm 511 0 0 512 521 S22 885 S21 Dynamic Accuracy dB 882 001 21 Measurement Level dB from Ref S21 PHRSE DYNRMIC RCCURRCY SPECIFICRTIONS 8510 5 HPeS8S6R SL 51 DUT Length 18 8 cm i S11 0 0 512 521 522 8 8 18 lt lt lt 17 Nov 1998 s Ss 13 38 49 6 bs Freq GHz 3 s i 2 to 20 to E le 48 to SO __ gt a in S21 Measurement Level dB from Ref 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 73
61. START 09 045000000 GHz STOP 20 000000000 GHz PATH 3 Reflected b2 TAPERED PAD X A o2 RF IN TUNE PRETUNE VTO SENSE TAPERED PAD at bi Good Bad t COUPLER SWITCH SPLITTER COUPLER log MAG REF 51 45 19 0 24 813 hp MARKER 1 Era GHz i START 0 045000020 GHz STOP 20 000000090 GHz PATH 4 Reflected b2 TAPERED PAD 2 RF IN TUNE PRETUNE VTO SENSE TAPERED PAD at COUPLER SWITCH SPLITTER COUPLER X b1 Good Bad 169 log MAG REF 50 0 dB 4 10 0 dB V_ 44 709 MARKER 1 MARKER 1 GHz GHz CT ee gt START 0 045000000 GHz START 2 0452000020 GHz STOP 20 000000000 GHz 5 5 20 000000000 GHz b Thru PATH 6 52 Thru b2 TAPERED PAD b2 TAPERED PAD COUPLER a2 COUPLER a2 RF IN TUNE SWITCH SWITCH SPLITTER RF IN SPLITTER TUNE PRETUNE VTO SENSE PRETUNE VTO SENSE
62. System Specifications System Uncertainties or Verify System Recall Eterm No Modify Data Save as a file for System verification Select System Specifications System Uncertainties or Verify System 8 14 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications How to Verify System Performance Choosing to Edit Specifications 1 After installing the software program press Hardware Config from the System Config menu Select hardware models that most closely match the equipment you are using Exact model numbers may not match but similar capabilities frequency range power range and so forth need to be matched as closely as possible Selections such as no source and no calibration kit are available if there are no similar models of equipment 2 After completing hardware configuration and model selection press Done to savethe information 3 From the Main menu display select Edit Specs By selecting EDIT SYST SPECS from the Main menu you can modify error terms for your hardware configuration You can use the modified data to compute custom uncertainties to use during performance verification Refer to U singthe Error Term Table Editor on page 8 19 to learn how to edit specifications Using Customizing Features In addition to the ability to edit error terms and compute custom specifications you can save recall and label your customized information Using Markers on Un
63. The detailed equation for each of the previous terms is derived from the signal flow model in Figure 8 18 Duetothe complexity of combining these terms manually the specifi cati ons performance verification software calculates the terms for you However the software makes some ideal device assumptions For S11 and S22 uncertainties the device is a one port device therefore the value of S21 and S12 are dB The value of S11 or S22 is varied For S21and S12 uncertainties the device is a reciprocal two port device with perfect input output match therefore S11 and S22 are f linear and S21 S12 The value of 521 512 is varied Reflection Phase Uncertainty Reflection phase uncertainty is determined from a comparison of the magnitude uncertainty with the test signal magnitude The worst case phase angle is computed This result is combined with the error terms related to thermal drift of the total system port 1 cable stability and phase dynamic accuracy Erp Arcsin Erm S11 2Cpf1f Dps1 Dpfs1f where Cpf1 cable phase frequency port 1 Dps drift phase degree source to port 1 Dpfs drift phase degree frequency source to port 1 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 79 Performance Verification and Specifications Measurement Uncertainties Transmission Uncertainty Equations Transmission Magnitude Uncertainty Etm An analysis of the error model in Figure 8 18 yields an equation for the transmission magni
64. The staircase pattern it produces will quickly show missing or stuck data bits Test Pat 7 Displays the following seven colors Red Yellow Green Cyan Blue Magenta and White Test Pat 8 Displays a color rainbow pattern for showing the ability of the A14 display interface board to display 15 colors plus white The numbers written below each bar indicatethe tint number used to produce that bar 0 and 100 pure red 33 pure green 67 pure blue This pattern is intended for use with an external display Test Pat 9 Displays the three primary colors Red Green and Blue at four different intensity levels You should see 16 color bands across the screen Starting at the left side of the display the pattern is Black four bands of Red each band increasing in intensity Black four bands of Green each band increasing in intensity Black four bands of Blue each band increasing in intensity Black If any one of the four bits for each color is missing the display will not look as described Test Pat 10 Displays a character set for showing the user all the different types and sizes of characters available Three sets of characters are drawn in each of thethree character Sizes 125 characters of each size are displayed Characters 0 and 3 cannot be drawn and several others are control characters such as carriage return and line feed Test Pat 11 Displays a bandwidth pattern for verifying the bandwidth of the EXTERNAL displa
65. This manual addresses troubleshooting to the faulty board or assembly not to the component level When the faulty board or assembly has been isolated contact Agilent and order the new part refer to Contacting Agilent on page iii some cases an exchange assembly is available which costs less than a new part Duetothe assembly level repair strategy schematics and individual component lists are not included in this documentation NOTE The original 85101C display processor incorporated a cathode ray tube CRT The current design incorporates a liquid crystal display LCD In this manual references to either CRT or LCD apply to both display designs unless otherwise noted Some troubleshooting procedures schematics replaceable parts and removal procedures may differ depending on the display installed In such instances display information CRT or LCD is documented separately Some of the main differences are 85101C Equipped with a CRT 85101C Equipped with an LCD A4 GSP display board positioned vertically in A14 GSP display board positioned horizontally card cage slot on chassis directly behind A15 LCD assembly A11 CRT display A15 LCD assembly includes the A16 inverter board and backlight W1 cable and connections to boards W4 W5 W6 W7 and W8 cables and connections to boards Rear panel multi pin connector uses D1191A Rear panel multi pin connector designed to video cable supplied for
66. UNABLE TO LOCK TO EXT 10 MHz REF ASSEMBLY 16 32 ERROR SYSTEM KEY NOT INSTALLEO LOCATED ON SUMMING BOARD INSIDE TEST SET 8360 SERIES SOURCES x 42 A16 21 24 23 24 adi p 12 CAUTION OPTIONAL FUNCTION NOT INSTALLEO 5 2 16 4 CAUTION TIME DOMAIN KEY NOT INSTALLED 1 USE THE FRONT PANEL EMULATOR FOR SOURCES WITH 9 AT mais e er o d 8514 BLANK FRONT PANELS PART NUMBER 08510 60022 2 92 ine LAS Pp ATTENUATOR 91 ns 21 Y 34 DISC COMMUNICATION ERROR 12345678 2 FOR SOFTWARE REVISION PORT 2 COUPLE oats m 96 IF DISPLAY 35 INITIALIZATION FAILED H H H H B H f H SYSTEM 1 3 Sortware 15 SAMPLER 92 427 IN TERCONNECT 36 DISC MEDIA WEARING OUT REPLACE SOON Simp FEN en LI 8 0 2 pe 22 8515A 16A PRESS SELFTEST FULL 42 mm 9 15 2 RAAD INTERFACE 13 13 22 sie F 13 22 8360 SERIES SOURCES RUNNING ERROR MESSAGES B 4 B B B f B 1 PRESS 9 9 CHECK THE 85508 FIRMWARE METER La 17 37 FAILURE FAULT INDICATOR ON 1 REVISION IT MUST BE REV 6 OR GREATER SETS R ere GSP 43 38 FAILURE RF UNLOCKED NOTE SELF TEST FAILU 39 FAILURE OVERMODULATION 85178 007 2 PRESS 6 9 ro CHECK THE 835 PLUG IN ADDRESS 42 al faz CAN ALSO BE CAUSED BY S 40 FAILURE SELF TEST FAILURE 123458758 EVISION
67. and subtest results Memory Board A6 consists of 26 EEPROMS arranged in 13 banks The main program resides in this nonvolatile memory NOTE The original HP 85101C display processor incorporated a cathode ray tube CRT The current design incorporates a liquid crystal display LCD In this manual references to either CRT or LCD apply to both display designs unless otherwise noted Some troubleshooting procedures schematics replaceable parts and replacement procedures may differ depending on the display installed In such instances display information CRT or LCD is documented separately Display Assemblies CRT Graphics Processor A4 provides an interface between the processor and display assemblies The CPU converts the formatted data to graphics commands and writes it to the graphics processor The graphics processor converts the data to obtain the necessary video signals and sends the signals to the display It also produces RGB output signals which are sent to the rear panel for use by optional external monitors The assembly receives two power supply voltages 5 V for processing and 65 V not used but passed on to the display 3 10 8510C On Site Service Manual Theory of Operation 85101 Display Processor CRT Display A11 is a 7 5 inch raster scan color CRT with associated drive circuitry Automatic degaussing is performed when the instrument is turned on to minimize the magnetization of the CRT It receives these inp
68. bottoms up uncertainty analysis of the HP 8510 being verified using the worst case specifications of the HP 8510 system 4 Table type specifications or data sheet data sheet is identical to the specifications table except that the cable stability errors and system drift errors are excluded 5 Time and date the plot was made 6 For reflection plots 511 S22 the values of the other three S parameters will be 0 linear For transmission plots S21 or 512 511 and S22 0 linear and S21 512 DUT length is assumed to be 10 cm airline the DUT length for the data sheet values is cm System instruments selected in the hardware configuration menu Reflection coefficient linear magnitude Magnitude uncertainty data for each frequency band linear magnitude Phase uncertainty data for each frequency band degrees b S11 Uncertainty Specifications Table 8 68 8510C On Site Service Manual Example 8 13 Performance Verification and Specifications Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts S11 Dynamic Accuracy Specifications Plots S11 MRGNITUDE DYNRMIC RCCURRCY SPECIFICRTIONS HP S18C 5 HP83651R HPBSOSER SL HPB5133F 511 Dynamic Accuracy Lin 511 PHRSE DYNRMIC RCCURRCY SPECIFICRTIONS s MN L7 511 Reflection Coefficient AAT 1 Nov 1888 12 53 00 Freq GHz 045 to 2 2 to 20 28 to 40 48 t
69. for the part number of this tool Connect the adapter using a BNC cable from the 20 MHz output on the rear panel of the 85102 tothe 1 Test Set I nterconnec IF interconnect also on the rear panel of the 85102 This test adapter takes a fixed 20 MHz IF reference signal from the 85102 and uses it in place of the 20 MHz IF from the test set The test set downconverts the source RF toa 20 MHzIF To verify the 20 MHz output use an oscilloscope terminated 50 ohms and you should see an approximate 0 7 volt p p square wave signal with rounded corners Or if the scope is not terminated in 50 ohms the 20 MHz signal is a distorted signal likea sine wave with a large third harmonic of about 1 8 volts p p Also connect a separate BNC cable from the ANALOG 10 tothe SWEEP IN 0 10V both located on the rear of the 85102 This connection will provide a trigger input to the sweep ADC in the 85102 85102 Prompt Message A message will appear on the display prompting you to makethe connections explained in the paragraph titled Hardware above Be sure you make these connections or the diagnostics will not report valid results After making the connections press MARKER to get to the 85102 IF detector service program menu Remember to reconnect the proper system cables after you are finished Refer to Chapter 9 System Installation if necessary Order of Testing These tests must berun in a specific order because of the relations
70. intothe vertical position hole 3 Adjust the control for the best alignment of the softkey lable with the softkeys See Service Program in Chapter 4 for procedure to display the Softkey Label Alignment Pattern Focus Adjustment NOTE The CRT focus can be adversely affected by the CRT intensity set too high or by magnetic interference 4 Usethe same screwdriver used in step 3 to adjust the focus until the display has the best readability Look for equal width of both the horizontal and vertical segments of the H character Also check the focus in all four corners of the CRT 7 10 8510C On Site Service Manual Adjustments Procedure 1 CRT Vertical Position and Focus Adjustments Figure 7 1 Vertical Position and Focus Adjustment Controls CRT Only FOCUS ADJUSTMENT CONTROL VERTICAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT CONTROL 8510C On Site Service Manual 7 11 Adjustments Procedure 2 CRT Display Degaussing Demagnetizing Procedure 2 CRT Display Degaussing Demagnetizing Equipment Degausser Description and Procedure As with all color CRT monitors the display is very susceptible to external magnetic fields These fields can originate from many sources including metal frame tables and from the earth The usual symptom is a discoloration or slight dimming of the display usually near the top left corner of the CRT In extreme cases a total color shift may be observed for example a trace that was red may shift to green Th
71. it usually indicates that the display interface board needs to be replaced Reference Information for Troubleshooting Refer to Figure 4 4 and Table 4 3 for connector locations on the A14 GSP and pinout information from 14 4 to motherboard 4 44 8510C On Site Service Manual Figure 4 4 BARCODE ese R76 R73 C60 LE 14 Graphics Display Board Connectors 16 R13 800 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure LCD Failures sa66d Table 4 3 A14J 4 Pinouts J4 Pin Signal J4 Pin Signal 1 GRD 18 ID3 1 0 2 GRD 19 IDO 1 0 3 1014 1 0 20 ID1 1 0 4 ID15 I O 21 GRD l 5 ID12 1 0 22 GRD 6 ID13 I O 23 IA2 7 1010 1 0 24 1 l 8 ID11 1 0 25 RD LWR l 9 ID8 1 0 26 IAL 10 109 1 0 27 GRD 11 28 GRD 12 GRD 29 LDISPACK 13 OD6 I O 30 LDISP 14 ID7 1 0 31 LDISPINT 15 IDA 1 0 32 LRESET 16 105 I O 33 GND 17 2 1 0 34 GND l 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 45 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure LCD Failures A15 LCD Ci
72. of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 for other agencies Agilent Technologies 1400 Fountaingrove Parkway Santa Rosa CA 95403 1799 U S A Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation O Copyright Agilent Technologies 1994 2001 Contacting Agilent Any adjustment maintenance or repair of this product must be performed by qualified personnel Contact Agilent by internet phone or fax to get assistance with all your test and measurement needs Online assistance www agilent com find assist United States Latin America Canada Europe tel 1 800 452 4844 tel 305 269 7500 td 1877 894 4414 tel 31 20 547 2323 fax 305 269 7599 fax 905 282 6495 fax 31 20 547 2390 New Zealand J apan Australia Singapore tel 0 800 738 378 fax 464 4 495 8950 td 81 426 56 7832 fax 81 426 56 7840 td 1 800 629 485 fax 461 3 9210 5947 tel 1800 375 8100 fax 65 836 0252 Malaysia 1 800 828 848 fax 1800 801 664 Philippines tel 632 8426802 tel PLDT subscriber only 1 800 16510170 fax 632 8426809 fax PLDT subscriber only 1 800 16510288 Thailand tel outside Bangkok 088 226 008 te within Bangkok 662 661 3999 fax 66 1 661 3714 Hong Kong tel 800 930 871 fax 852 2506 9233 Taiwan tel 0800 047 866 fax 886 2 25456723 People s Republ
73. right or left disk drive Switch the power on tothe controller 2 When BASIC is finished loading remove the disk and insert the 98612A extended BASIC 2 1 disk into the same disk drive you used to load the Basic system 3 Type LOAD BIN AP2 1 then press RETURN or EXECUTE or EXEC Loading Basic 3 0 or Higher 1 With the controller off insert the 98613A Basic 3 0 or higher system disk into either the right or left disk drive Switch the power on tothe controller 2 When Basic is finished loading remove the disk Insert the Basic 3 0 or higher drivers disk the language extensions and drivers disk into the same disk drive you used to load the BASIC system 3 Thefollowing extension files must be loaded into the controller memory Drivers Extensions DISC MAT KBD GPIB 10 GRAPH If you have any of the following system configurations the following driver and or extension files also must be loaded Configuration Driver File Extension File SRM DCOMM SRM 9885 disk drive 9885 CS80 disk drive CS80 9122 disk drive CS80 7 4 8510 On Site Service Manual Adjustments Safety Considerations To load the files type LOAD BIN filename for each driver filename and each extension filename if you have the double sided language extensions and drivers disk then press RETURN or EXECUTE or EXEC 4 When all the driver files are loaded remove the disk If you have the double sided language extensions and drivers disk the
74. whether the switch is ON or OFF Be aware that capacitors inside the instrument may remain charged for 5 seconds even though the instrument has been disconnected from its ac power source Table 6 1 Disassembly Tools Required Tool Agilent Part Number Large Pozidrive 8710 0900 Small Pozidrive 8710 0899 Torx driver T 10 8710 1623 Torx driver T 15 8710 1622 Nut driver 1 4 in 8720 0002 Nut driver 7 16 in 8720 0006 Allen wrench No 6 1 16 in 5020 0289 Small flat blade screwdriver 8730 0008 Needlenose pliers 8710 0595 Conductive L octite 0470 0573 Insulated clip leads N A 8510C On Site Service Manual 6 3 Replacement P rocedures Overview This pageintentionally left blank 6 4 8510C On Site Service Manual Replacement Procedures 85101C Replacement Procedures 85101C Replacement Procedures ATTENTION Static Sensitive Handle only at Static Safe Work Stations This product contains static sensitive components When handling these components or assemblies work on an anti static surface and use a static grounding wrist strap 8510C On Site Service Manual 6 5 Replacement P rocedures 85101C Replacement Procedures AlFront Panel Replacement Tools Required Large Pozidrive screwdriver Very small flat blade screwdriver T 10 Torx screwdriver Procedure The items shown in parentheses refer to the corresponding item numbers in Figure 6 1 To Disassemble 1 2
75. 0 001000000 GHz 8510C On Site Service Manual 7 27 Adjustments Procedure 8 Clock Adjustment Procedure 8 Clock Adjustment Equipment Frequency counter 53151A Opt 001 4 ft BNC to SMB cable assembly 5062 7230 85102 service adjustments disk 08510 10024 Controller HP 9000 series 200 or 300 Description and Procedure The clock assembly generates the reference signals for the main phase locked loop the 19 9 MHz LO generator and the YADC It also provides timing and LO signals for the 100 kHz synchronous detectors and a sinusoidal signal that is used to calibrate the 100 kHz IF system The 20 MHz LO oscillator is composed of an integrated circuit in a phase locked loop whose VCO is crystal controlled to run at 20 MHz By adjusting R51 the free running frequency of the VCO can befinetuned to 20 0 MHz This procedure adjusts the DC voltage input to the VCO on the A6 clock board to fine tune the free running frequency to 20 MHz 1 After loading BASIC intothe controller memory insert the 85102 service adjustments software disk into the controller disk drive Refer to the beginning of the chapter for a procedure on how to load BASIC 2 TypeLoAD ADJ 85102 EXECUTE 3 When the program is loaded press RUN 4 Press the softkey that selects the clock adjustment NOTE For this procedure the frequency counter input impedance switch maybe set to either 50 ohms or 1M ohms 5 Switch on the analyzer power but switch on the displ
76. 0000 32 0000 3 0000 Rau Fud Load match dB Rf i 18 00 10 00 7 00 7 00 Freq Cutoff Source to port 0 000 0 000 00 Freo Slooe Source to oort 2 00 5 02 6 20 Loss Dc Source to port dB 21951 77 51 6 94 6 47 Loss sqr F ghz Source to port dB iLfst 1 1 24 1 72 4 7 Drift Mag deg c Src to port 08 Dms 0 0000 9 0020 0 0002 Drift Ph deg c Src to port deg DOps 11518 1519 1518 Drift Ph deg c F ghz Src pt deg Dpfsl 1 0146 0146 014 Connector Repeat Refl port H 68 00 2 00 01 00 Connector Repeat Trans porti 66 00 62 00 62 90 Connector Repeat Refl port 4 68 02 5 00 2 06 Connector Repeat Trans port t 58 00 62 00 672 00 Loss Dc port Cable 19 Loss sar F ghz port Cable 0 Cable Refl Mag stab port 54 Cable Trns Mag stab port dB 0019 0013 Cable Ph F ghz stab pt deg GHz Cpf 0225 01 Loss Dc port Cable Loss saqr F ghz port2 Cable 56 60 Cable Refl Mag stab port d8 54 00 Cable Trns Mag stab port dB iCim2 1 00 Q 0819 Cable Ph F ghz stab pt2 deg 6Hz 3 0239 0 2 Table type specifications of raw errors associated with the test ports 49 1C 44 50 0042 0041 0116 49 10 41 50 0042 0041 10115 10122 The system instruments calibration kit and calibration technique selected the hardware configuration menu that the specifications have been generated for The sy
77. 016 0305 00 No substitute Degausser Radio Shack Mode 44 233 200 W input Spectrum Analyzer E4407B 100 kHz to 26 5 GHz GPIB controlled Frequency Counter 53151A Opt 001 45 MHz to 26 5 GHz Function Generator 33250A Fast Sweep less than 10 msec RF Source 8360 8340 series 45 MHz to 20 GHz a Agilent model number unless otherwise indicated 8510C On Site Service Manual Adjustments Procedure 1 CRT Vertical Position and Focus Adjustments Procedure 1 CRT Vertical Position and Focus Adjustments These display adjustments apply only to 8510C systems equipped with a CRT display No display adjustments other than those in this manual can be done in the field this indudes both customers and service centers Any other adjustments to the display will void the warranty Equipment screwdriver non conductive flat head Description and Procedure There is one vertical position adjustment one focus adjustment general these adjustments should not be required Warm up time 30 minutes Vertical Adjustment NOTE The vertical position can be adversely affected by magnetic interference Before adjusting the vertical position be surethe analyzer is in a non magnetic environment and the CRT is degaussed 1 Toaccess vertical position and focus adjustment controls remove the side panel nearest the display 2 Insert a narrow non conductive flat head screwdriver at least 2 inches long
78. 054 000255 082 SAC NU 00045 OGE 00028 054 000422 881 os M0940 066 00922 054 080259 044 00454 065 882290 042 000305 043 40411 052 200595 54 000225 041 090536 043 SU ABAT 4287 000555 964 000360 990570 042 2240 00060 ARZ 000395 041 000404 042 Fat 240 000647 052 0004239 041 000438 042 MASS Mo 08604 84 890454 000471 042 OAM OID Me 000503 O40 000498 4 000595 041 I 040 036619 047 000531 041 000523 041 we VAG 000 5 945 090564 040 00 573 041 Eu ULES 044 0090597 040 000506 04 Wd Cust 009670 042 0005723 940 000639 041 049 000522 941 090561 940 000672 041 NUI 040 000697 840 820705 040 SPSS reese 1 Measurement parameter 511 2 Type of plot dynamic accuracy overall magnitude detection accuracy as a function of levels for signals or arbitrary phase 3 Table type specifications or data sheet data sheet is identical to the specifications table except that the cable stability errors and system drift errors are excluded 4 Time and date the plot was made 5 For reflect
79. 1518 1518 1518 1518 Drift Phideg c F ghz Src Al deg iDpfsat 0146 0146 0146 0146 L Scurce to 05982 iLdsal 26 47 25 87 26 24 21 35 luss sqrif ghz Source to dB iLfsal 48 90 82 8 7 Lcss Dc cenVertor to I f M dB iLdvial 4 03 3 38 11 50 12 00 Freq ghz to 1 6 Al dB ILfviall 57 06 0 00 0 00 Damage Level M dBm Olat 20 00 20 00 20 00 20 00 Puz et lon for 0 1 db Comp Al dBm 10 00 10 00 5 00 15 00 Raw rms Noise on Trace Al 4 dB Rnta i 0070 0269 0360 rma Noise Floor dBm Rnfali 800 00 800 00 800 00 800 00 Raw res Noise floor Al Cony dBm IRnfalzi 101 20 101 20 101 50 102 00 R siduals 5 LEsiduals linearity r of Gain 4 7 fo Cain L ef Than E NOTES f R1 I E dom tReati 140 00 140 00 140 00 140 00 f Al dBm Realc 800 00 800 00 800 00 800 00 Xtal 4 dB gt 1 0020 002 0030 0056 rel dbm A i4 dP iGela 0050 0050 0050 0050 rea dbm Al 99 Ge2a 9180 0100 0100 0100 rei dbm Al GeZa 0150 150 0150 0150 4 dom 98 Gesal 1 0250 e25e 8258 e250 3 Phase shift At Ct dB 1 Table type specifications of raw errors associated with the A1 channel signal path 2 The system instruments calibration kit and calibration technique selected in the hardware configuration menu that the spec
80. 1990 Consult your Agilent customer engineer for additional information To check thefirmware revision on your 8360 press SHIFT 49 Therevision appears in theFREQUENCY TIME window To check the firmware revision on your 83500 series RF plug in press SHIFT 99 Therevision appears in the POWER window Thefirmware revision for all synthesized sweepers appears when the instrument power is switched 2 To take advantage of the quick step and test port power flatness correction features some 8360 series synthesized sweepers must be upgraded See Table 4 1 for a summary of upgrade kits required 3 Converts 8350A to 8510 compatibility 4 14 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Troubleshooting Outline 8360 Series Coupler to Bridge Detector All 8510B C systems when used with an 8360 series source that have a bridge detector inside will potentially cause an over modulation running error message If your 8510C has Rev 7 0 or greater RF unleveled caution message will also be displayed Agilent Model Coupler to Detector Conversion Prefix Determination 83620 Prefix equal to and greater than 3245A will cause problem 83622 Prefix equal to and greater than 3245A will cause problem 83630 Prefix equal to and greater than 3245A will cause problem 83650 Prefix equal to and greater than 3245A will cause problem 83621 Prefix equal to and greater than 3139A will cause probl
81. 2110 0425 If any fuse burns out replace it If it burns out again when power is applied to the 85101C A3 post regulator or A10 preregulator is bad Determine which of these assemblies has failed as follows Remove the A10W1 cable at post regulator and measure the voltages at A10P 1 with a voltmeter having a small probe Compare the measured voltages with those in Figure 4 17 fthe voltages are within tolerance replace post regulator A3 fthe voltages are not within tolerance replace preregulator A10 If all post regulator green LEDs are now the A10 preregulator and post regulator are working properly and the trouble is excessive loading somewhere after the motherboard connections at A3 Continue this procedure with the next paragraph Remove More Assemblies Install post regulator Remove the jumper from the GND pin the top edge of post regulator A3 and chassis ground This jumper was connected earlier in this procedure Remove the following assemblies and turn on the 85101C A4 A14 GSP board A5 CPU board A6 EEPROM board 71 board Disc drive power connector J 3 on the A8 motherboard keyboard cable 2 disk drive cable If any of the A3 green LEDs are off or flashing it is likely that the assemblies just removed are not causing the problem Ifall green LEDs are now on turn off the 85101C Reinstall each assembly one at a time and turn
82. 28480 85102 69006 A7 85102 60203 1 BOARD ASSY TEST SYNCHRONOUS DET NEW 28480 85102 60203 A7 85102 69203 BOARD ASSY TEST SYNCHRONOUS DET R E 28480 85102 69203 A8 85102 60008 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY 19 9 MHZL O NEW 28480 85102 60008 A8 85102 69008 BOARD ASSEMBLY 19 9 MHZL O R E 28480 85102 69008 A9 85102 60261 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY B21F MIXER NEW 28480 85102 60261 A10 85102 60010 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY TEST IF AMPLIFIER NEW 28480 85102 60010 A10 85102 69010 BOARD ASSEMBLY TEST IF AMPLIFIER R E 28480 85102 69010 A11 85102 60261 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY B1IF MIXER NEW 28480 85102 60261 A12 85102 60010 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY REF IF AMPLIFIER NEW 28480 85102 60010 SAME AS A10 USE PREFIX A12 A12 85102 69010 BOARD ASSEMBLY REF IF AMPLIFIER R E 28480 85102 69010 SAME AS A10 USE PREFIX A12 A13 85102 60261 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY A21F MIXER NEW 28480 85102 60261 SAME AS A9 USE PREFIX A13 A14 85102 60261 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY A1 IF MIXER NEW 28480 85102 60261 SAME AS A9 USE PREFIX A14 A15 85102 60015 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY REGULATOR NEW 28480 85102 60015 A16 85102 60235 1 REMOTE APPLICATIONS BOARD NEW 28480 85102 60235 Al7 85102 60212 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY SAMPLE AND HOLD NEW 28480 85102 60212 A17 85102 69212 BOARD ASSEMBLY SAMPLE AND HOLD R E 28480 85102 69212 A18 85102 60208 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY A D CONVERTER NEW 28480 85102 60208 A18 85102 69208 BOARD ASSEMBLY A D CONVERTER R E 28480 85102 69208 A19 85102 60019 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY ADC CONTROL NEW
83. 4 to trace the cause of the problem Display Power is routed through the motherboard to the graphics processor assembly and then to the CRT LCD 3 14 8510C On Site Service Manual Theory of Operation 8510 Typical System Measurement Sequence 8510 Typical System Measurement Sequence 1 The 8510 display processor sets the source and test set VTO start frequencies 2 The system achieves phase lock as explained in System Phase Lock Operation 3 The source begins one of two basic types of frequency sweep Step sweep mode the system phase locks at each frequency point This mode is accurate relatively fast for current synthesizers and relatively slow for older models Ramp sweep mode the system phase locks at the start of each band crossing This sweeper mode is fast but less accurate 4 Thetest set separates RF power from the source into test and reference signals The test signal is applied to the DUT and transmitted through or reflected from it 5 Thetest set down converts the RF signals test and reference into separate 20 MHz IF frequencies 6 ThelF detector down converts the 20 MHz signals to 100 kHz It autoranges IF gain steps to maintain thelF signals at optimum levels for detection over a wide dynamic range 7 ThelF detector applies each IF signal to a synchronous detector which generates DC voltages proportional to the magnitude and phase of each input signal The synchronous detectors use digital techniq
84. 50 dB This power level is typical for the output of the 20 MHz out signal after filtering with the bandpass filter If a power level within this range is displayed it means that this RF 4 126 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Other Failures path is working in the system and that the source could be faulty Refer to U nratioed Power Failures to further check the RF paths Check the remaining user parameters RF paths The results should be the same for each one Remember that these user parameters are the output power levels for the incident reflected and transmitted signal paths from the test set frequency converter Press PARAMETER MENU USER 2 b2 REDEFINE PARAMETER DRIVE PORT 2 SCALE 20 x1 to observe the user b2 parameter 3 Press PARAMETER MENU USER 3 a2 REDEFINE PARAMETER DRIVE PORT 2 SCALE 20 x1 to observe the user a2 parameter 4 Press PARAMETER MENU USER 4 b1 RESPONSE SCALE 20 x1 to observe the user b1 parameter If all the user parameters RF paths look good the source is probably faulty If they all look bad or if any one looks bad thetest set is faulty probably the VTO or a sampler Refer to U nratioed Power Failures to further check the RF paths in the test set 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 127 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Other Failures This pageintentionally left blank 4 128 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P r
85. 6 26 8510C On Site Service Manual Replacement Procedures 85102B Replacement Procedures Rear Panel Replacement Tools Required Large Pozidrive screwdri ver Small Pozidrive screwdriver T 15 Torx screwdriver Procedure Theitems shown in parentheses refer to the corresponding item numbers in Figure 6 9 To Disassemble 1 Disconnect the power cords and remove all covers 2 Remove two screws from the bottom edge of the frame item 3 four screws from the top edge of the frame item 2 and two screws from the rear panel item 4 3 Disconnect the 14 or 13 BNC to SMB coaxial cables leading from the rear panel tothe corresponding PC board covers inside the 85102 Reference designators W19 W27 W28 W30 W32 W32 W33 W34 W35 W36 W38 W40 and W41 For additional information on the location of specific cables see Figure 5 22 85102 Cable Locations 4 Disconnect the ribbon cable from the A24 processor interface board See item 2 Figure 6 8 Disconnect the wire harness assembly from 25 2 on the motherboard Remove two screws item 1 from the left side frame and disconnect the ground wires Disconnect all wires from the transformer cO N Remove the rear panel To Reassemble 9 Reverse the preceding steps Torque screws to 113 10 in Ib Figure 6 9 2 places 8510C On Site Service Manual 6 27 Replacement P rocedures Related Adjustments Procedures Related Adjustments Pro
86. 77 optional function not installed 4 78 phase lock failure 4 78 phase lock lost 4 79 pretune failure 4 79 pretune lost failure 4 79 pulse cal failure on test reference channel s or both channels 4 80 source GPIB syntax error 4 80 Source sweep sync error 4 80 sweep time too fast 4 81 system bus address error 4 81 system bus SRQ error 4 81 test set GPIB HP IB syntax error 4 82 unable to lock to ext 10 MHz Ref 4 82 VTO over range 4 82 characteristics caution 4 69 error 4 70 prompt 4 70 tell 4 70 types 4 69 S 511 dynamic accuracy specifications example plots 8 69 table 8 70 S11uncertainty specifications example plots 8 67 table 8 68 521 uncertainty specifications example plots 8 71 8 73 table 8 72 safety 8510 information 2 3 considerations 7 3 safety licensing 2 1 saving edited error terms 8 20 scheduling installation 9 2 Index Index self test how to exit 4 59 how to run once 4 59 how to run repeatedly 4 59 menu 4 60 self test failure 4 4 how to identify 4 55 when the is not working 4 56 with the CPU board LEDs 4 56 how to troubleshoot 4 58 self test failures and troubleshooting 4 60 sequence of system measurement 3 15 service test equipment 1 7 tools available 5 6 service adapter connections 4 87 troubleshooting with 4 86 service adapters conclusions 4 87 service command 22 run service program 4 66 23 diagnos
87. 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 27 Performance Verification and Specifications Using the Software A Tutorial Answers to Tutorial Questions Exercise questions from the tutorials are repeated in the first column of the tables Answers are stated in the column to the right of the question Table 8 2 Examining Error Term Tables Exercise 1 Answers Questions Answers 1 Which effective error term would dominate when you measure the following For a good 500W termination For a short circuit For an amplifier with 10 dB of gain For switch isolation The dominant error terms are The directivity term The source match term Theload match term The crosstalk term Aju B W N What is the raw directivity at 26 5 GHz H ow does this value compare with the data sheet value The value should be about 27 dB Theraw directivity at 26 5 GHz on the data sheet is 27 dB 7 What is the difference between system and receiver dynamic range Noticethat in the first table Residual Errors Correction On there are two values for effective dynamic range One refers to the system dynamic range whilethe other refers to the receiver dynamic range These terms are defined below System dynamic range P_ref_ P_min_ b Receiver dynamic range max P min Pref isthenominal or reference power at thetest port P min is the minimum power that can be measured abovethe noisefloor P ma
88. A power transformer with two center tapped secondary windings A separate bridge rectifier for each secondary winding Four regulators that supply 5 V 15 V 45 V and 15 V Filtered but unregulated supply voltages of 5 V 15 V 45 V and 15 V F uses test points and LEDs for all regulated supplies The 85102 power supply troubleshooting procedure is located in this section after the 85101C power supply troubleshooting procedure 4 98 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Power Supply Failures Table 4 9 Power Supply Troubleshooting Summary 1 of 2 This summary gives an overview of the power supply troubleshooting procedure If you are already familiar with troubleshooting the power supply you may save time by following this summary instead of reading the entire procedure Headings in this summary match the headings in the procedure Troubleshooting procedures are preceded by a check 85101C Display Processor Supply Troubleshooting Check the Green and Red LEDs on the A10 Preregulator Check the Green LEDs on the A3 Post Regulator Measure Voltages on the A3 Post Regulator Determine Why the Green LED on A10 15 Not On Steadily V Check the line voltage selector switch and fuse Determine Why the Red LED on 10 15 On or Flashing Disconnect A10W1 Check the A10 preregulator and related assemblies Measure voltages on A10W1 and at 1 Remove assemblies Remove A8 motherboard connector cables C
89. CRT S I D REFRESH FOCUS VERTICAL POSITION ADJ CONTROL RESET pol 8510 Display Processor Overall Block Diagram Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Troubleshooting Outline 4 30 8510C On Site Service Manual 85101C DISPLAY PROCESSOR OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM LCD oic KEYBOARD 13 KEYBOARD 13 RPG 2 RPG 2 LED DRIVE 8 LED DRIVE 8 7 1 0 BOARD y A14 GRAPHICS SYSTEM PROCESSOR BLUE n GREEN VGA EXTERNAL DISPLAY Disc DRIVE K KEYBOARD B RPG INTERFACE Q FRONT PANEL n VIDEO RED IF D
90. DONO cea XA7J1 82 7 1 27 SNP I aN 1 11 XA8J1 23 XA3J2 30 XA3J2 85 XA4J1 81 XA4J1 26 1 81 XA6J1 26 N rn DISKREAD XA7J1 81 XA7J1 26 LWRITEPROT MOTORRTN SIDESEL XABJ1 12 XABJ1 24 XA3J2 31 XA3J2 86 XA4J1 80 XA4J1 25 Nat E XA6J1 80 XA6J1 25 NC LTRACKOO XA7J1 80 XA7J1 25 TWRITEGATE LUISKCHG nu nes n E MEE Cn Essonne 2 ee E Mo 2232 2 88 Miu 691578 x62527 po 2 OD XA3J2 34 XA3J2 89 4 1 77 XA4J1 22 XA6J1 77 5 1 22 N C DIRECTION XA7J1 77 XA7J1 22 XA3J2 35 XA3J2 30 XA4J1 76 XA4J1 21 N 1 76 1 21 N LDRIVESELA XA7J1 76 XA7J1 21 XA3J2 35 XA3J2 91 XA4J1 75 XA4J1 20 XA6J1 75 XABJ1 20 TUNI XA7J1 75 XA7J1 20 Bee j ono XA3J2 37 XA3J2 92 XA4J1 74 XA4J1 19 N C XA5J1 74 1 19 XA7J1 74 XA7J1 19 C TINDEX 1 XA3J2 38 EIN XA4J1 18 XAbJ1 18 XA7J1 73 XA7J1 18 FRONT PANEL 2 39 2 94 431 XA4J1 17 NE 6 1 1 17 7 1 72 XA7J1 17 XA3J2 40 2 95 XA4J1 71 XA4J1 16 XA6J1 71 XA6J1 16 XA7J1 71 XA7J1 16 KEYBOARD Luc 2 0 sc Houos eue es iia 4 nre 22 e EC 012 N C N C ML gun Ghee ae AIL jp Nc RCM 21951013 XA7J1 68 XATJI 13
91. HARDWARE HP8510 TEST SET SOURCE CAL KIT CABLES VERIF KIT ETC SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MENU HARDWARE CONFIG PROGRAM RESET PRIOR MENU MAIN MENU SOFTWARE CONFIG Performance Verification Program SYSTEM CONFIG SYSTEM SPECS SYSTEM UNCERT VERIFY SYSTEM QUIT PROGRAM SEE HOW TO VERIFY SYSTEM PERFORMANCE SYSTEM SPECIFICATION TABLE MENU SELECT OUTPUT TABLE NUMBER TABLE TYPE TABLE FORMAT OUTPUT DEVICE ETERM DIRECTION TOTAL UNCERTAINTY DYNAMIC ACCURACY MENU SELECT PARAMETER FORMAT UNCERTAINTY LIMIT COMPUTATIONS PARAMETER STEP RESOLUTION OUTPUT SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION MENU SELECT ADDRESSES FOR SYSTEM INSTRUMENTS AND PEN NUMBERS AND COLORS 1 Perform the How to Load the Software procedure earlier in this chapter 2 Torun the performance verification press Verify System Serial Numbers 3 Complete the list of system component and kit serial numbers Also fill in the NIST test numbers from the verification kit Press DONE when the list is complete 8 48 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure 4 To begin a measurement calibration insert the calibration kit data disc into the analyzer disc drive and press System Cal If thelist does not match your system press Prior Menu Prior Menu System Config to return tothe hardware configuration menu to correct the
92. IT MAE 2108 GRCATER FOR THE A ARM CHOTHEREDARD PROCESSOR POWER SUPPLY 41 INVALID SETUP CHECK SYSTEM BUS CONFIGURATION associated with incorrect power 9 8359X AND REV 6 OR GREATER FOR THE 835XX SERIES m Bus A14 VIO LOP DATA BITS 0 7 ASSEMBL IES i B H 4 8 4 8 H PLUG INS Ma SUMMING 2 t9 REMOTE 17 counter level flotness correction only 1 HINS AMP A 4 5 43 ato prcrec eek 3 CHECK THE B3SXX SERIES PLUG IN CONFIGURATION SWITCHES 28 29 30 15 19 5 19 16 17 18 OTHER TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS 12345678 THROUGH 83572 SERIES SOURCE CONTROL ATONE 18 192 UNE A23 MAIN K A3 POST REG 42 Perform the unrolioed power tesi or al a2 bl b2 Refer to LENDRA PHASELOCK Unrolioed Power Failures in the On Site Service Monuol 00000000 AUXILIARY CABLE 215 SOURCE LENDER 19 T 7 1 INTERFACE INTERFACE A16 REMOTE 17 18 19 43 The 1 amp GSP ond the AIS LCD must be working for o lroce to be visible 1 85164 ONLY 8 APPLICATION 4 2 45 34 38 36 As un m 44 seif Lest 11 posses Ley to iniLiotize o blonk dine to further test W 85102 60234 1 42 43 44 BOARD the A2 disc drive B3 F0R 83590 5ERTEBE VTOSENSE A20 SWEEP BUCKET PuLSE 1 PANEL A19 ADC NOTE THE TEST SET CONFIGURATION SWITCHES 0000000 VIO SENSE 15 INPUT CONTROL POWER Nor A2 MUST BE SET AS SHOWN ABOVE w PRETUNE 14 SUP
93. It provides a fully regulated 45 V digital supply and several preregulated voltages that go to the post regulator assembly for additional regulation Figure 3 5 is a simplified block diagram of the power supply group Figure 3 5 Power Supply Functional Group Simplified Block Diagram MOTHERBOARD A3 POST 5VDIG REGULATOR MESI RE 70V 65V A10 E REGULATOR LINE POWER 5V DIGITAL LOW POWER FAIL WARNING 3 12 8510C On Site Service Manual Theory of Operation 85101 Display Processor The preregulator assembly indudes the line power module a 60 kHz switching preregulator and overvoltage protection for the 5 V digital supply It provides LEDs visible from the rear of the instrument to indicate circuit status Line Power Module includes the line power switch voltage selector switch and main fuse The voltage selector switch adapts the instrument to local line voltages of approximately 115 V or 230 V The main fuse protects the input side of the preregulator against drawing too much line current Preregulated Voltages are converted from line voltage by the switching preregulator regulated 5 V digital supply goes directly to the motherboard The following partially regulated voltages are routed to the post regulator for final regulation 70V 8V 3 418V Regulated 5 V Digital Supply is regulated by the control loop in the preregulator It goes directly to the mot
94. LEDs arelabeled 32 16 8 42 1 Figure 4 8 Diagnostic LEDs and Switch A5S1 on A5 CPU Board RED 4 56 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Self Test Failures At power up all six LEDs light for approximately two seconds If a self test fails the LEDs corresponding to the failed test will light for two seconds Then the LEDs that correspond to the subtest number light and stay on Self test 1 does not display a subtest number Self test 15 is not coded a Turn on the instrument and notethe first LED pattern It is the self test number in binary format b Notethe second LED pattern It is the subtest number in binary format 3 Either refer to Table 4 7 on page 4 60 to identify and troubleshoot the problem or rerun the test to confirm it 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 57 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Self Test Failures How to Troubleshoot a Self Test Failure If a self test failure message is visible on the display troubleshoot the instrument based the most likely causes for the failure If the most likely causes for failure are not displayed or for additional troubleshooting suggestions refer to the appropriate self test paragraph in Self Test Failures and Troubleshooting on page 4 60 How to Access the Test Menu and Run a Self Test Torun a self test you must first access thetest menu Then you can run the self test in one of three diagnostic modes Runonetest repeatedly Ru
95. N C N C XA4J2 82 XA4J2 27 Me AR XABJ2 82 5 2 27 REC XA6J2 82 XA5J2 27 CRY N C N C IADRI TADRO CRYPTS 5V CRYPTE pa Ri us N C Wu AO o LADCINT OGNO Mage B0 AA EN nou N C Os 256152 T N C XA4J2 79 XA4J2 24 SPARET N C 5 79 XA5J2 24 XA6J2 78 XAbJ2 24 2 SPARES SPARED XA4J2 78 XA4J2 23 SPARES SPARES XA5J2 78 XA5J2 23 SPARED 642 78 XA5J2 23 XA4J2 77 XA4J2 22 SPARES Ti15V XASJ2 77 XA5J2 22 15V XA6J2 77 6 2 22 SPARES XA4J2 76 XA4J2 21 542 76 5 2 21 6 2 76 2 21 NE NE XA4J2 75 4 2 20 Heg XASJ2 75 XABSJ2 20 e 2 75 XABJ2 20 es 3 N C N C 2221 DGND XA4J2 73 XA4J2 18 DENO XASJ2 73 5 2 18 XABJ2 73 XA6J2 18 Ri2 XA4J2 72 XA4J2 17 XASJ2 72 XA5J2 17 INI XAbJ2 17 aan 4222 HMULESY 22 a den GE qua 3H uu unen LPFA POP XA4J2 59 XA4J2 14 5 2 69 XASJ2 14 XA6J2 14 LNMI DENS MOTOR SV MOTOR 127 Oon tRFRINT O rni 7 tos e XA3J1 110 85101C A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram 1 of 2 A2 DISC DRIVE POWER A7 INPUT OUTPUT A3 POST REGULATO
96. PANEL EMULATOR FOR SOURCES WITH BLANK FRONT PANELS HP PART NUMBER 08510 60022 001 LANG ADDRESS 19 1 press 2 CHECK THE HP83508 FIRMWARE REVISION IT MUST BE REV 6 OR GREATER 2 PRESS 8 To CHECK THE HP835XX PLUG IN FIRMWARE REVISION 8359X AND REV 6 OR GREATER FOR THE HP835XX SERIES PLUG INS 3 CHECK THE HPB3SXX SERIES PLUG IN CONFIGURATION SWITCHES A FOR HP83522 THROUGH 83572 SERIES 00000000 DETERMINES FREQUENCY CARE B FOR HP85590 SERIES 00000000 TRIGGER OuTPUT STOP SWP 1N OUT 25 38 SWEEP OUTPUT 25 16 18 19 TO READ THE ADDRESS IT MUST REV 7 OR GREATER FOR THE AUXILIARY 15 SOURCE INTERFACE 19 38 SELF TEST 1 14 SOURCE RF PORT 1 PORT 2 BIAS 8 AS 1 NPUT DUT 5 m l PORT 2 3 TEST PORT RETURN CABLE ADDRESS SWEPT BIAS 14 26 V SOURCE CONTROL LE INTERFACE HP 85164 SUPPLI ES A15 POWER FOR SWEEP SPEED lt 200m SEC NUMEROUS RUNNING ERRORS AND BAND CROSS GLI TCHES MAY OCCUR SEE SERVI MANUAL FOR DETAILS A1 FRONT PANEL 1 YELLOW LED SHOWING TEST SET 15 ACTIVE 1 YELLOW LED SHOWING LINE VOLTAGE IS ON 2 LEDS FOR S PARAMETER TEST SETS SHOWING PORT WHERE POWER IS APPLIED 4 GREEN LED S THAT SHOW 5 5 15 15 REGULATED VOLTAGES RUNNING ERROR MESSAGES 15 41 HP8510
97. PASSWORD ENTRY CAUTION The following tests will erose non volotile Refer to the Service Manual for the password memory To occess these tests enter the possword then press MARKER To exit just press MARKER Possword is Y 8515 Be sure to hove o bockup of the operating system 85101 NON VOLATILE MEMORY BOARD A6 TESTS INITIALIZE MEMORY BOARD COMPLETE MEMORY BOARD UNFORMATTED WRITE READ TEST COMPLETE MEMORY BOARD FORMATTED WRITE READ TEST READ VERIFY TEST 3 DATA AGAIN WRITE UNFORMATTED DATA TO SELECTED MEMORY LOCATIONS READ VERIFY TEST 5 DATA AGAIN READ LOCATIONS WHERE HARDWARE CAL DATA IS STORED SHOW NON VOLATILE MEMORY PARAMETERS RESET MEMORY TO DEFAULT HARDWARE CAL DATA RETURN TO 85101 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU For factory use only TO RETURN TO THIS MENU AFTER COMPLETING A TEST PRESS THE MARKER KEY O UO N ENTRY AREA HEX KEYS a r C N TR Y WD gt J E36 ze 8510C SERVICE PROGRAM MENU LCD 1 OF 2 8510 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU 85101 DISPLAY PROCESSOR SERVICE PROGRAM 1 See prev 85102 IF DETECTOR SERVICE PROGRAM 2 TEST SET GPIB SERVICE PROGRAM E 8360 SERVICE PROGRAM i RETURN TO MAIN SERVICE FUNCTIONS MENU F see note 1 NOTES 1 Hex digits A thru F ore assigned to G n M uJ X1J C ond J respectively 2 To moke o selection ty
98. RAW ERRORS TABLES RAW FLOW GRAPH MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION EQUATIONS E TERMS RESIDUAL Note 2 RESIDUAL FLOWGRAPH MEASUREMENT UNCERTAINTY EQUATIONS MEASUREMENT Note 1 UNCERTAINTY GRAPHS AND TABLES System Measurement Uncertainties Generation Process NOTES 1 Program can print this out 2 See Figure 8 13 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Measurement Uncertainties The system raw errors are combined with the uncertainties of the calibration kit standards in a manner determined by the measurement calibration process This results in a set of specifications for the residual error terms effective directivity tracking source match load match crosstalk and dynamic range The residual error terms areinduded in the corrected system flowgraph The flow graph is then solved with measurement uncertainty equations resulting in the measurement uncertainty and dynamic accuracy tables and plots See Figure 8 17 for the graphic representation of this process NOTE Examples of generated system uncertainties and dynamic accuracy are located earlier in this chapter System Error Models The system error model flowgraphs illustrated in the following pages show the relationship of the various error sources in the forward and reverse directions These flowgraphs can be used to analyze overall measurement performance Use the lists of error terms in the
99. REDEFINE DONE to observe the b1 power level trace through path 5 illustrated on this foldout The trace should be similar to the example trace typically within 5 dB Record the result for path 5 good or bad under the RF path diagram 3 Press PARAMETER User 2 b2 REDEFINE PARAMETER DRIVE Port 1 PHASE LOCK a1 REDEFINE DONE to observe the b2 power level trace through path 6 illustrated on this foldout The trace should be similar to the example trace typically within 5 dB Record the result for path 6 good or bad under the RF path diagram Find the Faulty Assembly Try to match the observed results recorded under the RF path diagrams with the results listed in the table of most probable failures below Out of 32 possible variations the table lists the variations that result from 12 of the most probable failures Ifthe observed results match a group of results in the table investigate the most probable cause given in the table If all the paths are good then the test set is probably working properly Return to the Main Troubleshooting Procedure to continue troubleshooting the system f the observed results do not match any of those given in the table re evaluate and possibly re measure your observed data If the data is valid troubleshoot using the RF path diagram s given in this foldout for the bad signal traces Most Probable Failure Test set is not the problem Source sou
100. RETURN TO THIS MENU AFTER COMPLETING A TEST PRESS THE MARKER KEY 85101 1 0 BOARD AND FRONT PANEL TESTS A1 A2 A7 DISC CONTROLLER BUS TEST A7 1 DISC WRITE READ TEST A2 A7 2 TIMER TEST A7 3 SERIAL 1 0 TEST 7 4 TIMER CLOCK PERIPHERAL TCP TESTS A7 9 CPU TO GPIB TEST A7 6 BIDIRECTIONAL GPIB TEST A7 7 STATIC INTERRUPT SYSTEM TEST A7 8 RPG TEST A1 A7 9 KEYBOARD AND LEDS TEST Al A7 G n 85102 INTERFACE TEST A7 B M u DYNAMIC INTERRUPT SYSTEM TEST A7 C k m SECURITY KEYS INTERFACE TEST A7 D WATCHDOG TIMER TEST A7 E RETURN TO 85101 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU F E For factory use only TO RETURN TO THIS MENU AFTER COMPLETING A TEST PRESS THE MARKER KEY 85101 DISPLAY PROCESSOR SERVICE PROGRAM MENU CPU BOARD TESTS A5 1 1 O BOARD AND FRONT PANEL TESTS Al A2 A7 2 DISPLAY BOARD AND LCD TESTS A14 A15 3 NON VOLATILE MEMORY BOARD TESTS A6 4 RETURN TO 8510 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU Fo 85101 DISPLAY BOARD AND LCD TESTS A14 A15 GSP ADDRESS DECODER STIMULUS LOOP GSP DATA LINE STIMULUS LOOP RAMP BACKLIGHT DAC LOOP RAMP UNUSED DAC LOOP SAVE TIME DATE AND LCD BACKLIGHT SETTINGS RECALL TIME DATE AND LCD BACKLIGHT SETTINGS SCREEN TEST PATTERNS SOFTKEY LABEL ALIGNMENT PATTERN NOT USED RETURN TO 85101 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU TO RETURN TO THIS MENU AFTER COMPLETING A TEST PRESS THE MARKER KEY O G N
101. Rntb2 Factory Rntal Rnta2 Residuals at IF Rnfbli Rnfb2i Factory Rnfali Rnfa2i Linearity of Xtal Lxb1 Lxb2 Factory Lxal Lxa2 IF Gain 1 34 to 46 dBmt Gelb1 Gelb2 Factory Gelal Gela2 IF Gain 2 46to 58 dBm Ge2b1 Ge2b2 Factory 2 1 Ge2a2 IF Gain Err3 58to 78 dBm Ge3b1 Ge3b2 Factory Ge3al Ge3a2 IF Gain Err4 78 to co dBm Ge4b1 Ge4b2 Factory Ge4al Ge4a2 Mag Error vs Phase Shift B1 B2 A1 A2 M pb1 Mpb2 Factory 1 Mpa2 U sed in the corrected error model flowgraph to determine measurement uncertainty U sed in the corrected error model flowgraph to determine dynamic accuracy 8 86 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Measurement Uncertainties Additional Information Definitions Cust Site Verified in the factory and verifiable at the customer s site using the performance verification software Factory Verified in the factory on all units before shipment Not tested at the customer s site Fac Comp Factory computed verified in the factory by mathematical derivation using the measured performance of the system components and calibration standards Not tested at the customer s site Fac Char Factory characterized parameter set by measuring a number of units Verified in the factory by measurements on a random sampling Not tested at the customer s site Typical Non warranted performance characteristics intended to provide inf
102. Service Program AUXILIARY MENUS SYSTEM MORE SERVICE FUNCTIONS TEST MENU 22 ZMARKER Refer to the menu map included in this section It shows all service program tests and assemblies tested How to Interpret Service Program Test Results The service program tests do not completely check all board assemblies but are desi gned to exercise the most vulnerable parts of each board If all tests pass there is a 9096 confidence level that all board assemblies tested are good If service program tests indicate a failure in a board assembly there is a 7596 probability that the board assembly indicated is bad First make surethere are no fundamental problems such as an improperly seated board and so forth If the 8510C has failed and the service program tests pass then check to see that there are no fundamental problems such as wrong cable connections error messages due to improperly seated boards or extra GPIB cables attached to the analyzer but not to anything else 8510 Service Program Menu Map The service program menu map is located at the end of this section From this map you can access separate menus for testing the 85101C 85102 the test set or source 4 130 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Service Program 85101 Display Processor Service Program Menu From this menu access four different menus associated with 85101C troubleshooting You can enter this menu by pressing 1 Z MARKER Use
103. Sheet or User Parameter user modified values The specific s parameters and electrical length of the DUT can also be entered This is important for determining the phase uncertainty of 8350B sweeper based systems 8 22 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Using the Software A Tutorial Look at the worst case uncertainty curves data sheet for 11 and S21 magnitude and phase Notice that you can generate read out values on the display with the vertical marker nstructions about using the marker arein the section following Using Markers on Uncertainty Plots Refer to Table 8 3 for answers to the questions 1 On the S11 magnitude uncertainty curve at 26 5 GHz dothe following Estimate effective directivity Comparethe estimate with the data sheet value 2 Onthe S21 magnitude uncertainty curve at 26 5 GHz dothe following Estimate system dynamic range Comparethe esti mate with the data sheet value 3 Comparethe S11 and S21 phase uncertainty curves Editing Specifications Exercise 3 The exercises in this section present typical examples of customizing a test setup E ach exercise presents a task followed with a related question The answers tothe questions arein tables located at the end of the chapter You are referred tothe specific table number for the exercise you are doing Each exercise presents a different aspect of changing error terms for customizing specific
104. TEST THAT Re v 20 AQ A11 A13 A14 MIXERS RS 232 85 252 9 INTERRUPT SYSTEM test interrupts EXERCISES THE PARTICULAR ASSEMBLY MOSTLY oureut 16 18 19 ani ORTU SOURCE o 9 1 9 PORT PORT 2 A 10 AS MULTIPLIER performs o complex multiply ON THE 85101 DISPLAY PROCESSOR FOR BIAS BIAS INPUT 1 2 4 8 16 AA 11 A7 DISC CONTROLLER MORE INFORMATION REFER TO SELF TEST E 85101C DISPLAY 12 NON VOLATILE MEM read write test FAILURES IN THE ON SITE SERVICE MANUAL 27 29 50 57 38 39 40 41 8517A 8 TEST SET r 85102 IF DETECTOR PROCESSOR 7 33 1F DATA read write et doto and addome lines 14 KEYBOARD read 85101C keyboard for a stuck key NUMBERS 15 36 8340 8341 83508 sw ren fse irren USED AS AN EXAMPLE zl RUNNING ERROR MESSAGES THESE IDENTIFY Tue BUILT IN 8360 SERIES 502 72 e T Y ERROR MESSAGE THAT WILL APPEAR ON THE 85101 HOOTIN INTER SEEURTIY 15 FAILED PRETUNE LOST PRETUNE CRT IF A SYSTEM FAILURE 15 DETECTED MOSTLY SOURCE TROUBLESHOO G CONNECT 21 E 16 NO IF FOUND AM AT 3 mz rer us asf Rer AM ON THE 85102 IF DETECTOR TEST SCT AND n Np Sone Savoie 27 28 29 30 2 17 PHASE LOCK FAILURE SOURCE THE NUMBERS IDENTIFY THE ASSEMBLIES ALL SOURCES Zx A9 15 21 23 e DET AND 18 PHASE LOCK LOST WHERE THE ERROR 15 DETECTED OR GENERATED 1 CHECK TO SEE THAT THE SOURCE GPIB ADDRESS IS 19 liw IF MIXERS 23 1 42 HOLD 19 VTO O
105. THE SWITCH POSITIONS OF THE AS CONFIGURATION SWITCH DO NOT REFLECT THE ACTUAL CONFIGURATION MODEL OF THE TEST SET THIS IS A RESULT OF THE TEST SET PROCESSOR BELEVING THAT IT HAS THE ATTRIBUTES OF A DIFFERENT MOOEL TEST SET THE CONFIGURATION SWITCH MUST SET TO REFLECT THE PROPER MODEL TEST SET WHENEVER THE A3 VTO SUMMING AMP IS REPLACED TEST SET DEFAULT SETTINGS THE DEFAULT STATE OF THE TEST SETS TURN POWER OFF PULL A4 HPIB BOARD AND TURN POWER BACK ON 5 TO HAVE ALL SAMPLERS ENABLED 14 5 VTO BIASED ON PORT 1 AND 2 ATTENUATORS 048 AND THE SWITCH SPLITTER APPLYING RF POWER TO PORT 1 FRONT PANEL FREQ CAL PROCEDURE FOR HP8350 PLUG INS 1 PRESS INSTR PRESET Cw 0 MHz 2 ADJUST FREQ CAL CONTROL THROUGH TS RANGE AND NOTE THE PORTION OF ITS RANGE THAT THE UNLEVELED LIGHT IS TURNED ON SET THE FREQ CAL CONTROL TO THE CENTER OF THIS RANGE 3 IF NOT ADJUSTED IT CAN CAUSE THE 8510 TO LOSE PHASE LOCK AT LOW FREQUENCIES RF OUTPUT 27 29 30 37 38 39 40 41 HP8340 HP8341 HP83508 8360 SERIES SOURCE TROUBLESHOOTING ALL SOURCES 3 CHECK SEE THAT THE SOURCE 18 ADDRESS IS 19 FOR ALL EXCEPT HP 360 SERIES SOURCES A PRESS PRESS TO CHANGE THE ADDRESS 2 CHECK PRESET CONDITIONS AND SOURCE SELF TESTS 3 USE 60MHz 3rd HARMONIC BP FILTER SEE IF THE SYSTEM WORKS WITH 60MHz RF INPUT HP PART NUMSER 0955 0417 HP 8360 SERIES SOURCES 1 USE THE FRONT
106. Troubleshooting P rocedure Performance Test Failures Performance Test Failures Overview A performance test failure occurs whenever the performance verification data is not within specification limits If you have performed the verification procedures in Chapter 8 and any part of the tests has resulted in a failure follow the steps below Procedure 1 The measurement calibration is the first thing to suspect If thefailure wasin an S11 or S22 measurement suspect the sliding load open and or short connection made during the calibration If the failure was an S21 or S12 measurement suspect the test port cable and connectors 2 Check the calibration devices to be sure they are dean properly gaged and not worn out If the device has a collet or slot make sure it is not damaged Make sure all pin depths are correct The manuals for the various kits include the device specifications Refer tothe connector care section for information about making connections and caring for calibration devices 3 Check the verification devices to be sure they are dean properly gaged and not worn out If a test set connector is out of tolerance when gaged it may be repaired or shimmed to bring it into tolerance refer to the appropriate kit manual If a test set connector is shimmed or repaired recalibrate before repeating the verification 4 Check the ambient temperature System performance is specified at an ambient temperature of 23 3
107. and 11 Vdc out of the 5 V rectifier fall the voltages arelow check the line voltage selector setting for the proper line voltage ftheA26 voltages are correct but one or more A15 LEDs are off or the voltages on A15 are incorrect the problem is in A15 or theinterface between A26 and A15 fthe voltages are present but not correct continue with the next paragraph 4 114 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure 85102 IF Detector Power Supply Troubleshooting Check Connector P1 The line voltage may be loaded down by the A26 rectifier Unplug P 1 from 26 1 Refer to Table 4 12 and check the open end of P1 for unloaded ac secondary voltages from transformer T 1 Table 4 12 1 RMS Voltages Approximate Measure Between P1 Pins Wire Color ac Voltage RMS Approx 1 Yellow 37V 2 Yellow 1 Yellow 18 5 V Red 2 Yellow 18 5 V 4 Red 3 Blue 195 V 6 Blue 3 Blue 10V 5 Grey 6 Blue 10V 5 Grey fthe voltages are approximately correct replace A26 fthevoltages areincorrect the problem is in the power line module transformer T 1 or the connections 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 115 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure 85102 IF Detector Power Supply Troubleshooting This pageintentionally left blank 4 116 8510C On Site Service Manual s s p aww a ea
108. and is detected by the 20 MHz IF counter and 85101C math CPU Probable cause of failure 85102 A23 main phase lock assembly 85102 20 MHz reference signal from A6 clock assembly 85102 A21 IF counter assembly LPRTHLD linetotest set A3 summing amplifier from 85102 A22 4 78 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Running Error Messages e Weak or noisy VTO in the test set If you have intermittent error message see if the error message appears as you gently torque the VTO heat sink If it does the VTO assembly has a problem Also check the screws around the frequency converter samplers and VTO to be sure they are tight Troubleshooting e Run 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode Run 85102 service program tests 8 A22 9 A23 and A A21 Check the A6 clock board 20 MHz signal Refer to Other Failures Phase Lock Lost This error message indicates that the 8510C was phase locked but lost lock Loss of phase lock is detected by the 85102 A21 20 MHz IF counter and the 85101C A5 CPU after pretune Also this error message is often intermittent Besureto press the ENTRY OFF and MEASUREMENT RESTART keys to verify that this is a repeatable message If this error message occurs when the 8430 41 source is the RAMP mode but not in the STEP mode the problem is most likely the source or the 85102 A20 sweep ADC assembly If so be sure to check the A20 board with the service program d
109. and return the equipment to the original configuration Be sure to reconnect all the 85102 cables in the original configuration 7 20 8510C On Site Service Manual Adjustments Procedure 5 IF Mixer Adjustment Figure 7 7 IF Mixer Adjustment Waveform MKR 115 00 kHz REF 7 6 dBm 10 dB Fo 2 L Lu Vow 3 kHz 8510C On Site Service Manual 7 21 Adjustments Procedure 6 IF Amplifier Adjustment Procedure 6 IF Amplifier Adjustment Equipment Service extender board 85102 60030 Adapter SM B M M 2 1250 0669 12 inch SMB cable assembly 2 5061 1022 85102 service adjustments disk 08510 10024 Controller HP 9000 series 200 or 300 Description and Procedure The 100 kHz IF amplifiers provide port selection switchable IF gain and autoranging for the 100 kHz IF signal The 100 kHz IF mixer output is passed through a single secti on bandpass filter The following procedure peaks the A10 and A121F amplifiers by adjusting the circuit bandwidth to a center frequency of 100 kHz 1 After loading BASIC intothe controller memory insert the 85102 service adjustments software disk into the controller disk drive Refer to the beginning of the chapter for a procedure on how to load BASIC 2 Type LOAD ADJ 85102 EXECUTE 3 When the program is loaded press RUN Thefollowing prompt is displayed Adjustment on which if AMPL module Select a softkey 5 Press the appropriate
110. as depen e gt Gare e A10 PREREGULATOR DETAILED BLOCK DIAGRAM MOTHERBOARD POST REGULATOR DETAILED BLOCK DIAGRAM GNDDSENSE j 1 Numerous Pins RECTIFIER 1 I TP3 I Connected 2 GNDDSENSE to DGND 5 lt 5VDSENSE A3P1 ABXA3J1 5V DIG gt gt gt 48 49 5 SV PREREG 9 A 103 104 10 BIAS 10 l CONTROL 3 1 7 DGND I CIRCUIT gt 12 13 LINE POWER Co I NOTE emo See gt SWITCH aD i RECTIFIER aL RECTIFIER L cene idm assum 0 LINE onoo 6 m V 1 25V 11 N C NEUTRAL o E NC Ez lt NC NC d 12 N C I GROUND u 0 220v RECTIFIER 18V RESET 3 SHUTDOWN 4 1 18V 10V BIS SHUTDOWN FILTER a I LSHDN 1 GREEN TEMPERATURE t SENSE LED NORMALLY ON lt NC N 7 F3 2A 5V DISK ETD 8V FILTER REG DRIVE MOTOR T SHUTDOWN SIGNALS bd SHUTDOWN 3 SHUTDOWN CAUSES EXCESSIVE CURRENT 70V F1 1 5 lt 3 A OVER VOLTAGE LINE UNDER VOLTAGE LINE NC lt lt wc NC lt 1 12 OVER VOLTAGE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE INSIDE UNDER VOLTAGE PREREGULATOR CASTING gt 85 DISABLE OVER TEMPERATURE 48 71 OverTeMP RESET RETRY DISABLE SENSE
111. automated adjustments 7 4 DUT length and default S parameter values 8 99 dynamic accuracy 8 22 error model 8 84 limits 8 104 specification plots of S11 8 67 8 73 specification plots of S21 8 71 8 74 specification table of S11 8 70 specification table of S21 8 72 dynamic accuracy error model flowgraph 8 93 dynamic range check 8 40 Index Index editing error terms 8 15 editing for custom calibration kits 8 24 electrical length of devices phase errors due to 8 100 electrical requirements 9 5 electromagnetic radiated interference 9 6 EMC requirements compliance with Canadian 2 6 emissions requirements compliance with German FTZ 2 6 emulator Source 4 22 test set 4 22 entering information into data fields 8 20 environment and device temperature check 8 35 environmental requirements 9 3 equations measurement uncertainty 8 75 reflection uncertainty 8 76 transmission uncertainty 8 76 equipment required for specifications measurement uncertainties 8 9 for system performance verification 8 9 equipment verification for specifications and measurement uncertainties 8 9 equipment service test 1 7 Erm 8 78 Erp 8 79 error correction process 8 75 error models explanation of 8 78 error term editing 8 16 error terms calculated 8 97 changing values 8 18 preventive maintenance using 10 6 raw 8 6 errors magnitude due to device frequency response 8 99 measurement 8 3 pha
112. b2 TAPERED PAD a2 TRIAX BRIDGE 0 90dB SWITCH RF IN SPLITTER TUNE PRETUNE VTO SENSE al LJ B TEE 1 e BAS 1 TAPERED PAD 0 90dB TRIAX BRIDGE Good Bad HP 8515A STANDARD log MAG gt User4 tog MAG REF 2 0 cB REF 02 0 cB 10 0 10 0 fe fe REFERENCE VALUE REFERENCE VALUE 0 0 dB 0 0 dB STRRT 2450020000 GHz START 245000002 GHz STOP 2e6 9000 00000 GHz STOP 26 5000000002 GHz PATH 2 Reflected PATH 3 b1 Reflected BIAS 2 BIAS 2 b2 b2 TRIAX BRIDGE a2 SWITCH RF IN SPLITTER RF IN SPLITTER TUNE TUNE a2 SWITCH PRETUNE 0 90d8 VTO SENSE ATTEN 1 0 90dB TRIAX BRIDGE PRETUNE VTO SENSE at TRIAX BRIDGE ai bi BIAS 1 Good Bad Good Bad REFERENCE VALUE 0 0 dB START GHz STOP 26 SGD GHz PATH 5 b1 Thru BIAS 2 b2 TAPERED PAD 2 TRIAX BRIDGE a2 ATTEN 2 O 90dB SWITCH RF IN SPLITTER TUNE VTO TAPERED ATTEN 1 0 90 PAD TRIAX BRIDGE
113. calibration is bad or the test set is faulty All parts of the network analyzer system including cables and calibration devices can contribute to systematic errors and impact the error terms 4 Connectors must be clean gaged and within specification for error term analysis to be meaningful X Avoid unnecessary bending and flexing of the cables following measurement calibration to minimize cable instability errors 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 151 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Error Terms Use good connection techniques during the measurement calibration The connector interface must be repeatable Refer to information in the test set manual and cal kit manuals for information on connection techniques and on cleaning and gaging connectors V Useerror term analysis to troubleshoot minor subtle performance problems Refer to the main troubleshooting procedures in the beginning of this chapter if a blatant failure or gross measurement error is evident 4 Itis often worthwhile to perform the procedure twice using two separate measurement calibrations to establish the degree of repeatability If the results do not seem repeatable check all connectors and cables V Theerrors displayed by the verification program may be greater than the specified total uncertainty errors that you print out using the specifications program This can be due to bad connections during calibration or verification or to devices cables or rear pa
114. circuits are functional When no failures occur the self test sequence runs as described below 1 Press and hold the TEST button located on the front panel of the display processor The button is recessed about 1 2 inch Use an adjustment tool or paper dip toreach it 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 53 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Self Test Failures Figure 4 6 Location of Display Processor LEDs and Test Button LEDs TEST BUTTON The eight LEDs shown above all light This indicates that the 5 volt supply in the display processor is operating properly NOTE The events of the next seven steps happen quickly about 15 seconds If you do not observe each event do not be concerned 2 Release the TEST button All of the LEDs go out to signal the beginning of the self test 3 Thefour numbered LEDs 1 2 4 8 briefly flash They indicate the number of the current test 4 TESTING appears on the display 5 Thedisk drive LED blinks 6 LOADING OPERATING SYSTEM appears on the display The system has completed the self test sequence It is now loading the operating system software from nonvolatile memory into RAM using a program in the self test ROM 7 SYSTEM INITIALIZATION IN PROGRESS RECALLING INSTRUMENT STATE appears on the display Theself test ROM has turned over control to the program stored in RAM Theinitialization process continues 8 INST STATE RECALLED appears on the display with a graticule grid
115. ded 8 98 8511 Frequency Converter Test 8 98 Controller BUS peewee doo Gdn doe EI qe pom 8 99 Controller Displays with Limited Scrolling Capabilities 8 99 DUT Length N and Default S Parameter Values 8 99 Explanation of the Wording on 8 99 Magnitude Errors Due to Device Frequency Response 8 99 Measurement Calibration MANO whee ed er a aces RR om dece 8 100 Phase Errors Due to Device Electrical Length 8 100 NST NOMET usada XE EROS Re 1 udi dre eee aden SK dos 8 101 Omit Isolation Measurement for 8350B Sources 8 101 Parameter Step Resolution Software Configuration Menu 8 102 Performance Verification Criteria 8 102 Ples and Prinia RA dual on pg ao a dde 8 102 uk Hei do IMP EMIT 8 102 Plator MET px pup tet ere err ee eer eee 8 103 Plot Traces on the Controller 8 103 CORDE RR e eRe 8 103 Ramp Mode Operation for 5 8 103 Eemobs
116. dynamic accuracy and frequency error effects For reflection measurements the associated residual errors are effective directivity effective source match and effective reflection tracking For transmission measurements the additional residual errors are effective crosstalk effective load match and effective transmission tracking Thelisting below shows the abbreviations used for systematic errors that arein the error models and uncertainty equations Efd Erd effective directivity Efs Ers effective source match Efr Err effective reflection tracking Efc Erc effective crosstalk Efl Erl effective load match Eft Ert effective transmission tracking Crm Ctm cable stability deg GH z Ab1 Ab2 dynamic accuracy F frequency The sources for dynamic accuracy error effects are from errors during self calibration gain compression in the microwave frequency converter sampler at high signal levels errors generated in the synchronous detectors localized non linearities in the IF filter system and from LO leakage into the IF signal paths Sources of Random Errors The random error sources are noise connector repeatability and dynamic accuracy There are two types of noise in any measurement system low level noise noise floor and high level noise phase noise of the source Low level noise is the broadband noise floor of the receiver which can be reduced through averaging or by changing
117. external video work with external VGA compatible monitors connections requires special video monitor standard 15 pin VGA monitor cable not supplied NOTE In this manual GPIB and HP IB refer to the same protocol GPIB allows either the system display processor or an external controller to operate the various instruments of the system The GPIB interface operates according to EEE 488 1978 and IEC 625 standards and IEEE 728 1982 recommended practices 1 2 8510C On Site Service Manual Service and Equipment On Site Service Manual Organization On Site Service Manual Organization This manual is part of the documentation set included with the 8510C network analyzer Refer to the front matter of the 8510C Operating and Programming M anual for a graphic representati on of the complete documentation set Tabs are used to divide the major chapters and sections A chapter is a major topic division within the manual A section is a division of information within a chapter The names of the tabs and an explanation of their contents are listed below Service and Equipment Overview Chapter 1 This chapter provides a brief summary of the service information in this manual and a list of the test equipment required It should be read before attempting any repairs Safety Licensing Chapter 2 This chapter contains safety and licensing information required for the 8510C Theory of Operation Chapter 3 Read this section to learn about
118. failure during 7 2 function of 7 3 individual procedures dock 7 28 display degaussing demagnetizing 7 12 display intensity 7 14 IF amplifier 7 22 IF mixer 7 19 sweep ADC gain 7 16 vertical position and focus 7 10 individual synchronous adjuster 7 25 maximum intensity 7 15 procedures table of all 7 5 related 7 3 semi automated driver files for 7 4 extension files for 7 4 tools 7 3 warning 7 3 air conditioning of system 9 4 airflow 10 2 altitude requirements 9 3 amplifier adjustment to IF 7 19 applying power to instruments 9 17 9 21 assemblies exchange 5 2 attaching flanges to instrument 9 14 autorange cal failed 4 74 available service tools 5 8 B1 channel errors example printout 8 54 B2 channel errors example printout 8 54 background intensity adjustment 7 14 backlight lamp 4 49 backlight replacement 6 18 backup operating system disk 22 base system 3 2 BASIC 7 4 loading BASIC 2 0 7 4 loading BASIC 3 0 or higher 7 4 BASIC 5 0 and HP UX systems 8 97 cabinet 9 9 Index Index cabinet system configuration 9 14 cable magnitude and phase stability 8 36 cables 85101C location of 4 104 8510C cable assemblies 5 35 A8 motherboard connector 4 107 assemblies 5 35 available 9 7 checks 4 8 connector repeatability 8 36 extension for rear panel 9 18 grounding 9 19 insertion loss of 8 36 magnitude and phase stability of 8 38 non standard 8 25
119. failure report Remove the return shipping label from inside the box Place the defective module and the failure report in the box Seal the box with tape For shipping within the USA affix the return shipping label over the existing label Mail the box to Agilent Technologies Postage is paid by Agilent Technologies on boxes mailed within the USA Outside the USA address and mail the box to the nearest Agilent Technologies office Do not use the return shipping label 5 3 Replaceable P arts Table 5 1 Manufacturer s Code List Reference Designations Abbreviations Multipliers and Reference Designators Assembly Fan M otor Capacitor E Miscellaneous Electrical Part gr ETE Fuse lasa ET EE Filter mm Electrical Connector Stationary Portion J ack MP Miscellaneous Mechanical Part Q Silicon Controlled Rectifier SCR Transistor Triode Thyristor Bode nai Resistor guns bns Transformer Integrated Circuit Microcircuit W Cable Transmission Path Wire Crystal Unit Piezoelectric Quartz Abbreviations A AD Analog to Digital ADC Analog to Digital Converter ADP Timinin Adapter Alumninum Amplifier APC custos Amphenol Precision Connector ances Assembly AWG American Wire Gauge Assembly B B Band B Di EE Board Black Type of Co
120. for 8340 8360 sources The 8350 source frequency accuracy is tested during the total system uncertainty test Source frequency accuracy is tested across the entire sweep range both the swept CW sweep modes NOTE Allow at least one hour for the system instruments to warm up CW Frequency Accuracy Test The front panel emulation software contained on the 8510 operating system disc is required to do this test for an 83621 31 51 The analyzer keypad overlay is part of the front panel emulator kit 1 Connect the equipment as shown in the figure below NOTE If the source and test set operate below 500 M Hz connect the test set output to the 10 Hz to 500 MHz BNC connector on the frequency counter Theinput switch on the frequency counter must also be in the 10 Hz to 500 MHz position Figure 8 11 CW Frequency Accuracy Setup 8510 0000 0000 SYNTHESIZED oo 23 ng oo an SWEEPER FREQUENCY COUNTER INPUT SWITCH 500 MHz 26 5 GHz ss440c 2 To preset the instruments press INSTRUMENT STATE RECALL MORE FACTORY PRESET 3 To set the frequency from the analyzer front panel press STIMULUS CENTER MENU SINGLE POINT and enter the start frequency of the source or test set whichever is higher M easurethe frequency with the counter and record this value on thetest record located at the end of this chapter 8 42 8510C
121. frequency response of the test channel Large variations in the transmission tracking E terms may indicate a problem in the reference or test signal path in the test set or bad connections during the measurement calibration procedure Transmission tracking error terms are characterized from the transmission measurements of a thru connection in the measurement calibration procedure All transmission measurements are affected by transmission tracking errors Notes 1 The TRL thru reflection line calibration method uses a thru connection an airline and a short or open to obtain all twelve error terms individual TRL device is identified with any single error term using this method 2 Beextremely cautious when interpreting the results of E term displays compared with specification printouts A system failureis indicated only if the error is significantly worse than the specification 3 The values listed for reflection tracking and transmission tracking refer only to the ripple of the frequency response However the reflection and transmission tracking E terms include both the tracking E term ripple and the frequency response rolloff It is difficult to determine what part of the E term ripple is independent of the rolloff Therefore the reflection and transmission tracking E terms may not be as useful as the other values 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 155 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Error Terms 4 156 8510C On Site Service
122. ghz port to conv dB iLflbt Loss c conVertor to B dB iLdviblt toss Freg ghz to I f Bt dB Lfvibli Damage Level B dBm 1015 Pur at for 9 1 db Comp B dBm rms Noise on Trace 8 0070 0030 0350 0360 Raw rms Noise Floor B I f dBm Rnfbli 800 00 800 00 800 00 800 00 Raw Noise Floor Conv dBm iRnfblc 100 50 101 20 101 50 102 00 REsiduals of f f dBm iReb i i 140 00 140 00 140 00 140 00 Rfsiduals of Conv dBm Reb c 800 00 800 00 800 09 800 00 Lineerity of Xtal E dB abi 0020 0039 0030 9030 i f Gain Err 34 gt 46 dbm Bi dB Gelb 0050 0050 0050 0050 1 Gain 2 4 58 dbm BI dD 0100 0100 0100 0100 1 f Gain 58 70 dbm B dB Ge2b 0150 0150 0150 0158 1 f Gain Err 70 oo dbm 81 dB Ge4b Mag error vs Phase shift D dB Mpb 0030 0030 0030 Table type specifications of raw errors associated with the B1 channel signal path 2 The system instruments calibration kit and calibration technique selected in the hardware configuration menu that the specifications have been generated for 3 These specifications refer to the errors contributed by the test set from the test port through the coupler and into the sampler down converter The tables show values that are already included in the calculations for system specifications Th
123. intermittent Problems oe y XO CICERO ORT 4 111 85102 IF Detector Power Supply Troubleshooting 4 112 Check the Green and Red LEDs on the A15 Regulator 4 112 Check the 45 V Test Points on A24 1 4 113 Check the LEDs and Output Voltages of A26 Rectifier 4 113 CHEK P sioe eode deor dico ded accede Od qoe X eR 4 115 85101C Power Supply Detailed Block Diagram 4 117 Test Fall XE aC eC badd ROS eed eee ead 4 119 ONCE 4 119 PPO QU IK CP PAM PLC n 4 119 Sotware Fall l s OTH GG d RERO FRESHER E 4 121 ES QUIS AR TT 4 121 How to Resolve Software and Firmware 4 121 RUE o quin os Ras Dan tente 4 121 PIL dis disc eRe ORE 4 122 Firmware REVISIONS asus cade derat doe koe ded dre d Roe ade adeo dcs ce a b Re 4 122 Dto kawsa Up 4 125 cute ccm 4 125 Nosy dV TES IRR Shee Aeon 4 125 20 Mz Sing Wave Te gt repel a dora idis err
124. is used to choosethe following Thetable you want Thetype of table data sheet or specifications Thetable format linear or dB Theoutput device display or printer TheEterm direction forward reverse or forward reverse The data sheet table is identical tothe specifications table except that the cable stability errors and system drift errors are excluded The tables can be generated in two different modes CORRECTION ON after measurement calibration These system specifications are values based upon residual errors after a measurement calibration as specified in the configuration menu by the type of calibration and calibration kit used These errors are the effecti ve system errors CORRECTION OFF uncalibrated These system specifications are values based on the same system configuration but without a measurement calibration These errors arethe raw system errors 3 Press the Next or Previous softkeys to change the selection in the window For example if you select Tables Specifications dB and CRT and press the Done softkey the controller display will quickly display or scroll through the system spedifications as explained in Reference I nformation for Performance Verification and Specifications later in this chapter You can temporarily pause the printing that goes to the display by pressing any key on the keyboard To continue printing again press any key 4 Makethe selections you
125. it to select the specific menu that you want The four categories correspond to the four boards in the card cage instructions for removing and replacing boards in it are given in Chapter 6 Replacement Procedures Note that the boards tested in each menu are shown in parentheses below NOTE f you disconnect the 85101 display processor from all of the other instruments you can verify its stand alone operation Disconnect all GPIB cables and all other cables so that only the line voltage cord remains Turn on the 85101C by pressing the line switch on the left edge of the 85101C 85101 CPU Board Tests A5 This menu tests the functions of the CPU board the address bus and the data bus The tests marked with an asterisk are intended for factory use only DRAM Refresh Test 1 Tests the dynamic RAM refresh controller The interrupt system is turned on and is delayed by 8 ms before checking that a refresh interrupt occurred Read Write Shift Accumulator Test 2 Tests the math processor the A5 CPU Press 0 and MARKER torun this test automatically Data is written into the accumulators shifted and then read back and checked for proper results A manual version of this test is for factory use only Multiplier Test 3 Tests the math processor by doing multiplication in the registers Run this test in auto mode to find any failures in the multiplier A manual version of this test is for factory use only Complex Multiply Test
126. list If thelist does match your system press Resume 5 Follow the cable connection instructions on the display and then press Resume NOTE Tighten all connections to the correct torque 6 If your system operates at 45 MHz and your verification kit contains the device characterization data for 45 MHz insert the verification kit data disc into the analyzer disc drive and press Resume After the 45 MHz data is loaded press Yes f your system does not operate at 45 MHz or if your verification kit does not contain device characterization data for 45 MHz press Bypass If you do not know if your verification kit disc has data for 45 MHz the software will automatically detect whether or not the disc contains the data 7 Insert the calibration kit data disc into the analyzer disc drive Press Resume 8 Measurethe environmental temperature and record the results on thetest record at the end of this chapter 9 After allowing a 1 hour warm up perform a full 2 port measurement calibration by connecting the calibration devices and pressing the corresponding keys on the analyzer Do not hold the calibration devices when the analyzer is measuring them Use a TRL calibration whenever possible Otherwise for the loads portion of the calibration use the sliding and lowband loads or the broadband load for economy calibration kits Refer to the operating manual for a detailed measurement calibration procedure NOTE If you are usi
127. of A1 front panel replacement NOTE If a new disk driveis being installed and it has jumpers verify the jumper positions item 7 before installing If necessary use needlenose pliers to move the jumpers item 9 to their correct positions 8510C On Site Service Manual 6 9 Replacement P rocedures 85101C Replacement Procedures A11CRT Display Replacement Tools Required Large Pozidrive screwdriver Small Pozidrive screwdriver Small flat blade screwdriver T 10 Torx screwdriver T 15 Torx screwdriver Procedure The items shown in parentheses refer to the corresponding item numbers in Figure 6 1 To Disassemble 1 2 Disconnect the power cords and remove the top cover Remove the bezel s softkey cover item 1 by sliding your fingernail under the left edge near the top or bottom of the cover Pry the softkey cover away from the bezel If you use another tool take care not to scratch the glass Remove the two screws and washers item 2 exposed by the previous step The bezel is now free from the frame Remove the bezel item 3 and the gasket behind it Refer to Figure 6 2 for the rest of this procedure 4 5 Remove the display cable grounding dip item 2 from the display unit 6 7 Remove card cage cover item 8 the RFI gasket item 6 and the PC board spacers 8 9 Remove the four screws item 1 from the top of the display Remove 21 screws item 7 from the card cage cover item 5 Disconne
128. on the 85101C after each is installed The assembly that causes the A3 green LEDs to go off or flash is suspect It is possiblethat this condition is caused by the A3 post regulator supplying insufficient current To check this repeat the step but replace the assemblies in a different order to change the loading If the same assembly appears to be faulty replace that assembly If a different assembly appears faulty post regulator A3 is most likely bad unless both of the other assemblies are bad 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 109 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure 85101C Display Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting Disconnect Display Power Cable CRT Only Turn off the 85101C If the 85101C is equipped with a CRT removethe display power cable W1 see Figure 4 15 on page 4 104 Turn on the 85101C If all green LEDs are now on replace or repair the A11 display f any of the green LEDs are off or flashing continue with Inspect Motherboard Disconnect A15 LCD Assembly Cable and or A16 Backlight Inverter Cable LCD Only The A15 LCD assembly is powered through the A14 GSP board Remove cable W7 from 14 6 to isolate the display The 16 backlight inverter is also powered through the A14 GSP board Remove cable W8 from A14J 7 toisolate the backlight refer to Figure 6 4 on page 6 17 for an illustration of A15 LCD assembly Ifall green LEDs are now on replace the associated assembly If any of the
129. on the laser printer 2 Usethe laser printer controls to select the serial bus and select a BAUD rate of 9 600 Refer to the laser printer user s guide for instructions These settings will remain in effect even if you turn the laser printer OFF For further information about printer setup including parity stop bit and so forth refer to the following information Address of Printer RS 232 Port 1 in the 8510C Keyword Dictionary and Copy in the 8510C Operating and Programming Manual 9 20 8510C On Site Service Manual System Installation Making System Connections Figure 9 9 Laser Printer Connections HP 8510 SYSTEM BUS MICROPRINT 45 Seriol Porollel Input Port Input Port HP 8510 RS 232 PORT RS 232 CABLE CENTRONICS CABLE HP P N 245420 a Serial Connection b Parallel Connection Parallel Printer Setup As shown in Figure 9 9 the parallel setup requires a GPIB HP IB to parallel port adapter order to use currently available printers adapters such as MicroPlot 50A and MicroPrint 45CH are available from Intelligent Interfaces For more information consult their website at www intdligent interfaces com 1 If using the Microprint 45CH you must set it to address 01 as explained in its user s guide Connect the 45CH GPIB input to the 8510C system bus Connect the output of the 45CH to the laser printer Centronics input Make sure the 45CH ac adapter module is set to the proper line voltag
130. performance is specified at an ambient temperature of 423 C 3 Therefore the environmental temperature must remain in the range of 420 to 426 Oncethe measurement calibration has been done the ambient temperature must be held to 1 2 Open the calibration and verification kits and place all the devices on top of the foam so they will reach room temperature NOTE Temperature of the device is important because device dimensions electrical characteristics change with temperature 3 Switch on the power to the system instruments Switch on the controller last the 85101 next to last To achieve the maximum system stability allow the system instruments to warm up for at least 1 hour before measurement calibration User Parameters Check Unratioed Power Refer to the U nratioed Power Failures section in Chapter 4 for a procedure to check that the system RF power level is correct NOTE Check the user parameters with the source at different power levels and in the ramp and step modes 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 35 Performance Verification and Specifications Operational Check Procedures Inspect Clean and Gage Connectors CAUTION SMA connectors can easily damage the verification devices Always use adapters when verifying a system with SMA connectors 1 Visually inspect all the connectors for any burrs gold flakes or places wherethe gold is worn 2 Clean all the connectors with alcohol and foam
131. port 2 2 Press PARAMETER MENU User 4 b1 REDEFINE PARAMETER DRIVE Port 2 PHASE LOCK a2 REDEFINE DONE to observe the b1 power level trace through path 5 illustrated on this foldout The trace should be similar to the example trace typically within 5 dB Record the result for path 5 good or bad under the RF path diagram Good Bad Good Bad ___ Good Bad _ _ f _ Good Bad Good 3 Press PARAMETER MENU User 2 b2 REDEFINE PARAMETER DRIVE Port 1 PHASE LOCK a1 REDEFINE DONE to observe the b2 power level trace through path 6 x 2 illustrated on this foldout The trace should be similar to the example trace typically within 2 8514B Option 002 003 RF Flow Diagrams and Typical Traces 5 dB Record the result for path 6 good or bad under the path diagram Unratioed Power Failures TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE Check RF Paths 1 2 3 and 4 These paths are RF Path 1 User 1 a1 RF Path 2 User 3 a2 RF Path 3 User 4 1 Reflected RF Path 4 User 2 b2 Reflected 1 Doafactory preset of the analyzer and put the source into step mode On the network analyz er press INSTRUMENT STATE MORE FACTORY PRESET STIMULUS MENU J STEP 2 To examine the four sampler IF signals it is necessary to redefine what port and sampler the analyzer uses for phaselock Press PARAMETER MENU User 3 a2 REDEFINE PARAMETER DRIVE Port 2 PHASE LOCK a2 REDEFINE DONE to redefine a2 P
132. procedure is complete If you do not have the double sided language extensions and drivers disk insert the Basic 3 0 or higher language extensions disk into the same disk drive 5 TypeLOAD BIN filename for each extension filename then press RETURN or EXECUTE or EXEC NOTE The original 85101C display processor incorporated a cathode ray tube CRT The current design incorporates a liquid crystal display LCD The first three adjustments apply only to an the 85101C equipped with a CRT There are no equivalent adjustment procedures for an 85101C equipped with an LCD Table 7 1 Adjustment Procedures Title Procedure Number Assembly Adjusted Vertical Position and Focus Adjustments 1 A11 85101C equipped with a CRT Display Degaussing Demagnetizing 2 A11 85101C equipped with a CRT Display Intensity Adjustments 3 A11 85101C equipped with a CRT Sweep ADC Gain Adjustment 85102 4 A20 IF Mixer Adjustment 85102 5 A9 A11 A13 A14 IF Amplifier Adjustment 85102 6 A10 Synchronous Detector Adjustment 85102 7 A5 A7 Clock Adjustment 85102 8 A6 8510C On Site Service Manual 7 5 Adjustments Safety Considerations Table 7 2 Adjustable Components in Alpha Numeric Order Reference Adjustment Name Adjustment Adjustment Function Number Designator Procedure Number 85101 Display Processor A11 DISPLAY VERTICAL 1 A
133. procedures in Chapter 8 Performance Verification and Specifications To operate the system refer to the operating manual In Case of Difficulty Incorrect operation can be indicated by Error messages or error codes on the analyzer display Abnormal system response or operation The most likely causes of problems for newly installed systems are poor cable connections or system bus address errors Switch off the line power to all instruments and carefully recheck all cable connections and GPIB addresses referring to Figure 9 6 Then power up the system instruments again in the correct sequence If the problem still exists refer tothetroubleshooting chapter or contact your local Agilent customer engineer 8510C On Site Service Manual 9 23 System Installation Making System Connections 9 24 8510C On Site Service Manual 10 Preventive Maintenance Preventive Maintenance Overview Overview Preventive maintenance consists of five tasks that should be performed at least every six months If theinstrument is used daily on a production lineor in a harsh environment the tasks should be performed more often Preventive maintenance contains these tasks Maintain proper air flow Inspect and clean connectors Clean the glass filter and CRT or Clean the LCD Degaussthe display CRT only Inspect the error terms Maintain Proper Air Flow It is necessary to maintain constant air flow in and ar
134. quality is typically a small component of total system measurement error when connections are correctly made H owever poor connection quality can induce errors that significantly affect the accuracy of the measurement Measurement Errors M easurement errors prevent measured data from being a true representation of the unknown test device I n all applications measurement errors can influencethe application goals 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 3 Performance Verification and Specifications System Performance Network analysis measurement errors can be separated intothree types systematic errors those which are stable and repeatable random errors those which are random in nature and cannot be characterized and removed and drift errors those associated with temperature humidity pressure or other factors related to time Measurement errors that remain after measurement calibration are called residual measurement errors See the M easurement Calibration chapter in the operating manual for a detailed description of the systematic errors corrected by measurement calibration The measurement errors of the system are explained in relationship to error model flowgraphs and uncertainty equations later in this chapter If measurement accuracy measurement uncertainty specifications were written for each possible 8510 system configuration and measurement condition several thousand specifications would need to be generated Therefore
135. reference amplifier boards A10 and A12 respectively to pass and amplify the 100 kHz IF signals Other causes of failure of this test may be Faulty A24 processor interface board Faulty 100 kHz IF address decoder on the A6 clock board Faulty 100 kHz Cal signal on the A6 clock board f both boards A10 A12 fail the A6 dock is probably faulty Synchronous Detector Test A5 A7 6 This test verifies that both A5 and A7 synchronous detector boards are working properly It is also used to detect failures with the A17 sample and hold board circuitry However you must run the ADC test A18 and 100 kHz IF amp test A10 A12 before running this test If those tests pass then you can run this test and have confidence in the results Other causes of failure of this test may be Faulty A18 ADC and or A19 ADC control board Faulty A10 or A121F amplifiers Faulty A6 dock board 20 MHz Mixer Test A9 A11 A13 A14 7 This test verifies the ability of the 9 A11 A13 and A14 mixer boards to downconvert the 20 MHzIF signals to 100 kHz This test is a good example of the use of the 20 MHz output of the 85102 Before running this test be sure that the 100 kHz IF amplifier test A10 A12 has passed 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 141 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Service Program Other causes of failure of this test may be Faulty A10 A12 IF amplifier boards Faulty 20 MHz signal from the A6 clock board
136. softkey 6 Switch off the analyzer power Remove the board A10 or A12 from the 85102 and install it on an extender board Reconnect the cables as the controller display shows using adapters and extra cables provided in the service kit It is necessary only to reconnect the cables that are noticed in the setup on the display Switch on the analyzer power but switch on the display processor last to avoid system lockup When a graticule appears on the analyzer display the instrument has finished initializing Press CONTINUE on the controller 7 22 8510C On Site Service Manual Adjustments Procedure 6 IF Amplifier Adjustment Figure 7 8 Location of IF Amplifier Adjustments A10 IF AMPLIFIER A10J1 A10L1 A10J5 A12J1 1211 12 5 9 The following prompt is displayed gt gt gt gt gt COARSE ADJUST lt lt lt lt lt ADJUST L1 TO PEAK TRACE ON 8510 CRT 10 Refer to Figure 7 8 for the location of 1 Adjust L1 sothat the horizontal line on the analyzer display is at its maximum vertical location 11 Press CONTINUE 8510C On Site Service Manual 7 23 Adjustments Procedure 6 IF Amplifier Adjustment 12 The following prompt is displayed gt gt gt gt gt ADJUST RE ADJUST L1 TO PEAK TRACE ON 8510 CRT re center trace with marker key if necessary 13 Repeat step 10 If necessary press MARKER on the analyzer to re center the trace 14 When the adjustme
137. softkey that selects the sweep ADC adjustment Switch off the analyzer power Configure the equipment as the controller display shows BW N Switch on the analyzer power but switch on the display processor last to avoid system lockup 7 When a graticule appears on the analyzer display the instrument has finished initializing Press CONTINUE on the controller 8 The following prompt is displayed ADJUST GAIN R26 FOR 300 0 3mUnits 9 Refer to Figure 7 4 for the location of A20R26 Adjust A20R26 so that the mUnit shown on the analyzer display is 300 0 3 Refer to Figure 7 5 7 16 8510C On Site Service Manual Adjustments Procedure 4 Sweep ADC Gain Adjustment Figure 7 4 Location of Sweep ADC Gain Adjustment A20 SWEEP ADC A20 R26 8510C On Site Service Manual 7 17 Adjustments Procedure 4 Sweep ADC Gain Adjustment Figure 7 5 Display of Sweep ADC Adjustment A20R26 ADJUSTMENT 500 3mU 10 When the adjustment is complete press CONTINUE to return to the menu 11 If you are unable to adjust A20R26 within the given specification and the following prompt is displayed refer to the troubleshooting chapter ADC CONTROL GAIN is beyond limit press CONTINUE 12 Switch off the analyzer power and return all the equipment to the original configuration Be sure to reconnect all the 85102 cables in the original configuration 7 18 8510C On Site Service Manual Adjustments Procedure
138. still not successful the problem is elsewhere the system Go to U nratioed Power Failures and perform the troubleshooting procedures in that section to seeif the problem is in the test set 10 If step 9 did not resolve the problem refer to Error Terms and use the information thereto analyze the error terms printout made in step 8 11 If the verification still fails return tothe main troubleshooting procedures to check the system hardware 4 120 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Software Failures Software Failures Overview Usethe information in this section if you are having problems running the operating system or the verification software or controlling the system over GPIB Only usethis section after going through the Control Configuration and Cabling Pre Operational Checks in the Main Troubleshooting Procedure This section explains how to resolve software and firmware failures and provides a list of 8510 operating system revisions beginning with revision A 01 00 How to Resolve Software and Firmware Failures The following procedure for the resolution of software and firmware failures is in two parts 1 Make a list of programming codes or key presses Check the programming code descriptions with the documentation to verify that the intended operation is valid 2 List all system components and the 8510C and source firmware revisions For assistance see Contacting Ag
139. table Generating Customized System Uncertainty Plots To select edited error terms for generating system uncertainty data refer to the steps below 1 Press System Uncert in the Main menu 2 For Compute Using select User Parameters 3 Usethe softkeys within the menu to edit other selections as needed 4 Press Done to display uncertainty plots Using User Generated Specifications in System Verification You can choose user generated specifications for system verification Refer to the steps below 1 Press Verify System in the Main menu Press Select Standard Move the cursor to Verify Using and select User Parameters Usethe softkeys within the menu to edit other selections as needed uF WN Press Done to begin system verification Entering S parameters of the DUT You can edit the S parameter values for your specific device under test Refer to the steps below 1 Press System Uncert in the Main menu 2 Locate the S parameter data fields in the middle of the display Notice the default values of S11 522 0 and S21 512 3 Toenter an S11 value press Previous until the asterisk beside S11 lin blinks indicating the data field is activated 4 Usethe keyboard to enter the new S11 linear value 8 16 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications How to Verify System Performance 5 Movetothe next data field and press Next or Previous as needed to edit the
140. terminals power cord or supplied power cord set Whenever it is likely that the protection has been impaired the product must be made inoperative and secured against any unintended operation BEFORE APPLYING POWER Verify that the product is configured to match the available main power source per the input power configuration instructions provided in this manual If this product is to be energized via an autotransformer make sure the common terminal is connected to the neutral grounded side of the mains supply Thefront panel LINE switch disconnects the mains circuits from the mains supply after the EMC filters and before other parts of the instrument Before switching on this instrument make sure theline voltage selector switch is set to the voltage of the mains supply the correct fuse is installed the supply voltage is in the specified range SERVICING Any servicing adjustment maintenance or repair of this product must be performed only by qualified personnel Adjustments described in this manual may be performed with power supplied to the product while protective covers are removed Energy available at many points may if contacted result in personal injury Capacitors inside this product may still be charged even when disconnected from their power Source To avoid a fire hazard only fuses with the required current rating and of the specified type normal blow time delay etc are to be us
141. test set from J 1 test set interconnect on the 85102 Connect the service adapter as shown in Figure 4 9 The service adapter is not supplied with each 8510C Refer to Chapter 5 to order this servicing tool 4 86 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Unratioed Power Failures Figure 4 9 Service Adapter Connections IF INTERCONNECT J10 20 MHz IF ss445c 2 Press the following keys INSTRUMENT STATE RECALL MORE FACTORY PRESET MARKER STIMULUS MENU STEP PARAMETER MENU 3 Examine each user parameter IF response by pressing the corresponding softkey to observe the unratioed power level of User 1 through User 4 The traces should be flat lines quite close to each other as indicated by the marker value typically about 28 dB 5 dB Service Adapter Conclusions If one or more signal paths are incorrect The problem is most likely with the 85102 Stop this procedure and return to troubleshooting procedures for the 85102 If all signal paths are correct The 85102 is working properly The problem is most likely with the source or the test set Perform the following procedure to verify operation of the test set 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 87 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Unratioed Power Failures Test Set Unratioed Power Troubleshooting Usethis procedure with the following test sets 8514B 8514B Option 002 003 8515A 8516A 8516A Option 002 003 8517B 8517B Option 007
142. the 8510 system hardware and firmware and how the system operates especially the phase lock circuitry Main Troubleshooting Procedure Chapter 4 Turn tothis chapter first when troubleshooting a system It consists of a main procedure followed by sections with details on troubleshooting specific failures Thefollowing fold outs are located at the back of this chapter 8510C System L evel Troubleshooting Block Diagram equipped with a CRT display 8510C System L evel Troubleshooting Block Diagram equipped with an LCD 85101C Display Processor Overall Block Diagram equipped with a CRT display 85101C Display Processor Overall Block Diagram equipped with an LCD 85102 IF Detector Overall Block Diagram 8510C Phase Lock Block Diagram 85101C A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram equipped with a CRT display 85101C A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram equipped with an LCD 85102 A25 Motherboard Wiring Diagram The sections within this chapter are as follows LCD Failures Self Test Failures Running Error Messages Unratioed Power Failures Power Supply Failures Performance Test Failures Software Failures 8510C On Site Service Manual 1 3 Service and Equipment On Site Service Manual Organization Other Failures Service Program Error Terms Replaceable Parts Chapter 5 This chapter contains part numbers for replaceable parts and assemblies and instructions on how to order them Parts lists for instruments with CRT displays and LCDs a
143. the S H on thetest set VTO summing amp holds the pretune voltage and VTO frequency constant The main phase lock tracks the error signal of the phase detector toacquirethelF about 20 MHz Then it locksthelF tothe 20 MHz reference signal Once thelF is locked on 20 MHz the processor begins the sweep The phase locked loop remains locked while holding the IF at a zero phase error for the ramp output of the main phase lock board If the loop cannot lock the processor displays this error message PHASE LOCK FAILURE Monitoring Phase Lock While making the measurement sweep the processor monitors the IF count and power If phase lock is lost during the sweep the processor displays this error message PHASE LOCK LOST The system attempts to lock one more time during the sweep Lock may be recovered or not If lock is not recovered the loop stays unlocked until the next bandcrossing In any case the error message is displayed Phaselock problems of this nature may be caused by the main phase lock board A23 or a power hole in the reference channel 8510C On Site Service Manual 3 19 Theory of Operation System Phase Lock Operation Monitoring the VTO If the VTO is driven near the end of its tested range but maintains lock the processor displays this error message VTO OVER RANGE n essence the system especially the VTO is operating near its limits The system is still functioning properly but it may become unreliable Often t
144. the case of cautions the message indicates where the failure is detected and not always where the problem exists They may be caused by an 85101C CPU failure or error not necessarily by the cause indicated in the message However this type of failureis rare Theyremain on the display until you dear the message by correcting the problem pressing ENTRY OFF and MEASUREMENT RESTART Categories of Caution Running Error Messages The following four types of CAUTION running error messages are used for service and troubleshooting Phase Lock Running Error Messages NOTE Refer to Chapter 3 for a detailed description of how these phase lock error messages are generated PRETUNE FAILURE PRETUNE LOST FAILURE NOIF FOUND PHASE LOCK FAILURE PHASE LOCK LOST VTO OVER RANGE IF Detector ADC Running Error Messages ADC NOT RESPONDING ADC CAL FAILED IF CAL FAILED IF OVERLOAD AUTORANGE CAL FAILED Source Sweep Running Error Messages SOURCE SWEEP SYNC ERROR SWEEP TIME TOO FAST HP IB Running Error Messages SOURCE SYNTAX ERROR SYSTEM BUS ADDRESS ERROR TEST SET SYNTAX ERROR 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 71 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Running Error Messages Running Error Message Troubleshooting System L evel Troubleshooting Block Diagram Usethe system level troubleshooting block diagram as a reference guide for troubleshooting running error messages Read How to Read This Block Diagram tothe le
145. the operating system program A self test failure is indicated on the display by one of the 14 self test messages listed at the right side of the 8510C System L evel Troubleshooting Block Diagram If one of these messages appears go to Control Configuration and Cabling Pre Operational Checks on page 4 8 and then if necessary to Self Test Failures on page 4 51 4 4 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Troubleshooting Outline Abbreviated 8510C System Service Flowchart WHAT S WRONG Consider these questions before troubleshooting 1 Are there any self test failures running error messages beeping raw channel unratioed power problems 2 Is there an obvious failure If so go to next page Self Test Failures If a self test failure message appears refer to Control Configuration and Cabling Pre Operational Checks If necessary see Self Test Failures Otherwise go to next page ss416c 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 5 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Troubleshooting Outline Running Error Messages Running error messages arethe messages numbered 15 or higher listed on the right side of the 8510C System L evel Troubleshooting Block Diagram They occur if the CPU detects an error during normal operation When an error is detected and a running error message is displayed the system usually continues to make measurements Before troubleshooting a running error message be s
146. the reference port extension cables as vs piel da tothe shown in Figure 9 7 Not applicable for HP dii 85110 8516 8517 4 An HP 8340 or HP8360 requires a source in terconnect cable connection when the test set used is an HP 8516 8510C On Site Service Manual 9 17 System Installation Making System Connections 8360 Series Source GPIB HP IB Language Switch When using an 8360 series source its rear panel GPIB HP 1B language switches should be set as shown in Figure 9 7 Darkened switch positions indicate a depressed switch Figure 9 7 8360 Series Source GPIB HP IB Language Switch 00110011 HP IB LANG ADDRESS 9 18 8510C On Site Service Manual System Installation Making System Connections Grounding Power Cables WARNING An uninterrupted safety earth ground must be provided from the main power source to the supplied power cable s to prevent injury or death In compliance with international safety standards the 8510 system instruments are equipped with 3 wire power cables For systems using the cabinet connect the instruments directly to the power strip inside the cabinet using the 3 conductor grounded power cables supplied with the system cabinet Do not modify these power cables Reference Port Extension Cables not applicable for 85110 8516 8517 Connect the reference port extension cables rpecs as indicated in the following fig
147. time the values for a particular frequency band are completed Thetable or plot appears on the controller display with a softkey selection for sending the display tothe printer or plotter NOTE If you want to run the performance verification on your system keep the program running and refer to How to Verify System Performance on page 8 13 If you want to exit the program press the Quit Program key in the main menu The examples that follow are explanations of typical tables and plots generated by this program 8 60 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts Example printouts are used to explain the various information included Refer tothe system error model later in this chapter for the association of the error terms with the system error Example 8 5 flow graph Residual Errors System Specifications Residual Errors Correction NOTES 1 N NA TT Netuork Analyzer Calibration Kit Test Port Cables MP85188 Enhanced Model Test Set HPB516A003 2 4mn Parameter 45MHz 406Hz Source HP836X016 936K amp 8516 Synth 16MHz 406Hz 2 4mn Slotless Standard Grade Calibration Technique SL Sliding Load Cal HP851330 pair short cables 2 4 tEtera u Description Of Error Tera ISymb
148. without signal separation components couplers or bridges Its four front panel test ports connect directly to four samplers it is basically a four channel frequency converter ts assemblies are otherwise identical to the other test sets The special applications of this test set are documented in its manual and application notes 8510C On Site Service Manual 3 5 Theory of Operation Test Sets Test Set Control Path Thetest set and the display processor communicate over the 8510 system bus and the test set interface The A4 GPIB HP IB board is the control center of test set communications and logic It contains an 8 bit microprocessor a GPIB chip and an identification code in ROM to initialize and identify the test set to the display processor This code works in conjunction with configuration switches in the test set A4 board also controls several assemblies within the test set via a separate data address bus The bus enables the A4 processor to do the following Readthe configuration switches Select the sampler s required to measure the desired signal Operatethe front panel LEDs Program the switch splitter and any programmable attenuators Monitor the test set temperature and notify the display processor if it gets too hot Test Set Power On Sequence When power is applied tothe test set the A15 regulator board produces a power on reset signal PWON PWON resets the control logic of the test set When
149. you usethis section depends on your situation These are the major topics Self Test and Other Failures describes what happens prior to and during the self test sequence It gives an example of a failed self test describes the power up self test sequence and explains what subtests are How to Identify a Self Test Failure tells how to spot a self test and subtest failure How to Troubleshoot a Self Test Failure explains how to troubleshoot the 8510 when a self test fails How to Access the Test Menu and Run a Self Test tells how to access and run one or all of the self tests System Disc and Service Commands explains how to access and use these commands Self Test Failures and Troubleshooting lists all of the self tests shows the most likely causes of failures with percentages and offers additional troubleshooting hints How to Reload the Operating System explains how to dothis from memory and disc 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 51 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Self Test Failures Self Tests and Other Failures Before or during self tests the instrument may detect other failures These are known as instrument errors and default test 15 The next paragraphs and What to Do If the R L T S 8 4 2 1 LEDs Stay Lit Default Test 15 explain these conditions What to Do If an Instrument Error Occurs An instrument error may occur at power up before the self test sequence runs or as it runs If this happens one of the follow
150. 0 port to convertor Zb 3 65 3 42 2279 224 Loss sqr F ghz port2 conv B2 dB Lf2b2 79 95 1 35 1 32 Loss Dc conVertor to I f B2 dB 4 03 2 28 31 50 12 00 Loss Freq ghz to I f BZ dB iLfvib2t 7 96 0 00 0 90 Damage Level 82 dBm DIb2 Pur at Conv for 0 1 db Comp 82 dBm Pcch2 Raw rms Noise on race 82 4 dB iRntb2 0070 0630 0350 0360 Raw rms Noise Floor 82 dBm iRnfb2i 800 00 800 00 800 00 000 00 Raw rms Noise Floor B2 Conv dBm iRnfb2ci 101 20 101 28 101 50 102 00 RR REs1duals of B2 I f dBm Reb2i 140 00 140 00 140 00 149 00 REsiduals of 82 Conv dBm Reb2c 800 00 800 00 800 00 800 09 Linearity of Xtai B2 005 z Gain Err 34 gt 46 dbm dB iGelb 2050 0250 0858 0052 Gain Err2 46 gt 58 dbm B2 dB Ge2b2 0100 0102 0102 0100 Gain Err3 582 70 dbm B dB Ge3b2 0152 9150 0150 0150 Gain Err4 70 dbm B2 48 1Ge4b2 60250 0250 0250 0250 Mag error vs Phase shift B2 dB 1 9229 0030 Table type specifications of raw errors associated with the B2 channe signal path The system instruments calibration kit and calibration technique selected in the hardware configuration menu that the specifications have been generated for These specifications refer to the errors contributed by the test set trom the test port through the coupler and into the sampler down converter T
151. 0 85102 60147 W18 85102 60148 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 14 6 21 1 28480 85102 60148 W19 85102 60149 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 7 7 28480 85102 60149 W20 85102 60150 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A10J 5 A5J 3 28480 85102 60150 W21 85102 60151 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A5 1 A17 2 28480 85102 60151 W22 85102 60152 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 5 2 A17 1 28480 85102 60152 W23 85102 60153 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 12 5 A7 3 28480 85102 60153 W24 85102 60154 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A7 1 A17 4 28480 85102 60154 W25 85102 60155 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 7 2 A17 3 28480 85102 60155 W26 85102 60156 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 17 5 18 1 28480 85102 60156 W27 85102 60157 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 19 2 3 28480 85102 60157 W28 85102 60158 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 20 1 5 28480 85102 60158 W29 85102 60159 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 21 4 J 6 28480 85102 60159 W30 85102 60160 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY J 1A2 A11J 4 28480 85102 60160 W31 85102 60161 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY J 1 9 4 28480 85102 60161 W32 85102 60162 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY J 1 4 13 4 28480 85102 60162 W33 85102 60163 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY J 1 5 22 1 28480 85102 60163 W34 85102 60164 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY J 146 A23J 1 28480 85102 60164 W35 85102 60165 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY J 1 7 22 3 28480 85102 60165 W36 85102 60166 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY J 1 1 14 4 28480 85102 60166 W37 85102 60167 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A13J 6 21 2 28480 85102 60167 W38 85102 60168 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 3 4 28480 85102 60168 W39 85102 60169 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A6J 4 A19J 1 28480 85102 60169 W40 85102 60223 1 CABLE ASSEMBL
152. 00200 GHz STOP 40 000000000 GHz STOP 40 000000000 GHz PATH 3 b1 Reflected PATH b2 Reflected b2 52 X TAPERED a2 PAD a2 COUPLER a2 COUPLER DOUBLER SWITCH SWITCH RF IN SPLITTER RF IN SPLITTER TUNE TUNE PRETUNE PRETUNE VTO SENSE VTO SENSE ai COUPLER al CH COUPLER b1 TAPERED PAD b1 Good Bad Good Bad 129 MAG REF 30 0 dB 10 0 dB 2 REFERENCE VALUE 30 0 dB FERAT 14 START 0 045000000 GHz STOP 40 000000000 GHz PATH 5 b1 Thru b2 a2 COUPLER SWITCH RF IN SPLITTER TUNE PRETUNE VTO SENSE al COUPLER b1 Good Bad leg MAG REF 30 0 dB 10 0 dB 7 REFERENCE VALLE 30 0 START 9 045000000 GHz STOP 40 000000000 GHz PATH 6 b2 Thru b2 COUPLER a2 SWITCH RF IN SPLITTER TUNE PRETUNE VTO SENSE 01 C COUPLER TAPERED PAD b1 Good Bad 8516A Option 002 003 RF Flow Diagrams and Typical Traces TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE Check RF Paths 1 2 3 and 4 These paths are RF Path 1 User 1 a1 RF Path 2 User 3 a2 RF Path 3 User 4 b1 Reflected RF Path 4 User 2 b2 Reflected 1 Do a factory preset of
153. 0360 0031 E4 0360 1632 1 TERMINAL SLDR LUG LK MTG FOR 73 8 SCR 28480 0360 1632 E5 0362 0227 2 CONNECTOR SGL CONT SKT 1 14 MM BSC SZ 28480 0362 0227 E6 0362 0227 CONNECTOR SGL CONT SKT 1 14 MM BSC SZ 28480 0362 0227 11 1200 0147 8 INSULATOR FLG BSHG NYLON 28480 1200 0147 18 F1 2100 0002 1 2A 250V NTD 1 25X 25 UL 75915 2100 0002 FL1 0960 0443 1 LINE MODULE FILTERED 28480 0960 0443 J1 1251 2197 1 CONNECTOR R amp P 24F 28480 1251 2197 12 1250 1391 1 ADAPTOR TEE 5 28480 1250 1391 14 1250 0870 CONNECTOR RF BNC FEM SGL HOLE RR 50 OHM 28480 1250 0870 5 1250 1091 1 CONNECTOR RF FEM SGL HOLE RR 50 OHM 28480 1250 1091 J6 1250 0870 CONNECTOR RF BNC FEM SGL HOLE RR 50 OHM 28480 1250 0870 17 1250 0870 CONNECTOR RF BNC FEM SGL HOLE RR 50 OHM 28480 1250 0870 J8 1250 0083 1 CONNECTOR RF BNC FEM SGL HOLE FR 50 28480 1250 0083 19 1250 1091 1 CONNECTOR RF BNC FEM SGL HOLE FR 50 28480 1250 1091 10 1250 0870 1 CONNECTOR RF BNC FEM SGL HOLE FR 50 OHM 28480 1250 0870 W19 85102 60149 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 7 7 28480 85102 60149 W27 85102 60157 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 19 2 J 3 28480 85102 60157 W29 85102 60159 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 21 4 6 28480 85102 60159 W30 85102 60160 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY J 2 11 4 28480 85102 60160 W31 85102 60161 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY J 1A3 A9J 4 28480 85102 60161 W32 85102 60162 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY JIA4 A13J 4 28480 85102 60162 W33 85102 60163 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY J 1 5 22 1 28480 8
154. 05 1 LINE SWITCH BUTTON 28480 08757 40005 3 1460 1573 1 SPRING EXTENSION 138 I N OD 28480 1460 1573 4 85101 00081 1 LINE SWITCH ACTUATOR 28480 85101 00081 5 08753 00036 1 SWITCH INSULATOR 28480 08753 00036 A1 85101 60296 1 A1FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY 28480 85101 60296 6 85101 80135 1 OVERLAY RIGHT SIDE 28480 85101 80135 7 85101 80136 1 NAME PLATE 28480 85101 80136 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 27 Replaceable P arts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD Table 5 10 85101C Front Panel Internal with LCD Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number 1 85101 20299 1 FRONT BEZEL 28480 85101 20299 2 85101 00062 1 SUB PANEL 28480 85101 00062 3 0515 1946 MACH SCREW M3 0 6MM TX 28480 0515 1946 4 85101 80084 1 FRONT DRESS PANEL 28480 85101 80084 5 7121 4611 1 LABEL MADE IN USA 28480 7121 4611 6 0510 1148 3 PUSH ON RETAINER 28480 0510 1148 7 85101 60288 1 KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY 28480 85101 60288 8 85101 20053 1 AIR DAM 28480 85101 20053 9 3050 0105 8 WASHER FLAT 125 ID 28480 3050 0105 10 0515 0430 8 MACH SCREW M3 0 6MM TX 28480 0515 0430 11 85101 60234 1 ROTARY PULSE GENERATOR RPG 28480 85101 60234 12 2190 0016 2 WASHER LK INTL T3 8IN 377ID 28480 2190 0016 13 2950 0043 2 NUT HEX DBLCHAM 3 8 32 THD 00000 Order by desc 0941N 14 3050 0180 1 TEFLON WASHER 28480 3050 0180 15 0370 3033 1 KNOB BASE 250 G 28480 0370 3033 5 28 8510C On Site Service Manual Repl
155. 0679 1 TRANSISTOR NPN 2N5885 SI TO 3 PD 200W 28480 1854 0679 Q2 Q4 1853 0351 2 TRANSISTOR PNP 2N6053 SI DARL TO 3 28480 1853 0351 Q3 1854 0611 1 TRANSISTOR NPN 2N6055 SI DARL TO 3 28480 1854 0611 W55 85102 60191 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY INTER CON 28480 85102 60191 1 0570 0111 5 SM 632 375RDSL 28480 0570 0111 2 1390 0104 1 FASTENER SNAP IN GROM PANEL THKNS 28480 1390 0104 3 1390 0281 1 FASTENER SNAP IN PLGR PANEL THKNS 28480 1390 0281 4 85102 20058 1 SAFETY COVER 28480 85102 20058 5 85102 20059 1 SAFETY COVER 28480 85102 20059 6 1205 0399 4 HEAT SINK SGL TO 3 CS 28480 1205 0399 7 2200 0113 8 SCREW M ACH 4 40 625 IN LGPAN HD POZI 00000 Order by desc 8 2190 0017 4 WASHER LK HLCL NO 8 168 IN ID 28480 2190 0017 9 2510 0138 4 SCREW MACH 8 32 3 IN LG PAN HD POZI 00000 Order by desc 10 3050 0005 4 WASHER SHLDR NO 6 14 IN ID 375 IN OD 28480 3050 0005 11 3050 0139 4 WASHER FL MTLC NO 8 172 IN ID 28480 3050 0139 12 85102 20070 2 MOUNT TRANSFORMER 28480 85102 20070 14 08505 20133 1 ENCLOSURE CKT 28480 08505 20133 15 85102 00023 1 COVER RF MAIN PHASE LOCK 28480 85102 00023 16 85102 00022 1 COVER RF PRETUNE CONTROL 28480 85102 00022 17 85102 00021 1 COVER RF IF COUNTER 28480 85102 00021 18 85102 00020 1 COVER RF SWP A D CONVERTER 28480 85102 00020 19 85102 00019 1 COVER RF A D CONVERTER 28480 85102 00019 20 85102 00018 1 COVER A D CONVERTER 28480 85102 00018 21 85102 00017 1 COVER RF SAMPLE HOLD 28480 85102 00017 22 85102 00053 1 COVER RF REMOTE APPLICATIONS 28480
156. 08864 3 498 010615 4 926 017307 8 215 023445 16 993 10 s 2 708 010947 4 003 017896 6 722 024214 8 989 250 009357 2 245 011361 3 468 018620 5 8598 025156 7 781 500 909580 1 946 01185 2 126 01947 5 308 026270 7 029 reo 012417 2 894 020467 4 337 027543 6 518 400 016458 1 592 013057 2 730 021582 4 576 028996 6 161 450 010932 1 483 013771 2 612 022835 4 491 0306 9 5 905 500 011441 1 400 014558 2 526 024215 4 358 032411 5 720 550 011955 1 232 015419 2 453 025726 4 262 034374 5 585 500 012544 1 284 016248 2 417 027368 4 195 036505 5 430 550 013187 1 247 O17328 2 382 028138 4 150 038805 5 424 700 013869 1 218 018393 2 260 051039 4 121 041274 5 382 750 814535 1 198 019523 2 347 033066 4 107 043912 5 358 800 015364 1 183 020749 2 540 035226 4 103 046718 5 349 850 916177 1 173 022029 2 553 037512 4 109 949593 5 353 3e0 017034 1 157 0 3378 2 542 059926 4 122 052855 5 367 950 017934 1 154 024796 2 349 042469 4 14 0565147 5 389 1 000 018878 1 154 0268283 2 359 045140 4 166 059626 5 419 REESE eee NOTES 1 Measurement parameter 511 2 Uncertainty limits upper or lower the limits only apply to transmission measurements 3 Type of plot worst case uncertainties This is a field
157. 1 Measurement HPBS1 B PERFORMRNCE VERIFICATION 10 11 47 10 fug 1330 nnb EET Verif Std 20 dB Attenuator Ser 01371 Origin 12 20 88 Verif Kit HP85053B 3 5mm Ser 3 90301 rigin 12 20 88 Netuork finalyzer HP85108 S N Test Set HPSSISA S N Source S N Calibration Kit HP85052D S N Calibration Technique BL Test Port Cables HP851318 HE Test Numbers 4 4 t a t 1 a Lomments 521 MAGNITUDE 08 i 21 PHASE deg 1 Factory User Diff Total Factory User Diff Total Freq Meas d Meas d Mag Uncert Meas d Meas d Phase Uncert I6H21 81 8 1 LAI B A B HSE EROS Bawa Re ROSS ease Seem esas aN 10 110 20 105 005 078 60 84 50 78 07 85 2 900 20 117 20 11 006 078 81 09 80 93 18 94 3 208 c 2 20 128 00 089 121 57 121 42 15 1 18 5 590 722 151 004 090 177 81 178 00 2 089 1 45 20 171 003 089 117 16 117 38 22 1 69 20 199 005 087 56 55 56 87 30 1 84 3 000 29 210 20 202 008 089 36 35 3 4 2 29 2 04 zi 20 25 005 8 4 06 3 7 35 2 61 20 262 908 1481 64 66 64 29 37 2 86 2282 006 148 125 19 124 87 LE 3 12 L 002 146 174 19 174 59 40 3 36 0347 1 113 64 114 13 48 3 62 147 53 08 53 56 48 3 88 2146 i 7 46 96 50 4 12 43 i
158. 102 service program tests 1 A19 A18 and 4 A17 Ifthe Service Program found no fault with any assembly refer to Other Failures on page 4 125 and run the 20 Hz Sine Wave Test ADC Not Responding The 85102 A18 ADC board is not sending an expected interrupt service request to the 85101C CPU This message is the highest priority interrupt in the 8510C Probable cause of failure 85102 A18 ADC 85102 19 ADC control 85102 A24 CPU interface e 85101C interrupt problem F display interconnect cable Troubleshooting Run 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode Run 85102 service program tests 1 A19 and 3 A18 Run 85101C service program tests I O board tests If the service program found no fault with any assembly refer to Other Failures on page 4 125 and run the 20 Hz Sine Wave Test 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 73 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Running Error Messages Autorange Cal Failed The CPU tries to calibrate the switchable gain amplifiers 0 dB 12 dB 24 dB 36 dB and 48 dB gain steps on the 85102 IF amplifier boards A10 and A12 If the measured values exceed the normal error limits this message is displayed Probable cause of error 85102 A10 or A121F amplifier Troubleshooting Run 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode Run 85102 service program test 5 A10 A 12 Caution Optional Function Not Installed This message occurs if the A8 secur
159. 102B Replaceable Parts Table 5 18 Motherboard 2 of 2 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number A25 85102 60229 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY MOTHER 28480 85102 60229 The following parts are not supplied when A25 is ordered A25C1 A25C2 A25C3 A25C4 2501 2502 A25Q3 2504 0360 0124 4 CONNECTOR SGL CONT PIN 28480 0360 0124 04 IN BSC SZ RND MP6 0360 0124 CONNECTOR SGL CONT PIN 28480 0360 0124 04 IN BSC SZ RND 5 50 8510C On Site Service Manual Figure 5 29 8510C On Site Service Manual 85102 Motherboard 2 of 2 3 8 places PPP 00090000 e 00060000000000 00000 990 000 000000000000000000000 00000006 Replaceable P arts 85102B Replaceable Parts MP3 2 places eoceccceTocece 00000000000000000000 0 0000000000000000000009 000 0000000000000000 9990900990000000000009 4000000000000000009000 00 00000 0000000000000000009000 00 00000 090000
160. 11 90 gt J11 89 11 88 gt J11 87 11 86 11 85 gt J11 84 11 83 11 82 gt J11 81 gt 11 80 gt J11 79 gt J11 78 11 77 411 76 2411 75 11 74 gt J11 73 gt J11 72 11 71 2 J11 70 11 69 J11 68 gt J11 67 11 66 411 65 J11 64 99 184 5V 19 105 DGND DGND 2 J11 63 11 62 LRFRINT LMBMINT 9 106 J9 107 LDTACK LGINT 19 108 EAS LWRITE LLDS LUDS 9 109 DGND DGND 49 110 gt J11 61 2 J11 60 2 J11 59 2 J11 58 J11 57 2 11 56 ESSO EEPROM J13 J13 110 J13 109 gt J13 108 gt J13 107 2 13 106 DGND NC qf DIOIHPIB 5 N C FANNEG DGND DIO2HPIB INPUT OUTPUT DIO3HPIB gt J15 128 DIO4YHPIB J15 107 J13 105 gt J gt J gt J gt J gt J N N N N N N N N N N N N D N N N N N N N N N N N D N N N N gt J gt J SPARE1 SPARE3 gt J SPARES gt J N C gt J N C N C gt J N C gt J DGND LSHDN gt J LPRST gt J LNMI gt J DGND CLK8MHZ DGND DGND gt J MOTOR SV MOTOR SV gt J MOTOR 12V MOTOR 12V gt J 5V 5V 5V 5V gt J DGND DGN
161. 112 69 N C LLEDREM 5 LLEDLSN NC J lt 5112 68 C N C RPGCLK I LLEDTLK N C 2 lt N C 5112 67 N C N C N C RPGDR LLEDSRO DGND 1 lt N C cad N C N C N C LLED2 4 5V DGND DGND 5112 65 DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND J C1 N C die F 2 N C N C N C N C LLED8 2 LLEDY 0 0470 E N C N C N C N C LIOSLO HIORL DGND DGND di N C 2 N C N C N C LIOSL1 HIORLI NE J gt J J lt gt J12 61 lt DGND HIORL7 T N C cer N C N C N C LIOSL3 lt HIORL3 J U1A R1 N C s J lt N C gt 12 59 N C N C N C LIOSL4 HI ORLY J LLDS 1 14 1 N C y J J lt N C gt J12 58 N C N C HIORLS HIORL6 J LDG 2 3 AAA LDISPSEL DGND I 4 N C 512 57 N C N C N C HIORL7 d Li 2 ME J 4 DGND d 2 DGND ences DGND DGND DGND DGND 4 DGND J x LIOSLO J LLEDS DGND LLED2 RPGDR 7 RPGCLK LLEDREM 554260 85101 Motherboard Wiring Diagram LCD 2 of 2
162. 1367 DOES NOT INCLUDE CORD 9300 0980 GROUNDING CORD 5FEET LONG USE WITH WRIST 28480 9300 0980 STRAP 9300 0797 ANTI STATIC EQUIPMENT MAT 4 FT X 2 28480 9300 0797 23 08511 60016 8511B SERVICE TOOLS KIT 28480 08511 60016 THE FOLLOWING 8511B SERVICE TOOLS MAY BE ORDERED AS A KIT OR ORDERED SEPARATELY 24 08511 20025 RF TEST CABLE TWO SUPPLIED IN KIT 28480 08511 20025 25 08511 20031 RF CABLE SOURCE 2FT LG 28480 08511 20031 26 11667C 50 GHZ POWER SPLITTER 28480 11667C 28 08490 60011 FIXED ATTENUATOR 6 DB TWO SUPPLIED IN KIT 28480 08490 60011 29 08490 60012 FIXED ATTENUATOR 20 DB 28480 08490 60012 30 85138B FIXED LOAD 50 OHM F 2 4 MM 28480 85138B 31 85138A FIXED LOAD 50 OHM M 2 4 MM 28480 85138A 32 1250 2188 ADAPTER F 2 4MM F 2 4MM 28480 1250 2188 33 08510 60022 8510 8360 FRONT PANEL EMULATOR KIT 28480 08510 60022 THE FOLLOWING ITEMS ARE INCLUDED IN THE 8510 8360 FRONT PANEL EMULATOR KITS ARE AVAILABLE SEPARATELY 34 08510 90268 INSTALLATION NOTE 28480 08510 90268 35 85102 80115 PANEL OVERLAY 28480 85102 80115 NOT ILLUSTRATED 5 8 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable P arts Available Service Tools Figure 5 2 Available Service Tools 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 9 Replaceable P arts Available Service Tools Figure 5 3 Available Service Tools 002090090090 5 0001000000000 5 0 Da ILI 0 Dj O oooo 635 u o 5 10 8510C On Site Service
163. 2 CINSERTION LOSS DIV 25 T 1197104844 l GHz __ SU 8 Stee 29 459598278 Good Cable Bad Cable 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 37 Performance Verification and Specifications Operational Check Procedures Magnitude and Phase Stability of Cables 1 To measure magnitude and phase stability press the following keys on the analyzer DISPLAY DUAL CHANNEL SPLIT CHANNEL 1 LOG MAG RESPONSE MENU AVERAGING ON 6 4 x1 CHANNEL 2 PARAMETER S11 FORMAT PHASE RESPONSE MENU AVERAGING ON 6 4 X1 2 Connect a short at the end of the cable 3 Hold the cablein a straight line and press the following keys to normalize the displayed traces CHANNEL 1 DISPLAY DATA MEMORY 1 MATH CHANNEL 2 DISPLAY DATA gt MEMORY 2 MATH 4 Make a gradual 90 bend in the middle of the cable NOTE The specification in the cable manual is determined from a transmission measurement not a reflection measurement and using a particular radius of a bend 5 To change the scale of the displayed traces press CHANNEL 1 RESPONSE SCALE STEP 1 repeat arrow key CHANNEL 2 RESPONSE SCALE STEP repeat arrow key 6 To mark the end of the cable s specified range place a marker on the highest specified frequency of the cable Press MARKER enter
164. 2 2 Exercise the display test patterns by referring to Table 4 4 Check for damaged pixels look for the symptoms described in How toldentify a Faulty Display and other serious abnormalities If the A15 LCD is defective replace the complete display assembly Refer to 15 LCD Assembly Replacement on page 6 16 4 46 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure LCD Failures What Is A Faulty Pixel A pixel is a picture element that combines to create an image on the display They are about the size of a small pin point Damaged pixels can be either permanently on or permanently off A permanently on pixel is red green or blueand is always displayed regardless of the display setting It will be visible on a dark background A permanently off pixel is always dark and is displayed against a background of its own color How to Identify a Faulty Display The display test has a sequence of red green blue white and black backgrounds One or more of the following symptoms indicate a faulty display complete rows or columns of permanently on or permanently off pixels morethan five permanently on or permanently off pixels not to exceed a maximum of two red or blue or three green twoor more consecutive permanently on or permanently off pixels e permanently on or permanently off pixels less than 6 5 mm apart If any of these symptoms occur replace the display Display T
165. 20 SWEEP BUCKET INPU PULSE PANEL T A18 A D CONVERTER 20 22 A5 TEST SYNC DET 21 42 A19 ADC CONTROL 20 22 26 14 TRIGGER IN 3 YELLOW LEDS ON FRONT PANEL 2 FOR SHOWING ACTI VE CHANNELS 1 amp 2 1 FOR SHOWING LINE VOLTAGE NOTE THIS LED IS SUPPLIED BY THE 5101 5V SUPPLY NOTE SELF TEST FAILURE CAN ALSO 8E CAUSED BY l A25U1 MOTHERBOARD DATA BITS 0 7 I Il l POWER SUPPLIES I TCH SETTINGS 1 DEFECTIVE DATA OR ADDRESS LINES ON BUS WILL CAUSE ANY OF THE RUNNI NG ERRORS TO APPEAR AT RANDOM DISPLAY 1N TERCONNECT A24 PROCESSOR 1 M MAIN PROCESSOR RESET BUTTON LOCATED BEHIND FRONT PANEL HOLE UNDER THE DISC DRIVE IT RESETS THE PROCESSOR AND SELF TESTS 1 14 4 GREEN LEDS THAT SHOW 5V 45V 15 415V REGULATED POWER AND 4 THAT SHOW UNREGULATED SUPPLIES ARE ON 1 RED LED THAT SHOWS THERMAL SHUTDOWN A7 1 0 SELF TESTS SERI ES 1 AS PROCESSOR EPROM self test ond service progrom PROM using checksum 200 300 2 AS PROCESSOR RAM test processor memory using data complement technique CONTROLLER 3 A7 DATA BUS TEST test 1 0 dote bus USI NG BASI C 4 4 DISPLAY PROCESSOR 5 A amp DISPLAY RAM SHOW SELF TEST 6 RED LEDS THAT amp 7 TIMER CLOCK RS 232 EXTERNAL DISPLAY FAILURE AND En regi RS 232
166. 20055 5 0515 0372 21 MACH SCREW M3 0 8MM FLP TXP 28480 0515 0372 6 85101 00051 1 CARD CAGE COVER 28480 85101 00051 7 0515 1382 5 MACH SCREW M3 5 6 PCFLTX 28480 0515 1382 5 24 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable P arts Replaceable Parts for an 85101 Equipped with an LCD Figure 5 12 85101C Top Internal with LCD J20 A9 418 J19 UNDER 14 VISIBLE 16 NOT VISIBLE A1 LCD NOT VISIBLE NOT VISIBLE ss424c 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 25 Replaceable P arts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD Figure 5 13 85101C Bottom Internal with LCD not visible ss441c Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number 1 0515 2086 4 MACH SCREW M4 0 7MM TX 28480 0515 2086 2 0515 0377 4 MACH SCREW M3 5 10MM TX 28480 0515 0377 3 85101 60300 1 MOTHERBD CARD CAGE ASSY 28480 85101 60300 INCLUDES FRAME CORNER STRUTS 5 0515 1382 5 MACH SCREW M3 5 6 PCFLTX 28480 0515 1382 6 0515 0372 21 MACH SCREW M3 0 8MM PN TX 28480 0515 0372 5 26 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable P arts Replaceable Parts for an 85101 Equipped with an LCD Figure 5 14 85101C Front Panel External with LCD Label A15 A1 Not Visible 55426 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number A15 85101 60297 1 A15 LCD ASSEMBLY 28480 85101 60297 2 08757 400
167. 28480 0515 2086 2 0515 1400 1 MACH SCREW 3 5 8MM TX 28480 0515 1400 3 0515 1402 2 MACH SCREW M3 5 8 PCPNTX 28480 0515 1402 5 20 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable P arts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT Table 5 8 85101C Cabinet Parts with CRT Display Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number 1 5062 3735 2 TOP AND BOTTOM COVER 28480 5062 3735 2 5021 5837 4 CORNER STRUT 28480 5021 5837 3 5041 8802 1 TRIM STRIP 28480 5041 8802 4 5062 3817 1 COVER SIDE PERFORATED 28480 5062 3817 5 5021 8405 1 FRONT FRAME 28480 5021 8405 6 5062 3800 1 HANDLE ASSEMBLY 28480 5062 3800 7 0515 0896 8 p SCREW M4 O 10MM FL 28480 0515 0896 8 5021 8497 2 TRIM FRONT HANDLE 28480 5021 8497 9 5041 8821 1 STRAP HANDLE CAP FRONT 28480 5041 8821 10 0515 1132 2 MACH SCREW M5 0 10MM FL 28480 0515 1132 PD 11 5041 8820 1 STRAP HANDLE CAP REAR 28480 5041 8820 12 5062 3704 1 STRAP HANDLE 28480 5062 3704 13 5062 3842 1 COVER SIDE HANDLE 28480 5062 3842 14 5061 5806 1 REAR FRAME 28480 5061 5806 15 0515 2086 16 A SCREW M4 0 7MM FLP 28480 0515 2086 NOTE corner struts are part of motherboard card cage assy part number 85101 60267 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 21 Replaceable P arts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT Figure 5 10 85101C Cabinet Parts with CRT Display 4 PLACES e 2 PLAcES 7 8 PLACES 2 PLACES 2
168. 28480 85102 60019 A19 85102 69019 BOARD ASSEMBLY ADC CONTROL R E 28480 85102 69019 A20 85102 60234 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY SWEEP ADC NEW 28480 85102 60234 A21 85102 60021 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY IF COUNTER NEW 28480 85102 60021 A21 85102 69021 BOARD ASSEMBLY IF COUNTER R E 28480 85102 69021 A22 85102 60272 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY PRETUNE CONTROL NEW 28480 85102 60272 A22 85102 69272 BOARD ASSEMBLY PRETUNE CONTROL R E 28480 85102 69272 A23 85102 60240 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY MAIN PHASE LOCK NEW 28480 85102 60240 A24 85102 60024 1 BOARD ASSY PROCESSOR INTERFACE NEW 28480 85102 60024 A24 85102 69024 BOARD ASSY PROCESSOR INTERFACE R E 28480 85102 69024 A26 85102 60273 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY RECTIFIER NEW 28480 85102 60273 A26 85102 69273 BOARD ASSEMBLY RECTIFIER R E 28480 85102 60273 5 36 8510C On Site Service Manual Figure 5 20 Replaceable P arts 85102B Replaceable Parts 85102 Board Location tes 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 37 Replaceable P arts 85102B Replaceable Parts Table 5 14 85102 Top Internal Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number Bl 08756 20073 1 FAN ASSEMBLY 28480 08756 20073 E7 0340 0596 4 INSULATOR XSTR THRM CNDCT 28480 0340 0596 E8 0340 0596 INSULATOR XSTR THRM CNDCT 28480 0340 0596 E9 0340 0596 INSULATOR XSTR THRM CNDCT 28480 0340 0596 E10 0340 0596 INSULATOR XSTR THRM CNDCT 28480 0340 0596 J2 1250 1391 1 ADAPTOR TEE MFM SMB 28480 1250 1391 Q1 1854
169. 3 5 AA iSVREG TTSVREG A 15VREG 35 TSVREG AM AB3 BUFDB7 TSVREG 36 5VREG A 5 SvREG A 14 36 SvREG A 5 1 SvREG A SVREG 14 36 SVREG SVREG 5 SVREG SBVREG A SSVREG 5 15 37 081 1 15 081 080 37 081 15 081 080 15 37 DB1 4 OBO 08 080 081 26 082 16 38 083 A Da2 083 082 15 583 082 38 082 16 083 A 082 16 38 DB3 EA 083 NEA 583 082 38 083 084 17 38 0857 58 085 A 084 17 5 084 35 085 17 5 085 17 38 085 4h O83 085 084 085 084 38 585 086 18 40 087 085 7 085 18 087 A 085 40 087 086 18 087 A o6 18 40 087 085 087 D86 087 A 086 40 087 088 18 41 oss A pea 18 A Des ii MEEN bae 19 A 988 18 41 D83 NEEE DBS WE owe SVREG c9 DBIO 20 42 0811 0810 20 0811 A bB10 42 0811 0810 20 0811 A 0810 20 42 0811 Al 810 0811 A 0818 Bit Ne 429 0 1 0812 21 43 061355812 DB13 200812 21 0813 A DB12 33 0813 21 gt TE SELT 21 43 SEL2 AN SEL SEL2 A SELI SEL NOS 439 NT 0814 22 lt 0815 DBIS A DBi 4 22 0815 44 0815 oso LSWPTRG 45 LSWPTRG F3 m d NC Tos i JACK 24 JACK 44 JACK 43 JACK 44 JACK LFF JACK 44 JACK 4 2455744 JACK 4 5 620 BUF DBO BUFDB1 BUFDB2 BUFDB3 BUFDB4 3 4 5 5 8 3 BUFDBS 0884 BUFDB6 12 0
170. 3 Preset esc SEL p aura PRG AERC eRe iade 4 143 Ute ACHE LIGUE oun e eoi edet e ede ted dre 4 143 AUI EY BOTE S Uus d ERA ol o dull d 4 143 Activate Port L2 Atenan u yusa c sede pem dU m qos wees 4 143 Increment Active Attenuator D uuu su ades a ace aman ad 4 143 Select New GPIB Address 4 144 8360 Service Program Menu RR RR Eai E RECS E HORDE CAR 4 145 BSIOC Service Program Menu CRT u uu 4 147 8510C Service Program Menu LCD ocima sa sse a ma wama maq 4 149 Contents 5 Contents Erro TSE FERRER TRE SABRE TRAITS ORS 4 151 C US a acad pack debat Reb Oed debe rod deos edd desta doy Rd ael dX SEDI EN 4 151 Measurement Cal Rah ORE RC AUR OR eA ee C QU CR 4 152 Error Terms Inspection Procedure uu l ur add dad enews 4 152 Equipment su ross reu Fee 4s eRe rbir EER AG 4 152 Pe Lo si oo ie a cia ed dec ee dob Xa he ad d eode dor 4 152 Error Term Descriptions ERE 4 154 ty ech EDT Loo aeuo o PIE CERE E EM ipee pa eo cae o tea 4 154 Source Mace TEST
171. 30 7 0955 0417 FILTER BP 60 MHZ BNC SOURCE EMULATOR 28480 0955 0417 8 5086 7408 POWER SPLITTER 28480 5086 7408 9 1250 0780 ADAPTER TYPE BNC 28480 1250 0780 10 1250 1236 ADAPTER F BNC F SMB 28480 1250 1236 11 1250 1200 ADAPTER F BNC M SMA 28480 1250 1200 12 1250 0669 ADAPTER M SMB M SMB 28480 1250 0669 13 1250 2330 ADAPTER M 3 5 MM M 2 4 MM 28480 1250 2330 14 1250 1391 ADAPTER TEE MFM SMB 28480 1250 1391 15 8710 0630 ALIGNMENT TOOL 08 SCDR 28480 8710 0630 16 1400 0088 ALLIGATOR CLIP 28480 1400 0088 17 1490 0025 TEST PROBE 28480 1490 0025 18 85101 60209 BOARD ASSY 85102 EMULATOR 28480 85101 60209 19 85101 60236 85101 POST REGULATOR EXTENDER BOARD 28480 85101 60236 20 85101 60237 85101 STANDARD EXTENDER BOARD 28480 85101 60237 21 85102 60210 SERVICE ADAPTER TEST SET EMULATOR 28480 85102 60210 22 85102 60030 BOARD ASSEMBLY SERVICE EXTENDER 28480 85102 60030 27 8493C OPT 010 APC 3 5 10DB PAD 28480 8493C OPT 010 2110 0001 FUSE 1A 250V 85102 A26F 3 28480 2110 0001 2110 0002 FUSE 2A 250V 85102 F1LINE FUSE 28480 2110 0002 2110 0012 FUSE 51 250V 85102 A24F 1 28480 2110 0012 2110 0083 FUSE 2 5A 250V 85102 A26F 1 A26F 2 28480 2110 0083 2110 0333 FUSE 1 5A 125V 85101C A3F 1 28480 2110 0333 2110 0342 FUSE 8A 250V 85102 A26F 4 28480 2110 0342 2110 0425 FUSE 2A 125V 85101C A3F2 28480 2110 0425 2110 0655 FUSE 3 15A 250V 85101C LINE FUSE 28480 2110 0655 9300 1367 WRIST STRAP ANTI STATIC ADJ USTABLE 28480 9300
172. 4 098 30 0 0603 515 9724 1 319 1872 2 900 4390 4 379 25 0 0850 693 0763 1 35 2588 3 322 6620 6 55 40 n 1 025 081 1 460 3682 4 079 1 0454 9 357 45 0 2242 1 627 1107 1 597 5630 5 432 1 5882 14 398 50 0 3817 2 705 1504 1 867 8980 7 846 2 7258 23 641 55 0 6557 4 529 2241 2 367 1 4559 12 171 4 311 42 002 60 1 1229 8 055 3558 3 268 2 3873 20 035 5 5677 180 000 65 0 1 8966 14 257 5865 4 879 2 8205 35 123 9 5327 180 000 70 0 3 1224 25 754 9830 7 755 5 8985 78 08 13 1367 180 000 75 0 4 9490 50 296 1 6466 12 921 8 688 180 000 47 2405 180 000 80 0 7 4735 180 000 2 7144 22 385 12 142 180 000 21 6926 180 000 85 0 19 6918 180 000 4 3394 141 2658 16 1343 180 000 26 3587 180 000 90 0 14 5019 180 000 5 6411 180 000 20 5116 180 000 31 1810 180 000 NOTES Measurement parameter S21 Uncertainty limits upper or lower the limits only apply to transmission measurements Type of plot worst case uncertainties This is a field bottoms up uncertainty analysis of the HP 8510 being verified using the worst case specifications of the HP 8510 system Table type specifications or data sheet data sheet is identical to the specifications table except that the cable stability errors and system drift errors are excluded Time and date the plot was made For reflection plots 811 or 522 the values of the other three S parameters will be 0 linear For transmission plots 521 or 12 811 and S22 0 linear and S21
173. 4 125 Source mulabeT rper wade deeded 4 126 Su pace tanker gabe Cee aw S RRs dud Sus 4 126 qas d aus 4 129 ee ee eee 4 129 REWI exci TM 4 129 Running the 8510 Service Progra a ices dct been tae eee 4 130 How to Interpret Service Program Test Results 4 130 8510 Service Program Menu 4 130 85101 Display Processor Service Program 4 131 PU Board TeS ac RA wakaq 4 131 85101 I O Board and Front Panel Tests 1 2 7 4 133 85101 Display Board and CRT Tests A4 A11 or LCD Tests A14 A15 4 135 85101 Nonvolatile Memory Board Tests 4 137 85102 IF Detector Service Program n RR Re 4 139 ELEC u qi Rd v equ legas 4 139 85102 Prompt L u u s s u os ass soal saka eo DR GN 4 139 Or asuaka 4 139 Test Set GPIB HP IB Service Program 4 14
174. 5 IF Mixer Adjustment Procedure 5 IF Mixer Adjustment Equipment Spectrum analyzer E4407B Function generator 33250A 4 ft BNC to SMB cable assembly 2 5062 7230 Adapter male N to female BNC 1250 0780 85102 service adjustments disk 08510 10024 Controller HP 9000 series 200 or 300 Description and Procedure ThelF mixers convert the 20 MHz first IF signals from the test set to 100 kHz second IF signals which gotothelF amplifiers The 20 MHz IF signals are mixed with the 19 9 MHz signals from the 19 9 MHz LO board A8 The 20 MHz IF signals are also buffered and sent to the IF counter A21 All four IF mixers are identical In the following procedure the signal generator simulates the test set The signal is fed into the mixer board while the output of the mixer is monitored on the spectrum analyzer The following adjustments optimize the matching of the crystal filter to the IF thereby minimizing the test set noise appearing at the mixer output 1 After loading BASIC into the controller memory insert the 85102 service adjustments software disk into the controller disk drive Refer to the beginning of the chapter for a procedure on how to load BASIC Type LOAD ADJ_85102 EXECUTE When the program is loaded press RUN Press the softkey that selects the F mixer adjustment W N The following prompt is displayed Model number of spectrum analyzer being used Select a softkey Press the appropriate so
175. 5102 60163 W34 85102 60164 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY J 146 A23J 1 28480 85102 60164 W35 85102 60165 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY J 1A7 A22J 3 28480 85102 60165 W36 85102 60166 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY J 1 1 4 28480 85102 60166 W38 85102 60168 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 3 4 28480 85102 60168 W40 85102 60223 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A16J 2 REAR PANEL J 9 28480 85102 60223 W41 85102 60224 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 20 2 REAR PANEL J 10 28480 85102 60224 W55 85102 60191 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY DISPLAY INTERFACE 28480 85102 60191 W56 85102 60192 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY TEST SET INTERFACE 28480 85102 60192 1 2420 0001 3 NUT HEX W LKWR 6 32 THD 109 IN THK 00000 Order by desc 2 2360 0193 5 SCREW MACH 6 32 25 IN LG PAN HD POZI 28480 2360 0193 3 0400 0010 4 GROMMET RND 25 IN ID 375 IN GRV OD 28480 0400 0010 4 2950 0043 1 NUT HEX DBL CHAM 3 8 32 THD 094 IN THK 00000 Order by desc 5 7121 2380 1 LABEL SERIAL NUMBER 28480 7121 2380 6 7120 4835 1 LABEL INFORMATION 75 IN WD2 IN LG PPR 28480 7120 4835 7 3050 1094 1 WASHER FL MTLC 1 21N 505 IN ID 28480 3050 1094 8 00310 48801 2 SHOULDERED WASHER 28480 00310 48801 9 1251 2942 4 LOCK SUBMIN D CONN 28480 1251 2942 10 5021 8540 1 LOCK FOOTL RT 28480 5021 8540 11 0515 1402 2 SCREW SMM3 5 8 PCPNTX 00000 Order by desc 12 85102 00056 1 REAR PANEL 28480 85102 00056 13 0590 1251 5 NUT SPCLY 15 32 32 THD 1 IN THK 562 WD 00000 Order by desc 14 2190 0102 5 WASHER LK INTL T 15 321N 472 IN ID 28480 2190 0102 15 3160 0300 1 FINGER G
176. 510C HP851 R HP83651R HPAS 56A SL HPB5133F 109 17 Nov 1930 sa 1312710 F GH 28 req z 045 to 2 18 ee a ME 2 to 29 5 28 to 4D 2 to 58 _ i DUT Length 5 18 0 cm 511 98 8 2 812 521 See 521 Measurement Level dB from Ref 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 71 Performance Verification and Specifications Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts Example 8 16 521 Uncertainty Specifications Table 521 UPPER WORST CASE UNCERTAINTY SPECIFICATIONS 17 Nov 1380 13 15 55 Sit 0 0 512 521 522 AA Device Length 10 0 8519 Color Model est Set 8517 2 4mm S Parameter 45 2 506 2 Source HPB3 amp 5IR Synthesizer 4SMHz S Q GHz Calibration Kit WP850568 2 4mm Slotless Standard Grade Calibration Technique SL Sliding Load Cal Test Port Cables HP85133F pair short cables 2 4mm 2 4mm Level 045 2 2 20 20 40 40 50 dB i Mag dB Deg Mag dB Deg Mag dB Mag dB Deg 10 0 0385 328 0927 1 427 1582 2 598 2015 3 316 5 0 0330 286 0702 1 278 1385 2 473 1752 3 141 0 0 0314 276 963 1 23 1332 2 430 1681 3 996 5 0 0312 276 0643 1 247 1322 2 425 1702 3 115 10 0 0322 290 0652 1 250 1336 2 439 1745 3 185 15 0 0331 301 0654 1 251 1367 2 467 2008 3 336 342 0676 1 275 1447 2 531 2594 3 607 25 0 0433 381 0681 1 28 1640 2 570 5115
177. 517 RF Flow Diagrams and Typical Traces TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE Check RF Paths 1 2 3 and 4 These paths are RF Path 1 User 1 a1 RF Path 2 User 3 a2 RF Path 3 User 4 b1 Reflected RF Path 4 User 2 b2 Reflected 1 Doa factory preset of the analyzer and put the source into step mode On the network analyz er press INSTRUMENT STATE MORE FACTORY PRESET STIMULUS STEP 2 Toexamine the four sampler IF signals it is necessary to redefine what port and sampler the analyzer uses for phaselock Press PARAMETER User 3 a2 REDEFINE PARAMETER DRIVE Port 2 PHASE LOCK a2 REDEFINE DONE to redefine a2 Press User 2 b2 REDEFINE PARAMETER DRIVE Port 2 PHASE LOCK a2 REDE FINE DONE to redefine b2 3 Connect an open or short to port 1 and port 2 This reflects power back to the b1 and b2 samplers through the coupler 4 Find the test set RF paths and example frequency response traces on this foldout Press User 1 a1 User 2 b2 User 3 a2 and User 4 b1 Each trace should be similar to the example traces on this foldout typically within 5 dB Record the results for paths 1 through 4 User 1 through User 4 in Table 4 3 3 Check RF Paths 5 and 6 These paths are RF Path 5 User 4 61 Thru RF Path 6 User 2 b2 Thru 1 Connect a cable between port 1 and port 2 2 Press PARAMETER MENU User 4 b1 REDEFINE PARAMETER DRIVE Port 2 PHASE LOCK a2
178. 5VREG 15VREG A 15VREG 15VREG 15 13 35 15 A 15VREG 2135 1588 hosvuG njo 36 SVREG SVREG 5VREG 5VREG 5VREG 5VREG 5VREG SVREG 14 36 5VREG 5VREG Lje 5 8 Vb BUFOBO 15 37 BUFDB1 BUFDBO BUFDB1 AL BUF OBO BUFDB1 Al BUF BO BUFDBI AR BUFDBO 15 37 BUFDBO lt 37 BUFOB1 0 25 cs Wi BUFDB2 16 38 BUFDB3 BUFDB2 802083 AA BUFDB2 BUFDB3 BUF B2 BUFDB3 Al BUFDB2 16 38 BUFUB3 BUFOB2 lt BUFDB3 aie XSUREG iy 5VREG 15VREG BUFOB4 17 38 BUFDBS BUFOB4 BUFDBS A BUFDB4 BUFDBS AA BUF B4 BUFDBS BUFDB4 17 o 38 BUFOBS BUFDB4 lt 38 BUFDBS 15 d 40 BUFDB7 BUFOBS BUFDB7 BUFDB6 BUFDB7 BUFDBS BUFDB7 BUFDBS 18 40 BUFDB BUFDB6 lt j 40 BUFDB7 RS gt D 1815 41 DCOM DCOM DCOM DCOM DCOM DCOM 100KRETB 18 41 100KRETB N C 3 3 2015 42 DCOM DCOM DCOM DCOM DCOM DCOM 100 25 20 42 100KH25B NC lt T 2 NE gt 43 DCOM DCOM DCOM Al DCOM DCOM DCOM 100KRETA 21 43 100KRETA NC S535 NC 904 22 44 DCOM LHOLU 14 LHOLD DCOM 22 HPLSCAL N C 22 a N C Nic lt 440 R6 3 2 JACK 44 JACK 44 JACK 44 JACK 44 JACK 44 44 R1S 3 3 R13 1 2 RES SVREG 1SVREG 1 u2 amp ND Vo ADSS0 2 TEMP 85102 A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram 1 of 2
179. 6 connectors inspecting and deaning 10 3 considerations safety for adjustments 7 3 contents of shipment 9 9 controller CRT displays and high resolution monitors 8 98 keyboard keys 8 99 controllers with limited scrolling 8 99 cooling and heating system 9 4 corrected error model flowgraph 8 84 8 85 8 86 creating customized uncertainty plots 8 16 CRT cleaning 10 4 glass filter cleaning 10 4 CRT displays 8 98 custom calibration kit use 8 23 custom data recall 8 20 custom test set calculations 8 23 customizing error terms 8 18 CW frequency accuracy test 8 42 D data field entry 8 20 default intensity adjustment 7 15 demagnetizing display degaussing 7 12 10 5 designators of parts 5 4 detector adjustment synchronous 7 25 diagnose a failure 4 61 diagnostics running error messages as 4 69 disassembly tools required 6 3 disc command 19 load program disc 4 65 20 record program disc 4 66 21 initialize disc 4 66 disc communication error 4 74 disc hardware problem 4 74 disc read or write error 4 74 disk drive replacement jumper position 6 7 6 10 procedure 6 10 disk media wearing out replace soon 4 75 display CRT degaussing demagnetizing 10 5 display degaussing demagnetizing 7 12 display CRT replacement 6 10 display LCD replacement 6 16 displaying error term tables 8 19 documentation part numbers 5 6 drift errors 8 4 sources of 8 75 driver files for semi
180. 7 01441 00446 02124 1 131 76 108 12 23 64 80 20 18 500 01994 02020 00026 02125 159 07 139 57 29 49 73 77 12 000 1 02107 02779 00672 02125 163 47 171 06 25 47 68 65 13 500 1 02398 03425 01025 02127 128 67 147 41 8 74 N 58 77 15 000 02581 03584 00703 02131 1 115 06 109 97 6 03 46 65 03383 033S1 00032 02134 1 94 42 64 99 24 44 N 41 41 9105 02135 70 95 44 07 26 88 N 40 17 I 02157 02134 1 51 72 22 2 60 40 79 49 82 45 69 3 42 N 42 53 81838 01253 03783 36 25 58 79 22 54 N 180 80 22 500 03244 02906 00258 03787 8 77 N 180 90 24 000 1 03524 03913 00398 03792 8 51 84 45 25 500 03858 03635 00222 93799 11 69 N 72 72 NOTES 1 2 3 4 5 35 58 N 73 81 NOTE Total Uncert Factory System Uncertainty User System Uncertainty Legend N Parameter Verification Not Required F Parameter Verification failed V FAILED 527 Verification Measurement of the 20 dB Attenuator Measurement parameter 22 magnitude and phase Difference between the factory measurement and the verification measurement is more than the total uncertainty the system failed verification Difference between the phase measured at the factory and the phase measured in the verification is not required for this measurement parameter or for 511 Definitions for any annotation that appears next to the measurement differences Result of th
181. 7 1 board if the battery requires replacement WARNING Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended Discard used batteries according to manufacturer s instructions DO NOT THROW BATTERIES AWAY BUT COLLECT AS SMALL CHEMICAL WASTE Typeface Conventions Italics Used to emphasize important information Use this software only with the Agilent Technologies xxxxxX system Used for the title of a publication Refer to the Agilent Technologies xxxxxX S ystem L evd User s Guide Usedtoindicate a variable Type LOAD BIN filename Instrument Display Used to show on screen prompts and messages that you will see on the display of an instrument The Agilent Technologies xxxxxX will display the message CAL1 SAVED Keycap Used for labeled keys on the front panel of an instrument or on computer keyboard Press Return Softkey Used for simulated keys that appear on an instrument display Press Prior Menu User Entry Usedtoindicatetext that you will enter using the computer keyboard text shown in this typeface must be typed exactly as printed Type LOAD PARMFILE Used for examples of programming code endif ifndef NO CLASS Path name Used for a subdirectory name or file path Edit the file usr local bin sampletxt Computer Display Used to show messages prompts and window labels that appear on a computer monit
182. 72 2 1804 16 668 85 0 1 5556 11 127 4874 3 303 3 5737 30 665 90 0 2 5624 20 068 8453 5 874 5 6057 65 084 40 50 Mag 48 Deg 0033 661 0082 054 9061 040 9254 042 0058 045 912 685 0147 097 0195 12 0298 197 0500 331 2869 575 1528 1 017 2693 1 804 4728 2 207 4142 10 184 3746 18 325 8574 33 993 9954 83 828 8432 180 000 12 3482 180 008 Quo Measurement parameter S21 Type of plot dynamic accuracy overall magnitude detection accuracy as a function of level for signals or arbitrary phase Table type specifications or data sheet data sheet is identical to the specifications table except that the cable stability errors and system drift errors are excluded Time and date the plot was made For reflection plots 511 or S22 the values of the other three S parameters will be 0 linear For transmission plots 521 or 512 S11 and S22 0 linear and S21 S12 DUT length is assumed to be 10 cm the DUT length for the data sheet values is 0 cm System instruments selected in the hardware configuration menu Power level the specifications apply to dB Magnitude uncertainty data for each frequency band dB Phase uncertainty data for each frequency band degrees 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Measurement Uncertainties Measurement Uncertainties Overview In any measurement certain measurement errors associated with the sys
183. 75 105VDC AL 28480 0180 3017 C2 0180 0453 1 CAPACITOR FXD 8700UF 75 100VDC AL 28480 0180 0453 C3 0180 2671 2 CAPACITOR F XD 012 75 100VDC AL 00853 5001232U030AC2A C4 0180 2671 CAPACITOR F XD 012F 75 100VDC AL 00853 5001232U030AC2A C5 0180 1731 CAPACITOR FXD 4 7UF 100VDC TA 56289 150D475X9050B2 C6 0180 0116 CAPACITOR FXD 6 8UF 100VDC TA 56289 150D685X9035B2 C7 0180 1731 CAPACITOR FXD 4 7UF 100VDC TA 56289 150D475X9050B2 C8 0180 0116 CAPACITOR FXD 6 8UF 100VDC TA 56289 150D685X9035B2 C9 0160 4084 CAPACITOR F XD 1UF x200VDC CER 28480 0160 4084 J1 1251 5800 1 CONNECTOR 26 PIN M POST TYPE 28480 1251 5800 J2 1251 3901 1 CONNECTOR 15 PIN M POST TYPE 28480 1251 3901 MP2 1251 5595 5 POLARIZING KEY POST CONN 28480 1251 5595 MP4 0360 0124 3 CONNECTOR SGL CONT PIN 04 IN BSC SZ RND 28480 0360 0124 MP5 0360 0124 2 CONNECTOR SGL CONT PIN 04 IN BSC SZ RND 28480 0360 0124 MP8 2200 0105 2 SCREW SM 440 312PNPD 00000 Order by Desc MP9 1205 0421 1 HT SK TO66 28480 1205 0421 MP10 2420 0001 2 NUT HEX 6 32 28480 2420 0001 MP11 0570 0111 2 SCREW MACHINE 6 32 28480 0570 0111 Q5 1854 0072 1 TRANSISTOR NPN 2N3054 SI TO 66 PD 25W 28480 1854 0072 R1 0764 0016 2 RESISTOR 5W TC 0 200 28480 0764 0016 R2 0764 0016 RESISTOR 5W 0 200 28480 0764 0016 R3 0764 0015 2 RESISTOR 560 5W MO 0 200 28480 0764 0015 R4 0764 0015 RESISTOR 3 3 PW MO TC 0 400 28480 0764 0015 R5 0811 1672
184. 79 pretune phase lock sequence 3 16 preventive maintenance 10 2 using error terms 10 6 printer adapters 9 21 printers HP laser printers 9 20 connections 9 21 parallel 9 21 Index Index serial printer setup 9 20 printing and plotting aborting 8 102 printout of example raw channel errors al 8 65 a2 8 66 b1 8 63 b2 8 64 problems image 4 46 problems intermittent 4 111 procedures table of adjustment 7 9 process checks description 8 6 processor error 4 52 program modifications 8 103 pulse cal failed on test reference channel s or both channels 4 80 R random errors 8 4 sources of 8 76 ratioed and unratioed responses 4 86 raw error terms record 8 6 rear panel checks 4 8 rear panel replacement 6 13 rebuilt module exchange program 5 2 recommended process checks description 8 6 record program disc 4 66 rectifier board replacement 6 23 reference port extension cables 9 17 9 19 reflection phase uncertainty Erp 8 79 reloading operating system 4 67 remote or local operation 8 103 repacking system instruments 11 repeat test loop 4 65 replaceable parts 5 2 replacement A1 front panel 6 6 A15LCD assembly 6 16 backlight on LCD assembly 6 18 CRT display 6 10 inverter board 6 18 motherboard card cage assembly 6 14 power supply capacitors 6 26 preregulator 6 13 rectifier board 6 23 rotary pulse generator RPG 6 8 replacement of assembly adjustments r
185. 8 XA7J1 94 XA7J1 38 MOTORRTN a XA3J2 18 XA3J2 73 XA4J1 93 XA4J1 38 1 93 1 38 Al XA7J1 93 XA7J1 38 Al MOTORRIN SPARE oeno 7 2 18 XA3J2 74 XA4J1 92 XA4J1 37 1 92 6 1 37 DGND XA7J1 92 XA7J1 37 XA8J1 1 XA8J1 13 SPARE XA3J2 20 2 75 XA4J1 91 XA4J1 36 1 91 XA5J1 36 XA7J1 91 XA7J1 36 xui LDRIVESELB XABJ1 2 XA8J1 14 XA3J2 21 2 76 XA4J1 30 XA4J1 35 1 90 1 35 e 74 1 90 XA7J1 35 DCDI MOTORRTN LORIVESELA XABJ1 3 1 15 CRYPTS N c XA3J2 22 XA3J2 77 XA4J1 89 XA4J1 34 1 89 XA5J1 34 7 1 89 XA7J1 34 RTSI LMOTORB XABJ1 4 XABJ1 15 EtRYPTS5 XA3J2 23 XA3J2 78 XA4J1 88 XA4J1 33 1 88 XA6J1 33 N C XA7J1 88 XA7J1 33 811 7 XA8J1 5 XA8J1 17 XA3J2 24 XA3J2 79 XA4J1 87 XA4J1 32 XA5J1 87 41 32 NC XA7J1 87 XA7J1 32 1 1 6 XA8J1 18 C XA3J2 25 XA3J2 80 XA4J1 86 XA4J1 31 XAb5J1 85 XA6J1 31 NC XA7J1 86 XA7J1 31 XABJ1 7 XA8J1 19 CRYPT2 2 26 2 81 XA4J1 85 XA4J1 30 XA6J1 85 XA6J1 30 Not XA7J1 85 XA7J1 30 RYPTS 1 XA8J1 20 1 XA3J2 27 XA3J2 B2 XA4J1 84 XA4J1 28 1 84 1 29 XA7J1 84 XA7J1 29 m XA8J1 21 cRYPTD 1 XA3J2 28 XA3J2 83 XA4J1 83 XA4J1 28 XA6J1 83 XA5J1 28 mE XA7J1 83 XA7J1 28 XABJ1 10 XA8J1 22 XA3J2 29 2 84 XA4J1 82 4 1 27 XA6J1 82 XA8J1 27
186. 85 BUFDB7 11 087 DCOM 74LS245N 10 Vo 85102C A8 Motherboard Wiring Diagram 2 of 2 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure LCD Failures LCD Failures NOTE Theinformation in this section is specific to an 85101C display processor equipped with an LCD Unless otherwise noted this information does not apply to instruments with CRT displays This procedure is intended to isolate the faulty assembly A14 A15 or A16 if the display is dim dark or blank If the display is illuminated and showing an image but the color mix is faulty or other image problems refer to the A15 section Troubleshooting mage Problems 1 If the display is dim the backlight assembly is probably defective Refer to L CD Assembly Details on page 6 18 for replacement procedures If thedisplay remains dark after the instrument is turned on follow the procedure in Verifying the Inverter Board and Backlight Lamp on page 4 49 If the display lights up when the instrument power is turned on but the display remains blank continue with the following a Connect an external VGA monitor to the rear panel VGA output connector the instrument b If the external VGA monitor is blank the A14 GSP display interface board assembly is probably defective Remove the top cover of the instrument to facilitate troubleshooting Ifthe external VGA monitor is functioning as expected verify that the LCD data cable W7 is properly c
187. 85101C Replacement Procedures Rotary Pulse Generator RPG Replacement Tools Required Large Pozidrive screwdriver Very small flat blade screwdriver 7 16 in open end wrench or nut driver No 6 Allen wrench 1 16 in T 10 Torx screwdriver Procedure The items shown in parentheses refer to the corresponding item numbers in Figure 6 1 To Disassemble 1 Perform the front panel A1 disassembly procedure 2 Using a 1 16 in Allen wrench loosen the screws in the RPG knob item 5 Pull the knob off the RPG shaft 3 Removethe teflon sleeve nut and washer from the RPG shaft 4 Disconnect the cable from the A1 J 2 RPG connection item 8 and remove the RPG from the front panel assembly To Reassemble 5 Reverse steps 2 through 4 Perform step 8 of front panel A1 replacement procedure 6 8 8510C On Site Service Manual Replacement Procedures 85101C Replacement Procedures A2 Disk Drive Replacement Tools Required Large Pozidrive screwdriver Very small flat blade screwdriver T 10 Torx screwdriver Needlenose pliers Procedure Theitems shown in parentheses refer to the corresponding item numbers in Figure 6 1 To Disassemble 1 Perform the A1 front panel disassembly procedure 2 Remove the two screws holding the disc drive to the front panel item 6 3 Removethe disc drive from the front panel assembly To Reassemble 4 Reverse steps 2 and 3 Torque the two screws in step 2 to 79 N cm 7 in Ib Perform step 8
188. 85102 00053 23 85102 00060 1 GASKET RF COVER 28480 85102 00060 24 85102 00029 2 BRACKET 28480 85102 00029 25 85102 00028 1 BRACKET WIREWAY 28480 85102 00028 26 2360 0115 36 SCREW MACH 6 32 312 IN LGPAN HD POZI 00000 Order by desc 27 2200 1271 16 SCREW SM 440 375ETPNTX 28480 2200 1271 28 85102 00037 1 CLIP 28480 85102 00037 29 0515 2316 8 SCREW SMM3 5 6 PCPNTX 00000 Order by desc 30 2360 0334 10 SCREW SM 632 312FLPD 28480 2360 0334 31 85102 20061 1 GASKET RF COVER 28480 85102 20061 32 85102 00040 1 COVER BLANK A2 3 4 28480 85102 00040 33 85102 00005 1 COVER RF SYNCHRONOUS DETECTOR 28480 85102 00005 34 85102 00006 1 COVER A6 CLOCK 28480 85102 00006 35 85102 00008 1 COVER RF 19 9 MHZ LO 28480 85102 00008 36 85102 00009 1 COVER RF B2 IF MIXER 28480 85102 00009 37 85102 00010 1 COVER TEST IF AMP 28480 85102 00010 38 85102 00011 1 COVER RF B1IF MIXER 28480 85102 00011 39 85102 00012 1 COVER REF IF AMP 28480 85102 00012 40 85102 00013 1 COVER RF A21F MIXER 28480 85102 00013 41 85102 00014 1 COVER RFA1IF MIXER 28480 85102 00014 42 85102 20163 1 ENCLOSURE CKT 28480 85102 20163 43 85102 00015 1 COVER REGULATOR 28480 85102 00015 5 38 8510C On Site Service Manual Figure 5 21 92 10 85102 Top Internal 4 places 8 places D 53 SY 92 69 8 places 96 places used i not visible 8510C On Site Se
189. 9 Lost 5 a LIFSRO 5 279 N C tirsra 1067 5 LIrsno LLosr e 2 27 CIFSRO A LPRST 5 18 SVREG 6 28 CRUS m CRUS 5 TROS fh CLK 28 TROS fh CLK 5 CRUS Wawa 5 28 rRos CCK 5 LROS A CLK RosA CLK ae A LIF SRO 3 18 B FDBO vaocsra Ne 977 28 ABO AM LADcsRO ABO A LAUCSR 7 LADCSRG 2129 ABO A LAUCSR 7 ABO A LACCSRG 7 28 ABO A LADCSRG 7 AN LAOCSR ABO LADCSRG 2123 ABO A CLK 7 20 BUF OBI ABI 30 A82 A ABI 2 A ABI 8 ABS A ABT 2130 AB2 AABI 8 2 8 30 A82 ABI 8 2 ABI 30 2 LROS 8 21 BUFDB2 ABS E 31 aBa MAGS Mh ABS g ABA 2p 4 A A83 E ABS 9 31 AB4 ABS E ABA MAS AB4 A83 31 A LHOST 8 22 BUFDB3 15VREG 10 32 18VREG 15VREG 1SVREG 15YREG 10 15vREG 15VREG lt 32 15VREG 1 SVREG 10 gt 15 15vREG 10 32 1 SVREG 15VREG 10 15VREG 15VREG 19VREG 15VREG 32 15 ABO 23 BUFDB4 icon ett 33 LPRST A COM Al DCUM 33 ocon A Ocom 11 A DCOM m 33 ii DCOM Al DCOM 33 DCOM Al ABI 24 BUFOBS DCOM AEST 34 ocon A ocon 12 34 otom A ocom 12 A DCOM 12 34 i2 DCOM DEOM DCOM 34 DCOM ABZ 25 BUF BB iSVREG 35 TTSVREG 15VREG TSVREG AM 15VREG 13 TTSVREG iSUREG 35 psvREG 15VREG 13 TTSVREG A 15VREG 13 35 TTSVREG AM 15VREG 1
190. A3J1 S0 XA3J1 105 XA4J2 51 XA4J2 5 XA5J2 61 XASJ2 6 LRFRINT LLOS DGND XA3J1 51 XA3J1 106 XA3J1 52 1 107 XA3J1 53 XA3J1 108 XA3J1 54 XA3J1 108 XA3J1 55 XA4J2 60 XA4J2 5 XA4J2 58 XA4J2 4 XA4J2 58 XA4J2 3 XA4J2 57 XA4J2 2 XA4J2 56 XA4J2 1 XASJ2 60 5 2 5 5 2 59 XASJ2 4 XASJ2 58 XA5J2 3 XASJ2 57 5 2 2 LRFRINT LMBM INT LRFRINT LMBMINT LDTACK LGINT LDTACK LGINT LAS LWRITE LAS LWRITE LLOS LUOS LLDS LUDS DGND E LGINT LWRITE LUDS DGND LWRITE DGND 00 x TNHP IB DGND LSHDN puo ce ID EXTBLUE RE UN N C Tape ARIES NC DIOIHPTE MEME DIDSHPTE EXTGREEN LSROHPT DONO 38V 516 A EXIGREENRIN _ 41427109 siis Ot EXTGREEN SEU RD ka s N C N C e N C DIO2HPIB COH DIOSHPIB EXTREO EXIREURIN T LircHPI8 DN J XA4J2 108 XA4J2 53 XA5J2 108 XA5J2 53 mm 2 108 XA6J2 53 mE XA7J2 10 XA7J2 53 BR EE XA4J2 107 4 2 52 z Nt 5 2 107 5 2 52 EI ni XABJ2 107 2 52 Eo pm XA7J2 107 7 2 52 N C N C N C N C XABJ2 106 42 51 NC LEOTHPTE LRENHPIB LRENPRIV DIOBPRIV LDAVHPIB GNC DNO nn Roos uud 50 LR LNRFDHPTB DIO7PRIV
191. A5J1 108 XABJ1 53 88 DS XA7J1 108 XA7J1 53 07 XA3J2 4 XA3J2 59 XA4J1 107 XA4J1 52 XA5J1 107 XABJ1 107 1 52 XA7J1 107 XA7J1 52 fos XA3J2 5 XA3J2 60 XA4J1 106 XA4J1 51 XA5J1 106 XABJ1 105 1 51 04 05 XA7J1 106 XA7J1 51 03 XA3J2 5 XA3J2 61 XA4J1 105 4 1 50 XASJ1 105 XABJ1 105 1 50 XA7J1 105 XA7J1 50 XA3J2 7 XA3J2 52 XA4J1 104 XA4J1 49 XAS5J1 104 XABJ1 104 1 49 00 77 Sor XA7J1 104 XA7J1 43 XA3J2 8 XA3J2 53 XA4J1 103 XA4J1 48 541 103 XABJ1 103 1 48 XA7J1 103 XA7J1 48 A2 XA3J2 9 2 64 XA4J1 102 441 47 XA5J1 102 1 102 6 1 47 Ios Loe XA7J1 102 XA7J1 47 XA3J2 10 XA3J2 55 XA4J1 101 XA4J1 46 XAS5J1 101 XABJ1 101 1 46 Wc 7777 XA7J1 101 XA7J1 45 DISC DRIVE SECURITY KEY SMBS XA3J2 11 2 66 XA4J1 100 XA4J1 45 XA5J1 100 1 100 1 45 AIG XA7J1 100 XA7J1 45 1 2 12 2 67 471 99 XA4J1 44 1 99 1 44 XA7J1 99 XA7J1 44 A12 XA3J2 13 XA3J2 68 XA4J1 398 XA4J1 43 XA5J1 98 XA6J1 43 11 XA7J1 98 XA7J1 43 XA3J2 14 2 69 XA4J1 97 XA4J1 42 XABJ1 97 1 42 XA7J1 97 XA7J1 42 XA3J2 15 XA3J2 70 XA4J1 95 XA4J1 41 XABJ1 96 1 41 AT XA7J1 95 XA7J1 41 MOTORRTN DENSITY XA3J2 15 XA3J2 71 XA4J1 95 XA4J1 40 XABJ1 95 1 40 AS XA7J1 95 XA7J1 40 AS MOTORRTN 44 XA3J2 17 XA3J2 72 XA4J1 94 XA4J1 39 XA6J1 94 XA6J1 3
192. ANGE 8510C On Site Service Manual 3 21 Theory of Operation Phase Lock Cycle Summary Including Running Error Messages 3 22 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting Procedure 4 1 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Overview Overview This Main Troubleshooting Procedure provides a systematic series of checks to follow if the 8510 system appears to be faulty If you follow these checks in the sequence given here it will help you to isolate the cause of a problem in the least possible time The checks in this main section arerelatively brief Wherever a problem is indicated you will be referred to more detailed information in the following sections The service flowchart is an abbreviated version of the detailed procedure on the opposite page It is provided as a quick summary to be used by people who are already familiar with 8510 troubleshooting NOTE The original 85101C display processor incorporated a cathode ray tube CRT display The current design incorporates a liquid crystal display LCD In this manual references to either CRT or LCD apply to both display designs unless otherwise noted Some schematics di agrams replaceable parts and replacement procedures may differ depending on the display In such instances display information CRT or LCD is documented separately If your 85101C display processor is equipped with an LCD you will find troubleshooting information for the A14 graphics display GSP
193. Abbreviated 8510C System Service Flowchart cont Firmware Revisions Operation Internal Switches continued Remove power then apply power to the source test set and the analyzer Check the preset condition of each instrument Check the system factory preset condition see Figure 4 2 ss420c 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 17 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Troubleshooting Outline Removethe 85101C top cover Remove the A5 CPU board and make surethe free run Switch 551 is set to all zeroes See Figure 4 3 Figure 4 3 Location of Switch A5S1 RED Removethe test set top cover Check the setting of configuration switch A3S1 The correct settings are shown at the left side of the 8510C System L evel Troubleshooting Block Diagram at the end of this procedure fthesourceis an 8350 check the setting of configuration switch A3S1 The correct settings are shown at the left side of the 8510C System L evel Troubleshooting Block Diagram at the end of this procedure If you have completed the control configuration and cabling checks and you still have a self test failure running error message unratioed power failure or other obvious failure type go tothe appropriate troubleshooting section Otherwise continue with Obvious Failure Type on page 4 20 4 18 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Troubleshooting Outline Abbreviated System Service Flowchart cont Firmw
194. Agilent Technologies 8510C Network Analyzer On Site Service Manual Serial Numbers This manual applies directly to instruments with this serial prefix number or above 3031A E Agilent Technologies Manufacturing Part Number 08510 90282 Printed in USA May 2001 Revision 3 0 Supersedes J anuary 1994 Notice Theinformation contained in this document is subject to change without notice Agilent Technologies makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Agilent Technologies shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material Agilent Technologies assumes no responsibility for the use or reliability of its software on equipment that is not furnished by Agilent Technologies This document contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright All rights are reserved No part of this document may be photocopied reproduced or translated to another language without prior written consent of Agilent Technologies Restricted Rights Legend Use duplication or disdosure by the U S Government is subject torestrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software dause at DFARS 252 227 7013 for DOD agencies and subparagraphs 1 and c 2
195. An 85101C equipped with a liquid crystal display LCD requires C 08 XX or greater 4 124 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Other Failures Other Failures Overview This section presents additional tests that can be used for the small percentage of failures that are not resolved by the other troubleshooting sections Noisy Display Trace Test Whenever the noise on the trace is greater then 1 dB when you first turn the instrument on it means that the 85102 A18 ADC board may be faulty If the line power is cycled off then on again the noise may go away If this occurs there is probably a fault with the 85102 A18 ADC board although no apparent symptoms are present Also there may be running error messages no self test failures and no service program test failures If the trace noise disappears when the power is cycled replace the 85102 A18 ADC board 20 Hz Sine Wave Test This test checks the 85102 A17 sample and hold 85102 A18 ADC and the 85102 A19 ADC control board assemblies This procedure describes how to inject a signal into 85102 17 1 J 2 3 and J 4 in order totest the A17 sample and hold capability for each of the four synchronous detector inputs The procedure alsotests the 85102 A18 ADC linearity and ability to do an analog to digital conversion If this test passes the 85102 A19 ADC control board is also functioning properly A signal generator is required tha
196. AnI lt Q lt a Gub ub a coer CUP T PUT 10MHz ADC CONTROL i QUE j 577 COUNTER qu ue quem es 1 i 19 9 MHz 1 0 a enm tiem H with Pulsed RF Option 008 only m a F REGULATOR 71 DISPLAY m I 15 15 v 2 25 CONNECT p 4 A l eee 2 S ES LE s 8 amp 8 a rg ag md ame my en ip ee H NERO ts 85102C IF Detector Overall Block Diagram Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Troubleshooting Outline 4 34 8510C On Site Service Manual HP 8510C PHASE LOCK BLOCK DIAGRAM A14 IF MIXER 85102C mixer MIXER PREAMP Ju 19 9 MHz J3 RF y The HP 8510 phase lock loop has two parts a pretune and a main loop This INPUT BUFFER diagram shows how both loops would work for an HP 8510 using an HP 8515 20 MHE test set as an example The sequence is basically the same for all test sets NL 20 MHz FILTER PRETUNE The sequence begins when the processor loads information about the start frequency into the divide by N circuit on the A22 pretune board and the pretune DAC on the A23 Main phase lock board Note that part of the A23 board is used during pretune With this start frequency info
197. B1 BUF DBO 18 BUFDB1 A BUFDBO 15 37 BUFUBO 15 37 BUFDB1 37 A2BES 038 T N C o 15 6 15VREG BUFDB2 16 gt 38 BUFDB3 BUFDB2 38 BUFOB3 BUFDB2 BUFDB3 BUF DBZ 16 BUFDB3 BUFOB2 16 38 BUFDB3 BUFOB2 16 38 BUFDB3 BUF 082 38 BUFOB3 NN A26E2 15VUNREG DEP Mq 048 i7To 38 BUFDBS Al BUFCB4 39 BUFDBS BUFDB4 BUFDBS EUFD8 17 B FDBS AA BUFCB4 17 38 BUFDB5 A BUFDB4 17 38 BUF DBS Al BUFCB4 38 BUFOBS DH 18 15VUNREG 18 40 BUFDB7 40 BUFDB7 A BUF DB6 BUFDB7 BUFDB6 16 7 BUFDBG 18 40 BUFDB7 BUFDBS 18 40 BUFDB7 40 BUFDB7 2N6055 PIE 18 038 DCOM 19 cla DCOM 41 DCOM A DCOM DCOM A 10CKRETB 19 ig 41 TCOKRETA we ld N C 058 20 20 42 DCOM A DCOM 52 DCOM Adcom DCOM 100KHZSB 20 1DOKHZSB 100 25 20 42 100 75 020 325 LC ONG Y DCOM GNDSNS 21 THERI AA DCOM 21 43 DCOM 43 DCOM DCOM DCOM AA 21 43 21 43 100KRETA oil ag NE 3 N C ISVREG 15VSEN 22 THER2 DCOM 22 lt 44 DCOM 44 DCOM OCON DCOM 22 o22 gt N C 922 0 SESS NC NC lt 44 HPLSCAL ae JACK 44 JACK_44 JACK 44 JACK 44 JACK 44 JACK 44 JACK 44 JACK 44 028 02 04 14 2N6053 26 5 048 fT A25J2 R
198. Cpf2eF eCff Fss2 gt Rrc e y 26 48 1720 3 Rnfbii st 1 10 zb sqrt Avg tz Pecb1 Sz 8 Ld1b1 Lf1b1esqrt F 1 1 Ldvib1 Lfvib1 F 5 1 t Lxb1 1 6 1 1 41 1 Mpb1 61 talag Rnfbic Rebtc sqrt Avg Rnfaic sqrt Avg 1 Omso1 Dpsol Ldeot etu DpfsoteF eDrt Lfac1esqrt F 1 Ldvio1 Lfvio1eF arva 1 1 Lxo1 14Gea1E 3 92 1 1 8301 aE Reoti Rnfati sqrt Avg 8510 System Uncorrected Error Model Flowgraph Performance Verification and Specifications Measurement Uncertainties 8 90 8510C On Site Service Manual 1 Ab2 8 Oc Efnf Ernf T 1 Efnt 1 Ernt gt DUT 1 Dm2b2 Dp2b2 cnt 1 Crt2 Dpf2b2 F eDrt S21 1 hp oe b 512 1 Crt2 i 1 Dms2 Dps2 1 Dpfs2 F Drt L DRIFT RESIDUAL ERROR TERMS 511 Crm1sCff Crm1sCff Crm2 Cff Crm2sCff 1 Ab1 1 Ernt T Efnf Ernf 9 s CONNECTOR REPEATABILITY 3 NOISE AND DYNAMIC ACCURACY e CABLES 8510 System Corrected Error Model Flowgraph Performance Verification and Specifications Measurement Uncertainties 8 92 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Measurement Uncertainties Dynamic Accuracy Error Model The dynamic accuracy value used in the system uncertainty eq
199. D gt J LRFRINT LMBMINT gt J LDTACK LGINT LAS LWRITE gt J LLDS LUDS DGND DGND gt J gt J1 3 104 gt J13 103 gt J13 102 gt J13 101 gt J1 3 100 13 99 13 98 13 97 13 96 13 95 13 94 13 93 13 92 13 91 gt J13 90 J13 89 13 88 13 87 13 86 gt 1 3 85 13 84 13 83 13 82 13 81 13 82 gt J13 79 13 78 13 77 13 76 gt 13 75 13 74 13 73 gt J13 72 13 71 13 70 13 69 gt J13 68 13 67 13 66 13 65 gt 1 3 64 13 63 13 62 13 61 gt J1 3 60 13 59 gt J13 58 J13 57 13 56 LEOIHPIB gt J15 106 J15 105 2 15 104 2 15 103 J15 102 J15 101 gt 15 100 gt J15 99 J15 98 U U UT O TITI T L gt 415 97 gt 15 96 gt J15 95 gt J15 94 ANS AS S AS IIS ISIN IIS IS IS IN IS gt 415 93 415 92 gt 415 91 gt 415 98 DBS gt J15 89 J15 88 DB3 J15 87 DGND gt J15 86 J15 85 gt J15 84 ADRS I ADR3 J15 83 ADRI J15 82 LADCINT gt J15 81 z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z O O O O O Z O O O O OO O OO 729 O O O O O O O O OO LIPRST gt J15 80 SPARE1 LIST 2 15 79 SPARE 3 SPARE2 gt J15 78 SPARES 19V J15 77 N C DTR2 gt
200. D CRT After each key is displayed press that same key on the front panel 85102 Interface Test A7 B M u This test verifies that the 85101C can communicate with the 85102 It requires the 85102 emulator listed in Chapter 5 This emulates or takes the place of the 85102 IF detector The emulator can be connected in two different ways 1 Connect the male end directly to the F display interconnect on the back of the 85101C 2 Connect the IF display interconnect cable to the IF display interconnect and then connect the female end to the other end of the cable Using it this way you can determine if there is any problem with the F display interconnect cable Dynamic Interrupt System Test A7 C k m This test is used in the factory only and is not intended for use in the field It requires a different 85102 electronic emulator board Security Keys Interface Test A7 D x1 This test is used in the factory only and is not intended for use in the field A special electronic tool is required Watchdog Timer Test A7 E Tests the ability of the CPU watchdog ti mer to reset the processor Running this test will also reset the 8510C as if you pressed the recessed front panel TEST button It will be necessary for you to enter the service program again if you run this test 4 134 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Service Program 85101 Display Board and CRT Tests A4 A11 or LCD T
201. Dec 1992 12 23 01 Freq GHz 045 to 2 2 to B 8 to 20 20 to 26 5 DUT Length 0 0 cm S11 S12 521 522 0 S21 Worst Case Uncertainty dB 10 18 30 50 0 90 S21 Measurement Level dB from Ref 521 40 000 045 2 048 2 8 836 8 20 060 20 26 5 189 Figure 8 6 S21 Magnitude Uncertainty Using 85131F Cables S21 MAGNITUDE UPPER WORST CASE UNCERTAINTY USER PRRRMETERS 8510 HP8511R NOSOURCE NOCRLKIT BL NOCRBLES 16 Dec 1992 16 54 48 Freq GHz U45 to 8 B to 20 20 to 26 5 DUT Length 10 cm 511 512 521 S22 0 S21 Morst Case Uncertainty dB 521 Measurement Level dB from Ref 521 10 0008 945 8 233 0 20 250 20 26 5 337 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 33 Performance Verification and Specifications Using the Software A Tutorial Table 8 9 Using Non Ideal Test Device Exercise Answers Questions Answers What are the measurement a After setting up the hardware configuration for the uncertainties for each frequency non ideal test device go to the Main menu and press rangein the attenuator the System Uncert key measurement b Select a plot for 521 magnitude Lower Limit Worst Case Uncertainty and Computed Using Specifications c Noticethat by default the program assumes an ideal test device which has 521 512 with no reflection from either the input or output ports d Next movetothe space for entering S11 and pres
202. E Total measurement uncertainty is also highly dependent on the device being measured For the purpose of the uncertainty plots the following ideal device assumptions are made For 511 and S22 uncertainties the device is a one port device therefore the value of 521 and S12 are dB The value of S11 or S22 is varied For S21 and S12 uncertainties the device is a reciprocal two port device with perfect input output match therefore 511 and S22 are 9 linear 521 S12 The value of 521 or S12 is varied For phase uncertainty calculations an arbitrary length of 10 cm is assumed If your device is longer than 10 cm your phase uncertainty will be greater than the value shown Likewise if your device length is shorter than 10 cm your phase uncertainty will be less than the value shown For system performance verification the S parameters of the verification standards measured at the factory are used in the actual uncertainty calculations NOTE At any time you can return tothe hardware configuration menu and change any of the items For example if you change calibration kits you can print out the specifications for the same system with the different calibration kit and compare the results 7 Makethe menu selections you want and press the Done softkey when finished The same keys used in the system specs menu are used to select and toggle the selections in this menu The program computes the values and the controller beeps each
203. E and ESP ous pa 3 papua 4 154 Reflection Tracking El and ECT d cer tack EA Xr EHE paq a pea 4 154 sota om Crosstalk EXT and EX iuo eda RC e ac CR 4 155 Load Marcell and EIE o ou ac Eres 4 155 Transmission Tracking aha isis ikke a Rasa RERO Fees e ERO FCR Kon EROR 4 155 a Ld aka OR QR E CEN HE ODE REM RD ed E qb XO a e D do 4 155 5 Replaceable Parts Software Documentation and 5 7 Service Ea uberi te DAC adios EA ca RAD Sawa 5 8 Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a 5 12 Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD 5 24 UD Repiapesble Parts RO Ro RA E Rp d AC 5 36 6 Replacement Procedures OVEVIOW 6044 448 bs 6 2 85101C Replacement Procedures EENI a 6 2 85102B Replacement Procedures 6 2 Adjustments and Performance Teste vs e ua kx ard e ER RE Aa ERR d 6 2 85101C Replacement Procedures een sume E en deen deed EEO Ree EAE 6 5 Al Front Panel Replacement pere baie eyed eae p ded ed 6 6 Rotary Pulse Generator RPG
204. ED 4 YELLOW LEDS THAT SHOW GPIB ACTIVITY R L T S R REMOTE L LISTEN T TALK SeSERVICE REQUEST A3 POST REG GREEN LEDS SHOW 12 5 POWER SUPPLIES ARE ON 12V amp 55V 55431 8510C SYSTEM LEVEL TROUBLESHOOTING BLOCK DIAGRAM LCD Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Troubleshooting Outline 4 28 8510C On Site Service Manual HP85101C DISPLAY PROCESSOR OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM TAPE W 10 BOARD INPUT OUTPUT IF DETECTOR INTERFACE D DISC DRIVE CONTROLLER RPG INTERFACE amp PROGRAMMABLE TIMER FRONT PANEL LED DRIVER INTERFACE CONTROLLER HmuLasy r CONTROL IF DISPLAY ADDRESS INTERCONNECT Eala ADDRESS PROCESSOR 1 NETWORK ANALYZER DECODE INTERFACE Rev 06 or Rev 07 i Lo 2 OPTION 010 TIME DOMAN r d4 Q HP IB 2 3 ANTENNA BUS B eee ee 7 1 7 LREFINT CLOCK GENERATOR Rs 232 2 KOZ 9 8510 OD BEEPER REAL TIME CLOCK X L 1 8 SEC HTEST 9 on ect INTERCONN s b LLL 2 15 2 22 60 L SHON A10 A10 A10 A6 NON VOLATILE M
205. EFERENCE M SVUNREG TEST SET Al IF REFERENCE TEST IF 19 SMHZ PULSE INTERCONNECT MIXER IF AMP LO GEN CLOCK DETECTOR 4 J2 XAL4 XA12 XA10 4 15VUNREG 1 LSS DCOM 1 23 DCOM DCOM DCOM ME 23 23 2 LENDRA 2 24 DCOM DCOM DCOM DCOM DCOM A DCOM 11505 9 5 249 N C LRSDS N E lt 2 2 Ne a 3 LPRTHLD DCOM 3 28 DCOM LRIFWS CRIFWS AA LTIFWS LTIFWS Al DCOM LTIFWS 3 25 LRIFWS me S255 ic 3 3 DCOM 4 26 DCOM LRIFRS LRIFRS LTIFRS LTIFRS DCOM LTIFRS 4 26 LRIFRS N C lt 265 5 o 15VREG 1SVREG 5VREG N C o 27 LIFSRO N C LIFSRO N C LIFSRO N C LHOST 5l 27 CIFSRO LHOST 202 lt 27 fon LIFSRO 96 28 180 we LROS s CROS CLK 6 gt 28 LRDS lt 28 LRDS Re SUSPEN TIR 285 NC Nee DCOM 7 28 ABO DCOM ae lt 28 ABO N C 90 eo Cc ABI 30 AB2 ABI lt 2 i Nic N C AB3 9 3i AB4 A ABS lt 4 15 10 329 Nhs 15VREG 15VREG lt 18VREG 15VREG 2252 15 A 15VREG AS 15VREG A 15VREG 10 gt 32 18VREG AL 15VREG 32 R15 E 4 7 DCOM 11 33 DCOM DCOM DCOM DCOM DCOM DCOM DCOM 1i gt 33 DCOM DCOM gt 33 com 3 3 DCOM 12 34 DCOM A DCOM DCOM A DCOM DCOM AA DCOM 12 34 DCOM 34 7 80044 d I 6 8 D 15VREG 13 35 18VREG 15VREG 15VREG AA i
206. EMORY B t O EEPROM amp INTERFACE I EEPROM CONTROL CONTROL ADDRESS 16 DATA SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY p AND REGULATOR MODULE I I TO FAN 2 ein POST REGULATOR Tpu 12 TPS tei 1 1 I i l SYSTEM BUS 1 1 I 5 DIGITAL 5V PREREG 1 10 PREREGULATOR A10W1 Z 1 VALUE OF LINE MODULE FUSE I N 12V VARIES WITH LINE VOLTAGE a EC g l 18V ee FAN DRIVE i REAR PANEL ud 45V DISC Sid DRM MOTOR 1 70V Normally on Steady 2241 GRAPHICS SYSTEM PROCESSOR 1 I DIGITAL INTERFACE BACKGROUND INTENSITY CLOCKS F PIXEL DRAM MEMORY K P processing vipeo GREEN a HORIZONTAL 5 VERTICAL SYNC m H 1 1 Ww BLUE GREEN EXTERNAL DISPLAY RED To 5101 VGA HORIZONTAL SYNC VERTICAL SYNC Interface on Rear Panel 2 p x g gt ala 5 lt alz MEMORY INTERFACE gt aig z DISC INTERFACE alas Ele SELF TEST ol lt tulo ule BOOT FIRMWARE gt MONITOR ADDRESS MAIN MEMORY 512KX328IT C 65V TO DISPLAY LSHON ADJ CONTROL 771 I 1 9 COLOR
207. EPROM BOARD ASSEMBLY R E 28480 85101 69238 7 85101 60272 1 INPUT OUTPUT BOARD ASSEMBLY NEW 28480 85101 60272 A8 85101 60263 1 SECURITY KEY BOARD ASSEMBLY NEW NO IC 28480 85101 60263 SUPPLIED 85101 69273 SECURITY KEY IC 8510C STANDARD 28480 85101 69273 8510C REVISION 6 XX 8 XX FIRMWARE REBUILT EXCHANGE ONLY A8IC2 85101 69268 SECURITY KEY IC 8510C TIME DOMAIN 28480 85101 69268 OPTION 010 REBUILT EXCHANGE ONLY A9 85101 60295 1 REAR PANEL WITH BOARD ASSEMBLY 28480 85101 60295 A10 0950 3488 1 PREREGULATOR ASSEMBLY NEW 28480 0950 3488 10 1 2110 0655 1 FUSE 3 15A 250V 28480 2110 0655 A11 1 NOT ASSIGNED A14 85101 60293 1 GRAPHICS SYSTEM PROCESSOR ASSEMBLY 28480 85101 60293 A15 85101 60297 1 LCD ASSEMBLY 28480 85101 60297 A16 0950 3379 1 INVERTER 28480 0950 3379 W2 85101 60254 1 RIBBON CABLE DISK DRIVE 28480 85101 60254 W3 85101 60259 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY DISK DRIVE POWER 28480 85101 60259 WA 85101 60299 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 14C 28 AWG 28480 85101 60299 W5 08757 60071 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY POWER 28480 08757 60071 W6 0857 60076 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 34C 28 AWG 28480 0857 60076 W7 8121 0576 1 CABLE DATA FOR LCD 31C 28480 8121 0576 W8 8121 8842 1 CABLE INVERTER 6C 28480 8121 8842 1 0515 2086 4 MACH SCREW M4 0 7MM TX 28480 0515 2086 2 0515 0377 4 MACH SCREW M3 5 10MM TX 28480 0515 0377 3 85101 40014 6 PC BOARD SPACER 28480 85101 40014 4 85101 20055 1 RFI GASKET TOP 28480 85101
208. ETECTOR CONTROLLER INTERFACE amp PROGRAMMABLE LED DRIVER CONTROL DAC SUNG To 85101C VGA Interface TIMER on Rear Panel INTERFACE E 7 gt MEX He VERTICAL SYNC CONTROL pp C T 4 4 INTERFACE CLOCKS U l ADDRESS BLUE 0 83 gt IF DISPLAY ADDRESS I GREENSGUEGS INTERCONNECT 15 DIGTIAL RED ROERS PIXEL INTERFACE SECURITY KEY VRAM PROCESS ING HORIZONTAL SYNC Lege CATA Q SELF TEST ADDRESS 5 PROCESSOR 12 VERTICAL SYNC DECODE INTERFACE 1 NETWORK ANALYZER 2 OPTION 010 TIME DOMAIN dem 2 gt 8 3 NOT USED BUS 4 NOT USED BACKL IGHT 4 POWER CONTROL lt t RS 232 1 RS 232 E INTERRUPT HMULBSY 7 CONTROLLER LREF INT RS CLOCK GENERATOR 2 5 2 95 5 232 2 K 8510 amp SHUTDOWN BEEPER A10 A10 di SYSTEM BUS REAL TIME CLOCK e tee i FTH 5 PROCESSOR oos inrenrace 15 LCD ASSEMBLY I amp DISC INTERFACE 8510 gt EE TEST C INTERCONNECT k 2001 P2 15 P2 69 P2 60 2 MATH BACKLIGHT COLOR LCD L SHON A10 A10 A10 PROCESSOR INVERTER LPFA A10 S 7 5 A6 NON VOLATILE MEMORY 8 1 EEPROM amp INTERFACE if e R EEPROM CONTROL CONTROL ADDRESS D REFRESH 16 ADDRESS DATA SE M MAIN MEMORY Y A10 PREREGULATOR A3 POST REGULATOR PRA e e e 512KX3281T
209. F Calculated 520 500 20 Actual 520 478 42 Required 498 478 20 Finally and here s wherethe learning takes place the processor learns remembers the required LO frequency for an IF of 20 MHz and phase lock It then uses that value on subsequent sweeps It sweeps faster because it need not recalculate pretune frequencies or search for thelF The process is the same for the start frequency and all of the band crossings The process is used after the system has maintained phase lock through all of the band crossings of the complete sweep 3 20 8510C On Site Service Manual Theory of Operation Phase Lock Cycle Summary Including Running Error Messages Phase Lock Cycle Summary Including Running Error Messages The phase lock cycle occurs at every start frequency at every band crossing and at every point in step mode as follows Pretune Phase Lock Sequence pretunes a harmonic to the source frequency 420 MHz locks the frequency and checks for proper lock If unsuccessful PRETUNE FAILURE Pretune IF Count Sequence counts the IF searches for it if unsuccessful and checks the harmonic and sideband following a valid count If unsuccessful NO IF FOUND Main Phase Lock Sequence holds the pretune frequency locks the main phase locked loop and checks for 20 MHz IF If unsuccessful PHASE LOCK FAILURE If phase lock is lost during a sweep PHASE LOCK LOST If the VTO reaches the end of its range before band crossing VTO OVER R
210. G High voltage is present on the inverter board Be careful when measuring signals and voltages on the board Make sure the plastic cover on the inverter board is held securely in place by one of the mounting screws This cover protects against inadvertent contact with the high voltage generated by the inverter Verifying the Inverter Board and Backlight Lamp Remove the top cover of the instrument to facilitate troubleshooting Using Figure 4 5 as a reference measure the signals and voltages indicated in Table 4 5 If the signals and voltages measure correctly the inverter board is functioning properly Figure 4 5 16 Inverter Board Test Point Locations DETAIL CN2 Probe Here for Metal Contact To A14 Board sa614d 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 49 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure LCD Failures Table 4 5 A16 Inverter Board Voltages and Signals Test Point Signal or Voltage Test Point Signal or Voltage CN1 pin 1 45 1 CN1 pin 5 0 V ground CN1 pin 2 35 1 Vdc CN1 pin 6 OV to 45 1V CN1pin 39 mV CN2 pin 11 4900 V peak sinewave 938 kHz after completion of power on CN1 4 0 V ground CN2 pin 5 ac neutral referenced to pin 1 1 This signal is referenced to chassis ground For easier access to pin 1 of CN2 slide the plug slightly out of the fully seated position This will expose a small piece of metal electrica
211. How to Run the System Specifications and Uncertainties Program How to Run the System Specifications and Uncertainties Program The figure below shows a menu map of the system specifications and uncertainties program Step by step instructions follow Figure 8 16 Menu Map of System Specifications and Uncertainties Program START LOAD BASIC LOAD SPECS 8510 SYSTEM CONFIG SYSTEM SPECS RUN PROGRAM SEE HOW TO QUIT PROGRAM VERIFY SYSTEM PERFORMANCE ENTER DATE AND TIME SYSTEM SPECIFICATION TABLE MENU SELECT OUTPUT TABLE NUMBER TABLE TYPE HARDWARE CONFIGURATION MENU SELECT HARDWARE HP8510 TEST SET SOURCE CAL KIT CABLES VERIF KIT ETC SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MENU HARDWARE CONFIG PROGRAM RESET PRIOR MENU TABLE FORMAT OUTPUT DEVICE ETERM DIRECTION TOTAL UNCERTAINTY DYNAMIC ACCURACY MENU SELECT PARAMETER FORMAT UNCERTAINTY LIMIT COMPUTATIONS PARAMETER STEP RESOLUTION OUTPUT MAIN MENU SOFTWARE CONFIG SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION MENU SELECT ADDRESSES FOR SYSTEM INSTRUMENTS AND PEN NUMBERS AND COLORS 8 58 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications How to Run the System Specifications and Uncertainties Program 1 Perform the H ow to Load the Software procedure located earlier in this chapter 2 To specify which type of system specifications you want to generate press System Specs The active highlighted window
212. Hz STOP 0 100000000 GHz Measurement Calibration Method Before verification you must do a full two port calibration for systems with S parameter test sets and a one path two port calibration for systems with reflection transmission test sets The calibration method selected in the program is based on the type of load you use sliding load offset load broadband load or TRL Phase Errors Due to Device Electrical Length In measurements of devices with finite electrical length the frequency accuracy of the sweeper causes additional uncertainty in phase measurements The phase uncertainty DQ is given by the following equation DQ 360 c F L Where cis the propagation velocity in a vacuum 3 1019 DF is the frequency accuracy specification of the sweeper in ramp mode and L is the length of the device under test The following plot shows this uncertainty for the 8350B 83592A 8 100 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications Figure 8 21 Phase error deg WNL e HAH 0 10 20 30 uo 50 60 70 Electrical Length cm NIST Numbers The National Institute of Standards Technology NIST measures Agilent standards and returns the results to Agilent with a test number and a date NIST numbers are supplied with the certificate of calibration that comes with your verificat
213. IF sampler a4 with the PIN switch on the IF counter board The 8510 pretune synthesizer is accurate enough to pretune the comb frequency to within 5 MHz of the desired LO frequency Ideally this creates an IF at 20 MHz 5 MHz thelF counter detects that thelF is strong enough to lock to and then thelF counter counts the IF to within 10 kHz resolution If the IF is not approximately 10 MHz to 30 MHz or if the IF counter has over ranged or if the IF is too weak to lock to the processor ignores the count and begins the IF search routine IF Search Routine is a series of ever widening steps of approximately 10 MHz that attempts to find the IF After several attempts if a valid count is found the check step is performed If the check step is successful the main phase lock is released If the check step is not successful the search continues for two more sequences ThelF may not be counted at the default location for several reasons It could be out of range or too weak Source linearity including band cross locations and sweep point quantization errors on the sweep ADC board are the two major sources of error in the location of the F Bandpass filtering the sampler preamps the test set limits the available search window to about 20 MHz 10 MHz The filter is down about 15 dB at the edges Check Step Sequence algorithm determines 1 whether thelF is a product of the RF and 2 whether thelF is the correct sideba
214. ILT EXCHANGE ONLY Revision 6 XX 8 XX firmware A8IC2 85101 69268 SECURITY KEY IC 8510C TIME DOMAIN 010 28480 85101 69268 REBUILT EXCHANGE ONLY A9 85101 60246 1 REAR PANEL WITH BOARD ASSEMBLY 28480 85101 60246 A10 0950 3488 1 PREREGULATOR ASSEMBLY NEW 28480 0950 3488 A10F1 2110 0655 1 FUSE 3 15A 250V 28480 2110 0655 A11 2090 0210 1 DISPLAY ASSEMBLY NEW 28480 2090 0210 W1 85101 60257 1 RIBBON CABLE ASSEMBLY 28480 85101 60257 W2 85101 60254 1 RIBBON CABLE DISK DRIVE 28480 85101 60254 W3 85101 60259 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY DISK DRIVE POWER 28480 85101 60259 1 0515 2086 5 MACH SCREW M4 0 7MM TX 28480 0515 2086 2 0515 0377 4 MACH SCREW M3 5 10MM TX 28480 0515 0377 3 85101 40014 11 PC BOARD SPACER 28480 85101 40014 4 85101 20055 1 GASKET TOP 28480 85101 20055 5 0515 0372 21 MACH SCREW M3 0 8MM FLP TXP 28480 0515 0372 6 85101 00051 1 CARD CAGE COVER 28480 85101 00051 7 0515 1400 2 MACH SCREW M3 5 8MM FLP TXP 28480 0515 1400 8 0515 0433 4 MACH SCREW M4 0 8MM TX 28480 0515 0433 5 12 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable P arts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT Figure 5 4 85101C Top Internal with CRT Display t visibl m n e 1 A3 1 3 pop S l CT CU NX 5 5 A6 A7 11 places 21 places 1
215. Internal Switches Check that 8510C firmware is C 07 00 or higher Check tables 4 1 and 4 2 for the full functionality and compatibility of source firmware ss419c 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 13 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Troubleshooting Outline Table 4 2 Source Compatibility Agilent Instrument Firmware Revision Number or Higher Modification Kit 8360 series synthesized sweeper 8340A synthesized sweeper 8340B synthesized sweeper 8341 A synthesized sweeper 8341 B synthesized sweeper 8350A sweep oscillator 8350B sweep oscillator 83522A RF plug in 83525A B RF plug in 83540A B RF plug in 83545A RF plug in 83550A RF plug in 83570A RF plug in 83572A RF plug in 83590A RF plug in 83592A RF plug in 83592B RF plug in 83592C RF plug in 83594A RF plug in 83595A RF plug in 83595C RF plug in 83596A RF plug in 83597A RF plug in 8360 series synthesizer 8620 sweep oscillator 86200 series RF Plug ins all all all all all 4 4 4 1 1 1 1 1 0 O O O all cannot be used cannot be used unnecessary2 unnecessary unnecessary unnecessary unnecessary 08350 60100 08350 60101 83525 60074 83525 60074 83525 60074 83525 60074 83550 60041 83525 60074 83572 60074 83590 60074 83592 60074 83592 60100 83592 60102 83594 60074 83595 60074 83595 60104 83596 60002 83597 60021 unnecessary 1 The sources listed above are the only compatible sources as of December
216. J lt J lt TN gt 42 1 J lt J17 3 gt J J lt J lt J lt J lt gt 42 1 J lt J17 u N C lt N C lt N C lt gt 12 1 7 5 C N C x N C E TN P 17 6 C gt J lt Mes J12 86 J Ne J J lt IN gt J J lt J17 7 N C N C N C N gt J J lt gt J12 85 J J J lt gt J J lt J17 8 1 N C N C N C N C U1B gt J J lt gt J12 84 J J J lt gt J jJ lt J17 9 4 DGND N C N C N C 6 N C gt J J lt gt J12 83 ij J J lt I gt J J lt J17 10 5 C DGND gt DGND Saisons DGND N 5 7 11 5V N C N C 5112 61 u N C F LDISKCHG lt SIDESEL N z roe 7 32 lt N C 5 12 80 D N C DISKREAD 5 LWRITEPROT TN b N C gt J u N C 12 79 N C b LTRACK 5 x LWRITEGATE N s lt U1C N C 22 s N C 5715 78 P N C y DISKWRITE LSTEP 8 N C DGND lt DGND eee DGND DGND p 2 DGND 10 DGND 2 N C gt 12 76 N C DIRECTION I LMOTORB 32 N C 9 lt LDRIVESELA LDRIVESELB DGND d p lt DGND J12 7u p DGND DGND DGND U1D DGND lt N C 712 73 N C LMOTORA E LINDEX 12 11 N C N C i Y N C N C MEDIAID DENSITY DGND 13 gt J J lt gt 012 72 J J J lt SPARE6 2 SPARE6 5 J12 71 SPARE6 SPARE6 SPARE7 KEYBOARD 7 32 SPAREB S d lt SPAREB gt SPARE8 F SPARES 7 I SPARE9 N C 5 N C 5
217. L X REF n AWI VY o t PASE X REF MUX fi from A18 A9 b2 MIXER 20 L Bp 4 ioi w LOW PASS PULSE Y REF EE SYNC PHASE SHET Wu AN SIGNAL FORM TEST SET 35 VTO SENSE 65 300MHz al SIGNAL TO TEST SET TEST PHASE a cio sn SUMMING VIO TUNE H o I ca emm uu e e lt s a c m s fes A12 100kHz REF IF AMPLIFIER MULTIPLEXER ii Loud 9 E ms ees orm w 0 n 7 F SYNCHRONOUS DETECTOR 48 3 TEST SET INTERCONNECT A18 Y ADC 3 35 waT vn E LOW PASS Ver 35 a cos x to GENERATOR pod m Bu SYNC PHASE t TEST PHASE WRITE GENERATOR p i r AX 20 10 48 J L 2 ER Ii e 16 REMOTE A19 ADC CONTROL APPLICATION 1 9 n 1 I PROCESSOR gt AN Q0 M2 10 48 SYNC DET 1 LO s ius sui2 2 L DATA HIS DATA t P a s sss s s Max qu A 0 7 6 15 E 2222 3 Y 2 PROCESSOR INTERFACE PASE DRE
218. LED 4 is lit to indicate that the test is active Calibrate Background and Intensity 5 CRT or Save Time Date and LCD Backlight Settings 5 LCD CRT A password is required to run this test It also requires a special digital photometer with probe and a light occluder A three step grayscale is used to set background where all three steps are just visible Intensity is then set settings and the date arethen stored For a complete procedure refer to Chapter 7 Adjustments LCD This test is used in the factory to save the time date and LCD backlight settings after adjustment Recall Background and Intensity Calibration 6 CRT or Recall Time Date and LCD Backlight Settings 6 LCD CRT This recalls the calibration that is stored in nonvolatile memory and loads the appropriate DACs with the data LCD This test is used in the factory to recall the time date and LCD backlight settings for diagnostic purposes 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 135 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Service Program Screen Test Patterns 7 CRT This test provides 15 screen patterns for use in evaluating and adjusting the display With these patterns the following display qualities can be evaluated color purity grayscale focus astigmatism geometric distortion convergence Use the up down keys RPG knob or the numeric keypad to select different patterns To exit this test press MARKER LCD This test is used for diagno
219. LRENHPIB pend MONGNU 4 2 104 4 2 49 XA3J2 1U4 DIOSPRIV DIOIPRIV OGND J MONGNOSENSE MONGNDSENSE M MONGNOSENSE 44 ONGNDSENSE idis C Yx C Py re E LSROHPTB LATNHPIB DIO2PRIV BIBSPRIY DI ELS XA4J2 102 XA4J2 47 mE 5 2 1402 XASJ2 47 692 102 2 47 1 DIOIHPIB MONGSVSENSE MONGSVSENSE MONGSVSENSE MONGSVSENSE_Wf N C C N C DIOIPRIV DIOSPRIV omo j DIO4PRIV DIOZHPIB DIOIHPIB XA4J2 101 XA4J2 45 XASJ2 101 XASJ2 46 2 101 2 46 TOSHPIB DIOBHP B o MON6SV NC uu ino DIO2PRIV Dio pRiv Tos Lroreaiv foose DIO amp HPIB OGND pe SSCS R427 100 X 192 45 DGNO ARAS 100 45 N C N C N C DIO3PRIV DIO7PRIV Sic LDAVPRIV D O7HPIB DIOSHPIB ND 42 998 uos ds DGND N C 5 2 98 XASJ2 44 NE N C XABJ2 99 2 44 NC DIO4PRIV BIOBPRIV DGND LNRF PRIV Yf po BIS O XA4J2 98 XA4J2 43 mE 5 2 98 XASJ2 43 IS Hm 6 2 98 XA6J2 43 n Dco DGNO N C N C N C N C LEOIPRIV LRENPRIV DGND IDB14 DS Too sb oan 086 DEND __ 10812 10814 4 2 36 XA4J2 41 XA5J2 96 5 2 4 XA6J2 96 2 41 1588
220. Manual Replaceable Parts 5 1 Replaceable P arts Overview This chapter contains illustrations and corresponding parts lists of the major assemblies cables and other hardware software and accessories for use with the analyzer Parts tables for individual test sets and sources arein their respective manuals Sections include parts listings for Software and documentation Available service tools 85101C equipped with a CRT display e 85101C equipped with an LCD 85102B NOTE The original 85101C display processor incorporated a cathode ray tube CRT display The current design incorporates a liquid crystal display LCD Exchange Assemblies Some of the major assemblies be replaced on a rebuilt exchange R E basis Exchange factory repaired and tested assemblies are available only on a trade in basis the defective assemblies must be returned for credit within 30 days For this reason assemblies required for spare parts stock must be ordered by the new assembly part number Figure 5 1 explains the rebuilt module exchange procedure R E assembly part numbers are listed in the parts list below the part numbers for the corresponding new assemblies Ordering Information order a part listed in the replaceable parts tables quote the Agilent part number indicate the quantity required and address the order to the nearest Agilent office 5 2 8510C On Site Service Manual Figure 5 1 Module Excha
221. Manual Replaceable P arts Available Service Tools This pageintentionally left blank 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 11 Replaceable P arts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT Table 5 5 85101C Top Internal with CRT Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number A1 85101 60249 1 FRONT PANEL WITH KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY 28480 85101 60249 A2 0950 2075 1 DISC DRIVE 28480 0950 2075 A3 85101 60244 1 POST REGULATOR BOARD ASSEMBLY NEW 28480 85101 60244 A3 85101 69244 POST REGULATOR BOARD ASSEMBLY R E 28480 85101 69244 1 2110 0333 1 FUSE 1 5A 125V NTD 28480 2110 0333 A3F2 2110 0425 1 FUSE 2A 125V 25 X 27 28480 2110 0425 A3F3 2110 0425 1 FUSE 2A 125V NTD 25 X 27 28480 2110 0425 4 85101 60243 1 GRAPHICS SYSTEM PROCESSOR ASSEMBLY NEW 28480 85101 60243 A4 85101 69243 GRAPHICS SYSTEM PROCESSOR ASSEMBLY R E 28480 85101 69243 A5 85101 60245 1 CPU BOARD ASSEMBLY 28480 85101 60245 A5 85101 69245 CPU BOARD ASSEMBLY R E 28480 85101 69245 A6 85101 60238 1 EEPROM BOARD ASSEMBLY NEW 28480 85101 60238 A6 85101 69238 EEPROM BOARD ASSEMBLY R E 28480 85101 69238 7 85101 60272 1 INPUT OUTPUT BOARD ASSEMBLY NEW 28480 85101 60272 A8 85101 60263 1 SECURITY KEY BOARD ASSEMBLY NEW 28480 85101 60263 NO IC SUPPLIED A8IC1 85101 69273 SECURITY KEY IC 8510 STANDARD 28480 85101 69273 REBU
222. Most Likely Causes of Failure area duplicate of information displayed on the display NOTE The original 85101C display processor incorporated a cathode ray tube CRT The current design incorporates a liquid crystal display LCD Self tests for the A4 display processor CRT design and the A14 display processor LCD design are functionally equivalent The notation A4 A14 indicates that the information applies to both designs Self Test Menu The self test part of the main Service Functions test menu appears below in Table 4 7 The LED pattern represents the binary code which appears on the front panel and A5 CPU board as explained earlier Table 4 7 Self Test Menu and LED Pattern LED Pattern Name of Test 32 16 8 4 2 1 A5 Processor EPROM no code A5 Processor RAM A7 Data Bus A4 A14 Display Processor A4 A14 Display Ram A7 Timer Clock RS 232 A7 Public GPIB HP IB A7 System Bus Interrupt System A5 Multiplier A7 Disk Controller A6 Nonvolatile Memory F Detector Data Keyboard performed after test 2 z o N O w N Ol O O O N UJ O O O O O O O O O o LED off O L ED The following paragraphs list the most likely cause of failure for each test The percentage in parentheses is the probability that a particular it
223. NOTE The A3 post regulator assembly has its own special extender board for troubleshooting Agilent part number 85101 60236 The connector pin numbers are reversed from extenders for the other board assemblies Figure 4 16 A3 Post Regulator Extender Board If the 85101C is equipped with a CRT ribbon cable W1 from the A11 CRT display may remain disconnected from the A4 GSP board during this procedure Disconnect A10 preregulator cable A10W1 from the 1 post regulator connector Turn on the 85101C and measurethe voltages on the connector pins with a small probe Comparethe measured voltages with the voltages listed in Figure 4 17 fthe voltages are not within tolerance replace the A10 preregulator fthevoltages are within tolerance the A10 preregulator is working properly Continue with this procedure Turn off the 85101C and connect A10 preregulator cable A10W1 to the 1 post regul ator connector Turn on the 85101C and measure the voltages on the pins of A3J 1 Compare these voltages with the voltages listed in Figure 4 17 fthe voltages are not within tolerance either the A3 post regulator or an assembly connected to it is loading down the A10 preregulator Continue this procedure with Remove Assemblies fthe voltages are within tolerance it is likely that the A3 post regulator is good and both the A10 preregulator and A3 post regulator are being loaded down by an assembly connected to it Continuethis procedur
224. Noise Floor Effective Power Ref out port 1 2 Effective Power max in port 2 1 Effective Power min in port 2 1 Effective Dynamic Range Ref min port 2 port 1 Effective Dynamic Range max min port 2 port 1 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 97 Performance Verification and Specifications Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications Connections and Connector Maintenance Always keep your connectors and cables in good working order by following the instructions in the respective manuals As a general rule clean all connections prior to calibration and verification with the recommended cleaning solution and lint free swabs Controller Displays and High Resolution Monitors Tabular data displays do not stop at the top of each page on the display If the controller display memory is not capable of displaying the entire table you can press any key to stop the scrolling table and then press any key to continue the display You can also pause the program with the BASIC PAUSE or STOP key and then use the UP DOWN arrow keys to scroll the display Afterward you can use the BASIC CONTINUE key to resume program operation you may haveto reset the BASIC softkeys to menu softkeys by pressing USER or SHIFT USER depending on your keyboard 8350B Sweep Oscillators as System Sources Additional magnitude and phase errors are introduced into the system by these sweepers Frequency accuracy of 8350B 83592A 25 5 de
225. OTING BLOCK DIAGRAM LCD THIS DIAGRAM SHOWS A TYPICAL 8510 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION NOTE THAT THE CIRCUIT BOARDS _ NFIGURATION SWITCH SETTINGS AND ASSEMBLIES HAVE NUMBERS PRECEDED BY THE SELF TEST 1 14 RUNNING ERROR MESSAGES 15 41 UNRATIOED POWER TEST 42 LEDS GPIB ADDRESSES AND CO GU o s S LETTER THAT NUMBER IDENTIFIES THE ASSEMBLY THE OTHER NUMBERS REFER TO THE LIST SELF TESTS ON THE RIGHT OF THIS FOLDOUT ih PC CONTROLLER 1 AS PROCESSOR EPROM self ond service program PROM using checksum USE THIS BLOCK DIAGRAM AS A QUICK REFERENCE SERIES 2 5 PROCESSOR RAM tesl processor memory using doto complement technique GUIDE TO tipi FAILURES be NL AS GUIDE 8510 SYSTEM 27 28 29 200 300 3 A7 DATA BUS TEST test 1 0 bus TO LED LOCATION AND MEANING CONTROLLER 4 A14 DISPLAY PROCESSOR ADDRESS AND CONFIGURATION SWITCH SETTINGS 1 DEFECTIVE DATA OR ADDRESS USING BASIC S DAE ARE ALSO SHOWN NOTE Q u a 6 RED LEDS THAT 6 7 TIMER CLOCK RS 232 THE 85102C HAS DUPLICATE BOARDS OF THE RUNNING ERRORS TO 4 NUMBERS 1 14 TEST SET ADDRESS SWITCH REAR PNL ALL MODELS USE THEM AS A BUILT IN BOARD KIT APPEAR AT RANDOM EXTERNAL DISPLAY SHOW SELF TEST 7 A7 PUBLIC GPIB reod write lest of GPIB regisler ail a al al as A7 AS REF DET 10 12 REF IF AMPL VGA INTERFACE Sustest 8 SYSTEM BUS read write test of system bus register THESE NUMBERS IDENTIFY THE SELF
226. On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Frequency Test Procedures 4 Fromthe analyzer front panel enter the stop frequency of the source or test set whichever is lower For an 83640 or 83651 omit this step and follow the appropriate next step NOTE Make sure the test set output is connected to the 500 MHz to 26 5 GHz input on the frequency counter The input switch must also be set tothe 500 MHz to 26 5 GHz position Measure the frequency with the counter and record the value on the test record located at the end of this chapter For the 83640 5 Fromthe analyzer front panel enter 2 6 5 G n NOTE Make sure the test set output is connected to the 500 MHz to 26 5 GHz input on the frequency counter The input switch must also be set tothe 500 MHz to 26 5 GHz position Measure the frequency with the counter and record the value on the test record located at the end of this chapter 6 In the 83640 an internal frequency doubler is used to generate frequencies of S20 GHz through 40 GHz Since the highest frequency that the frequency counter can measure 15 26 5 GHz the doubler is disabled for the measurement at 40 GHz providing an RF output of 20 GHz This verifies a 40 GHz output except for the operation of the doubler Since the doubler is engaged to produce the 26 5 GHz RF output the operation of the doubler is verified in the 26 5 through 40 GHz On the synthesizer press SERVICE MORE
227. On Site Service Manual 4 107 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure 85101C Display Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting Inspect the A8 Motherboard If the red LED is still on after replacement or repair of the A10 preregulator turn off the 85101C and inspect the A8 motherboard for solder bridges and other noticeable defects Use an ohmmeter to check for shorts In particular check the following lines between the A10 preregulator and the A3 post regulator GNDDSENSE 5VDSENSE 5V DIG DGND Refer to the A8 motherboard wiring diagram to troubleshoot these suspected power supply lines The wiring diagram is supplied at the end of the main troubleshooting section If the A10 red LED is still on after doing the above checks and isolating the A3 post regulator by removing all of the assemblies the fault is most likely in the post regulator or the A10 preregulator If after replacing and A10 the fault still exists them replace the A8 motherboard with a new motherboard card cage assembly Determine Why the Green LEDs on Are Not On The green LEDs along the top edge of the A3 post regulator are normally on Flashing LEDs on A3 indicate that the shutdown circuitry on the A3 post regulator is protecting power supplies from over current conditions by repeatedly shutting them down This may be caused by supply loading on A3 or on any other assembly in the 85101C Remove the A3 Post Regulator from Its Motherboard Connector Turn o
228. P TB DIO7PRIV 12102 FCHPIB DIOSPRIV ATNHPIB DIO2PRIV gt 15 102 OSPRIV DGND epe O6PRIV DGND iis ee O7PRIV DGND ug OS8PRIV DGND 5 2 RENPRIV DGND ae GND DGND NRF DPRIV DGND EXTBLUERTN LATNHPIB EXTGREENRTN W LSROHPIB EXTREDRTN LIFCHPIB EXTSYNCRTN LNDACHPIB VGAS LNRFDHPIB DIOBPRIV LDAVHPIB DIO6PRIV DIOIPRIV DIO3PRIV DIO3HPTB DIOUPRIV DIO1HPIB DIOGHP IB LDAVPRIV DIOBHP LNRF DPR1V DBi5 LNDACPRIV DB13 LIFCPRIV DB11 LSROPRIV DB9 15 00 FCPRIV DGND LATNPRIV DB7 ard ATNPRIV DGND DTR2 DBS 15 95 DBlu XD2 RXD2 DB3 15 91 gt J15 90 gt J15 89 15 88 IDB5 2 RXDI 0601 TADRI LADRE 1083 0581 51 LIST 5V gt J15 86 EXTGREENRTN EXTGREEN LDBL gt 015 85 CTS1 RII CERIK EXTBLUERTN EXTBLUE D DGND 8 DGND q CRYPTO LIPRST DGND TADRS EXTVSYNC EXTHSYNC VGAS oio J11 108 J11 107 J11 106 J11 105 J11 10u J11 103 J11 102 J11 101 J11 100 gt J11 99 gt J11 98 2 11 97 gt 11 96 2 11 95 gt J11 94 gt 411 93 J11 92 gt J11 91 gt J11 90 gt J11 89 J11 88 J11 87 gt J11 86 J11 85 gt J11 84 gt J11 83 gt J11 82 gt J11 81 gt J11 82 gt J11 79 gt J11 78 gt J11 77 gt J11 76 gt J11 75 gt J11 74 gt J11 73 gt J11 72 gt 411 71 gt J11 70 gt J11 69 gt J11 68 2 J11 67 gt J11 66 2 J11 65 gt J11 64 gt 411 63 gt J11 62 gt J11 61 gt J11 60 2 J11 59 2 J11 58 J11 57 2 411 56 J13 108
229. PHICS Ab A7 AS PREREGULATOR POST REGULATOR SYSTEM PROCESSOR AS CPU EEPROM INPUT OUTPUT REAR PANEL REAR PANEL XA4J2 XASJ2 XA6J2 XA7J2 LPOP 2 13 XA4J2 68 XA4J2 13 XASJ2 58 5 2 13 LNMI LPOP DGND CLK8MHZ 4 2 67 XA4J2 12 XA5J2 67 5 2 12 XABJ2 67 2 12 XA3J1 100 PEND Sy XA4J2 56 4 2 11 XA5J2 66 2 11 be M XA6J2 56 XA6J2 11 s MOTOR 12V e CCE HOTOR 12V onc ME lt ae MOTOR 12V MOTOR 12V ST MEME e MOTOR 12V HOTOR 12V Capello MOTOR 12V MOTOR i2V Mer 47 XAQU1 102 gt S ESOS EL Bic xaa2 64 XA4J2 9 XASJ2 64 592 9 XA6J2 64 XA5J2 9 XA3J1 48 XA3J1 103 ES Le XA4J2 53 2 8 121 XASJ2 63 XASJ2 8 XA3J1 49 XA3J1 104 SEND XA4J2 62 XA4J2 7 5 2 62 XASJ2 7 a X
230. PLACES 5 22 8510 On Site Service Manual ss428c Figure 5 11 Replaceable P arts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT 8510C Cable Assemblies with CRT Display W28 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number W27 8120 1348 2 CABLE ASSY 18 AWG 3 CNDCT 28480 8120 1348 W28 8120 3445 1 GPIB CABLE 1METER 28480 8120 3445 W29 08510 60101 1 CBL AY IF DISPLAY 28480 08510 60101 W30 8120 2592 2 AY 1 METER 28480 8120 2582 W64 D1191A 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY FOR CRT DISPLAY 28480 D1191A w65 24542G 2 CABLE SERIAL RS 232 28480 24525G 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 23 Replaceable P arts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD Table 5 9 85101C Top Internal with LCD Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number A2 0950 2075 1 DISC DRIVE 28480 0950 2075 A3 85101 60244 1 POST REGULATOR BOARD ASSEMBLY NEW 28480 85101 60244 A3 85101 69244 POST REGULATOR BOARD ASSEMBLY R E 28480 85101 69244 1 2110 0333 1 FUSE 1 5A 125V NTD 28480 2110 0333 2 2110 0425 1 FUSE 2A 125V NTD 25 X 27 28480 2110 0425 2110 0425 1 FUSE 2 125V 25 2 7 28480 2110 0425 A4 NOT ASSIGNED A5 85101 60298 1 CPU BOARD ASSEMBLY 28480 85101 60298 A6 85101 60238 1 EEPROM BOARD ASSEMBLY NEW 28480 85101 60238 A6 85101 69238 E
231. PLAY PROCESSOR SERVICE PROGRAM HP85102 IF DETECTOR SERVICE PROGRAM TEST SET HP IB SERVICE PROGRAM HP8360 SERVICE PROGRAM RETURN TO MAIN SERVICE FUNCTIONS MENU NOTES 1 Hex digits A thru F are ossigned to MENU 1 2 See next page 3 See next poge 4 See next page F see note 1 M uJ Ck m X1 C ond C J respectively 2 To make o selection type the number then press MARKER indicated 3 The default value on data entry is zero Copyright Hewlett Packard 1987 1988 1991 HP85101 I O BOARD AND FRONT PANEL TESTS A1 A2 A7 DISC CONTROLLER BUS TEST A7 DISC WRITE READ TEST A2 A7 TIMER TEST A7 SERIAL I O TEST A7 TIMER CLOCK PERIPHERAL TCP TESTS A7 CPU TO TEST A7 BIDIRECTIONAL TEST A7 STATIC INTERRUPT SYSTEM TEST A7 RPG TEST Al A7 KEYBOARD AND LEDS TEST Al A7 HP85102 INTERFACE TEST A7 DYNAMIC INTERRUPT SYSTEM TEST A7 SECURITY KEYS INTERFACE TEST A7 WATCHDOG TIMER TEST A7 RETURN TO 85101 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU For factory use only TO RETURN TO THIS MENU AFTER COMPLETING A TEST PRESS THE MARKER KEY m O O O gt 400 N G n tM u1 k m X1 C PASSWORD ENTRY CAUTION The following tests will erase non volatile memory To access these tests enter the password then press MARKER To exit just press MARKER Refer to the Service Manual for the password NOTE Passw
232. PLIES DISC ro ve Dd 5 eme 19 25 26 20 22 26 PANEL 43 43 IT CARE CARE 17 LPTHLD Y 15 18 31 4 OISPLAY SECTION TEST SET DEFAULT SETTINGS 8 50 uiu Brus POWER 42 N 0 Dp 1 be on THE DEFAULT STATE OF THE TEST SETS TURN POWER 8360 400VA 1 360 BTUs Y OFF PULL A4 GPIB BOARD AND TURN POWER BACK ON L BHAGE ANALOG 1 sweer stor MAIN PROCESSOR RESET 1 TO HAVE ALL SAMPLERS ENABLED 14 VTO BIASED STOP SWP SWEEP TRIGGER LOCK OUT i LOCATED BEHIND FRONT PANEL PORT 1 AND 2 ATTENUATORS 048 AND THE 1N 0UT OUTPUT OUTPUT 19 25 HOLE UNDER THE DISC DRIVE A LIT RED LEO ON 10 PREREG INDICATES SWITCH SPLITTER APPLYING RF POWER TO PORT 1 25 38 25 19 38 USE ONLY WITH 8340 8341 83508 SOURCES 16 38 25 1T RESETS THE PROCESSOR ANO ise DRIVE POWER SUPPLY SHUTOOWN DUE TO FAILURE OF USE WITH ALL SOURCES 3 YELLOW LEOS ON FRONT ACTIVATES 18 LED ON FRONT PANEL 1 AIO PREREG _ 7346 2 A3 POST REG FRONT PANEL FREQ CAL PROCEDURE FOR 8350 PLUG INS 2 ee E 1 PRESS INSTR PRESET CW 0 MHz USE ONLY WITH B360 SERIES SOURCES RED LED S 81 2 4 8 THAT 4 ASSEMOLIES USING 5V DIGITAL SUPPLY LINE VOLTAGE Ios sov ISV REGULATEO SHOW SELF TEST FAILURE 2 ADJUST FREQ CAL CONTROL THROUGH ITS RANGE AND NOTE AV ERORTPANEL A2 IF COUNTER HAS 1 GREEN LED NOTE THIS LED IS SUPPLIED WHEN ADD
233. R TAPERED TEN 1 PAD b BIAS 1 Good Bad log MAG REF 60 69 d 10 0 32 541 MARKER 1 20 0 GHz START 9 045000000 GHz STOP 29 000000200 GHz PATH 6 b2 Thru BIAS 2 b2 TAPERED PAD COUPLER a2 TEN 2 0 to 90dB SWITCH RF IN SPLITTER TUNE 0 to 90d8 d TAPERED VTO SENSE PAD ATTEN 1 al COUPLER ai BIAS b1 TEE 1 b1 BIAS 1 Good Bad 8514B RF Flow Diagrams and Typical Traces TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE Find the Faulty Assembly HP 8514B OPT 002 003 Try to match the observed results recorded under the RF path diagrams with the results listed in per per 48 per sas 9 S per 7 9 fer 0 0 Check RF Paths 1 2 3 and 4 the table of most probable failures below Out of 32 possible variations the table lists the variations snis HE eee eo that result from 12 of the most probable failures ES M MAR Td MARKER ascent MARKER Ifthe observed results match a group of results in the table investigate the most probable cause RF Path 1 User 1 a1 given in the table RF Path 2 User 3 a2 the obser
234. R A4 GRAPHICS SYSTEM PROCESSOR A6 EEPROM SPARES SPARES MOTOR 5V MOTORRIN XA3J2 XA4J1 XASJ1 XA6J1 XA7J1 J7 2 XA3J2 1 XA3J2 56 XA4J1 110 XA4J1 55 XASJi 110 501 55 XAGJI 110 55 53 are XA7J1 110 7 55 KOTORR TN DENO Dii XA3J2 2 XA3J2 57 XA4J1 109 XA4J1 54 XASJ1 108 1 109 1 54 XA7J1 169 XA7J1 54 N C 53 C XA3J2 3 XA3J2 58 XA4J1 108 XA4J1 53 XA5J1 108 X
235. RE pda aieo ahd a as 3 5 Test Ser Control issu ako XXE CREARE REA REOR ORA EC CERE QS ROOTES 3 6 Test Ser Power On e a eh E E RET 3 6 Test Set Typical RF Path sO ERR REPRE 3 6 RDN 241435555466 3 8 Signal Path Assemblies 3 8 Control do ees OR A CE C a wed oec Re A 3 9 Phase Lock Assemblies ccd peed aeee dee se 3 9 Miscellaneous ASSES Lu sores saepe b paca kde a b 3 GE Rep x E dew bala ka 3 9 DusplayPUOCeSSOl 22545365543 RE AIR ERR 3 10 Processo Aes a ROGER RU EE COSE 3 10 Display Assemblies CRT uk ERR EROR ERES 3 10 Display Assemblies ILC DI S d u y REX TER Jo De eX dC PESE C le M c a 3 11 Input Output Assemblles iusso zn 3 3 11 Fons SOD uu abd ico o dos deseo d ad Sil eee ee paqa ad cae wik 3 12 8510 Typical System Measurement 3 15 Contents 1 Contents System Phase Lock Operation RE 3 16 Pretune Phase Lock uu l u a sss aa ayata a ebri
236. REQ CAL MENU Sweep Span Once ONCE Continue with step 6 For 8340 41 Series Synthesizers 3 Toinitiate an auto track press the following keys the synthesizer PRESET SHIFT PEAK 4 Continue with step 6 For Synthesizers 6 Press the following keys on the analyzer PARAMETER S21 FORMAT PHASE STIMULUS MENU STEP Allow at least one complete sweep until the asterisk is gone 7 To normalize the measurement press MENUS DISPLAY DATAS MEMORY 2 MATH 8 To offset the center frequency by 5 MHz press STIMULUS CENTER and increase the displayed value by 5 MHz For example for a 45 MHz to 50 GHz sweep the center frequency should be changed from 25 0225 to 25 0275 GHz 9 Press RESPONSE SCALE and use the front panel knob to adjust the scale factor so that the flat trace is shifted to the bottom or top graticule Where the trace variations are approximately halfway above and below the last graticule 10 Press STIMULUS CENTER and change the displayed frequency by 10 MHz This places the trace on the opposite side of the display The amount of the frequency shift now represents a vertical scaling of 1 MHz per division 11 Press STIMULUS CENTER and return the frequency to the original setting The phase measurement should return to 09 8 46 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Frequency Test Procedures 12 Press STIMULUS MENU RAMP SWEEP TIME 5 The display
237. RESPONSE MENU AVERAGING ON 1 2 8 x1 3 To normalize the data trace press DISPLAY MORE MATH OPERATIONS MATH DISPLAY DATA MEMORY 1 MATH RESPONSE REF VALUE 5 0 x1 4 Disconnect and then reconnect the cable to the test port Tighten the connection to the specified torque for the connector type 5 add the data trace of the reconnected cable to memory press DISPLAY DATA MEMORY 1 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least 3 times to look for modes Modes appear when a harmonic of the source fundamental frequency is ableto propagate through the cable or connector 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 39 Performance Verification and Specifications Operational Check Procedures Any mode that appears each time the cable is connected and reconnected will affect measurement integrity Refer to the example plot in Figure 8 10 NOTE The connector repeatability measurement should be done at the test port as well as at the end of thetest port cable Figure 8 10 Connector Repeatability Examples E 3 0 dB log 79 ws 0 0 18 3 A od da 29 844 C m Lo LAANA AD T ABA AND Me 4 4 tn A a Aid d 1 REE AM yg iO 49 875911 Good Cable Dynamic Range Check ET eer AAT S
238. RF plug in 6 83572 60074 83590A RF plug in 7 83590 60074 83592A RF plug in 7 83592 60074 83592B RF plug in 7 83592 60100 83592C RF plug in 7 83592 60102 83594A RF plug in 7 83594 60074 83595A RF plug in 7 83595 60074 83595C RF plug in 7 83595 60104 83596A RF plug in 7 83596 60002 83597A RF plug in 7 83597 60021 8360 series synthesizer all unnecessary 8620 sweep oscillator cannot be used 86200 series RF Plug ins cannot be used 1 Converts 8350A to 8510 compatibility Note The sources listed above are the only compatible sources as of December 1990 Consult your Agilent customer engineer for additional information To check the firmware revision on your 8350 press SHIFT 4 9 The revision appears in the FREQUENCY TIME window To check the firmware revision on your 83500 series RF plug in press SHIFT 9 9 The revision appears in the POWER window The firmware revision for all synthesized sweepers appears when the instrument power is switched on 8510C On Site Service Manual 9 13 System Installation Configuring and Connecting the System Configuring the System in a Cabinet If your system will be used in a system cabinet follow the configuration instructions here Otherwise refer to Configuring the System on a Bench Top later in this chapter Preconfigured Systems If the system is shipped in the system cabinet inspect for loosened connections and conclude the installation procedure with Checking System Operation lat
239. RIPPLE minimize the high frequency ripple THEN ADJUST L4 amp L5 TO FURTHER REDUCE RIPPLE If the following prompt is displayed check equipment setup for configuration errors or refer to the troubleshooting chapter SIGNAL LEVEL IS TOO LOW IT MEASURES XXX dB BUT SHOULD BE gt 15 dB CHECK SETUP OR REPAIR BOARD 7 26 8510C On Site Service Manual Adjustments Procedure 7 Synchronous Detector Adjustment 11 Refer to Figure 7 9 for the location of L4 and L5 To center L4 and L5 adjustable inductors rotate each inductor fully counterdockwise until the core is as far out as it will go then three turns dockwise CAUTION Be careful not to rotate the inductors too far clockwise Damage may occur to the inductors 12 Refer to Figure 7 9 for the location of L6 and L 7 Alternately adjust L6 and L7 to get the minimum ripple seen on the analyzer display See Figure 7 10 13 Alternately adjust L4 and L5 to minimize the ripple Typically the ripple 15 less than 0 01 dB 14 When the adjustment is complete press CONTINUE to return to the menu 15 Switch off the analyzer power and return the equipment to the original configuration Be sure to tighten the screws when reinstalling the board into the mainframe loose screws can cause crosstalk in the instrument Also be sure to reconnect the 85102 cables in the original configuration Figure 7 10 Synchronous Detector Adjustment Waveform CENTER 0 275000000 GHz SPAN
240. RS 232 VGA INTERFACE SUBTEST LUES SUN SYSTEM i PORT 1 PORT 2 es 10 AS MULTIPLIER performs o complex multiply 11 A7 DISC CONTROLLER HP85101C DISPLAY t NUN TEST eet test we 13 D IR DATA reod test dota ond oddress PROCESSOR 14 KEYBOARD read HP 85101C keyboord for stuck key RUNNING ERROR MESSAGES lt CAGE SECURITY 15 FAILED PRETUNE LOST PRETUNE 16 NO IF FOUND 27 28 29 30 32 17 PHASE LOCK FAILURE 18 PHASE LOCK LOST 19 OVER RANGE 20 ADC CAL FALED 3 6 7 8 9 11 44 1 YELLOW DISC DRIVE LED ON FRONT PANEL 4 RED LED S 41 2 4 8 THAT SHOW SELF TEST FAI LURE WHEN ADDED 4 YELLOW LEDS THAT SHOW B ACTIVITY R L T S ReREMOTE L LI STEN T TALK SeSERVI CE REQUEST DISPLAY SECTION MEMORY HP 3 3 40 41 EEPROM ASSEMBLIES A10 PREREG 42 43 44 LIT RED LED ON A10 PREREG INDICATES A POWER SUPPLY SHUTDOWN DUE TO FALURE OF 1 A10 PREREG 2 A3 POST REG 3 45V DIGITAL SUPPLY 4 ASSEMBLIES USING 45V DIGITAL SUPPLY A3 POST REG GREEN LEDS SHOW 15 12 5V 12V amp 65V POWER SUPPLES ARE ON CAL FAILED REFERENCE IF CAL FAILED TEST IF CAL FAILED BOTH channels ADC NOT RESPONDING IF OVERLOAD AUTORANGE CAL FAILED SOURCE SWEEP SYNC ERROR SWEEP TIME TOO FAST SOURCE HP IB SYNTAX ERROR
241. RT DEMAGNITIZER 8510C On Site Service Manual 7 13 Adjustments Procedure 3 CRT Display Intensity Adjustments Procedure 3 CRT Display Intensity Adjustments Equipment photometer Tektronix J 16 Option 2 photometer probe Tektronix J 6503 Option 2 light ocduder Tektronix 016 0305 00 Description and Procedure There are two display intensity adjustments background black and operating default I n general these adjustments should not be required Yet when either the A5 CPU A4GSP A6 EEPROM or A11 display assembly is replaced do a visual inspection of the display If it appears to need adjustment proceed with these adjustments NOTE This procedure should be done with a photometer and only by qualified service personnel Warm up time 30 minutes Background Intensity Black Adjustment 1 Remove the top cover of the analyzer 2 Inadimly lit room or with the analyzer CRT shaded from bright lights press PRESET SYSTEM MORE softkey 8 SERVICE FUNCTIONS softkey 8 TEST MENU softkey 1 2 2 MARKER 1 ZMARKER 3 ZMARKER 5 MARKER 8 5 1 7 Z MARKER x1 3 Alternating vertical bars of three different intensities are shown on the CRT Each bar has a number written below it either O 1 or 2 Adjust the analyzer front panel knob until the vertical bar labeled 1 is just barely visible against the black border Vertical bar 0 must not be visible indistinguishable 7 14 8510C On Site Service M
242. Replacement Procedures A15 LCD Assembly Replacement TheLCD assembly consists of the display glass the LCD and backlight and the inverter board Refer to LCD Assembly Details for replacement of these parts Tools Required Large Pozidrive screwdriver Small Pozidrive screwdriver Very small flat blade screwdriver T 10 Torx screwdriver T 15 Torx screwdriver Procedure The items shown in parentheses refer to the corresponding item numbers in Figure 6 5 To Disassemble 1 Disconnect the power cords and remove the top cover 2 Disconnect the LCD data cable W7 from connector 6 on the front of the A14 display GSP board by pulling straight up on the cable plug 3 the display GSP board slide the two ears on connector J 7 toward the front of the instrument to release the flat flex cable W8 from the connector Then remove the cable from the connector 4 Removethetrim strip from thetop edge of the front frame by prying under it with a flat screwdriver 5 Remove the two top screws and the two bottom screws item 1 from the LCD assembly side of the instrument frame 6 While holding the LCD assembly rotate it slightly out of the frame 7 Disconnect the ribbon cable from the softkey keyboard on the back of the LCD assembly To Reassemble 8 Reverse the preceding steps Torque all screws to 113 N cm 10 in Ib 6 16 8510C On Site Service Manual Replacement Procedures 85101C Replacement Procedures Figur
243. S aC n B 28 LRDS 5 5 lt 28 LR S N C 28 CRUS A26E3 f N C o N C 0 7 295 N C NIC lt L28 DCOM ul lt DCOM REN 29 ABO DCOM LL 79 ABO AK DEOM 29 ABO 058 Ne NC o Ble NC ak ars N Wits 8 30 AB2 8 o 30 AB2 M ABI 30 AB2 018 NN We o 9 gt lt 31 NI N ace NC 98 AB3 8 Aga M 3 31 ABS 4 AB3 31 ABE 15VREG d 10 1SvREG A 15vREG 10 lt 320 7 18VREG 15 32 5 1SVREG 1SVREG k 5 2 1SVREG 15VREG SC Tg 1SVREG 15VREG 10 32 ISVREG 15VREG 10 32 15VREG 15VREG 32 15VREG 15VUNREG 2N3054 OCOM 11 DCOM DCOM lt 33 DCOM lt A DCOM DCOM 11 DCOM DCOM 11 33 DCOM DCOM N Ti 33 DCOM 33 DCOM SVRAW 9 A DCOM 12 gt lt 34 DCOM A DCOM lt 3 DCOM DCOM A 12 DCOM DCOM 12 34 DCOM A DCOM 12 34 DCOM DCOM 34 DCOM 15VREG 13 1SVREB K 1SVREG 13 35 I5VREG ISVREG 35 ISVREG 15VREG 18VREG A 15VREG 13 15VREG 15VREG 13 35 18VREG A 15VREG 13 35 I5VREG 15 35 ISVR G 03 SvREG 14 5VREG_ AR 5VREG 14 lt 3e 5VREG SVREG 36 5VREG SVREG SVREG Al 5SVREG 14 5VREG AR 35VREG 14 36 5VREG_ A 5VREG 14 36 5VREG A SVREG 36 5VREG SVUNREG N C 15 C 5VSEN 5 BUFDBO 15 lt 37 BUFDB1 BUFOBO 37 AK BUFOBO BUFD
244. SOR EPROM 15 RUN MAIN PROGRAM 2 A5 PROCESSOR RAM 16 MEMORY OPERATIONS 3 A7 DATA BUS 17 RERUN SELF TEST 4 A14 DISPLAY PROCESSOR 18 REPEAT TEST LOOP 5 A14 DISPLAY RAM 6 A7 TIMER CLOCK RS 232 7 A7 PUBLIC GPIB DISC COMMANDS 8 A7 SYSTEM BUS 19 LOAD PROGRAM DISC 9 INTERRUPT SYSTEM 20 RECORD PROGRAM DISC 10 A5 MULTIPLIER 21 INITIALIZE DISC 11 A7 DISC CONTROLLER 12 A6 NON VOLATILE MEMORY 13 IF DETECTOR DATA SERVICE COMMANDS 85101 CPU BOARD TESTS A5 DRAM REFRESH TEST 22 RUN SERVICE PROGRAM 14 KEYBOARD 23 DIAGNOSE A FAILURE ENTER SELECTION THEN PRESS MARKER 8510 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU 85101 DISPLAY PROCESSOR SERVICE PROGRAM 1 85102 IF DETECTOR SERVICE PROGRAM TEST SET GPIB SERVICE PROGRAM 8360 SERVICE PROGRAM RETURN TO MAIN SERVICE FUNCTIONS MENU F see note 1 NOTES 1 Hex digits A thru F ore assigned to M uJ X1J 1 and C J respectively 2 See next page 3 See next page 4 See next page 2 To moke o selection type the number indicoted then press MARKER 3 The default value on dota entry is zero Copyright Agilent Technologies 1987 2001 READ WRITE SHIFT ACCUMULATOR TEST 2 MULTIPLIER TEST 3 COMPLEX MULTIPLY TEST 4 CIRCLE TEST EXERCISES MULTIPLIER 5 SIGNATURE ANALYSIS MULTIPLIER 6 SIGNATURE ANALYSIS ADDRESS BUS 7 SIGNATURE ANALYSIS DATA BUS 8 RETURN TO 85101 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU 1 For factory use only TO
245. Space Requirements An area must be provided for the system instruments The following table lists the space required for different configurations and includes the additional space for proper ventilation Table 9 3 System Space Requirements Height Width Depth 85043C System Cabinet 132 cm 60 cm 92 cm without work surface 52 in 24 in 36 in Bench Top System 60 cm 45 cm 60 cm arranged as single stack 24 in 18 in Q4 in arranged as two stacks E 113cm 60 cm 45 in 24 in a Refer toFigure 9 4 for a recommended cabinet configuration b Refer to Figure 9 5 for bench top configurations Electrical Requirements To determine the power requirements of a particular system add the volt amp ratings of theindividual instruments Theseratings can be found on therear panel of the instrument near the line module The voltage and frequency information can also be found the same general location WARNING Install the instrument so that the ON OFF switch is readily identifiable and is easily reached by the operator The ON OFF switch or the detachable power cord is the instrument disconnecting device It disconnects the mains circuits from the mains supply before other parts of the instrument Alternatively an externally installed switch or circuit breaker which is readily identifiable and is easily reached by the operator may be used as a disconnecting device Example 8510 System includes test equip
246. System Uncertainty Test Procedure is located later in this chapter Recommended Process Checks Description To assure the continued correct operation of the analyzer system the following process checks should be done periodically Recertify your calibration kit at the interval stated in your calibration kit manual or more often depending on the amount of use Review the connector care information summarized on the blue connector care card Consult a calibration kit manual for more detailed information to ensure that you are using correct connection techniques Record the system raw error terms and compare them to periodically generated lists of the same raw error terms By tracking the error terms you can monitor when the system is beginning to drift and usethe data to help troubleshoot the system Refer to the Error Terms section of Chapter 4 in this manual for information on how to generate a list of error terms Periodically measure the same device daily for example and compare the current results to the results previously measured When the data begins to deviate greatly refer to Chapter 4 in this manual 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Specifications Specifications Specifications are the limiting values of the individual system errors that describe the system performance This performance is different for each type of 8510 system configuration depending on test set s
247. T 15 screwdrivers Procedure To Disassemble items shown in parenthesis refer to the corresponding item numbers in Figure 6 3 1 Disconnect the power cords and remove the top and bottom covers 2 Remove seven screws two from the top edge of the frame and two from the bottom edge of the frame item 1 and three from the middle of the rear panel of the instrument item 2 3 Slide the rear panel partway out to access the ribbon cable connections to the motherboard 4 Remove the ribbon cables from the motherboard and slide the rear panel out To Reassemble 5 Reverse the preceding steps Torque frame screws item 1 to 113 N cm 10 in Ib Torque rear panel screws item 2 to 79 N cm 7 in Ib Figure 6 3 6 12 8510C On Site Service Manual Replacement Procedures 85101C Replacement Procedures A10 Preregulator Replacement Tools Required T 10 Torx screwdriver T 15 Torx screwdriver Large Pozidrive screwdriver Procedure The items shown in parentheses refer to the corresponding item numbers in Figure 6 2 To Disassemble 1 Perform the rear panel A9 disassembly procedure 2 Disconnect the preregulator cable from the post regulator board If necessary remove the 21 screws item 7 from the card cage cover Remove the card cage cover item 8 the RFI gasket item 6 and the PC board spacers item 5 3 Removethe four screws in the rear frame two on the top and two on the bottom item 4 4 Pull t
248. TAPE INDL 75 I N W 25 IN T POLYU FM 00000 Order by desc 11 85102 00033 1 BRACKET R FRONT 28480 85102 00033 12 85102 00034 1 BRACKET R REAR 28480 85102 00034 13 2200 1272 8 SCREW SM 440 5 ETPNTX 00000 Order by desc 14 2190 0011 8 WASHER LK INTL T NO 10 195 IN ID 28480 2190 0011 15 2680 0129 8 SCREW MACH 10 32 312 N LG 00000 Order by desc PAN HD POZI 16 85102 20053 1 COVER SAFETY 28480 85102 20053 5 42 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable P arts 85102B Replaceable Parts Figure 5 24 85102 Front places 7 2 places 2 places places Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number 1 1600 1423 4 VERTICAL LOCK FRONT 28480 1600 0367 2 85102 80116 1 DRESS PANEL 28480 85102 80116 3 5062 3735 1 COVER TOP 18 28480 5062 3735 4 5062 3799 2 HANDLE ASSEMBLY FRONT 28480 5062 3799 5 85102 00043 1 BOTTOM COVER 28480 85102 00043 6 5041 8801 4 FOOT BOTTOM 28480 5041 8801 7 5062 3757 2 COVER ASSEMBLY SIDE 28480 5062 3757 8 85102 20054 1 FRONT BEZEL MACH 28480 85102 20054 W63 85102 60193 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY LINE SWITCH 28480 85102 60193 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 43 Replaceable P arts 85102B Replaceable Parts Table 5 16 85102 Rear Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number 08756 20073 1 FAN 85102B 28480 08756 20073 E3 0360 0031 TERMINAL CRIMP R TNG 76 22 16 AWG RED 28480
249. TART 124688279 GHz STOP 49 999999879 GHz Bad Cable This check requires a full 2 port measurement calibration with isolation and 1024 averages Since the total measurement uncertainty test also requires the same measurement calibration this check should be done in the first portion of that test NOTE Each system configuration has a different dynamic range specification Usethe effective dynamic range specifications Ref min Edrr2 Edrr1 that are found on theresidual error w correction on table generated from the specifications performance verification software 1 Terminate each test port with a broadband load included the calibration kit On the analyzer press FORMAT LOG MAG PARAMETER S21 RESPONSE MENU AVERAGING ON for sweepers 1 2 8 x1 for synthesizers 1 0 2 4 x1 Allow at least one complete sweep until the asterisk at the left side of the display disappears 2 Compare the measured dynamic range to the specification on the generated table 8 40 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Operational Check Procedures NOTE Test sets with Option 003 reversed coupler have a different specification for forward and reverse measurements M easure the dynamic range in both S12 and S21 parameters 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 41 Performance Verification and Specifications Frequency Test Procedures Frequency Test Procedures The frequency tests are only
250. TEST A21 RUN ALL THE ABOVE TESTS 85102 FRONT PANEL TEST RETURN TO 8510 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU NOTE Always check cables leading to ond from boords with suspected problems B M uJ C k m fail tests 1 or 2 due to processor speed issue when running all tests If tests 1 and 2 poss individually then ossume the instrument is OK 8510C SERVICE PROGRAM MENU LCD 2 OF 2 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Error Terms Error Terms Overview Error terms are factors used for error correction or accuracy enhancement in the analyzer system when correction is turned on Error terms are numbers generated and stored in internal arrays during a measurement calibration They are also known as E terms or measurement calibration coefficients Descriptions of the individual error terms are provided at the end of this section Error terms can also serve a diagnostic purpose Specific parts of the analyzer system and accessories contribute to the values of the error terms Since we know this correlation and we know what typical error terms look like we can examine error terms to monitor system performance or to identify faulty components in the system Error terms are created by measuring well defined calibration devices over the frequency range of interest and comparing the measured data with the ideal model for the devices Neglecting drift and random errors such as noise the dif
251. TIFIES THE ASSEMBLY THE OTHER NUMBERS REFER TO THE UST ON THE RIGHT OF THIS FOLDOUT USE THIS BLOCK DIAGRAM AS A QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE TO SYSTEM FAILURES AS WELL AS A GUIDE TO LED LOCATION AND MEANING TEST SET ADDRESS AND CONFIGURATION SWITCH SETTINGS ARE ALSO SHOWN NUMBERS 1 14 THESE NUMBERS IDENTIFY THE SELF TEST THAT EXERCISES THE PARTICULAR ASSEMBLY MOSTLY ON THE 85101 DISPLAY PROCESSOR FOR MORE INFORMATION REFER TO SELF TEST FAILURES IN THE ON SITE SERVICE MANUAL NUMBERS 15 36 THESE NUMBERS IDENTIFY THE BUILT IN RUNNING ERROR MESSAGE THAT WILL APPEAR ON THE 85101 CRT IF A SYSTEM FALURE IS DETECTED MOSTLY ON THE 85102 IF DETECTOR TEST SET AND HP SOURCE THE NUMBERS IDENTIFY THE ASSEMBUES WHERE THE ERROR IS DETECTED OR GENERATED FOR MORE INFORMATION REFER TO RUNNING ERROR MESSAGES IN THE ON SITE SERVICE MANUAL NUMBERS 37 41 THESE NUMBERS IDENTIFY RUNNING ERROR MESSAGES ASSOCIATED WITH HP8360 SERIES SOURCES ONLY APPEAR ON THE 85101 CRT NUMBERS 42 44 THESE ARE EXTRA TROUBLESHOOTING SUGGESTIONS TEST SET CONFIGURATION SWITCHES LOCATED ON A3 SUMMING AMP BOARO INSIDE TEST SET MUST 8E SET AS SHOWN BELOW 8511 851 4 2 8 8 100 NOTE DARK SIDE SW TCH 15 DEPRESSED TERELIT NOTE CONFIGURATION SWITCH SETTINGS ARE NOT USED ON OTHER TEST SETS SUCH AS 85148 8516A 8517A NOTE PROBLEMS MAY RESULT IF
252. TOOLS MENU MORE DISABLE DOUBLER asterisk on CW 4 0 G n Measure the frequency with the counter and record the value on the test record located at the end of this chapter For the 83651 5 Fromthe analyzer front panel enter 2 6 5 G n NOTE Make sure the test set output is connected to the 500 MHz to 26 5 GHz input on the frequency counter The input switch must also be set tothe 500 MHz to 26 5 GHz position Measure the frequency with the counter and record the value on the test record located at the end of this chapter 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 43 Performance Verification and Specifications Frequency Test Procedures 6 Insert the 8510 operating disc into the analyzer disc drive to run the front panel emulation software In the 83651 an internal frequency doubler is used to generate frequencies of 226 5 GHz through 50 GHz Sincethe highest frequency that the frequency counter can measure is 26 5 GHz the doubler is disabled for the measurement at 50 GHz providing an RF output of 25 GHz This verifies a 50 GHz output except for the operation of the doubler Sincethe doubler is engaged to produce the 26 5 GHz RF output the operation of the doubler is verified in the 26 5 GHz measurement 7 On the analyzer press AUXILIARY MENUS SYSTEM MORE SERVICE FUNCTIONS TEST MENU 1 9 LOAD PROGRAM DISC ZMARKER LOAD FILE 2 FRONT PANEL EMULATOR MARKER 8 Put the keypad overlay on the analyz
253. Therefore the environmental temperature must remain in therange of 420 to 26 C Once calibrated the environmental temperature must not vary more than 1 The temperature of the devices is also important because their electrical characteristics change with temperature The devices should have been removed from their slots in the boxes and set on top of the foam to allow them to reach room temperature 5 Check the standards data in the verification printout against the printed data that came with the verification kit Make sure that the cal coefficients are the correct ones for your kit For example the 85052B calibration kit should be using a revision B xn xx or B n cal coefficient disk or tape where B B type cal kit revision number x don t care If they do not agree contact your Agilent customer engineer 6 Perform the calibration and verification procedures again Make sure all connections are good and properly torqued When you connect a device you can gently tap on it with your finger to see if the display traceis stable If not reconnec the device and try again 7 If the procedure still fails and another calibration kit or verification kit is available try substituting kits 8 Usethe verification program to print out the system error terms If necessary you will usethis printout in step 10 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 119 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Performance Test Failures 9 If the verification is
254. UARD 28480 3160 0300 16 0510 0110 3 NUT CAP 6 32 THD 281 IN THK 312 A F 00000 Order by desc 17 2190 0006 2 WASHER LK HLCL NO 6 141 IN ID 28480 2190 0006 18 2190 0007 4 WASHER LK INTL T NO 6 141 IN ID 28480 2190 0007 19 2360 0205 2 SCREW M ACH 6 32 75 IN LG PAN HD POZI 00000 Order by desc 20 3050 0227 4 WASHER FL MTLC NO 6 149 IN ID 28480 3050 0227 21 85102 20057 1 HEAT SINK 28480 85102 20057 22 5040 7221 2 FOOT REAR 28480 5040 7221 23 0515 2317 3 SCREW SMM3 5 12 PCPNTX 00000 Order by desc 24 2360 0115 36 SCREW M ACH 6 32 312 IN LG PAN HD POZI 00000 Order by desc 25 5021 8538 1 LOCK FOOTLLFT 28480 5021 8538 08360 60026 1 BD ASSY FP FLT BNC 28480 08360 60026 5 44 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable P arts 85102B Replaceable Parts Figure 5 25 85102 Rear W30 W36 B1 5 E6 W55 W38 w27 w56 w29 W19 places NOT VISIBLE FL1 moy be different 2 places 4 places than shown J2 M za memi L 242 2294 z 36 places 96969990909090999990969099 o 5 32222222220222222000000 _ m j Pe 2 used 5 Ploces J6 11 18 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number 0590 0663 2 NUT HEX 4 40 28480 0590 0663 3050 0235 2 WASHER FLAT 117 IN ID 28480 3050 0235 3050 0011 2 WASHER FLAT 1301N HD 28480 3050 0011 2200 0107 2 SCREW MACH 440 375IN LG 28480 2200 0107
255. User 2 Connect a cable between port 1 and port 2 Press PARAMETER User 4 b1 REDEFINE PARAMETER DRIVE Port 2 PHASE LOCK a2 REDEFINE DONE to observe the b1 power level trace through path 5 illustrated on this foldout The trace should be similar to the example trace typically within 5 dB Record the result for path 5 good or bad under the RF path diagram Press PARAMETER MENU User 2 b2 REDEFINE PARAMETER DRIVE Port 1 PHASE LOCK a1 REDEFINE DONE to observe the b2 power level trace through path 6 illustrated on this foldout The trace should be similar to the example trace typically within 5 dB Record the result for path 6 good or bad under the RF path diagram Find the Faulty Assembly Try to match the observed results recorded under the RF path diagrams with the results listed in the table of most probable failures below Out of 32 possible variations the table lists the variations that result from 12 of the most probable failures Iftheobserved results match a group of results in the table investigate the most probable cause given in the table If all the paths are good then the test set is probably working properly Return to the Main Troubleshooting Procedure to continue troubleshooting the system If the observed results do not match any of those given in the table re evaluate and possibly re measure your observed data If the data is valid troubleshoot using the RF pa
256. User 2 b2 REDEFINE PARAMETER DRIVE Port 1 PHASE LOCK a1 REDEFINE DONE to observe the b2 power level trace through path 6 illustrated on this foldout The trace should be similar to the example trace typically within 5 dB Record the result for path 6 good or bad under the RF path diagram Find the Faulty Assembly Try to match the observed results recorded under the RF path diagrams with the results listed in the table of most probable failures below Out of 32 possible variations the table lists the variations that result from 12 of the most probable failures Ifthe observed results match a group of results in the table investigate the most probable cause given in the table If ail the paths are good then the test set is probably working properly Return to the Main Troubleshooting Procedure to continue troubleshooting the system If the observed results do not match any of those given in the table re evaluate and possibly re measure your observed data If the data is valid troubleshoot using the RF path diagram s given in this foldout for the bad signal traces Most Probable Failure Test set is not the problem Source source cable VTO cables from rear panel to switch splitter Switch splitter Switch splitter a sampler sampler bz sampler Port 1 connector or directional coupler Port 2 connector or directional coupler BIAS 2 b2
257. VER RANGE FOR MORE INFORMATION REFER TO RUNNING ERROR SAMPLER el 16 16 42 24 42 1 2 14 20 ADC CAL FAILED MESSAGES IN THE ON SITE SERVICE MANUAL 001 LANG ADDRESS 19 i 5221 31 IF CAL FAILED REFERENCE 1 PORT 1 421 NUMBERS 37 41 100000000 E a 16 42 IF CAL FAILED BOTH chonnels gt gt Q 248 BAS 42 20 lab ASA T tee 120 418 a70 3 6 7 8 9 11 44 22 ADC NOT RESPONDING THESE NUMBERS IDENTIFY RUNNING ERROR MESSAGES CONVERTER 6 7 8 9 11 ASSOCIATED WITH 8360 SERIES SOURCES ONLY AND FOR ALL EXCEPT 8360 SERIES SOURCES 15 TAPERED rm 6 5 APPEAR ON THE 85101 CRI PRESS TO READ THE GPIB ADORESS T Saurier op 42 oi ERE 20 22 25 SOURCE SWEEP SYNC ERROR PRESS CHANGE THE ADDRESS AND USE i ASSEMBLY e 2i 26 SWEEP TIME TOO FAST NUMBERS 42 44 Hz KEY FOR 8340 41 TO ENTER CHANGE AS ATIEN 16 42 3 S Bene bey 27 SOURCE GPIB SYNTAX ERROR EE UTER wl i ey 28 TEST SET GPIB SYNTAX ERROR THESE ARE EXTRA TROUBLESHOOTING SUGGESTIONS 2 CHECK PRESET CONDITIONS AND SOURCE SELF TESTS 5 20 748 a DRIVER 100kHz 21 23 1 42 6 EEPROM 29 SYSTEM BUS ADDRESS ERROR 3 USE 60MHz 3rd HARMONIC BP FILTER TO SEE IF THE SYSTEM X 200 10 30 SYSTEM BUS SRO ERROR TEST SET CONFIGURATION SWITCHES WORKS WITH RF INPUT PART NUMBER 0955 0417 11 sawecer o 42 3 24 42 31
258. Verification and Specifications Som Per DOO s epit pee ge aad qe ba 8 3 Individual System Components caac sese Rede edie Re ed eee 8 3 Ap heads knee wee 8 3 Measurement 5 7 4 ORAS A XP dede XS Roe OX Pow Rr d 8 3 Mesurament ENO S LETT 8 3 System Performance Verification 8 5 Operational Checks Descriptiori sinc ERE DR RR GE Ge RR CR 8 5 Frequency Tests DESDE DEDE AX ect Re a eden ROC dde 8 5 Total System Uncertainty Test Description 8 5 Recommended Process Checks lt 8 6 Pe ML Tnm 8 7 Software for Performance Verification and Specifications 8 8 System Performance ESguipmmieni c usos s miu CAPR Rica dad 8 9 How talpa the SONAE usse Ba a d 8 10 Using the Keyboard or Mouse for Program Control 8 12 lit Cesar RUY M cc PRI cT 8 12 How to Verity System Performiafice uuu u u suwa pcc ex obe ip tl RR cx OR 8 13 Choosing to Edit Specificatloris 2 2 5 2 22 2 42 404 8 15 Using Customizing Fea
259. Y A16J 2 REAR PANEL J 9 28480 85102 60223 W41 85102 60224 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 20 2 REAR PANEL J 10 28480 85102 60224 W42 85102 60222 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 16 1 A23J 1 28480 85102 60222 W43 NOT ASSIGNED W44 85102 60174 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A6J 10 A8J 1 28480 85102 60174 5 40 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable P arts 85102B Replaceable Parts Figure 5 22 85102 Cable Locations wu 5 W30 W32 W36 Cu Il euim 3 yen 52 52 3 L VAS sDrm NS w31 W28 W22 w42 WHO W21 w25 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 41 Replaceable P arts 85102B Replaceable Parts Figure 5 23 85102 Bottom Internal 3 places 2 places 2 places p o o 0 0 O O O OQ 6 9 0 6 0 6 0 o o 6 4 22 used 55438 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number 1 2200 0165 3 SCREW MACH 4 40 25IN LG 82 DEG 00000 Order by desc 2 2360 0117 2 SCREW MACH 6 32 375 I N LG PAN HD POZI 00000 Order by desc 3 85102 00036 1 BRACKET L REAR 28480 85102 00036 4 2360 0202 2 SCREW MACH 6 32 625 I N LG 100 DEG 00000 Order by desc 5 0380 0018 2 SPACER RND 25 IN LG 194 I N ID 28480 0380 0018 6 85102 00035 1 BRACKET L FRONT 28480 85102 00035 7 2200 1272 26 SCREW SM 440 5 ETPNTX 28480 2200 1272 8 5021 8403 1 FRAME FRONT 28480 5021 8403 9 2200 1271 8 SCREW SM 440 375ETPNTX 28480 2200 1271 10 0460 0778 1
260. a dua b 3 16 PretunelF Count SEUEN Erat eK ROC RA ERROR 3 18 Main Phase Lock Sequence uus da ad dba ucl d dici da 3 19 Monitoring Phase LOCK weed POs eS P ERAT AERE 3 19 Monto mg ME YTO ou pesa Corde ddd ide doa e oa ded aos dab 3 20 Phase Lock Learn 2445 2 be ENS 3 20 Phase Lock Cycle Summary Including Running Error Messages 3 21 4 Main Troubleshooting Procedure CUI cuo eder Rura tus 4 2 Troubleshooting COELO sese dote dt deem ie bodies 4 3 KI S VEDO oy upan lol UP dob dca heed pica dod dob TT 4 4 Self TESEFSIWEDS oon fie nates eee ad tosta wat date HAE dos 4 4 Running Messages cus desee da thei e p ddnde abes qu e pd sun sassa 4 6 Unratiogd Power Failures deed 4 6 Other Obvious Failure ass us Uca das 4 6 Control Configuration and Cabling Pre Operational Checks 4 8 Front ong Rear Panele Deus c oss e mauu d e Rus P a a d HR 4 8 aede crate dius oer dd eh ae a Hee hve Rae chere Reo 4 8 BeylsloDs xi ua esae Rx eoo
261. ability of the non standard cables Cable loss dc and RF Reflection and transmission repeatability 0 4 dB should bethe calculated loss error term result For transmission stability Connect the cables together and measure S21 Look at S21 M then bend the cables For reflection stability Connect the short to port 1 cable and measure S11 Look at S11 M then bend the cables Repeat the reflection measurement on port 2 cable and measure S22 Table 8 8 Error Term Values Needed for This Custom Cable Question Port 1 Port 2 2 0 GHz 8 0 GHz 20 GHz 26 5 GHz ETerm ETerm What arethe new Ldic Ld2c 0 25 dB 0 25dB 0 25 0 25 dB calculated values for port 1 and port 2 error terms Lf1c Lf2c 0 40 dB 0 40dB 0 40 0 40 dB 1 Crm2 45 0 dB 41 0 35 0 31 0 dB Ctm2 0 02 dB 0 03 dB 0 04 dB 0 06 dB Cpf1 Cpf2 0 10 dB 0 10 dB 0 10 dB 0 10 dB Review the graph of the new error terms in the figures that follow The uncertainties are higher for the system using non standard cables than for the system using HP Agilent 85131F cables See Figure 8 5 and Figure 8 6 8 32 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Using the Software A Tutorial Figure 8 5 S21 Magnitude Uncertainty Using Custom Cables 621 MAGNITUDE LOWER WORST CRSE UNCERTAINTY DATA SHEET HP851 C HPBSISR HP83531R HP850S2C TL HPB85131F 16
262. aceable P arts Replaceable Parts for an 85101 Equipped with LCD 85101C Front Panel Internal with LCD Figure 5 15 5 29 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable P arts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD Table 5 11 85101C Rear Panel External with LCD Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Agilent Part Desig Number Code Number 1 5041 8821 2 STANDOFF REAR PANEL 28480 5041 8821 2 0515 0372 3 MACH SCREW M3 0 8MM PN TX 28480 0515 0372 3 0515 1232 2 MACH SCREW M3 5 8MM PN PD 28480 0515 1232 4 0515 0892 2 MACH SCREW M3 5 12MM PN PD 28480 0515 0892 5 5021 8537 1 LOCKING FOOT RIGHT 28480 5021 8537 6 5021 8539 1 LOCKING FOOT LEFT 28480 5041 8539 7 85101 60290 1 REAR PANEL BOARD ASSEMBLY 28480 85101 60290 8 2190 0586 4 WASHER LK HLCL 4 0M M 28480 2190 0586 9 0380 0643 4 STANDOFF HEX 255l N LG 6 32 28480 0380 0643 10 2190 0584 8 WASHER LK M3 0 NOM 28480 2190 0584 11 1251 7812 8 CONNECTOR JACKSCREW 28480 1251 7812 12 85101 00082 1 REAR PANEL 28480 85101 00045 13 7121 4611 1 LABEL MADE IN USA 28480 7121 4611 14 3050 1192 4 WASHER FL M3 5 NOM 28480 3050 1192 15 3160 0281 1 FINGER GUARD 28480 3160 0281 16 0515 0379 4 MACH SCREW M3 5 16MM PN TX 28480 0515 0379 17 08415 60036 1 FAN TUBE AXIAL 28480 08415 60036 5 30 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable P arts Replaceable Parts for an 85101 Equipped with an LCD Figure 5 16 85101C Rear Panel
263. an be no source substitutions for a system performance verification Cable Substitution Thetest port cables specified for an 8510 system have been characterized for connector repeatability magnitude and phase stability with flexing return loss insertion loss and aging rate Sincethe performance of test port cables is a very significant contributor tothe system performance substituting specified cables with cables that have not been carefully characterized will increase the uncertainty of your measurement verification If a 8 94 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Measurement Uncertainties substitute cable is used that is of lesser quality than characterized in the verification program the performance verification is no longer valid Refer tothe plots in the cable checks earlier in this chapter that show the difference in performance between good and bad cables It is highly recommended to periodically check test port cables to determine if they are good If the system verification is performed with non Agilent cables and fails but is then repeated with Agilent cables and passes the non Agilent cables are at fault It must be documented in the comments area of the performance verification printout that non Agilent cables were used in the system The effects of the non specified cables cannot be taken into account in the performance verification procedure without fully characterizing the cables and m
264. analysis of the error model in Figure 8 18 yields an equation for the reflection magnitude uncertainty The equation contains all of the first order terms and the significant second order terms Theterms under the radical are random in character and are combined on an RSS basis Theterms in the systematic error group are combined on a worst case basis In all cases the error terms and the S parameters treated as linear absolute magnitudes Reflection magnitude uncertainty forward direction Erm Systematic Random Drift Systematic S11 5112 S21 S12 Efl Ab1 S11 Random dicey Rr w Cr 2Ctm1S11 Crmis11 2 Cm2821812 2 Rr em 2cn1811 enisi Cr2821812 Nr Jti Ef Drift amp Stability Dm1b1 S11 where Crm2 cable 2 reflection magnitude stability Efnt effective noise on trace Dms1 drift magnitude x C source to port 1 Efnf effective noise floor Efs effective source match error Crt1 connector repeatability transmission effective reflection tracking error 1 connector repeatability reflection effective load match error Ctm1 cable 1 transmission magnitude stability Efd effective directivity error Crm1 1 reflection magnitude stability 2 connector repeatability reflection 8 78 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Measurement Uncertainties
265. and measurement trace see Figure 4 7 The measurement operating system software is now running 4 54 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Self Test Failures Figure 4 7 Typical Power Up Display ss BE E E m Thetype of display that you see depends on the contents of instrument state 8 This power up state is factory set to an 511 log mag display over a typical default frequency range of 2 GHz to 18 GHz However instrument state 8 can be changed Therefore your display may appear different Subtests Subtests arethe buildings blocks of most self tests Subtests further isolate a self test failure by revealing which part of the self test failed This information can help to further verify that a particular board is faulty In most repair situations subtest information is not required or useful because of Agilent s assembly level repair strategy for this instrument If you want to simulate this type of failure to see an example of a failure message press 9 and keep it pressed in Then press TEST Keep the entry key 9 pressed in until the failure message appears How to Identify a Self Test Failure Self test failures are displayed three ways BytheL CD CRT Bythefront panel LEDs BytheCPU board LEDs When the display is operating properly it displays self test failureinformation as shown above In such instances read the most likely causes for failure and troubles
266. and switch off power again before removing the next Check the 45 V LED on A15 after each assembly is removed When removing a particular assembly causes the LED to light that assembly is probably defective and should be replaced If removing assemblies does not cause the 45 V LED to light the fault is probably in the A15 regulator Replace A15 Check the LEDs and Output Voltages of A26 Rectifier Check the four green LEDs on rectifier A26 They should all be on fall the LEDs are off check the power line module and P1 connector plug f any oneLED is out check the continuity of the corresponding fuse See Figure 4 19 e f an LED is off but its fuse is good A26 is bad replace it f you change a fuse and its LED is still out go to Check Connector P1 to check the continuity of P1 and the unloaded ac secondary voltages from transformer T1 IftheLEDs are on this means that voltages are present but it does not necessarily mean they are at the correct values 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 113 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure 85102 IF Detector Power Supply Troubleshooting Figure 4 19 A26 Rectifier Fuse Locations g i gt B E9 E8 E7 E6 E5 Eu 2 5 UNREG 15 UNREG 15 UNREG 5 UNREG Next measure the four unregulated output voltages of the rectifier Measure at either side of the fuses see Figure 4 19 The voltages should measure approximately 22 V dc out of the 15 V rectifier
267. anual Adjustments Procedure 3 CRT Display Intensity Adjustments from the black border 4 When the adjustment is complete press MARKER Operating Default Intensity Adjustment This adjustment sets the default level of the display intensity The analyzer normally presets to the same intensity level that was last used This level is stored in volatile memory If you switch the power on and off the memory is lost Then the analyzer uses the default display intensity to ensure that the display is visible and eliminate concern that the display may not be functioning Thelevel is set using a photometer that measures the output light 1 Tostart the adjustment press ZMARKER 2 Set the photometer probe to NORMAL Press POWER on the photometer to switch the power on and allow 30 minutes warm up Zerothe photometer according to the manufacturer s instructions The analyzer CRT should have an all white screen Figure 7 3 Maximum Intensity Adjustment Setup RNRLYZER LIGHT OCCLUDER a a m Q a 3 Center the photometer on the analyzer CRT as shown in Figure 7 3 Adjust the analyzer front panel knob to the maxi mum dockwise position If the photometer registers greater than 100 NITs turn the front panel knob until a reading of no more than 100 NITs registers on the photometer If the photometer does not register a reading of 100 NITs the display is faul
268. anual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Running Error Messages IF Overload or O The error message CAUTION IF OVERLOAD is displayed and or an O is displayed on the left side of the display Both error messages indicate that the 85102 IF amplifier A10 or A12 is overloaded The CPU detects the overload condition from a status bit on the A10 or A121F boards Theo on the left side of the display is usually an intermittent failure that can disappear during a measurement sweep Do not be overly concerned with this type of error O can appear if you are measuring a device with a sharp change in response typically greater than 24 dB This is normal and happens because the 85102 A10 A12 IF amp autoranging cannot respond fast enough to a step in RF power greater than 24 dB at adjacent data points It is sometimes possible to eliminate the O by doing one of the following Slow down the sweep time Change ramp sweep to step sweep mode Change the number of points Change the frequency span Probable cause of failure Operator error The 8510C maybe operated in manual mode with the source power too high samplers are receiving excessive RF power e Thereis 20 dB pad on thethru cable for an R T test set 8512 F gain is too high Access thelF gain test and control by pressing AUXILIARY MENUS SYSTEM MORE SERVICE FUNCTIONS IF GAIN Troubleshooting e Run 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode Initiali
269. are Revisions Operation Internal Switches continued Remove the top covers 85101 A5 CPU board free run switch all zeros Test set A3S1 configuration switch see troubleshooting block diagram 8350 A3S1 configuration switch see troubleshooting block diagram Make sure you have completed the control configuration and cabling checks If there is still a self test failure running error message unratioed power failure or other obvious failure type then go to the appropriate troubleshooting section If not continue to No Obvious Failure Type ss421c 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 19 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Troubleshooting Outline No Obvious Failure Type Verify the 85101C Display Processor The best approach to troubleshooting an 8510C when you are not aware of any obvious failure type is to verify that the 85101C display processor is working properly When its operation is verified it will act as your diagnostic controller Reduce the analyzer system to its basic structure Disconnect all peripherals such as printer plotter controller and all their cables The core system remaining should consist only of 8510 network analyzer test set source The system should be connected as shown in Figure 4 1 on page 4 10 If the 85101 display processor passed the self tests at power up without displaying self test failure messages 1 to 14 it is already verified to a 7096 confidence level The following test
270. ased on the start frequency input to the display processor It also counts the VT O fundamental frequency Main Phase Lock A23 assembly is used during pretune and as part of the main phase locked loop Miscellaneous Assemblies Motherboard A25 assembly interconnects all of the other assemblies Regulator A15 assembly provides four regulated DC voltages H5V 15V 45V 5V Rectifier A26 assembly rectifies line voltage ac to dc for the IF detector 8510C On Site Service Manual 3 9 Theory of Operation 85101 Display Processor 85101 Display Processor The 85101 display processor is the system controller data processor and display unit for the 8510 system It consists of the processor EEPROM non volatile memory the display and I O ports The 85101 controls the 85102 I F detector via a dedicated interface bus I F display interconnect It controls the test set and source via one dedicated GPIB HP IB port 8510 system interconnect and interfaces with an external controller printer or plotter a second GPIB HP IB port In addition the display processor can address printers and plotters via two RS 232 ports Processor Assemblies Processor Assembly A5 performs all system control and computation functions This assembly contains Themain processor or CPU a 68020 32 bit microprocessor A separate math coprocessor Themain processor memory RAM 2 Mbyte The system ROM LEDstoindicate self test
271. ations The exercises do not need to be completed in any particular order Exercise shows you how to modify error terms for a custom system Exercise 3b shows you how to modify error terms for a custom test set Exercise shows you how to edit error terms for custom cables in a test setup Exercise shows you how to edit error terms to calculate uncertainties for measuring a non ideal test device Select Edit Specs from the Main menu This selection allows you to edit the system specifications tables You can change power levels averaging factors or error terms After you finish editing the software prompts you to recompute the effective terms that are calculated by the program crosstalk noise on trace noise floor power ref power max and power min Review the modify edit key descriptions of the menu selections in Handling Customized Error Terms in this section Using a Custom Calibration Kit Exercise 3a You have purchased a 3 5 mm broadband load calibration kit from another manufacturer You want to usethis kit on an 8510SX system to make reflection measurements at 26 5 GHz The known return loss of a broadband load at 26 5 GHz is 35 dB Thereis 2 phase error on both the open and short terminations 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 23 Performance Verification and Specifications Using the Software A Tutorial These factors requirethat you changethe following error terms to the values listed E
272. atona 11 JI 11 11 J a2 Source source cable VTO FINE DONE to redefine b2 cables from rear panel to Switch splitter 3 Connect an open or short to port 1 and port 2 This reflects power back to the b1 and b2 2 samplers through the coupler Switch splitter 52 m s ES TAPERED E T Switch splitter o2 COUPLER 22 El COUPLER a2 COUPLER a2 Q COUPLER 22 5 COUPLER pa SWITCH Most Probable Failure PATH 4 b2 Reflected PATH 5 b1 Thru PATH 6 b2 Thru 4 Find the test set RF paths and example frequency response traces on this foldout Press User 1 a1 User 2 b2 User 3 a2 and User 4 b1 Each trace should be similar to the example traces on this foldout typically within 5 dB m T RF IN SPLITTER RF IN LY SPLITTER RF IN gr SPLITTER RF IN SPLITTER RF IN SPLITTER Record the results for paths 1 through 4 User 1 through User 4 in Table 4 3 3 Samp TUNE TUNE TUNE JUNE TUNE b sampler PRETUNE PRETUNE PRETUNE PRETUNE PRETUNE VTO SENSE VIO SENSE VTO SENSE VTO SENSE VTO SENSE Check RF Paths 5 and 6 Port 1 connector or directional ei x COUPLER o1 LJ COUPLER o1 COUPLER at COUPLER o1 COUPLER coupler These paths are Port 2 connector or directional b coupler b1 Thru p RF Path 5 User 4 RF Path 6 User 2 b2 Thru SWITCH b1 b1 b1 b1 1 Connect a cable between port 1 and
273. automatically when the operating system 8510c is loaded See the 8360 Service Program M enu on page 4 145 for details on using the 8360 front panel emulator 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 65 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Self Test Failures Disc Command 20 Record Program Disc Usethis selection to record a backup copy of the operating system on an initialized see below blank disk Use DEFAULT TITLE to select the default program filename 8510 Use REPLACE MENU to overwrite an existing program file on the disk Slide the disk into the disk drive In the Main Service Functions test menu press 2 0 MARKER Press DEFAULT TITLE and press STORE FILE to record the operating system program from the network analyzer to a program file PG 8510 onthedisk Disc Command 21 Initialize Disc Usethis selection to initialize a disk prior to recording the operating system on it You can use a disk that has been recorded on before or not but it should be double sided high density 1 44 MB and of good quality Slidethe disk intothe disk drive In the Main Service Functions test menu press 2 1 about a minute the disk will beinitialized in the LIF format needed for recording the operating system Service Command 22 Run Service Program Refer tothe Service Program section to usethis selection Service Command 23 Diagnose a Failure This selection displays the failure message for a self test and su
274. available Press Done 14 Insert the verification kit disc into the analyzer disc drive and press Resume 15 Measurethe environmental temperature and record the results on the test record at the end of this chapter NOTE For specified performance the environmental temperature at the time of verification must be within 1 lt 1 8 of the measurement calibration temperature 16 Press Measure Data 17 If the measurement calibration sets and corresponding analyzer registers that appear on the display not correct return to the system calibration menu by pressing Prior Menu Prior Menu If the measurement calibration sets are valid connect the verification device between the test port cables and press Resume 18 After the measurement is complete view the results of each parameter measurement Press S11 S12 S21 S22 19 Press Print to create a hardcopy of the verification results 20 If the system passes all the parameter measurements of the device press Select Standard to select another verification device measurement If the system does not pass all the parameter measurements refer to If the System Fails Performance Verification later in this chapter 21 Usethe cursor keys and the Next and Previous softkeys to select another verification standard and to change the device serial number Press Done Resume 22 Repeat steps 16 through 21 until all the devices in the verification
275. ay processor last to avoid system lockup 6 When a graticule appears on the analyzer display the instrument has finished initializing Press CONTINUE 7 The following prompt is displayed ADJUST R51 FOR 20 MHz 50 HZ 8 Refer to Figure 7 11 for the location of A6R51 Adjust A6R511 for a frequency counter reading of 20 MHz 50 Hz 9 When the adjustment is complete press CONTINUE to return to the menu 7 28 8510C On Site Service Manual Adjustments Procedure 8 Clock Adjustment 10 If either of the following prompts is displayed refer to the troubleshooting chapter 20 MHz FREQUENCY COUNTS LIMIT 20 MHz 50 Hz Freq Delta 10 Hz FIRST COUNT XXXXXXXX SECOND COUNT XXXXXXXX FREQUENCY IS OUT OF LIMIT or FREQUENCY UNSTABLE COUNT 1 COUNT 2 TOO LARGE 11 Switch off the analyzer power and return the equipment to the original configuration Be sure to reconnect the 85102 cables in the original configuration Figure 7 11 Location of Clock Adjustment v 45 4 i gq Me J ON A6 CLOCK 5 ES A6R51 8510C On Site Service Manual 7 29 Adjustments Procedure 8 Clock Adjustment 7 30 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications 8 1 Performance Verification and Specifications Overview This chapter describes the following topics System performance System performance verification Specif
276. b port 1 2 Crm1 Crm2 Fac Char Cable Trans Mag stab port 1 2 Ctm1 Ctm2 Fac Char Cable Ph F GHz stab port 1 2 Cpf1 Cpf2 Fac Char Used in the corrected error model flowgraph to determine measurement uncertainty TUsed in the corrected error model flowgraph to determine dynamic accuracy 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 85 Performance Verification and Specifications Measurement Uncertainties Table 8 12 Channel Error Term Symbols Error Term Eterm Symbol Additional Information low Freg Cutoff port 1 2 to b1 b2t Fc1b1 F c2b2 Fac Comp Source to a1 a2 Fcsal Fcsa2 low Freg Slope port 1 2 to b1 62 Fs1b1 Fc2b2 Fac Comp Source to a1 a2 Fssal 55 2 Drift Mag deg c port 1 2 to b1 b2t 01161 Dm2b2 Fac Char Source to al a2 1 Dmsa2 Drift Ph deg c port1 2to b1 b2 0 161 Dp2b2 Fac Char Source to al a2 1 Dpsa2 Drift Ph deg c F GHz Src to port to 1 2 Dpf1b1 Dpf2b2 Fac Char Source to al a2 Dpfsa1 Dpfsa2 Loss dc port 1 2 to convertor b1 b2t 4101 Ld2b2 Source to al a2 dsa1 Ldsa2 Loss sqr F GHz port 1 2 to conv b1 b2 Lf1b1 Lf2b2 Typical Source to a1 a2 Lfsal Lfsa2 Loss dc convertor to F Ldvib1 Ldvib2 Typical Ldvial Ldvia2 Loss 2 convertor to F Lfvib1 Lfvib2 Typical Lfvial Lfvia2 Damage Level D1b1 D1b2 Fac Char D1al D1a2 Power at conver for 0 1 compress t Pccb1 Pccb2 Factory 1 Pcca2 Raw rms IF noise floor Rntb1
277. bad begin by troubleshooting the 85101C power supply 85101C Power Supplies Summary Included are a short power supply troubleshooting summary and a longer in depth procedure The summary is provided for troubleshooters who are familiar with the 85101C power supply circuitry Thein depth procedure is provided for troubleshooters having minimum familiarity with the operation of the 8510C power supplies Refer to Figure 4 11 The 85101C display processor power supply consists of the following assemblies A10 preregulator assembly post regulator board assembly assemblies are related to A10 and since power is supplied to each assembly Therefore a failure of any assembly can affect the power supply NOTE The 85101C equipped with an LCD uses the same A10 and A3 assemblies as an 85101C equipped with a CRT display The 465 V supply from the A3 post regulator is not used in the 85101C with an LCD and ends at the motherboard connector for A3 Refer to Figure 4 11 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 97 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Power Supply Failures Figure 4 11 85101C Power Supply Simplified Block Diagram A10 PRE REGULATOR MOTHERBOARD A8 LINE POWER 5V DIGITAL LOW POWER FAIL WARNING Refer to the 85101 Power Supplies Detailed Block Diagram at the end of this section to see signal paths and specific connector pin numbers 85102 Power Supplies Summary The 85102 power supply consists of
278. bar Source TNG eene Tongue aint tere Panel SCR Screw Silicon Controlled Tapping Rectifier PAN HD Head Serial TTL Transistor Transistor Log c Printed Circuit 561 Single TX ui ciet eren Torx PD Pad Palladium Pitch Shaft U Diameter Power Dissipation Perforated 5 Silicon UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc PK tens Package Sink uuu usss Undercut PL suu Phase Lock Plain Plate SKT iii eroe Skirt Socket V Plug PNP Positive Negative Positive SOE Volt Transistor POLYU nis Polyurethane SMB SubminaturetypeB Video Graphics Adapter Snap on Conductor icta Pozidrive Sample W 25 Processor Special Watt Width PVC usce Polyvinyl Chloride STR Strapped Stop Width PW ies Power Wirewound SUBMIN Subminature X iom xe Power SW Switch Transducer R SWP sire baies Sweep XSTR Transistor Rig
279. bility of the GPIB chips to communicate with each other in both directions to and from The display message will prompt you to connect the GPIB tothe SYSTEM bus Usethe GPIB cablethat would normally connect the test set to the 85101C and makethe connection from the system bus to the GPIB on the rear panel of the 85101C Then run the test If thetest fails the A7 board the cable connection or the cable may be faulty Static Interrupt System Test A7 8 This routine exercises the CPU interrupt system on the A7 1 0 board This is a static test of the interrupt system it is a simple means of detecting major system problems 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 133 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Service Program RPG Test A1 A7 9 Tests the RPG rotary pulse generator knob and front panel interface to that knob Run the test and verify that the displayed RPG count is 00 Hex Turn the knob counterclockwise and verify that the count increases Then turn the knob clockwise and verify that the count decreases You can go either way because the count wraps around from 00 Hex toFF Hex Keyboards and LEDs Test A1 A7 A G n Tests the front panel keys and LEDs and their interfaceto the A7 1 board Run the test and first check that the 85101C front panel LEDs RLTS 1248 areflashing on and off If they are not the A1 or A7 board is faulty However if they are flashing continue the test by pressing the key that is displayed on the C
280. bits to the display processor and enables the I F detector and display processor to communicate 3 8 8510C On Site Service Manual Theory of Operation 85102 IF Detector Control Assemblies The control assemblies control the functioning and timing of the system and enable communication within the system The phase lock assemblies are described later Front Panel and Front Panel Interface A1 assembly enables the user to control the 8510 displays the statues of power on off and the active channel 1 or 2 ADC Control A19 provides the control for the A17 sample and hold assembly and the A18 analog to digital converter It is controlled by the display processor and works in conjunction with the A20 sweep ADC assembly Sweep ADC A20 assembly triggers the sample and hold assembly to take data at the proper frequency intervals Note that as the 8510 system sweeps the intervals are determined by the display processor Clock A6 assembly provides four reference ti ming and calibration signals ReferencelF signals for the main phase locked loop Timing signals for the synchronous detectors Timing signals for the 19 9 MHz local oscillator e The 100 kHz calibration signal for the IF Phase Lock Assemblies IF Counter A21 assembly counts the 20 MHz IF signal and checks for the power level and valid frequency count for both pretune and main lock Pretune Phase Lock A22 assembly lets the system initiate a pretune phase lock b
281. btest of your choice Use it to read failure messages when the display goes blank but is not faulty Refer to How to Identify a Self Test Failure toward the beginning of this section Obtain the self test and subtest numbers as directed Press SYSTEM MORE SERVICE FUNCTIONS TEST MENU to enter the Main Service Functions test menu Then press 2 3 ZMARKER to display the diagnose a failure screen Enter the self test and subtest numbers obtained above and press Z MARKER The LCD CRT should display the appropriate failure messages 4 66 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Self Test Failures How to Reload the Operating System You can reload the operating system from RAM or from the disk Toreload from RAM press the recessed TEST button This re initializes the system reruns the self tests sequence and if nofailures occur displays the power up instrument state number 8 If the operating system does not reload properly from RAM you can reload it from disk But do soonly as a last resort Refer to Disc Command 19 Load Program Disc on page 4 65 If the Disc Command 19 Load Program Disc or the Main Service Functions test menu cannot be accessed because of an operating system or loading error then turn off the 85101C display processor Hold down the ZMARKER key on the front panel whileturning on the 85101C K eep the ZMARKER key pressed until the keyboard self test failure message appears the di
282. by Desc 8 2420 0002 3 NUT HEX 6 32 00000 Order by Desc 9 1400 0017 1 CLAMP CABLE 312 DIA 375 WD NYL 28480 1400 0017 10 3050 0227 4 WASHER FL MTLC NO 6 149 IN ID 28480 3050 0227 11 2360 0121 3 SCREW SM 632 500PNPD 00000 Order by Desc 12 1400 0757 1 CLAMP CABLE 25 DIA 1 WD PVC 28480 1400 0757 13 5020 8896 2 FRONT HANDLE TRIM 28480 5020 8896 5 46 8510C On Site Service Manual Figure 5 27 85102 Front Panel Board Assembly 8510 FRONT PANEL FRONT A1 Replaceable P arts 85102B Replaceable Parts A1A1 A1 2 ploces Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number A1 85102 60001 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY FRONT PANEL NEW 28480 85102 60001 A1 85102 69001 BOARD ASSEMBLY FRONT PANEL R E 28480 85102 69001 1 1 85102 60029 1 BOARD ASSY FRONT PANEL INTERFACE 28480 85102 60029 NEW 1 1 85102 69029 BOARD ASSY FRONT PANEL INTERFACE 28480 85102 69029 R E 1 0380 0020 2 SPACER RND 25 I N LG 128 I N I D 00000 Order by Desc 2 2190 0019 2 WASHER LK HLCL NO 4 115 IN ID 28480 2190 0019 3 2260 0001 2 NUT HEX DBL CHAM 4 40 THD 28480 2260 0001 094 IN THK 4 85102 60214 1 SUB PANEL 28480 85102 60214 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 47 Replaceable P arts 85102B Replaceable Parts Table 5 17 85102 Motherboard 1 of 2 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number C1 0180 3017 1 CAPACITOR FXD 045F
283. c ul scares aos e enit e xr kn RR 4 71 IF Detector ADC Running Error 4 71 Source Sweep Running Error 4 71 GPIB Running Error Messages 4 71 Running Error Message 5 4 72 System L evel Troubleshooting Block Diagram 4 72 Helpful Troubleshooting as usada nisi rani itan dean 4 72 Alphabetical List of Caution Running Error Messages 4 73 Cie PERPE LIC EI 4 73 ADC No Respon IG a usado acer Raden X Ron i Ree dore don A ede 4 73 Poor ipo cal PAC acid palos bog ees clue 4 74 Caution Optional Function Not Installed cu RYE 4 74 Dp ca On E ERO ion eae det Poel aim wake 4 74 Disc Hardware uou ceder gn oem ofrecido acre ice mad tete aoe 4 74 Disc Rede DC EI usate xe pad b dope dut tess d aO 4 74 Disc Media Wearing Out Replace Soon 4 75 Failure Check System Bus 4 75 Failure Fault Indicator rea sedere en dog qaqaqa e maq 4 75 c Wer modu SELON Sek beads S n dog t dd
284. cables descri bed above Question Which transmission and reflection tests do you perform to determine the stability of the non standard cables Refer to the 8510C On Site Servi ce Manual as needed While you are working on the system you perform a 2 port calibration Then you connect the cables together and store the transmission measurement in memory Next you bend the connected cables by the same amount that the cables are bent during a measurement Looking at S21 M data memory you find the cable s transmission magnitude repeatability to as indicated below 0 02 dB for frequency range ending at 2 GHz 0 03 dB for frequency range ending at 8 GHz 0 04 dB for frequency range ending at 20 GHz 0 06 dB for frequency range ending at 26 GHz The S21 M phase measurements showed 0 12 around 0 at 1 GHz You find the cable s reflection magnitude stability Crm to be the following values 45 dB at 2 GHz 41 dB at 8 GHz 35 dB at 20 GHz 31 dB at 26 GHz 1 Question What are the new values for the following error terms Refer to Table 8 8 to verify answers Port 1 Ld1c Lf1c Crm1 Ctm1 Port 2 Ld2c Lf2c Crm2 Ctm2 Cpf2 Task Knowing the information above press Edit Specs Enter the new values for the above error terms U sethe Next and Tab keys to edit values a Enter the error terms Lf1c Lf2c Cpf1 and Cpf2 as constants over the software s frequency breakpoints At any frequency you can calcu
285. ce For additional assurance that the source is working you can run the operator s check procedure in the source manual If the procedures in this 8510 service manual indicate a fault in the source refer tothe troubleshooting procedures in the service manual for that particular source 4 22 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Troubleshooting Outline Abbreviated 8510C System Service Flowchart cont HARDWARE EMULATOR TOOLS If all the previous tests pass there is a high level of confidence that the 85101C and 85102 are working properly Test Set Emulator Substitute the service adapter for the test set Follow the procedure in Unratioed Power Failure to verify that the test set is working Source Emulator Apply 60 MHz from the 85102 to the test set using the source emulator Follow the procedure in Other Failures For 8360 source use the front panel emulator over the 85102 keys Other Tests for the Source If a source failure is indicated run the source operator s check procedure in the source manual 55423 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 23 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Troubleshooting Outline This pageintentionally left blank 4 24 8510C On Site Service Manual HOW TO READ THIS BLOCK DIAGRAM THIS DIAGRAM SHOWS A TYPICAL HPB510 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION NOTE THAT THE CIRCUIT BOARDS AND ASSEMBUES HAVE NUMBERS PRECEDED BY THE LETTER THAT NUMBER IDEN
286. ce Manual 5 15 Replaceable P arts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT Table 5 6 85101C Front Panel Internal with CRT Display Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number 85101 60249 FRONT BEZEL AND SUBPANEL 28480 85101 60249 1 85101 20056 1 FRONT BEZEL 28480 85101 20056 2 85101 00062 1 SUB PANEL 28480 85101 00062 3 0515 1946 6 MACH SCREW M3 0 6MM TX 28480 0515 1946 4 85101 80084 1 FRONT DRESS PANEL 28480 85101 80084 5 7121 4611 1 LABEL MADE IN USA 28480 7121 4611 6 0510 1148 PUSH ON RETAINER 28480 0510 1148 7 85101 60239 1 KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY 28480 85101 60239 8 85101 20053 1 AIR DAM 28480 85101 20053 9 3050 0105 8 WASHER FLAT 125 ID 28480 3050 0105 10 0515 0430 8 MACH SCREW M3 0 6MM TX 28480 0515 0430 11 85101 60234 1 ROTARY PULSE GENERATOR RPG 28480 85101 60234 12 2190 0016 2 WASHER LK INTL T3 8IN 377ID 28480 2190 0016 13 2950 0043 2 NUT HEX DBLCHAM 3 8 32 THD 00000 Order by desc 094IN THK 14 3050 0180 1 TEFLON WASHER 28480 3050 0180 15 0370 3033 1 KNOB BASE 250 G 28480 0370 3033 5 16 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable P arts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT 85101C Front Panel Internal with CRT Display Figure 5 7 5 17 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable P arts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT Table 5 7 85101C Rear Panel with CRT Display Ref Agilent Part Qty Des
287. cedures When an assembly is replaced adjustments may be necessary to assure the analyzer meets its specifications Use Table 7 3 to identify the adjustment s required after replacing an assembly n addition to any necessary adjustments performance verification may be needed depending on the assembly replaced 6 28 8510C On Site Service Manual Adjustments 7 1 Adjustments Overview Overview This chapter provides adjustment procedures for the 8510 network analyzer These procedures should be used 1 after replacement of a part or 2 when performance tests show that the specification cannot be met Table 7 1 lists the adjustment procedures by the order they appear in this chapter Table 7 2 lists all adjustable components by reference designator name and the function adjusted Table 7 3 lists adjustment procedures that interact between assemblies and lists the adjustment procedures that must be done when an assembly is replaced or repaired NOTE Allow the analyzer system to warm up for one hour before making any adjustments The 85102 IF detector adjustments are semi automated E ach adjustment procedure requires a controller connected to the 8510 bus labeled GPIB on the display processor rear panel The 85102 and Test Set Service adjustments disk is also required The system source must be connected to the system bus to do the 85102 adjustments A test set is not required Yet if a test set is not connected
288. certainties All that is required is the software and computer controller A printer is required for hardcopy output a All of the equipment listed is required for performance verification b 8360 source with 1 Hz resolution needed to pass performance verification c Wrap around display problem d Only 2 0 Mb of memory 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 9 Performance Verification and Specifications Software for Performance Verification and Specifications How to Load the Software There are many ways to load BASIC therefore the example below is one common sequence Refer to the manual of your computer for an exact procedure 1 Insert the BASIC disc into the controller disc drive 0 2 Cydethe power of the controller to activate the BASIC start up NOTE You must have 3 megabytes of memory for the program to run To check this type SYSTEMS AVAILABLE MEMORY RETURN 3 After BASIC is loaded the drive LED goes off and a BASIC ready prompt appears on the controller display Remove the disc 4 Thefollowing binary files must be loaded into the controller memory ERR CLOCK MAT 1 0 HP IB To check which binary files are already loaded in the controller memory type LIST BIN RETURN 5 Toload the binary files insert the language extensions disc in the disc drive and type LOAD BIN ERR RETURN LOAD BIN CLOCK RETURN LOAD BIN MAT RETURN LOAD BIN 1 0 RETURN 6 Toload the HP IB binary file remove th
289. certainty Plots Markers automatically turn on when the uncertainty plot is displayed The marker appears on the plot as a vertical dashed line To display the plot and use the marker function refer to the steps below 1 From the Main menu press Syst Uncert 2 Fromthe plot options choose the desired selections 3 Press Done to display the graph 4 To move the marker usethe left or right arrow keys NOTE You can control the position of the marker with the mouse however it is not recommended The mouse s sensitivity may make it too awkward to use 5 Read the marker values along the bottom row of the display The readings indudethe X axis value and marker readouts for each frequency range 6 Usethe Marker ON OFF key to turn markers on or off 7 Usethe Mkr Sens key to change the marker sensitivity You can choose a marker sensitivity of 1 3 or 10 The setting determines the distance the marker moves on the graticule each time you press the left or right arrow key 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 15 Performance Verification and Specifications How to Verify System Performance Choosing User Generated Error Terms To select edited error terms for generating system specifications tables refer to the steps below 1 Press System Specs in the Main menu 2 Choose User Parameters for Table Type 3 Usethe softkeys within the menu to edit other selections as needed 4 Press Done to display the specifications
290. ch the list of system hardware to your system configuration and select the calibration technique NOTE If the test set is an 8516 the source selection must be 834X016 or 8360X016 Older 8340 sources may require modification to work with the 8516 NOTE When generating specifications for 8511 systems select no source no cal kit no cables and no verification kit See Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications later in this chapter 14 To load the data files from the disc press Done 15 The program presents the main menu F rom here you can select one of four other menus System configuration System specifications System uncertainty Verify system A brief explanation of the menu choices follows System Config This menu presents the choice of returning to the hardware configuration menu or entering the software configuration menu The software configuration menu allows you to set the addresses of your 8510 and your printer plotter or select plotter trace pens 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 11 Performance Verification and Specifications Software for Performance Verification and Specifications System Specs n this menu you can choose several types of tables and formats for a hard copy of both forward and reverse error terms System Uncert This menu allows you to print or plot dynamic accuracy or total uncertainty for your system configuration Verify System Th
291. check the test set and the source Special service tools are available that emulate a test set and a source the part numbers are provided Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Test Set Emulator This is service adapter that substitutes for the test set by connecting the 20 MHzIF signal from the 85102 back into the amplifier of the 85102 The total effect on the analyzer system is similar to connecting a good test set in a normal configuration This can determine if a fault is in the test set or the 85102 Refer to Unratioed Power Failures on page 4 85 for the procedure If this test indicates that the 85102 I F detector is not the problem its confidence level is now increased from 8096 to 9596 Source Emulator This is 60 MHz 55 filter which is used to pass the third harmonic of the 85102 output signal to the test set to emulate a signal from an external source Actually almost any source that has a 60 MHz signal or higher can be used Refer to Other Failures for a procedure that uses the source emulator tripler to determine whether or not the problem is in the source Also available is an 8360 front panel emulator kit This is an overlay that can be placed over the front panel keys of the 85102 IF detector The 85102 keys can then be used to run the built in service diagnostics of the 8360 according to the key codes on the overlay Press SERVICE FULL SELF TEST to access the procedure Other Tests for the Sour
292. choice of pen colors is arbitrary When the plotter is connected to the 8510 system bus you can usethe 8510 COPY key on the front panel to access its plotting capabilities for plotting 8510 displays Plot Traces on the Controller Display Some traces may appear to be missing from program plots that show four frequency bands Whenever three traces appear instead of four it is because the bands have the same values and are overlaid This overlay cannot be distinguished on low resolution monitors or plotters For example the S11 magnitude uncertainty specifications for an 8510 using an 8340 source and an 8514 test set have the same uncertainty values for traces labeled 8 to 18 GHz and 18 to 20 GHz Plot traces are designed for all controller CRT combinations but they appear best on high resolution color monitors When the program is calculating the values for plot traces it beeps each time a trace is calculated Therefore if you hear four beeps but only see three traces that indicates that four traces were generated but is overlaid on the other Program Modifications It is not possible to modify this program Contact an Agilent system engineer for more information If you experience a problem with the program contact Agilent with a description of the problem Ramp Mode Operation for Synthesizers Ramp sweep is tested in Frequency Test Procedures as part of the system performance verification The performance verification softwa
293. ck the source especially the 0 to 10 volt ramp linearity Check the test set VTO and A3 summing amp boards Refer to Unratioed Power Failures 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 83 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Running Error Messages This pageintentionally left blank 4 84 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Unratioed Power Failures Unratioed Power Failures Overview This section checks test set RF functionality to isolate the problem to either the test set or the rest of the system If the test set is at fault this section helps to further isolate the faulty assembly within the test set Thefollowing test sets are covered in this section 8514B 8514B Option 002 003 8515A 8516A 8516A Option 002 003 8517B 8517B Option 007 The procedure in this section is divided into two parts First the service adapter is connected to the 85102 IF detector to simulate basic operation of the test set If the 85102 is operating correctly then the test set is re connected and the IF responses of the six RF signal paths are checked to verify test set operation Knowing which test set assemblies common to the RF signal paths of known IF signal responses is a powerful troubleshooting tool Second you will check the output power levels of each test set sampler mixer assembly and its associated IF amplifier alone This is done by comparing the power levels and shape of the frequency response trace wi
294. condition occurs check the numbered items below using the information on the power supply test points located in Power Supply Failures on page 4 97 or refer tothe test points on the 85101 block diagram 1 Check the 45 V power supply at the post regulator Refer tothe Power Supply Failures section for information on power supply test points 2 Confirm that the A4 GSP assembly A14 GSP if equipped with an LCD is properly seated 3 Confirm that the A5 CPU assembly is properly seated 4 Check that all A5S1 switches see Figure 4 8 are closed 5 Check these pins of the A5 assembly Pin Reading Line P 2 13 425V LHMF P2 45 40 7 V HMULBSY P2 59 425V LGINT low general interrupt masked P 2 68 gt 2 5 V LPOP low power on pulse from post regulator 6 Remove these assemblies A7 I O board EEPROM board A4 graphics system processor board A14 GSP if equipped with an LCD Disconnect the F detector interconnect cable and the GPIB cable from display processor rear panel Verify that default error 15 is still present If so thetroubleis isolated to the A5 CPU board assembly Self Test Sequence The sequence starts testing with the processor ROM circuit the kernel in the display processor and then tests RAM the data bus various input output registers math processor F detector interface and the display processor keyboard Some of the tests are not completely exhaustive but they do give an indication that these
295. corrected forward and reverse isolation error terms that represent the leakage between the test port paths The isolation error coefficients are characterized when fixed loads are connected to both test ports in the calibration procedure Any signal that appears in the test channel is coupled from the reference channel The crosstalk term should be very small It affects both reflection and transmission measurements primarily when the test channel signal is at a very low level especially transmission measurements where the insertion loss of the DUT is large for example 240 dB attenuation Load Match Elf and These arethe forward and reverse uncorrected load match errors a measure of the impedance match of the output port of a two port device including the match of test port cables Load match error terms are characterized by measuring the responses of a thru connection during the calibration procedure S11 for all test sets plus S22 for S parameter test sets Large variations in the forward or reverse load match error terms may indicate bad thru cable or if a reflection transmission test set is used a bad system attenuator The measurements most affected by load match errors areall transmission measurements and reflection measurements of a two port device with low insertion loss for example an airline Transmission Tracking Etf and Etr Tracking is the difference between the frequency response of the reference channel and the
296. cription Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number 1 5041 8821 2 STANDOFF REAR PANEL 28480 5041 8821 2 0515 0372 3 MACH SCREW M3 0 8MM PN TX 28480 0515 0372 3 0515 1232 2 MACH SCREW M3 5 8MM PN PD 28480 0515 1232 4 0515 0892 2 MACH SCREW M3 5 12MM PN PD 28480 0515 0892 5 5021 8537 1 LOCKING FOOT RIGHT 28480 5021 8537 6 5021 8539 1 LOCKING FOOT LEFT 28480 5041 8539 7 85101 60241 1 REAR PANEL BOARD ASSEMBLY 28480 85101 60241 8 2190 0586 4 WASHER LK HLCL 4 0MM 28480 2190 0586 9 0380 0643 4 STANDOFF HEX 255l N LG 6 32 28480 0380 0643 10 2190 0584 8 WASHER LK M3 0 NOM 28480 2190 0584 11 1251 7812 8 CONNECTOR JACKSCREW 28480 1251 7812 12 85101 00045 1 REAR PANEL 28480 85101 00045 13 7121 4611 1 LABEL MADE IN USA 28480 7121 4611 14 3050 1192 4 WASHER FL M3 5 NOM 28480 3050 1192 15 3160 0281 1 FINGER GUARD 28480 3160 0281 16 0515 0379 4 MACH SCREW M3 5 16MM PN TX 28480 0515 0379 17 08415 60036 1 FAN TUBE AXIAL 28480 08415 60036 5 18 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable P arts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT 85101C Rear Panel with CRT Display Figure 5 8 5 19 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable P arts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with a CRT 85101C Left and Right Sides with CRT Display Figure 5 9 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number 1 0515 2086 19 MACH SCREW M4 0 7MM TX
297. ct the display power cable assembly item 3 from the display processor board Gently slide the display forward and out of the steel display enclosure 10 Disconnect the display power cable assembly item 3 from the display To make the connector inside the display more accessible remove the top cover of the display 2 screws 6 10 8510C On Site Service Manual Replacement Procedures 85101C Replacement Procedures To Reassemble NOTE Before installing a new display remove the four screws from the rear panel of the new display assembly Slide off the one piece bottom and rear cover of the new display and discard 11 Remove the display power cable assembly shipped with the new display unit 12 Install the display power cable assembly item 3 used in the 85101C to the new display unit 13 To install a new display unit reverse the preceding steps When replacing the four screws in step 4 first hand tighten them then torque to 237 N cm 21 in Ib Torque all other screws to 113 N cm 10 in Ib Figure 6 2 CRT Replacement 11 places V LL Pp O O O O O O O O O 8510C On Site Service Manual 6 11 Replacement P rocedures 85101C Replacement Procedures A9 Rear Panel Replacement Tools Required Large Pozidrive screwdriver T 10 Torx screwdriver T 15 Torx screwdri ver NOTE Old CRT chassis uses T 10 screwdriver New LCD chassis uses a combination of T 10 and
298. cting the Hardware for an 8510SX System After loading the software as directed in the section following the flowchart Figure 8 1 the first selection menu that appears is the Hardware Configuration menu For this tutorial select the following equipment 8510C network analyzer 8515A test set 83631A synthesized source y 85052 3 5 mm TRL kit choose TRL calibration 85131F 3 5 mm test port cable set 85053 3 5 mm verification kit Examining Error Term Tables Exercise 1 Select System Specs from the Main menu Review the following descriptions to learn more about a few of the menu selections Output Table You can look at the residual errors with correction on the test port errors with correction off the test set channel B1 B2 A1 A2 errors with correction off or All Tables Table Type Choose Specification Data Sheet or User Parameter values Data sheet values are published in Agilent s technical literature The values do not include effects due to cable stability or system drift errors Specification values are used during system verification User parameter values are tables which have been modified by the user with the Edit Specs function 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 21 Performance Verification and Specifications Using the Software A Tutorial To examine the error terms tables select All Tables You see displayed both the effective corrected and raw uncorrected error terms Re
299. ction helps to correctly generate specifications prepare the program for performance verification and interpret any results 8510 System Specification Criteria Assumptions The spedifications for any system are valid only when certain conditions are met Agilent assumes that the following criteria is met for all specifications 1 Sources Synthesizers are in step mode not ramp mode Sweepers are in ramp mode 2 Temperature of System Uncorrected 0 to 55 degrees C Corrected 23 degrees 3 degrees at calibration Also 1 degree from calibration must be maintained for valid verification and for measurements within specified uncertainty limits 3 Reflection Transmission Test Sets Use a 10 dB attenuator for 8513 and a 20 dB attenuator for 8512 on the transmission thru path These attenuators are available by ordering 8492A option 20 20 dB 7 mm or 8493C option 10 10 dB 3 5 mm Devices are connected directly to test port 1 for reflection measurements For transmission measurements the device is connected to test port 1 the attenuator is connected to the end of the device and the cable is connected between the attenuator and port 2 4 System Configurations Specifications apply to systems configured with hardware items available in the 8510 specifications database 5 Test Set Ports RF Input Connectors Reference Channel Power Characteristics for the test set ports RF input connectors and maximum and minimum reference chann
300. d and Corrected Error flowgraphs at the end of this chapter Review the error term labels and locations You need to understand which error term gets modified with respect to the unique components within your system setup I n the Uncorrected Error Model flowgraph the device under test is identified with thelabels S11 521 S22 S12 and is the center of the graph You can use the location of the device in this illustration to help you determine which error term to change In there are examples to help you understand how to change error terms for some typically used hardware modificati ons Handling Customized Error Terms The information you need to understand about customized error terms is explained in this section Thetopics are listed below Usingtheerror term table editor Saving edited error term values Recalling a custom error term table file 8 18 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Performing System Verification Using the Error Term Table Editor To display an error term table for editing select Edit Specs in the Main menu Refer to the Error Model flowgraphs at the end of this chapter Find the error term of interest on the figure The figure can help you determine the relative physical location of the error term in your system configuration Refer tothe steps below to edit the values 1 Locatethe error term in the displayed table that represents the error term of t
301. diagrams with the results listed in the table of most probable failures below Out of 32 possible variations the table lists the variations that result from 12 of the most probable failures If the observed results match a group of results in the table investigate the most probable cause given in the table If all the paths are good then the test set is probably working properly Return to the Main Troubleshooting Procedure to continue troubleshooting the system If the observed results do not match any of those given in the table re evaluate and possibly re measure your observed data If the data is valid troubleshoot using the RF path diagram s given in this foldout for the bad signal traces Most Probable Failure Test set is not the problem Source source cable VTO cables from rear panel to switch splitter Switch splitter Switch splitter REFERENCE VALUE 0 0 dB START GHz STOP 26 90000000X0 GHz BIAS 2 52 TAPERED PAD 2 RF IN TUNE TRIAX BRIDGE PRETUNE VTO SENSE at TAPERED PAD 0 9048 SWITCH SPLITTER 0 90dB TRIAX BRIDGE b1 BIAS 1 Good Bad REFERENCE VALUE FO 0 dB START J 045820000 GHz STOP 26 GHz BIAS 2
302. dicates a problem in the 85101C display processor unless the CPU has failed Whenever you get an error message be sure it is a consistent and repeatable error Press the ENTRY OFF key to remove the message from the display and then press the MEASUREMENT RESTART key to take another sweep Many times an error message like PHASELOCK LOST is only an intermittent loss of phase lock that can be corrected on the next sweep If the message is gone then there is no real problem However if the error message repeats find that message in this section and note the possible causes and troubleshooting suggestions Different Types of Running Error Messages The four types of 8510C error messages are Cautions Prompts Tells Errors These four types are described below Only those error messages which are related to service and repair are documented in this section Refer to the Keyword Dictionary for an explanation of caution and tell messages M essages such as those following are not documented in this section because they are not related to service and are mostly self explanatory FILE NOT FOUND caution type POSITION SLIDE THEN PRESS KEY TO MEASURE prompt type RECALLING CAL SET telltype INSUFFICIENT MEMORY error type 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 69 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Running Error Messages Error Message Characteristics The general characteristics of each type of error message are described in the f
303. dpass ripple A9C8 20MHZ XTAL FILTER 5 Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple A10L1 100KHZ TUNED FILTER 6 Tunesthe filter to 100 kHz A11C6 20MHZ XTAL FILTER 5 Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple A11C7 20MHZ XTAL FILTER 5 Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple 7 6 8510C On Site Service Manual Adjustments Safety Considerations Table 7 2 Adjustable Components in Alpha Numeric Order Reference Adjustment Name Adjustment Adjustment Function Number Designator Procedure Number A11C8 20MHZ XTAL FILTER 5 Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple A12L1 100KHZ TUNED FILTER 6 Tunes thefilter to 100 kHz Al 3C6 20MHZ XTAL FILTER 5 Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple A13C7 20MHZ XTAL FILTER 5 Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple A13C8 20MHZ XTAL FILTER 5 Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple A14C6 20MHZ XTAL FILTER 5 Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple A14C7 20MHZ XTAL FILTER 5 Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple A14C8 20MHZ XTAL FILTER 5 Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple A20R26 SWEEP ADC GAIN 4 Compensates for component tolerances in the staircase generation circuit 8510C On Site Service Manual Adjustments Safety Considerations Table 7 3 Related Adjustment Procedures Assembly Replaced or Repaired Adjustment Procedure Number If Replaced 85101 Display Processor A1 Front Panel none A2 Disk Drive none A3 Post Regulator Board none A4 Graphic System Processor CRT 1 3 85101C eq
304. e then plug it in Make sure the 8510C is set up for an GPIB HP IB printer at address 701 On the 8510C Press LOCAL MORE PRINTER HP IB BW N 6 Turn on the laser printer For further information about printer setup refer to Copy in the 8510C Operating and Programming Manual Switching On Power n systems with controllers switch on power to the controller last 85101 next to last n systems without controllers switch on power to the 85101 last 8510C On Site Service Manual 9 21 System Installation Making System Connections Making a Backup Operating System Disk Hold down the ZMARKER key on the analyzer and cycle the power on the analyzer switch on 85101 last Holding down the ZMARKER key makes the instrument detect a failure so it will show self test error 14 sub test 2 Press Z MARKER again to enter the power up self test menu Disablethe write protect feature on the blank disk by sliding thetab to the closed position Insert the disk into the analyzer and press 2 1 ZMARKER The disk is initialized when the analyzer display shows INITIALIZATION COMPLETE Press 2 0 ZMARKER When the disk is recorded write protect it by sliding the tab tothe open position Checking System Operation Thefollowing system operation checks confirm that the system is functional and ready for performance verification or operation or both These simple checks are optional and primarily serve to establish confide
305. e 6 4 A15 LCD Assembly Replacement 1 aZ LCD ASSEMBLY ss433c 8510C On Site Service Manual 6 17 Replacement P rocedures 85101C Replacement Procedures LCD Assembly Details The LCD assembly consists of the display glass the LCD and backlight and the inverter board See Chapter 5 for associated part numbers NOTE To avoid dust or dirt particles from getting in between the display glass and the LCD do not completely remove the LCD from the bezel Figure 6 5 LCD Assembly Details Softkey Keyboard Display Glass Backlight Inverter Board LCD Retainer Sheet Metal sa67d 6 18 8510C On Site Service Manual Replacement Procedures 85101C Replacement Procedures Procedure To Disassemble 1 Disconnect the power cord 2 Remove the L CD assembly Refer to A15 LCD Assembly Replacement 3 Removethe two nuts behind the softkeys that secure the sheet metal LCD retainer 4 Tilt the sheet metal LCD retainer up before sliding tabs A and B free NOTE To avoid dust or dirt particles from getting in between the display glass and the LCD do not completely separate the display from the bezel Helpful Hints When replacing the backlight lamp remove the two screws holding the lamp in place on the LCD Tilt the LCD in the bezel just enough to allow thelamp to be replaced ftheinverter is replaced be surethe plastic cover is held securely in place by one
306. e 8510C and the source s used Check the 8510 revision by pressing AUXILIARY MENUS SYSTEM MORE SERVICE FUNCTIONS SOFTWARE REVISION Thelist of key presses or GPIB programming codes used to create the conditions that showed the problem This list was created in List Programming Codes earlier in this procedure Any cther details about the state of the system during failure that may beimportant to troubleshooting Contact Agilent If you need assistance contact Agilent by internet phone or fax see Contacting Agilent on page iii Your CE has access to a software tracking system that includes reports of known problems and their solutions or workarounds Firmware Revisions The following firmware revisions for the 8510A 8510B and 8510C are listed for historical purposes nformation about any later versions used with the 8510C will be published as they occur 4 122 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Software Failures Table4 13 8510 Operating System History Revision Analyzer HP Agilent Significant Contribution Number Part Number A 01 00 8510A 85101 100012 3 8510A first release Order A 02 00 A 02 00 8510A 85101 10001 11575A upgrade Contains latest 8510A Operating System B 03 00 8510B See Note 3 8510B first release Major speed and feature enhancements B 03 11 8510B 85101 80070 11575B upgrade Many improve
307. e Lock 1 al User 1 Port 1 al 2 a2 User 3 Port 2 a2 3 b1 Reflection User 4 Port 1 al 4 b2 Reflection User 2 Port 2 a2 5 b1 Thru User 4 Port 2 a2 6 b2 Thru User 2 Port 1 al Ratioed and Unratioed Responses A normal power level display for the 8510C is a ratio of two frequency responses in the case of S11 the ratio 1 b1 a1 The network analyzer automatically supplies power to and provides phase lock for one or more predefined ports to perform the sel ected measurement Ratioed measurements provide useful data but they can mask certain problems For example when measuring an S parameter at a specific power level a faulty RF input connector on the test set creates a 20 dB power hole In this case the power hole might be invisible because the S parameter measurement ratios out the frequency response error This is why troubleshooting system problems in a ratioed measurement mode can be decepti ve The solution is to look at the IF signal responses of the six RF paths singly in order to check them in an unratioed mode Troubleshooting with the Service Adapter The service adapter substitutes for a test set by connecting the 20 MHz IF signal from the 85102 back into amplifier of the 85102 This is done to determine if a fault isin the test set or the 85102 This procedure does not check phase lock circuitry NOTE Ignore any phase lock error messages that may appear during this procedure 1 Disconnect the
308. e Voltages on the 5 4 102 Determine Why the Green LED on 10 Is Not On 4 103 Check the Line Voltage Selector Switch 4 103 Determine Why the Red LED on A10 15 or Flashing 4 104 Iu sconmaect DOVER ap apnea dal pls dale io dd 4 104 Check the A10 Preregulator and Related Assemblies 4 105 Determine Why the Green LEDs on Are No All 4 108 Remove the A3 Post Regulator from Its Motherboard Connector 4 108 Check the Fuses and Voltages casse ag bh RR OO Ape iio Apod 4 108 Remove More Assemblies u dea ge kk abe ERREUR ER RO 4 109 Disconnect Display Power Cable CRT 4 110 Disconnect A15 LCD Assembly Cable and or A16 Backlight Inverter Cable LED ODRI Sas med Rake ROGA E EOD Dol d RC 4 110 Inspect ou BE ERE ey eet 4 110 Fan Troubles sio od s ioci E E 4 111 Contents 4 Contents Fan 5 5 4555 PUES EME ERR ES Bee 4 111 Check Ehe Fan u uu oii Ge ke EP Ra ERE e Rd ad 4 111
309. e a failure 4 66 service manual on site service manuals organization 1 3 service tools available 1 5 shipment checking 9 7 contents of 9 7 simplified pretune phase locked loop 3 17 software for performance verification specifications 8 5 8 8 part numbers 5 6 software failures 4 6 how to resolve 4 121 source 4 20 substitution 8 94 theory of operation 3 4 source GPIB syntax error 4 80 source sweep sync error 4 80 source troubleshooting 4 22 sources 3 4 sources of errors drift 8 77 measurement 8 76 additional 8 77 random 8 76 systematic 8 76 space requirements 9 5 S parameter data entry 8 16 S parameter test set check 9 23 specialized systems 3 2 specifications 8 1 criteria or assumptions 8 96 description of 8 7 example printout 8 61 program how torun 8 58 software 8 8 substitution of system components 8 94 substitution cables 8 94 subtests 4 55 sweep ADC gain adjustment 7 16 7 18 sweep oscillator 8350B as system source 8 98 sweep oscillators theory of operation 3 4 sweep time too fast 4 81 swept frequency accuracy test 8 44 switching on power 9 21 symbols channel error term 8 86 synchronous detector adjustment 7 25 synthesized sweepers 3 4 system base 3 3 configuration 9 14 9 16 connections 9 17 heating and cooling 9 4 how to reload the operating system 4 67 maintenance 10 2 not preconfigured 9 14 options 9 2 preconfigured 9 14 requirements of
310. e language extensions disc and insert the drivers disc into the disc drive and type LOAD BIN HPIB Remove the drivers disc 7 TypeMSI 700 0 RETURN on the controller to specify the system mass storage device drive 0 of the disc drive NOTE This procedure is used only with older revisions of BASIC i e 3 0 BASIC 5 0 automatically loads these files 8 10 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Software for Performance Verification and Specifications NOTE The mass storage device must be set to the correct location for the program to run smoothly 8 Insert the program disk into the computer s disk drive 9 Set the active drive Type and enter the mass storage specifier 10 Type LOAD SPECS_8510 and wait for the program to be installed 11 Type RUN to start the program The initial screen displays the program revision and the data revision numbers These numbers are also listed on the disk label Refer to these numbers if you contact Agilent about your software product 12 Follow the instructions on the controller display to set the date and time When the correct date and time are set type Y at the prompt 13 The hardware configuration menu is displayed with a highlighted field around the active selection Use the Next and Previous keys to change the selection in the highlighted area Use the cursor keys to move the highlighted box to each piece of hardware Mat
311. e performance verification measurement 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 55 Performance Verification and Specifications Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure If the System Fails Performance Verification Disconnect and reconnect the device that failed the verification Then remeasure the device If the performance verification still fails Continue to measure the rest of the verification devices and printout the results of all four measurement parameters Print the error terms and examine them for anomalies near the failure frequencies Refer to Error Terms in Chapter 4 Make another measurement calibration and follow the flow chart on the next page Verify that the data disk from the verification kit is for an 8510 and not for an 8720 8 56 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure VERIFICATION FAILS VERIFICATION DEVICE REMEASURED PRINT OUT RESULTS AND CONTINUE TO MEASURE ALL THE VERIFICATION DEVICES FAILS AT THE SAME FREQUENCY WITH MORE THAN ONE DEVICE SUBSTITUTE CAL KIT SUBSTITUTE VERIFICATION VERIFICATION KIT KIT SUBSTITUTED CABLES SUBSTITUTED SUBSTITUTE CABLES GO TO THE TROUBLESHOOTING CHAPTER SUBSTITUTE ADAPTERS GO TO THE TROUBLESHOOTING CHAPTER 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 57 Performance Verification and Specifications
312. e power cords disconnected dangerous voltages may be present on the capacitors in the instrument Perform the the following procedure to DISCHARGE THE POWER SUPPLY CAPACITORS BEFORE PERFORMING THE DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE Capacitor Discharge Procedure The items shown in parentheses refer to the corresponding item numbers in Figure 6 7 1 Disconnect the power cords and remove top and bottom covers 2 On the bottom of the instrument remove the three screws item 2 from the plastic safety cover Carefully remove the cover taking care not to touch capacitor terminals eight large Pozidrive screws item 3 3 Connect the chassis of the instrument to earth ground 4 Discharge the capacitors one by one by attaching one end of an insulated dip lead tothe chassis and the other end of the dip lead to the capacitor terminal large Pozidrive screws item 3 Do this to every capacitor terminal To Disassemble 5 Remove the two screws item 3 of the desired capacitor and remove the capacitor To Reassemble 6 To install a new capacitor apply one drop of conductive Loctite to each capacitor screw hole and install the capacitor Torque the capacitor screws to 237 N cm 21 in Ib Torque the plastic shield screws to 79 N cm 7 in Ib NOTE Itisimportant to observe polarity when installing a capacitor There is a plug in the bottom of the capacitor that can be seen through a hole the motherboard if the capacitor is installed correctly
313. e the A3 post regulator assembly and check to see if the five green LEDs on the top edge of this 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 101 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure 85101C Display Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting assembly are on Refer to Figure 4 13 for locations of these LEDs f any LED on the A3 post regulator is off or flashing refer to Determine Why the Green LEDs on Are Not All On later in this procedure Ifall of the green LEDs on thetop edge of on there is 95 confidence level that the power supply is verified To confirm the last 5 uncertainty continue this procedure with the next paragraph Measure Voltages on the Post Regulator Refer to Figure 4 13 and measure the dc voltages on the A3 post regular test points This figure lists the voltage and their limits fthe voltages are within their limits the 85101C power supply is 100 verified fthe voltages are not within their limits replace the A3 post regulator Figure 4 13 A3 Post Regulator LEDs and Test Point Voltages LED TP1 LED TP2 LED TP5 4654 15 GROUND 5 MTR s pommes 99588 oem 4 102 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure 85101C Display Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting Determine Why the Green LED on A10 Is Not On Steadily If the green LED is not on steadily the l
314. e with Remove Assemblies to isolate the faulty assembly 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 105 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure 85101C Display Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting Figure 4 17 A10P1 Plug Detail and Output Voltages FROM A10 PREREGULATOR REGULATOR SOLDER 12 000000 2 11000000 1 A10 Preregulator Mnemonic Supply Block Diagram A10P1 Voltages Connected to A3J1 A10P1 Voltages Disconnected from A3J1 IEEE s usos 97 A10P1 Wire 1 rw sr ees _ r 3 sers C sansa C a foe 9 a m o 9 0 NONE The 5V digital supply must be loaded by one or more assemblies at all times or the voltages shown here will be wrong The 5V digital supply voltage connects from preregulator A10 to A8 motherboard connector A8J8 9 10 4 106 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure 85101C Display Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting Remove Assemblies Check power supply loading from the assemblies that are supplied by A10 Turn off the 85101C Connect the A10W1 cable to the post regulator Remove the following assemblies and then turn on the 85101C A4 A14 GSP board A5 CPU board A6 EEPROM board A7 1 0 board Disc drive power connector J 3 on the A8 motherboard e ftheA10red LED is still on continue this
315. ed data to the data and uncertainty limits supplied with the verification kit The device data provided with the verification kit has a traceable path to NIST Thetotal measurement uncertainty limits for the performance verification are the sum of the factory measurement uncertainties and the uncertainties associated with measuring the same devices on the system being verified The difference between the factory measured data and the verification measured data must fall within the total uncertainty limits at all frequencies for the total system uncertainty test to pass You can compare the factory system measurement uncertainty to your system measurement uncertainty in Comparing System Measurement Uncertainties for the Performance Verification Devices located later in this chapter The performance verification software calculates the total measurement uncertainty for each measurement and determines if the system being verified meets that total 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 5 Performance Verification and Specifications Sys tem Performance Verification uncertainty limit The results of the performance verification can be immediately viewed and printed When an 8510 system passes this test it does not ensure the system meets all the performance specifications H owever it does show the system being verified measures the same devices with the same results as a factory system that was verified in a bottoms up approach Th e Total
316. ed for replacement 8510C On Site Service Manual Safety Licensing 8510 Safety Information 8510 Safety Information In order to maintain safe operation of the 8510 system read and follow the specific instructions in the Warnings Cautions and Notes found in the instruments and throughout this manual Hazardous Instrument Areas with Power On Each instrument in the 8510 system has areas that contain lethal voltages when the instrument has ac power applied Figure 2 1 and Figure 2 2 show each of the instruments and their hazardous areas A shock hazard exists when the covers are removed Also the protective earth grounding on this equipment must be maintained to provide protection from electrical shock Any service or adjustment performed with the covers removed should be performed by qualified service personnel only Turn off the line voltage before removing or replacing printed circuit boards Damage to integrated circuits can occur if power is left on when printed circuit boards are removed or replaced Whenever the 8510 system is serviced an anti static workstation should be used to avoid damage incurred by static discharge into the static sensitive circuits of the 8510 system If this product is not used as specified the protection provided by the equipment could be impared This product must be used in a normal condition in which all means for protection are intact only 8510C On Site Service Manual 2 3 Saf
317. eir use is 4 NOTE Refer to the system error model later in this chapter for the association of the error terms with the system error flow graph limited to inspecting the flowgraph error terms that exist between the coupler or bridge and the sampler The symbol for the error terms that is used in the system error model located later in this chapter 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 63 Performance Verification and Specifications Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts Example 8 8 Raw B2 Channel Errors Specifications BZ Channel Errors Correction OFF Netuork finalyzer Test Set Source Calibration Kit HPB5108 Enhanced Model 5 168003 2 4mm 5 Parameter 45MHz 40GHz HP836X016 amp 8515 Synth 10MHz 40GHz 5 5 2 4mm Slotless Standard Grade NOTES 4 Calibration Technique SL Sliding Loed Cal Test Port Cables Etern Description Of Error Term iSymbl 045 2 1 10 2 51330 pair short cables 2 4mm 2 4mm H Frequency 6Hz 29 35 36 40 low Freq Cutoff port2 to GHz iFe2b2 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 099 lou Freq Slope port2 to 82 dB Fs2b2 8 02 0 06 0 20 0 00 Drift Mag deg c port to 82 98 Dm2b2 0475 0475 0475 0470 Drift Ph deg c port2 to B2 deg Op2b2 0 0000 9 0000 0000 0 0000 Drift Ph deg c F ghz pt deg Dpf2 0 0900 0 0000 000u e acon 055
318. el power are defined in thetest set manuals 45 MHz Calibration and Verification If the verification kit data disc has 45 MHz data always usethe fixed load for the loads portion of the 45 MHz calibration and always select the lowband load from the menu 800 dB or 180 Degree Values The program will not display a magnitude valueless than 800 dB or a phase value greater than x 180 degrees covers the full Smith chart Therefore whenever these values appear it is likely that even greater values were calculated For example if a magnitude error is a negative number that is less than 800 dB for example 4 000 dB or minus infinity it will appear as 800 dB 8 96 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications Aborting Plots and Printouts with the ABORT Key You can press this softkey whenever you want to stop plotting or printing a program selection Usethis key instead of turning off the peripheral or pressing the controller STOP or PAUSE key Some printers and plotters will continue after ABORT is pressed because data is held in an internal buffer NOTE If incorrect characters or traces appear on the printout turn OFF the printer enhancement selection in the software configuration menu Adapters Test Port When you use adapters on a test set the program will calculate and include the adapter errors The program compares t
319. el Tests A1 A2 A7 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 63 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Self Test Failures Test 12 A6 Nonvolatile memory Most likely cause of failure A6 nonvolatile memory board failure 7096 Nonvolatile memory not initialized 30 Additional troubleshooting hints Makesurethe A6 board is properly seated In the main Service Functions test menu press 2 2 Z MARKER to enter the 8510 Service Program menu Select 85101 Display Processor Service Program and run the Non Volatile M emory Board Tests A6 Test 13 IF Detector Data Most likely cause of failure 85102 interconnect cable missing or damaged 50 85102 A24 failure 2096 85101 A7 I O board failure 20 85102 A6 failure 1096 85102 motherboard or connector or cable failure 196 85101 A8 motherboard or connector failure 196 Additional troubleshooting hints In the main Service Functions test menu press 2 2 to enter the 8510 Service Program menu Select 85101 Display Processor Service Program and run the CPU Board A5 Tests and the I O Board and Front Panel Tests A1 2 7 Totroubleshoot the I F detector refer to the 85102 IF Detector tests part of the Service Program section Test 14 Keyboard Test Most likely cause of failure 85101 keyboard key was held down during power up 80 A71 O board failure 1096 Alkeyboard failure 1096 Keyboard connecting cable missing or damaged
320. em 83631 Prefix equal to and greater than 3139A will cause problem 83651 Prefix equal to and greater than 3139A will cause problem 83623 Couplers only will not cause problem 83624 Couplers only will not cause problem Workaround ncrease your source power and use test set attenuators or use a source that has a coupler in its leveling loop The problem is caused by dc switching spikes from the test set RF pin diode switch getting back into the sources leveling loop and causing an unleveled condition If this is not satisfactory there are three upgrade kits available the 8514B 8515A 85110A 08510 60119 8517A B 08510 60118 and the 85110L 08510 60121 test sets The upgrade kit will eliminatethe RF switching spikes from getting back into the source leveling loop by installing a dc return between the RF input and RF pin diode switch inside the test set Contact an Agilent customer engineer for installation of these kits 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 15 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Troubleshooting Outline Switch off power Switch on the source the test set then the analyzer Check that each instrument preset condition is correct Then check the system preset condition by pressing Instrument State RECALL MORE FACTORY PRESET Theresulting analyzer display should be similar to Figure 4 2 Figure 4 2 System Factory Preset State 4 16 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Troubleshooting Outline
321. em is at fault The percentages may not always total 10096 One percent 196 means very low probability Supplemental troubleshooting help is provided by these features Additional troubleshooting hints part of each test description System level troubleshooting block diagram Service program menu of the firmware and the Service Program section in this manual 4 60 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Self Test Failures Test 1 A5 Processor EPROM Most likely cause of failure A5 EPROM failure 6096 A5 processor board failure 4096 A8 motherboard trace connector failure 196 A4 A14 A6 A7 trace problem 1 Additional troubleshooting hints Check the seating of the A5 board n the main Service Functions test menu press 2 2 ZMARKER to enter the 8510 Service Program menu Select 85101 Display Processor Service Program and run the CPU Board Tests A5 Test 2 A5 Processor RAM Most likely cause of failure A5 RAM failure 8096 A5 processor board failure 2096 A8 motherboard trace connector failure 196 A4 A14 A6 A7 trace problem 1 Additional troubleshooting hints Remove 4 A14 and A7 from the instrument and rerun self test 2 If the failure dears suspect one of the boards removed the main Service Functions menu press 2 2 to enter the 8510 Service Program menu Select 85101 Display Processor Service Program and run the CPU Boa
322. entire system hardware calibration kit and connections is verified using the following procedures Operational checks Frequency tests 8340 and 8360 only Total system uncertainty test Recommended process checks Operational Checks Description The first level of system performance verification is a series of recommended but not required functional checks The assessment of the system operating environment and the functional operation of the system components help identify faulty equipment The procedures check the environmental temperature and humidity the typical power out of the analyzer measurement channels the typical system dynamic range and the connector dimensions pin depths Test port cable stability is also tested in a subset of the operational checks procedure The Operational Check Procedures is located later in this chapter Frequency Tests Description The second level of the system performance verification is for synthesized sources onl y The 8350 source frequency accuracy is tested during the total system uncertainty test procedure The source frequency accuracy is checked across the entire sweep rangein both the swept and the CW sweep modes The Frequency Test Procedures is located later in this chapter Total System Uncertainty Test Description The procedure consists of calibrating the analyzer with a calibration kit measuring a set of characterized devices and comparing the resultant measur
323. ept the 8511A B 08510 10024 1 85102 and Test Sets Adjustment Software 28480 08510 10024 08510 10034 1 Master Calibration Disk 28480 08510 10034 85103 10002 1 Software Toolkit Disk 28480 85103 10002 Documentation 08510 90275 1 8510C Operating and Service Manual Set 28480 08510 90275 Indudes the following separately available manuals 08510 90281 1 Operating and Programming M anual 28480 08510 90281 08510 90280 1 Keyword Dictionary 28480 08510 90280 08510 90282 1 On Site Service M anual 28480 08510 90282 08510 90283 1 Test Sets and Accessories Binder 28480 08510 90283 Accessories 6010 1134 Dove Grey touch up paint for front panel frame 28480 6010 1134 and painted portions of front handles 6010 1137 French Grey touch up paint for side top and 28480 6010 1137 bottom covers 6010 1138 Parchment Grey touch up paint for rack mount 28480 6010 1138 flanges rack support shelves and front panels 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 7 Replaceable P arts Available Service Tools Available Service Tools Table 5 4 Ref Agilent Part Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number 1 08510 20001 CABLE TEST 1 28480 08510 20001 2 08510 20002 CABLE RF TEST 28480 08510 20002 3 08517 20019 CABLE FLEX SOURCE 50 GHZ 28480 08517 20019 4 08513 60009 CABLE FLEX SOURCE 26 5 28480 08513 60009 5 5061 1022 CABLE ASSEMBLY 28480 5061 1022 6 5062 7230 CABLE ASSEMBLY BNC SNAP 28480 5062 72
324. equency accuracy test set stability test port cable stability and connector type User selected operating conditions analyzer measurement parameter S11 S21 S12 S22 averaging source sweep mode sweep speed and power Condition and quality of the components Calibration Kit The quality of the measurement calibration is dominated by the accuracy of the calibration kit device models and how closely the actual electrical performance of the device meets the model Model limitations can be overcome by using a calibration method that requires a less precise device model For example a TRL thru reflection line calibration method requires less precise modeling of the devices than an open short load method M easurement calibration errors occur when the expected or modeled electrical performance of the calibration standard deviates from the actual electrical performance of the standard The calibration kit should be periodically recertified to ensure the actual electrical performance matches the model Refer to the calibration kit manual for information on how to recertify your kit Measurement Process The measurement process includes the measurement of calibration and test devices This process encompasses connector care the amount of flex on test port cables the method of measurement calibration the way you make connections for both the measurement calibration and the DUT measurement and connection repeatability Connection
325. equired after 7 2 replacement procedures 6 1 85101C 6 5 85102 6 21 required disassembly tools 6 3 requirement altitude 9 3 requirements electrical 9 5 line voltage and fuses 9 12 emissions compliance with 9 3 environmental 9 3 humidity 9 3 line voltage and fuses 9 12 other 9 6 source compatibility 9 13 space 9 5 temperature 9 3 rerun self test 4 65 resealing of components after adjustment 7 4 residual error example printout 8 61 error term symbols 8 81 responses ratioed and unratioed 4 86 retrieving saved custom data revision of source firmware 9 13 RF paths troubleshooting 4 88 RF signal paths 4 86 R L T S 8 4 2 1 LEDs 4 53 rotary pulse generator RPG replacement 6 8 run main program 4 65 run service program 4 66 running error messages 4 6 4 69 as built in diagnostics 4 69 categories of GPIB HP IB 4 71 IF Detector ADC 4 71 phase lock 4 71 source sweep 4 71 caution ADC cal failed 4 73 ADC not responding 4 73 autorange cal failed 4 74 caution optional function not installed 4 74 disc communication error 4 74 disc media wearing out replace soon 4 75 disk hardware problem 4 74 disk read or write error 4 74 failure check system bus configuration 4 75 failure fault indicator on 4 75 failure overmodulation 4 75 failure RF Unlocked 4 75 failure self test failure 4 75 IF cal failed 4 75 IF overload or O 4 77 initialization failed 4 77 no IF found 4
326. er CRT only Tektronix J 16 Opt 2 A Photometer Probe Tektronix J 6503 Opt 2 A CRT only Light Ocduder CRT only Tektronix 016 0305 00 Power M eter 50MHz to 50 GHz Agilent E4418B Power Sensor 50 MHz to 26 5 GHz 3 5 mm Agilent 8485A to 100mW 50 MHz to 50 GHz 2 4mm Agilent 8487A 1 uW to 100 mW Digital Multimeter General Purpose DMM Agilent 34401A A T 32 mV to 300 V ac dc Frequency Counter 45 MHz to 26 5 GHz Agilent 53151A Opt 001 A P T 10 dB Attenuator 45 MHz to 26 5 GHz 3 5 mm Agilent 8493C Opt 010 P 45 MHz to 50 GHz 2 4 mm Agilent 8490D Opt 010 P Power Splitter 45 MHz to 26 5 GHz 3 5 mm Agilent 11667B 45 MHz to 50 GHz 2 4mm Agilent 11667C Pulse Generator 35 ns to 1 second pulse period Agilent 81101A A Function Generator 20 MHz 1 Hz waveform frequency Agilent 33250A A Dual Power Supply Dual 0 to 15 Vdc Agilent E3631A A Spectrum Analyzer 100 kHz to 26 5 GHz Agilent E4407B A GPIB Controllable Degausser CRT only 200W input Radio Shack 44 233 A A Adjustments P Performance Verification T Troubleshooting Other calibration kits verification kits and cables may be required depending upon the system configuration 8510C On Site Service Manual 1 7 Service and Equipment On Site Service Manual Organization 1 8 8510C On Site Service Manual Safety Licensing 2 1 Safety Licensing SAFETY SYMBOLS This product and related documentation must be reviewed for familiarization with sa
327. er front panel The overlay is part of the front panel emulator kit 9 To set the stop frequency of the 83651 press the following keys on the analyzer FREQUENCY CW 5 0 G n SERVICE D4 more k2 Tools Menu k4 more k4 Disable Doubler asterisk on M easure the frequency with the counter and record the value on the test record located at the end of this chapter 10 Follow the instructions on the analyzer display to exit the front panel emulator software In Case of Difficulty f the measured values do not meet the specifications listed on the test record refer to the source manual for adjustment and troubleshooting instructions Swept Frequency Accuracy Test This check is helpful for systems that are primarily operated in ramp mode and is optional This procedure is not part of performance verification Performance verification requires step mode only The front panel emulation software contained on the 8510 operating system disc is required to do this test for an 83621 31 51 The analyzer keypad overlay is part of the front panel emulator kit 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8 12 8 44 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Frequency Test Procedures NOTE The 8514 8515 test sets must have the ports unbalanced Connect long cables between the front panel ports and short cables between the back panel ports or vice versa Figure 8 12 Swept Frequenc
328. er in this chapter Systems that Are Not Preconfigured 1 Placethe empty cabinet in the operating area Then lower the feet at the bottom corners of the cabinet to prevent movement 2 Removethe instrument feet and pull out instruction card assemblies if any 3 Attach the rack mount flanges with the instrument placed partly on the support shelves of the cabinet Figure 9 3 Attaching Flanges to Instruments with and without Handles Slide each instrument intothe cabinet and secure it with the dress screws provided See Figure 9 4 for a recommended cabinet configuration 9 14 8510C On Site Service Manual System Installation Configuring and Connecting the System Recommended Cabinet Configuration Figure 9 4 illustrates a recommended system cabinet configuration Shown is a typical configuration of a standard 85107B system installed in an 85043C system rack Figure 9 4 85107B System in 85043C System Rack Typical Agilent Technologies SYSTEMS 85101C DISPLAY PROCESSOR 25 RU AVAILABLE RACK MOUNTING SPACE 85102B IF IDETECTOR FILLER PANEL 8517B TEST SET 1 RU 1 75 INCHES RU Rack Unit NE CO SURFACE FILLER PANEL PANEL 83651B SOURCE FILLER PANEL FILLER PANEL STABILIZER L DRAWER UNIT LEVER FOOT 4 PLACES ss446c 8510C On Site Service Manual 9 15 System Installation Configuring and Connecting the System Configuring the System on a Bench Top Set up instr
329. erboard card cage assy part number 85101 60300 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 33 Replaceable P arts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD Figure 5 18 85101C Cabinet Parts with LCD 4 PLACES e 2 PLAcES 7 8 PLACES 2 PLACES 2 PLACES G 5 34 8510C On Site Service Manual 55428 Replaceable P arts Replaceable Parts for an 85101 Equipped with LCD Figure 5 19 8510C Cable Assemblies with LCD W27 W28 W30 W65 ss436c Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number W27 8120 1348 2 CABLE ASSY 18 AWG 3 CNDCT BLK J 28480 8120 1348 W28 8120 3445 1 GPIB CABLE 1METER 28480 8120 3445 W29 08510 60101 1 CBL AY IF DISPLAY 28480 08510 60101 W30 8120 2592 2 CBL AY BNC1METER 28480 8120 2582 W65 24542G 2 CABLE SERIAL RS 232 28480 24525G 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 35 Replaceable P arts 85102B Replaceable Parts 85102B Replaceable Parts Table 5 13 85102 Board Location Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number A2 NOT SHOWN PULSE OPT ONLY A3 NOT SHOWN PULSE OPT ONLY 4 NOT SHOWN PULSE ONLY A5 85102 60203 1 BOARD ASSY TEST SYNCHRONOUS DET NEW 28480 85102 60203 A5 85102 69203 BOARD ASSY TEST SYNCHRONOUS DET R E 85102 69203 A6 85102 60006 1 BOARD ASSEMBLY CLOCK NEW 28480 85102 60006 A6 85102 69006 BOARD ASSEMBLY CLOCK R E
330. es source firmware dated year 2000 and higher 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 123 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Software Failures Table 4 13 8510 Operating System History Revision Analyzer HP Agilent Significant Contribution Number Part Number C 07 00 8510C 85101 80116 Allows 8510C to work with 8517B Option 007 and power domain functions limit lines dissimilar connector compensations and color printer compatibility features C 07 10 8510C 85101 80116 Compatibility to calibrate inside of a pulse instead of CW for TRL calibrations and minor bug fix C 07 14 8510C 85101 80116 Bug fix 8510 firmware problem with writing year 2000 and higher DOS file dates C 07 16 8510C 85101 80116 Bug fix 8510 firmware problem with 8360 series source firmware dated year 2000 and higher C 08 XX 8510C 85101 80116 Released to support 8510C equipped with color liquid crystal display 5 1 Replacement of 8510A or 8510B operating systems with time domain option 010 must be ordered through Agilent see Contacting Agilent In this case the 85101 serial number is required 2 Revision A 01 00 is not orderable even though it has the same part number as revision A 02 00 Revision A 02 00 is available 3 Not recommended for replacement may contain many bugs 4 Induded in 11575J Upgrade Kit 11575J upgrades revision C 06 xx to the current version C 07 xx or higher 5
331. est Patterns Test patterns are used in the factory for display adjustments diagnostics and troubleshooting They may be used for field service as needed Test patterns are executed by pressing the following keys SYSTEM MORE SERVICE FUNCTIONS TEST MENU 2 2 MARKER 1 MARKER 3 MARKER 7 MARKER and enter the test number 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 47 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure LCD Failures Table 4 4 Tests Pattern Descriptions Test Name Description Test Pat 1 Displays an all white screen for verifying the light output of the A15 display and checks for color purity Test Pat 2 4 Displays a red green and blue pattern for verifying the color purity of the display and alsothe ability to independently control each color Test Pat 5 Displays an all black screen This is used to check for stuck pixels Test Pat 6 Displays a 16 step gray scale for verifying that the A14 display interface board can produce 16 different amplitudes of color in this case white The output comes from the RAM on the GSP board it is then split The signal goes through a video DAC and then to an external monitor or through some buffer amplifiers and then tothe internal LCD If the external display looks good but the internal display is bad then the probl em may be with the display or the cable connecting it to the display interface board This pattern is also very useful when using an oscilloscope for troubleshooting
332. est sequence even if the fault has cleared Access the test menu and enter the number of the self test with the entry keys Then press MARKER test repeats continuously unless a processor error halts it To exit the loop press any entry key 4 58 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Self Test Failures How to Run the Self Test Sequence Once Press the recessed TEST button to run the self test sequence once Alternatively access the test menu and enter number 17 rerun self test with the entry keys Then press MARKER How to Run the Self Test Sequence Repeatedly Access the test menu and enter number 18 repeat test loop with the entry keys Then press ZMARKER Test 18 runs the entire self test continuously It displays the number of times the sequence has passed failed and which test and subtest if any last failed In order to avoid wearing out EEPROM memory cells the EEPROM writetest routine is only performed for the first 20 cycles of a repeat loop This applies only to the self test selections 12 nonvolatile memory test and 18 repeat test loop How to Exit Self Test Press the recessed TEST button to exit any self test 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 59 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Self Test Failures Self Test Failures and Troubleshooting This part lists each of the 14 self tests and suggests troubleshooting techniques in the event of a failure The conditions listed under
333. ests A14 A15 GSP Address Decoder Stimulus Loop 1 This test strobes the interface address lines between the CPU and the graphics system processor GSP for oscilloscope troubleshooting A scope trigger is provided by HTEST on the A7 I O board LED 1 is lit to indicate this test is active to help the troubleshooter who may not have a functioning display The scope pattern is not clear except to those familiar with the patterns of good working units GSP Data Line Stimulus Loop 2 This test sends a continuous loop of walking 1s to the CPU GSP interface data lines for scope troubleshooting LED 2 is lit toindicate an activetest A scopetrigger is provided by HTEST on the A7 I O board Press the recessed front panel TEST button to exit this test Ramp Background DAC Loop 3 CRT or Ramp Background DAC Loop 3 LCD A continuous negative going staircase pattern should be seen at TP4 on the A4 or A14 LCD GSP board A scope trigger is provided by HTEST on the A7 I O board This signal is generated by applying a digital ramp tothe background or backlight DAC LEDs 1 and 2 to indicate that the test is active Ramp Intensity DAC Loop 4 CRT or Ramp Intensity DAC Loop 4 LCD A continuous negati ve going staircase pattern should be seen at TP5 on the A4 or A14 LCD GSP board A scope trigger is provided by HTEST on the A7 I O board This signal is generated by applying a digital ramp to the intensity or unused DAC
334. ety Licensing 8510 Safety Information Figure 2 1 Location of Hazardous Voltages in 8510 Instruments 1 of 2 65VDC 65VDC 15KV CRT LCD 1 5 KV A16 BACKLIGHT INVERTER 120 240 Vac 120 240 Vac POWER TRANSFORMER POWER LINE MODULE 120 240 Vac LINE SWITCH 38 Vac A26 RECTIFIER 120 240 Vac LINE SWITCH 55427 WARNING The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose dangerous voltages Disconnect the product from all voltage sources while it is being opened The power cord is connected to internal capacitors that may remain live for 5 seconds after disconnecting the plug from its power supply 2 4 8510C On Site Service Manual Safety Licensing 8510 Safety Information Figure 2 2 Location of Hazardous Voltages in 8510 Instruments 2 of 2 120 Vac 120 240 Vac FAN TRANSFORMER 38 Vac A15 REGULATOR 120 240 Vac 120 240 Voc UNE SWITCH LINE SWITCH 8510C On Site Service Manual 2 5 Safety Licensing 8510 Safety Information Compliance with German FTZ Emissions Requirements The Agilent 8510C network analyzer complies with German FTZ 526 527 Radiated Emissions and Conducted missions requirements This is to dedare that the products listed below are in conformance with the German Regulation on Noise Declaration for Machines Laermangabe nach der Maschinenlaermrerordnung 3 GSGV Deutschland Instruments with fan installed Gerate mit engebautem Ventilator
335. execute certain commands Also these tests verify operation of the A5 attenuator switch driver board for S parameter test sets only These tests can be run with the test set connected to the entire system and also with the test set only connected to the 85101C For more troubleshooting information about the test set refer to Unratioed Power Failures Preset Test Set 1 This test initializes the test set to its own preset state 0 dB attenuation Power to port 1 S11 display Active light on port 1 Thetest set must be at GPIB address 720 or just 20 on the switches If this test fails the failure message will remain on the display even if you run any other test or if you run this test again and it passes To dear the failure message from the display exit this menu and return Switch Active Light 2 This test toggles the front panel active light when the ZMARKER key is pressed This test verifies that the light is working properly Switch Port 1 2 Lights 3 This test switches the two front panel LEDs on an S parameter test set to display all four possible states 00 01 10 11 This test verifies that the A5 board can switch power between the ports separately and together Also the test set A5 attenuator switch driver board has two LEDs that should also light as you press the ZMARKER key to toggle the power to all four states Activate Port 1 2 Attenuator 4 This test alternately activates deactivates port 1 and 2 attenuato
336. ey different The data sheet values for these curves do not indude the effects of cable stability and system drift errors Table 8 4 Using a Custom Calibration Kit Exercise 3a Answers Questions Answers 1 How can you verify that the 511 magnitude uncertainty curve is correct At S11 0 the value for the 26 5 GHz curve should be about 35 dB or 0 0178 linear since that is the of return loss of theload 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 29 Performance Verification and Specifications Using the Software A Tutorial Table 8 5 Error Terms to Modify for Generating Uncertainty Curves Error Term Value Power of source 10 dB Effective directivity 30 dB Effective reflection tracking 0 011 dB Effecti ve source match 25 dB Effective load match 30 dB Effective power ref out port 1 40 dBm Loss dc source to port 1 30 dB Loss dc port 1 to B1 50 dB Loss dc port 2 to B2 80 dB Loss dc sourceto A1 50 dB Table 8 6 Using a Special Test Set Exercise 3b Answers Error Term Value 1 What is the difference between the S21 As expected the lower case uncertainty is larger upper case magnitude uncertainty and the than the upper case uncertainty The plots for lower case uncertainty both the upper and lower case uncertainty are shown in Figure 8 3 and Figure 8 4 8 30 8510C On Site Service Manual Figure 8 3 Performance Verification and Specifications Using the Sof
337. eyboard BASIC RESET key will not reset the program s menus to their default settings The program keeps data in the controller memory so that you can perform other computer tasks when paused in the middle of the program You can then rerun the program without having to reload files The program database includes error models for hardware components of the system The software only generates specifications and allows performance testi ng for system hardware that is included in the database For example specifications for systems using cables other than those available through Agilent cannot be generated because error models for them are not contained in the data Refer to Substitution of System Components located later in this chapter NOTE Specifications for a system using an 8511 frequency converter test set can be generated using this software refer to Reference I nformation for Performance Verification and Specifications in this chapter However the performance verification must be performed with 8511 performance verification software shipped with 8511 frequency converters NOTE For 8510 systems that have their own system manual refer to that manual for performance verification instructions 8 8 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Software for Performance Verification and Specifications System Performance Equipment Thetable below shows the equipment required to do the system performance ve
338. faces Agilent part number 8500 2163 is on such solution 10 4 8510C On Site Service Manual Preventive Maintenance Degauss Demagnetize the Display CRT Only Degauss Demagnetize the Display CRT Only If the display becomes magnetized or if color purity is a problem cycle the power several times Leavethe instrument off for at least 15 seconds before turning it on This will activatethe automatic degaussing circuit in the analyzer display If thisis insufficient to achieve color purity a commercially available demagnetizer must be used either a CRT demagnetizer or a bulk tape eraser can be used Follow the manufacturer s instructions keeping in mind the following it is imperative that at first it be placed no closer than 4 inches 10 cm from the face of the CRT while demagnetizing the display If this distanceis toofar to completely demagnetize the CRT try again at a slightly doser distance until the CRT is demagnetized Generally degaussing is accomplished with a slow rotary motion of the degausser moving it in a circle of increasing radius while simultaneously moving away from the CRT Figure 10 2 shows the motion for degaussing the display CAUTION Applying an excessively strong magnetic field to the CRT face can destroy the CRT Like most displays the CRT can be sensitive to large magnetic fields generated from unshielded motors In countries that use 50 Hz some 10 Hz jitter may be observed If this problem is obser
339. fer to Table 8 2 at the end of this section for answers to the questions below 1 Which effective error term would dominate when you measure the following a A very good 50W termination b A short circuit c An amplifier with 10 dB of gain d Theisolation of a switch 2 What is the raw directivity at 26 5 GHz H ow does it compare to the data sheet 3 What is the difference between system and receiver dynamic range Computing Uncertainty Curves Exercise 2 Select System Uncert from the M ain menu Review the following descriptions to learn more about a few of the menu selections Parameter Select the appropriate s parameter Format Choose magnitude or phase Uncertainty Limit Selection applies only to transmission measurements where The Upper Limit is 20xlog 1 error The Lower Limit is 20xlog 1 error Thelower limit always produces the larger uncertainty value Compute Choose from the worst case uncertainty RSS uncertainty dynamic range or test port power levels e RSS uncertainties are calculated with the RSS of all systematic errors but the 3 sigma values of random errors are still used for 99 796 certainty Dynamic accuracy shows the worst case uncertainty duetolF residuals and detector inaccuracies without the effects of noise frequency response directivity port match cross talk and connector repeatability Compute Using uncertainty may be computed using Specification Data
340. ferences represent systematic repeatable errors of the network analyzer system The resulting measurement calibration coefficients are good representations of some raw error sources of the system Use the procedures in this section to generate and examine error terms This information can be useful in two ways Preventive Maintenance A stable repeatable system should generate repeatable error terms over long time intervals for example six months Make a hardcopy record print or plot of the error terms then periodically compare current error terms with the record A sudden shift in error terms reflects a sudden shift in systematic errors or a degradation of cal standards and may indicate the need for further troubleshooting A long term trend usually reflects drift connector or cable wear or gradual degradation of calibration devices indicating the need for further investigation and preventive maintenance Note that the system may still conform to specifications The cure is often as simple as deaning and gaging connectors and cal standards or inspecting cables Troubleshooting If a subtle failure or minor performance problem is suspected the magnitude of the error terms should be compared against values generated previously with the same system and calibration kit This comparison will produce the most precise view of the problem Consider the following while troubleshooting These procedures are especially good for determining if a
341. fety markings and instructions before operation This product has been designed and tested in accordance with the standards listed on the Manufacturer s Dedaration of Conformity and has been supplied in a safe condition The documentation contains information and warnings that must be followed by the user to ensure safe operation and to maintain the product in a safe condition Instruction manual symbol the product will be marked with this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer tothe instruction manual refer to Table of Contents Indicates hazardous voltages Indicates earth ground terminal The WARNING sign denotes a hazard It call attention to a procedure practice or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in personal injury Do not proceed beyond WARNING until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met The CAUTION sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to an operating procedure practice or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damageto or destruction of part or all of the product Do not proceed beyond a CAUTION sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met GENERAL SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS SAFETY EARTH GROUND This is a Safety Class product provided with a protective earthing terminal An uninterruptible safety earth ground must be provided from the main power source to the produc input wiring
342. ff the 85101C Remove post regulator A3 from its motherboard connector but keep theA 10 to A3 cable A10W1 connected to If the 85101C is equipped with a CRT remove display power cable W1 see Figure 4 15 Short to chassis ground any of the three common GND pins located on the top edge of the A3 post regulator Turn the 85101C on f any A3 post regulator green LEDs other than 45 V PREREG is still off or flashing continue with this procedure Ifall LEDs are now on steadily except for the 5 V PREREG LED the A10 preregulator and A3 post regulator are working properly and the trouble is excessive loading somewhere after the motherboard connections at post regulator A3 Continue this procedure with Remove M ore Assemblies Check the A3 Fuses and Voltages If any of LEDs for the following supplies are completely off first check their fuses 65 V 12 V 5 V DSK MTR The fuses for these supplies are all located on the top edge of the A3 post regulator board assembly Their supply circuits test points and current ratings are listed in Table 4 11 4 108 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure 85101C Display Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting The part numbers of these fuses are in Chapter 5 in Table 5 5 Table 4 11 Post Regulator F uses LED Test Point Fuse Designator Fuse Rating Agilent Part Number TP1 A3F1 1 5A 125V 2110 0333 4 2 2A 125V 2110 0425 TP5 A3F3 2A 125V
343. ffective directivity of 35 dB Port match of 35 dB 4 Reflection tracking of 0 024 TIP In the hardware configuration menu select the 85052D calibration kit and edit the effective terms Remember to select User Parameters when generating the S11 magnitude uncertainty curve Task Generate S11 magnitude uncertainty curve for this measurement 9 Question How can you verify that the S11 magnitude uncertainty curve is correct Answers are provided in Table 8 4 Using a Special Test Set Exercise 3b You want to compute the S21 uncertainty at 26 5 GHz for a customized high power measurement setup using the same 8511A A block diagram of the setup is shown in Figure 8 2 Figure 8 2 Equipment Setup Block Diagram 50 dB 10 dBm 91 30dB bi 20 dB 20dB 719 Em 40dBm thru amp AD X X gt x 2 30 dB 40dBm 25dB 65dBm b2 a2 LO Input 8 24 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Using the Software A Tutorial For the hardware configuration choose the following 8511A test set 4 No source Nocalibration kit 4 No cables verification kit Use the broad band load calibration method Assume the following Effective directivity of 30 dB Reflection tracking of 0 011 Source match of 25 dB Load match of 30 dB Task Plot the S21 magnitude uncertainty uppercase uncertainty Question What is the difference between t
344. firmware revision It must be C 06 00 or higher On the analyzer press SYSTEM MORE SERVICE FUNCTIONS SOFTWARE REVISION Upgrading an Agilent 8360 Source For complete compatibility with revision C 07 00 or greater firmware your source must be an Agilent 8360 series source If an 8360 series source is not used power domain and receiver calibration functions will not work The 8510C works with all 8360 synthesized sweeper models H owever some 8360 instruments must be upgraded totake advantage of two 8510C system features quick step mode and test port power flatness correction Refer to Table 4 1 Table 4 1 Upgrade Summary Agilent Model Serial Prefix Required for Test Port Flatness Correction and Quick Step Mode 83630A 83650A All No modification required 83651A 3103A 83601A upgrade kit 83621A 3103A 08360 60167 firmware kit 83631A 3104A to 3111A 08360 60201 firmware kit gt 3112 No modification required 83620A 83622A 3103A 08360 60167 firmware kit 83623A 3104A to 3111A 08360 60201 firmware kit 83624 3112 to 3144 No modification required 83640A gt 3145 No modification required 83642A 1 Fully compatible at time of shipment 2 Indudes installation 3 Quick Step cannot be retrofitted to these models 4 12 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Troubleshooting Outline Abbreviated 8510C System Service Flowchart cont Firmware Revisions Operation
345. following tables as a guidetothe abbreviations in the error model flowgraphs The additional information column helps darify how the error terms are derived The system flowgraphs show the following Error model of the uncorrected analyzer system without measurement calibration Error model of the corrected analyzer system the residual errors remaining after measurement calibration 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 83 Performance Verification and Specifications Measurement Uncertainties NOTE In all of the terms below f the forward direction and r the reverse direction Table 8 10 Residual Error Term Symbols Error Term Eterm Symbol Additional Information Power of Source t Ps Condition Averaging factor Avg Condition Loss of Attenuator 1 t Lal Condition Loss of Attenuator 2 t La2 Condition Cable Flex Factor Cff Condition Drift in Room Temperature Drt Condition Effective Directivity T Efd Erd Fac Comp Effective Refl Tracking t Efr Err Fac Comp Effective Source match t Efs Ers Fac Comp Effective Crosstalk Efc Erc Fac Comp Effective Trans Tracking t Eft Ert Fac Comp Effective Load Match t Efl Erl Fac Comp Effective Noise on Trace Efnt Ernt Fac Comp Effective Noise Floor Efnf Ernf Fac Comp Effective Power Ref out port1 2 Epr1 Epr2 Typical Effective Power max in port1 2 Epx2 1 Typical Effective Power miN in port1 2 Epn2 Epn1 Typical Effective Dny Rng Ref min port1 2 Ed
346. ft of the block diagram The running error messages are listed on the right and have numbers associated with each message that cross reference locations on the block diagram Helpful Troubleshooting Hints Before troubleshooting a caution running error message first do the following Makesurethat the line power applied to all instruments is correct Check all connections Refer to Chapter 9 System Installation if necessary Makesurethe source RF power and frequency are correct as some phase lock errors are caused by these being improperly set Besurethat the test set is properly downconverting the RF source input signal to 20 MHz Refer to Unratioed Power Failures to verify test set operation Always press the ENTRY OFF and MEASUREMENT RESTART keys several times after an error message is displayed This will allow you to obtain the best indication of the true failure This is necessary because a running error message may bethe result of the CPU executing a firmware instruction at the time of failure Therefore the displayed error message is indicating a related failure not the actual failure It is indicating a failure at the wrong place or wrong assembly The error message that continually repeats is the running error message you want to troubleshoot Makesurethe system is powered up in the proper order to avoid a possible phaselock error The instrument power on sequence is In systems with external controllers sw
347. ftkey 7 Switch off the analyzer power Configure the equipment as the controller display shows Make sure that the addresses of the test equipment match the addresses appearing on the controller 8 Switch on the analyzer power but switch on the display processor last to avoid system lockup 8510C On Site Service Manual 7 19 Adjustments Procedure 5 IF Mixer Adjustment Figure 7 6 Location of the IF Mixer Adjustments A14 A1 IF MIXER A13 A2 IF MIXER A11 Bt IF MIXER A9 B2 IF MIXER A9 A11 A13 A1U XTAL FILTER 1 2 5 1 61 F A13 F MER F 9 When a graticule appears on the analyzer display the instrument has finished initializing Press CONTINUE on the controller 10 The following prompt is displayed ADJUST XTAL FILTER 1 2 AND 3 FOR MINIMUM RIPPLE 1 2 dB 20 kHz BW 11 Refer to Figure 7 6 for the location of the XTAL FILTER adjustments To get the minimum ripple of the RF envelope seen on the spectrum analyzer iterate XTAL FILTER adjustments 1 2 and 3 Adjust for minimum ripple at 100 kHz 10 kHz see Figure 7 7 12 If you are unable to adjust the XTAL FILTER within specification if the following prompt is displayed check the equipment setup for configuration errors or refer to the troubleshooting chapter 100kHz LEVEL TOO LOW 20 dBm 13 When the adjustment is complete press CONTINUE to return to the menu 14 Switch off the analyzer power
348. g strategy uses several different processes This main procedure explains the appropriate times when each of these troubleshooting processes should be used Control configuration and cabling pre operational checks These can quickly identify many failures Spedific procedures for certain obvious failures When the nature of a failureis obvious the procedure goes immediately to symptom related troubleshooting steps nternal diagnostics The service program checks various circuits in the network analyzer e Hardware service tools Test devices emulate the test set and source to determine if the problem is in the analyzer 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 3 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Troubleshooting Outline What s Wrong First consider four questions before any other troubleshooting is attempted These questions quickly focus the direction troubleshooting should take The questions are Arethere any self test failures Arethere any running error messages sthere an unratioed power failure sthere any other obvious failure type Before you continue with the individual troubleshooting for each of these problems go to the Control Configuration and Cabling Pre Operational Checks on page 4 8 These checks can quickly correct up to 70 of failures Self Test Failures The network analyzer performs a series of self tests each time it is powered up If the analyzer passes all the tests it loads and runs
349. grees C BAND 0 1 2 3 Full Band Frequency range GHz 01 2 4 2 4 7 7 13 5 13 5 20 01 20 Frequency accuracy M Hz Ramp sweep typical 5 6 25 30 50 Ramp sweep typical using 5 6 8 10 15 Trim Sweep 8510 mm Wave Systems Performance verification procedures for mm wave systems and the 85106 racked system are provided with mm wave products and documented in 8510 mm wave system manuals 8511 Frequency Converter Test Sets When generating specifications for systems using an 8511 frequency converter test set specify the following in the hardware configuration menu Nosource Notest port cables Nocal kit Noverification kit When no source is specified a 20 dBm power level is assumed at the samplers during calibration 8 98 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications When a source is chosen the performance verification software assumes no loss between the source and samplers thereby causing the software to show an overload on the samplers 8511 performance verification procedures and software are provided with the 8511 they are not part of this program Controller Keyboard Keys The program is capable of responding to many of the BASIC operating system key presses induding INSERT CHAR DELETE CHAR INSERT LINE etc Controller Displays with Limited Scrolling Capabili
350. h diagrams with the results listed in the table of most probable failures below Out of 32 possible variations the table lists the variations that result from 12 of the most probable failures Ifthe observed results match a group of results in the table investigate the most probable cause given in the table lf all the paths are good then the test set is probably working properly Return to the Main Troubleshooting Procedure to continue troubleshooting the system Ifthe observed results do not match any of those given in the table re evaluate and possibly re measure your observed data If the data is valid troubleshoot using the RF path diagram s given in this foldout for the bad signal traces Most Probable Failure Test set is not the problem Source source cable VTO cables from rear panel to switch splitter Switch splitter Switch splitter a sampler sampler b sampler Port 1 connector or directional coupler Attenuator 1 bias tee 1 Attenuator 2 bias tee 2 Port 2 connector or directional coupler log MAG REF 21 0 dB 10 0 dB V 32 229 dB 1 a MARKER 1 0 0 GHz START 0 045000000 GHz STOP 20 000000000 GHz BIAS 2 b2 TAPERED PAD _ a2 COUPLER arten 2 O TO 90dB SWITCH RF IN SPLITTER TUNE TO 90dB PRETUNE TAPERED SENSE PAD TEN 1
351. he hardware change 2 Pec arrow keys TAB key to position the cursor at the term that needs to e edit Usethe number keys to enter the values Continue editing error terms until your system or device is defined Press Done when you have finished editing error terms Atthe prompt Re compute effective terms from raw terms respond with Yes The function of the Edit Specs menu keys are described below Undo Term Usethis key torestore all values of the currently highlighted error term tothe value listed just prior to your most recent change If you have changed an error term then changed it again but you want to restore the value to your first change press Undo Term Use Reset All only if you want to usethe software s predefined error terms Undo All Usethis key to restorethe values of all the error terms tothe previous change As with Undo Term this key changes all the error terms of thetableto previously changed values Use Reset only if you want to use the software s predefined error terms Reset Term Usethis key torestore the value of the currently highlighted error term to the software s predefined error term values Save Eterms Usethis key to save the edited error term table under a file name you specify Recall Eterms Usethis key to display a data field for you to enter the name of an error term table file to recall You need to press Next or Previous until t
352. he A7 1 0 that control the disk drive Disc Write Read Test A2 A7 2 This tests the status of the disk drive adjusts to high or low density disks and then writes and reads to one sector of the disk on each side It writes again in another location then reads back everything and verifies If there is no disk in the drive or if it is write protected then the status will be displayed and the test halted Timer Test A7 3 This tests all three sections of the programmabletimer It is set up with a known value and then read back to see that it has counted down Serial 1 Test 7 4 A special interconnect electronic tool is required to perform this test This tool is not available to the field This tests the bi directional communication of the serial 1 0 ports on the rear panel of the 85101C Data flow is from RS 232 Port 1 to RS 232 Port 2 and then the data is sent back to RS 232 Port 1 Timer Clock Peripheral TCP Tests A7 5 This is a combination of seven tests that check out and set the TCP chip for beeper and time date functions CPU to GPIB Test 7 6 This routine creates a test pattern then initializes the GPIB chip to causean internal echo of the data The resulting data is compared to the original and error messages are generated The above sequence is repeated for each port Nothing should be connected to the rear panel during this test Bidirectional GPIB HP IB Test A7 7 Tests the a
353. he Specification and Uncertainties Printouts 8 61 Measurement Ss cci eee band boas 8 75 rrr 8 75 Sources of Measurement Errors cade RR GEO 8 76 42 duc odii e dais due Sut qe shaq 8 76 SOUrces er Bang S Sa 8 76 Contents 8 Contents Sources of Drift ETIS asus risia Ee eee AREA Y 8 77 Sources of Additional Measurement 5 8 77 Measurement Uncertainty 5 8 78 Reflection Uncertainty Equations acude br rw 54 o add 8 78 Transmission Uncertainty Equations 2 8 80 Generation of System Measurement 8 82 System Error sew DORE 8 83 Additional Information Definitions 8 87 8510C System Uncorrected Error Model Flowgraph 8 89 8510C System Corrected Error Model Flowgraph 8 91 Dynamic Accuracy Error Model sucesos veda pe ween eo eee res 8 93 Measurement Traceability s daa tae he 8 93 Substitution of System C
354. he asterisk flashes before entering a filename Done Use this key when you have finished editing the error term table New uncertainties are computed based on the error terms Prior Menu Usethis key to return to a previous menu 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 19 Performance Verification and Specifications Performing System Verification Saving Edited Error Term Values Usethe new features in the softwareto save your specific error terms in a user parameters file Usethe following steps to save customized error terms The original data files are isolated from changes made to the error term tables for your specific system As a result you can chooseto use standard error terms or your customized values 1 After editing error term tables press the Done key to save edited terms 2 From the Main menu press Edit Specs Save Eterms 3 Enter a file name and directory if needed for the new data in the space provided NOTE To enter a file name press Next or Previous until the blinking asterisk appears beside the blank input field The blinking asterisk indicates that you can edit the current field The program allows you to choose a previously entered file name or type in a new one Use the Next and Previous keys to select another file name Recalling a Custom Error Term File After saving the custom fileto disk you can recall it for use whenever the system you plan to use matches your current hardware configuration
355. he preregulator assembly away from the frame Disconnect the cable harness assembly at the J 8 preregulator connection on the motherboard To Reassemble 5 Toinstall a new preregulator reverse steps 2 through 4 Torque all screws to 113 N cm 10 in Ib Perform step 5 of rear panel replacement procedure 8510C On Site Service Manual 6 13 Replacement P rocedures 85101C Replacement Procedures Motherboard Card Cage Assembly Replacement Tools Required Large Pozidrive screwdriver Small Pozidrive screwdriver Very small flat blade screwdriver T 10 Torx screwdriver T 15 Torx screwdriver Procedure To Disassemble 1 Disconnect the power cords and remove all handles and covers 2 Perform the front panel A1 disassembly procedure which removes the LCD assembly If the 85101C is equipped with a CRT perform the CRT display A11 disassembly procedure Perform the rear panel A9 disassembly procedure Perform the preregulator A10 disassembly procedure Remove all PC boards from the instrument W Remove all screws from the frame of the instrument The front and rear frame are now free from the motherboard card cage assembly To Reassemble 7 Reverse the preceding steps torquing screws to 113 N cm 10 in Ib 6 14 8510C On Site Service Manual Replacement Procedures 85101C Replacement Procedures This pageintentionally left blank 8510C On Site Service Manual 6 15 Replacement P rocedures 85101C
356. he tables show values that are already included in the calculations for system specifications Their use is limited to inspecting the flowgraph error terms that exist between the coupler or bridge and the sampler The symbol for the error terms that is used in the system error model located later in this chapter NOTE Refer to the system error model later in this chapter for the association of the error terms with the system error flow graph 8 64 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts Example 8 9 Raw 1 Channel Errors Netuork fina Test Set Source System Specifications Al Channel Errors Correction OFF HP051 B Enhanced Model 6168003 2 4mm S Parameter 45MHz 406Hz HP838X016 amp 8516 Synth 10MHz 40GHz lyzer 2 Calibration Kit HPBS SGA 2 4 Slotless Standard Grade Calibration Technique SL Sliding Load Cal Test Port Cebles HP85133D pair short cables 2 4mn 2 4mm LH Frequency 6Hz Description Of Error Term iSymbl 045 7 2 20 20 36 36 40 s ss S s low Freg Culoff Source lo GHz Fosal 1 0 000 0 000 9 0090 0 000 low Frey Slope source to At dB iFssel 0 00 0 02 0 09 Drift Mag deg c Source tc dB iDmsat 0402 0402 0403 0403 Dosa
357. he test set port connector type to the calibration kit and determines if an adapter is required for that configuration Attention Messages and SCPP Settings When the program exercises the 8510 to determine if it and its peripherals are correctly addressed and responding it will display a message if there is a problem This message will tell you to check the GPIB address Check the software configuration menu addresses so that they correspond to the address switches set on the peripherals SCPP is an BASIC abbreviation for select code primary address It is possibleto have an 8510 address anywhere from 716 through 3130 depending upon your system address configuration BASIC 5 0 and HP UX Systems setting the time on your system If you are using BASIC 5 0 that is running from a hard disc shared with an HP UX system you may find that the time displayed by the program is incorrect because BASIC requires explicit information to set the correct time Do not usethe program to change the system dock Instead use the TIMEZONE IS command to set the correct time and rerun the program Refer to the BASIC Language Reference manual Calculated Error Terms Some of the error terms that appear in the specifications are calculated by the program They are not fixed values on the database both forward and reverse directions they are Effective Forward Reverse Crosstalk Effective Forward Reverse Noise on the Trace Effective Forward Reverse
358. heck the operating temperature 45 5 5 5 4 lt Inspect the A8 motherboard Determine Why the Green LEDs on Are Not All On Remove the post regulator from its motherboard connector maintain A10W1 cable connection 4 Check the fuses and voltages X Remove more assemblies Disconnect display power cable CRT only Disconnect A15 LCD assembly cable and or A16 backlight inverter cable LCD only V Inspect motherboard Fan Troubleshooting Fan speeds 4 Check the fan voltages Intermittent Problems Replace the A5 CPU board assembly V Ifthe problem continues replace the A10 preregulator assembly 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 99 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Power Supply Failures Table4 10 Power Supply Troubleshooting Summary 2 of 2 85102 IF Detector Power Supply Troubleshooting Check the Green and Red LEDs on the A15 Regulator Four green LEDs should be on one red LED off V If not cycle power and measure the test points Check the 5 V Test Points on A24 Interface X Remove assemblies and check 5V LED on 15 Check the LEDs and Output Voltages of A26 Rectifier Four green LEDs should be on Measure at fuses 22 V and 11 Vdc 4 Check line voltage selector Check Connector P1 4 Unplug A26 4 100 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure 85101C Display Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting 85101C Display Processor Power Supply Tro
359. herboard and from there to all assemblies requiring a digital supply A 5 V sense line returns from the motherboard to the preregulator In order for the preregulator to function the 45 VD supply must be loaded by one or more assemblies and the 5 V sense line must be working If not the other preregulated voltages will be incorrect However this condition will not cause damage as all circuits are over and under voltage protected Shutdown Indications Thegreen LED is on in normal operation It is off when line power is not connected not turned on or set too low or if the line fuse has blown TheredLED is off in normal operation It lights to indicate a 5 V supply fault or power transformer circuitry fault such as an undervoltage overvoltage overcurrent or overtemperature condition Post Regulator A3 filters and regulates the dc voltages received from the preregulator It provides fusing and shutdown circuitry for individual voltage supplies It distributes regulated constant voltages to individual assemblies throughout the instrument Five green LEDs provide status indications for the individual voltage supplies 465V for CRT display not used for LCD 15V for the fan and dropped to 12 V for RS 232 ports 45 PREREG digital supply also called 5 VDIG e 412V variable for the fan and fixed for RS 232 ports 45 DSK MTR for the disc drive motor The post regulator consists of these circuits among ot
360. herboard or connector or cable failure 596 Additional troubleshooting hints Inthe main Service Functions test menu press 2 2 ZMARKER to enter the 8510 service program menu Select 85101 Display Processor Service Program and run display board and CRT test A4 A11 or LCD tests A14 A15 Test 6 A7 Timer Clock R S 232 Most likely cause of failure A71 O board failure 90 Additional troubleshooting hints Inthe main Service Functions test menu press 2 2 MARKER to enter 8510 Service Program menu Select 85101 Display Processor Service Program and thel O Board and Front Panel Tests A1 A2 A7 Test 7 A7 Public GPIB Most likely cause of failure A71 O board failure 90 A5 CPU board failure 1096 A8 motherboard trace connection failure 1 Additional troubleshooting hints Minimizethe system remove A6 and all GPIB cables Rerun self test number 7 If it does not pass check the control lines Inthe main Service Functions test menu press 2 2 MARKER to enter 8510 Service Program menu Select 85101 Display Processor Service Program and run the 1 0 Board and Front Panel Tests A1 A2 A7 4 62 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Self Test Failures Test 8 A7 System Bus Most likely cause of failure A71 O board failure 80 A5 CPU board 2090 A8 motherboard 1 Additional troubleshooting hints Minimizethe system remo
361. hers Shutdown circuit Variable fan speed circuit Low power circuit 8510C On Site Service Manual 3 13 Theory of Operation 85101 Display Processor Shutdown Circuit is triggered by overcurrent overvoltage undervoltage or overtemperature It protects the instrument by causing the regulated voltage supplies to be shut down The voltages that are not shut down are the 5 VDIG digital supply from the preregulator and the fan supplies If a fault occurs in any of the post regulated voltages except 465 V all but the 465 V and 45 VDIG shut down The shutdown circuit can be disabled momentarily for troubleshooting purposes But do so quickly and carefully or components may be damaged Variable Fan Speed Circuit and an air flow detector provide fan power as needed Fan power is derived directly from the 18 V and 18 V supplies from the preregulator The fan is fused only with thelinefuse sothat it will continue to provide airflow and cooling when the instrument is otherwise disabled If overheating occurs the main instrument supplies are shut down and the fan runs at full speed Full speed is normal at initial power up Low Power Fail Warning Circuit L PF W detects low power and shuts down the CPU gracefully Voltage Indicators The five green LEDs along the top edge of the post regulator assembly are on in normal operation to indicate the correct voltage is present in each supply If they are off or flashing refer to Chapter
362. hip between the boards in the 85102 There is specific signal flow that corresponds to the arrangement of the boards in this instrument Therefore it is recommended that you use the Run mode first whenever you suspect a problem or replace a board in this instrument This Run mode will run all thetests in a specific order Later you can run the tests individually Also the Run All or any individual tests be looped repeatedly to look for intermittent errors Again because of the interdependence of the boards it is possible to fail a specific test although the real failure is due to a problem on a different board This is because the other board provided a faulty signal tothe board that appeared to fail 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 139 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Service Program The following sequence is recommended to minimize the chance of erroneous test failures When running the tests separately run them in the order below 1 ADC control test A19 2 Sweep ADC A20 ADC A18 and 100 kHz IF amplifiers A10 A12 3 Cal DAC A17 Mixers A9 A11 A13 A14 synchronous detectors A5 A7 and all others If the Test Does Not Verify or Isolate the Failure If after running these service program tests you suspect a single board use the Run All mode first and then run the single board test afterward If running the test does not verify the failure refer to Other Failures That section contains additio
363. his condition indicates the source should be calibrated to the 8510 through its trim sweep adjustment refer to the 8510 Operating and Programming M anual Phase Lock Learn Mode This mode enables the system especially a sweeper based system to sweep quickly and accurately after the first sweep In this context the first sweep means the first sweep at a new start or stop frequency or new sweep speed The first sweep takes longer than subsequent sweeps for two reasons 1 Prior to the first sweep the processor determines band crossing frequencies based on default or calculated values This determination takes some time 2 At the end of the first sweep the processor recalculates the band crossing frequencies based on where it found the I F Recall that the sweep linearity of sweepers like the Agilent 8350 and its associated plug in is approximately 350 MHz This wide range almost invariably forces the 8510 to enter an IF search routine The frequency inaccuracy of the sweeper displaces the IF and forces the search For example assume a start frequency of 500 MHz The 8510 pretunes the VTO to produce an LO of 520MHz 20MHz abovetheRF and it expects tofind thelF at 20 MHz required for phase lock But if the sweeper RF is actually 478 MHz thelF would be 42 MHz not 20 MHz as calculated The 8510 would not find the IF initially But after retuning the LO to 498 MHz it would find the required 20 MHz IF LO VTO RF Sweeper IF LO R
364. his result and the lowercase uncertainty Refer to Table 8 6 for the answer TIP Modify the effective terms and the raw loss terms Don t forget to select User Parameters when you start generating the 521 magnitude uncertainty curves Using Non Standard Test Cables Exercise 3c You are using a pair of non standard 3 5 mm flexible cables You want to approximate the measurement uncertainty for an 8510SX system over the system s entire frequency range While you cannot guarantee the results you can change certain error terms to provide satisfactory results Question Assuming you have specified No Cables in the Hardware Configuration menu which error terms do you need to degrade to account for this cable Refer to Table 8 7 for answers TIP Consider how the cables impact your measurements The cable s known worst case loss is 1 85 dB at 16 GHz and 0 25 dB at 45 MHz You can determine the RF cable loss by assuming that similar to Agilent cables the total loss on these cables has a constant dc loss component and an RF loss component that varies with the square root of the frequency in GHz 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 25 Performance Verification and Specifications Using the Software A Tutorial Theerror termis Loss sqrt F GHz port 1 2 cable Usethefollowing formula to calculate the error term assuming F 1 gt F gt Loss1 Loss2 F GHz F GHz Question What is the value of this error term for the
365. hoot accordingly To rerun the self test sequence a single self test to verify the fault refer to How to Run the Self Test Sequence Repeatedl y 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 55 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Self Test Failures How to Identify a Self Test Failure When the Display Is Not Working When the display does not indicate a self test failure but you suspect a failure observe the front panel LEDs They may or may not indicatethe failed self test If all of the front panel LEDs are lit refer to What to Do If the R L T S 8 4 2 1 LEDs Stay Lit Default Test 15 on page 4 53 This is not a self test failure but default test 15 condition If some combination of the 8 4 2 1 LEDs stays lit and none of the R L T S LEDs are lit the binary sum of the numbers indicates the failed self test Continue with the troubleshooting procedures below If some combination of the 8 4 2 1 LEDs stays lit and only one two or three of the R L T S LEDs lit the binary sum of the numbers indicates the failed subtest To see what self test failed continue with the next paragraph How to Identify a Self Test Failure with the CPU Board LEDs When neither the display nor the front panel LEDs indicate a self test failure but you suspect a failure check the A5 CPU board as explained below 1 Turn off the display processor Remove its top cover and locate the A5 board It has red pull levers and six LEDs near its upper edge The
366. ht SYNC Synchronous 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 5 Replaceable P arts Table 5 2 Abbreviations Multipliers and Manufacturer s CodeList Multipliers Abbreviation Prefix Multiple Abbreviation Prefix Multiple Abbreviation Multiple T tera 1012 da deka 10 n nano 10 9 G giga 109 d ded 1071 p pico 10712 M mega 106 centi 19 3 f femto 10 15 k kilo 103 m milli 19 3 a atto 10 16 u micro 10 6 Manufacturer s Code List Mfr No Manufacturer Name Address Zip Code 00000 Any satisfactory supplier 00853 Sangamo Elec Co S Carolina Div Pickens SC 29671 01295 Texas Instr Inc Semicon Cmpnt Div Dallas TX 75222 24355 Analog Devices Inc Norwood MA 02062 28480 Agilent Co Corporate Hg Palo Alto CA 94304 56289 Sprague Electric Co North Adams MA 01247 75402 Trw Inc Philadelphia Philadelphia PA 19108 91673 Dale Electronics Columbus NE 68601 5 6 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable P arts Software Documentation and Accessories Software Documentation and Accessories Table 5 3 Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Number Code Number Software 85101 80116 1 Operating System Firmware for LCD or CRT 28480 85101 80116 displays 08510 10033 1 Test Set Specifications and Performance Tests 28480 08510 10033 Disk Note Thesetests are used for all test sets exc
367. iagnostics Probable cause of failure Power holes or frequency error in the source 85102 A21 IF counter 85102 A22 pretune phase lock assembly 85102 A23 main phase lock Test set A3 VTO summing amplifier assembly Faulty or intermittent VTO assembly with 15 dB power loss Troubleshooting Run 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode Run 85102 service program tests 8 A22 9 A23 and A A21 Check the unratioed power level of test set signal path al Check all rear panel connections Pretune Failure Pretune Lost Failure The lock detector on the 85102 A22 pretune control assembly indicates that the pretune cycle has not occurred The pretune cycle changes the VTO output to a frequency where one of its harmonics mixes with the RF to produce the 20 MHz IF The power from the VTO sense line must drop about 15 dB to 18 dBm before a VTO failure message occurs This condition could cause the VTO frequency to be noisy and low in power Probable cause of failure Test set power turned off Overheated or bad test set VTO 85102 A23 main phase lock board IF detector test set interconnect cable 85102 A22 pretune assembly 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 79 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Running Error Messages Test set A3 VTO summing amplifier LPRTHLD line to test set summing amplifier from 85102 A22 pretune assembly Troubleshooting Run 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode Run 85102
368. ic of China tel preferred 800 810 0189 tel alternate 10800 650 0021 fax 10800 650 0121 India td 1 600 11 2929 fax 000 800 650 1101 Safety and Regulatory Information Review this product and related documentation to familiarize yourself with safety markings and instructions before you operate the instrument This product has been desi gned and tested in accordance with international standards WARNING The WARNING notice denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure practice or the like that if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in personal injury Do not proceed beyond a WARNING notice until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met CAUTION The CAUTION notice denotes a hazard It calls attention to an operating procedure practice or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damageto the product or loss of important data Do not proceed beyond a CAUTION notice until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met Instrument Markings N 2 j 1279 When you see this symbol your instrument you should refer to the instrument s instruction manual for important information This symbol indicates hazardous voltages The C tick is a registered trademark of the Australian Spectrum Mangagement Agency This symbol indicates that the instrument requires alternating current ac input The
369. ication Specification Uncertainty CW Frequency Accuracy Worst Case Value 45 MHz 44 999955 MHz 45 000045 MHz 10 Hz 2 GHz 1 999998 GHz 2 000002 GHz 10 Hz 20 GH zd 19 99998 GHz 20 00002 GHz 4 kHz 26 5 GHz 626 4999735 GHz 26 5000265 GHz 5 kHz 40 GHz 39 99996 GHz 40 00004 GHz 5 kHz 50 GHz9 24 999975 GHz 25 000025 GHz 5 kHz Swept Frequency Accuracy Worst Case Value Start Freq 0 1 of sweep 150 kHz 8360 Stop Freq 1 of sweep 8340 41 Worst Case Value Start Freq 0 1 of sweep 150 kHz 8360 Stop Freq 1 of sweep 8340 41 a The measurement uncertainty is quoted for these performance tests using only the recommended models specified in Table 8 1 The measurement uncertainty quoted represents limits of 3 times the equivalent standard deviation 3s and is intended to represent a 99 confidence level 83622 24 only 83640 only 83651 only 8 106 For all sources except 83622 24 83620 21 22 23 24 and 8341 only 83631 40 51 and 8340 only 8510C On Site Service Manual System Installation System Installation Overview Overview This chapter provides instructions for installing and interconnecting an 8510 system in either a cabinet or a bench top configuration System installation consists of the following steps 1 Preparing the site 2 Checking the shipment and unpacking the system 3 Configuring and connecting the system 4 Checking the system o
370. ications Software for specifications and performance verification How to verify system performance Performing system verification Usingthe software A tutorial Operational check procedures Frequency test procedures Total system uncertainty test procedure How torun the system specifications e Interpreting the specification and uncertainties printout Measurement uncertainties Sources of measurement errors Generation of system measurement uncertainties System error models Dynamic accuracy error model Measurement traceability Substitution of system components Calibration cyde Reference information for performance verification and specification Performancetest record 8 2 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications System Performance System Performance The performance of a network analyzer systemis attributabletothe accuracy and stability of the entire system The accuracy of the system is dependent on the measurement error correction The error correction also known as measurement calibration is dominated by the quality of the calibration kit devices and the device models The stability of the measurement calibration is dependent on the raw performance of each system component Individual System Components The following characteristics and conditions of the system components affect the perfor mance of the combined system configuration Operating characteristics source fr
371. ifications have been generated for 3 These specifications refer to the errors contributed from the source to the A1 sampler signal path The tables show values that are already included in the system specifications 4 The symbol for the error terms that is used in the system error model located later in this chapter NOTE Refer to the system error model later in this chapter for the association of the error terms with the System error flow graph 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 65 Performance Verification and Specifications Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts 8 10 Raw A2Channel Errors N NOTE 8 66 System Specifications AZ Channel Errors Correction OFF Netuork finalyzer 851 8 Enhanced Model Test Set HPB8515R003 2 4 S Parameter 45MHz 406Hz Calibration Technique SL Sliding Load Cal Test Port Cables 851330 pair short cables Z 4mm 2 4mm Etera iSymbl Description Of Error Term 2 20 Frequency GHz 20 36 36 40 2 020 9 00 2 00 uteff Source to ope source to Source HP835X015 35 4 8516 Synth 10MHz 40GHz Calibration Kit HP8505b58 2 4mm Slotless Standard Grade 0475 0475 9 0000 0173 twift Mag degto Course Ucift Gource ta te df dB nV to i f Damage Level Fur at Cone for 0 1 db Comp haw rms on Trace
372. igher 5 0 is preferred Check that the controller has at least 3 megabytes of memory Type SYSTEMS AVAILABLE MEMORY RETURN Check that all the required binary files are loaded in the controller memory refer to step 4 If the program is still not running correctly cycle the power of all the instruments 8 12 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications How to Verify System Performance How to Verify System Performance The system performance verification process is summarized below 1 Operational checks a Environment and device temperature check User parameters check unratioed power Inspect clean and gage connectors Cable check Dynamic range check 2 Frequency tests pom pow a CW frequency accuracy test b Swept frequency accuracy test 3 Total system uncertainty test a The program sets the frequency range of the 8510 system to the corresponding frequency of the traceable verification devices b The program prompts you to perform a full 2 port measurement calibration You measure the verification devices d The program compares the measured data with the traceable data and uncertainty limits supplied with the verification devices and generates pass fail results 4 Defining a custom system in the software a Thefirst menu that appears in version A 03 01 software is the Hardware Configuration menu b From this menu choose the model numbers of the ha
373. ilent on page ili in the front matter of this manual Part 1 List Programming Codes If the 8510C system is manually controlled make a list of 8510 key presses used to create the conditions that showed the problem If you are using GPIB to control the system check your program and list the GPIB programming codes being sent to the 8510 when the problem occurred This list will be used in the following steps Check Programming Code Descriptions Check the information on key press functions and or mnemonics in the Keyword Dictionary The entries in this document contain detailed descriptions of the manual operation and programmed operation of each function Use the manual to verify how the commands should operate rather than assume they will operate in a certain way Refer to the Operating and Programming M anual for example programs If the actual behavior of a function is different than its documented intended behavior continue this procedure with Part 2 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 121 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Software Failures Part 2 List System Components and Firmware Revisions Write down the following information prior to contacting Agilent in the next part of this procedure The customer engineer CE will serve you better when this information is available The exact system configuration including the model numbers of all system components in the system Thefirmware revisions and serial numbers of th
374. ill be displayed the CPU knows that you have previously saved calibrations in all of the available cal sets It is prompting you to delete one or more cal sets so that you can store the one you have just finished Tell Type Messages Tell messages are displayed whenever the CPU is telling you what it is doing or has done This type of message does not indicate a failure or a problem unless the message is unrelated to a key you thought you pressed For example if you want to save the current state of the 8510C for any reason you would press the INSTRUMENT STATE SAVE key on the 85102 The CPU would immediately recognize your command and tell you that it is obeying by displaying the message SAVING INST STATE Error Type Messages These messages are displayed whenever the system cannot continue running because of a programming error E rror messages are not related to CAUTION messages For example if you have programmed the 8510C to perform a function requiring moving data to its internal memory and it does not have enough room to store the data the message INSUFFICIENT MEMORY will be displayed on the LCD CRT 4 70 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Running Error Messages Things to Remember about Running Error Messages They may be caused by either an internal problem or an operator error n many cases they will not stop the measurement sweep They can beintermittent or permanent and in
375. im sweep procedure in the Operating and Programming M anual to adjust the sweep ADC gain DAC 4 80 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Running Error Messages Sweep Time Too Fast Too many sweep triggers or too rapid sweep triggers were sent from the 85102 A20 sweep ADC assembly The 85102 A19 ADC control assembly sends a status bit indicating it did not have time to complete an A to D conversion before receiving the next sweep trigger Probable cause of error 85102 A19 ADC control assembly 85102 A20 sweep ADC assembly Source sweep speed set too fast especially in local operation Troubleshooting Run 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode Run 85102 service program tests 1 A19 and 2 A20 fthe service program found no fault with any assembly refer to Other Failures and run the 20 Hz Sine Wave Test Refer to Unratioed Power Failures to check source operation System Bus Address Error This message is displayed if the address of any 8510C system instrument is wrong or not recognized by the 85101C CPU Probable cause of failure The source 19 test set 20 or plotter is at the wrong GPIB HP IB address or their line power is off GPIB cable is not connected GPIB cable or connector is faulty 85101C A7 1 0 assembly GPIB portion Test set A4 GPIB assembly Troubleshooting Run the 85101C service program test 2 A7 Runtheservice program GPIB
376. ine a2 Press User 2 b2 REDEFINE PARAMETER DRIVE Port 2 PHASE LOCK a2 REDE FINE DONE to redefine b2 Connect an open or short to port 1 and port 2 This reflects power back to the b1 and b2 samplers through the coupler Find the test set RF paths and example frequency response traces on this foldout Press User 1 a1 User 2 b2 User 3 a2 and User 4 b1 Each trace should be similar to the example traces on this foldout typically within 5 dB Record the results for paths 1 through 4 User 1 through User 4 in Table 4 3 3 Check RF Paths 5 and 6 These paths are RF Path 5 User 4 b1 Thru RF Path 6 User 2 b2 Thru 1 Connect a cable between port 1 and port 2 2 Press PARAMETER MENU User 4 b1 REDEFINE PARAMETER DRIVE Port 2 PHASE LOCK a2 REDEFINE DONE to observe the b1 power level trace through path 5 illustrated on this foldout The trace should be similar to the example trace typically within 5 dB Record the result for path 5 good or bad under the RF path diagram 3 Press PARAMETER MENU User 2 b2 REDEFINE PARAMETER DRIVE Port 1 PHASE LOCK a1 REDEFINE DONE to observe the b2 power level trace through path 6 illustrated on this foldout The trace should be similar to the example trace typically within 5 dB Record the result for path 6 good or bad under the RF path diagram Find the Faulty Assembly Try to match the observed results recorded under the RF pat
377. ine voltage is missing or is not enough to power the 85101C Continue this procedure with the next paragraph Check the Line Voltage Selector Switch and Fuse Check the main power line cord line selector switch setting line fuse and actual line voltage to see that they are all correct Figure 4 12 earlier in this procedure shows the location of the line voltage selector switch Use a small flat bladed screwdriver to select the correct switch position Figure 4 14 shows how to removethe line fuse using a small flat bladed screwdriver to pry out the fuseholder The line fuse is rated for 250 V at 3 amperes for operation at all line voltages A spare fuse is provided in a plastic drawer in the line fuseholder as shown in the figure Theline fuse Agilent part number is 2110 0655 ftheA10 green LED is still not on steadily after verification of correct line voltage replace the A10 preregulator Figure 4 14 Removing theLine Fuse B SPARE FUSE 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 103 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure 85101C Display Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting Determine Why the Red LED on A10 1 On or Flashing If the red LED is on the problem may be in the A10 preregulator the A3 post regulator the 45 V digital supply or any of the assemblies obtaining power from the supplies Continue with Check the Line Voltage Selector Switch and Fuse and then continue this procedure with the next paragraph Disconnec
378. ing messages is displayed on the display Abort Break Instruction Error Address Error Processor Error An example of a processor error message is displayed below PROCESSOR ERROR nq Ihe processor encountered an error from which it could not recover Technical Details Address executed or next instruction was PC 000 009C Status register at that time was SR 2700 Top of memory stack after the error 0002 FFAG 2700 0000 009C FFF1 423C 016 0002 Reason for the error was Vector offset 0010 Processor illegal instruction error If any of the five messages above are displayed reload the operating system explained at the end of this section NOTE Do not use the memory operations menu softkeys GO SHOW WRITE CSHOW and CWRITE Agilent recommends that only qualified Agilent service personnel usethese selections If reloading the operating system does not eliminate instrument errors contact your Agilent customer engineer 4 52 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Self Test Failures What to Do If the R L T S 8 4 2 1 LEDs Stay Lit Default Test 15 Default test 15 is the condition when all eight of the front panel display processor LEDs R L T S 8 4 2 1 stay lit This condition occurs at the beginning of the self tests sequence If it persists it probably means that the sequence could not start or the processor was unable to dear the front panel LEDs If this
379. ing the System Repacking If it is necessary to ship any of the instruments in the 8510 system pack each instrument separately in a double wall cardboard carton made of 350 pound test material Place enough shock absorbing material around all sides of the instrument to prevent any movement inside the container Containers and materials similar to those used for factory shipments are available from Agilent See Contacting Agilent on page iii If an instrument is being returned to Agilent for service please attach a tag indicating the nature of the problem and the person to contact for more information about the service required l dentify the instrument by model number and full serial number and list the other system instruments it is used with 8510C On Site Service Manual 9 11 System Installation Configuring and Connecting the System Configuring and Connecting the System Line Voltage and Fuses Set the line voltage for each instrument according to the voltage of the ac power source Typically line voltage is set with a line voltage selector switch or a voltage selector card at the rear panel of the instrument CAUTION Severe damage to the instruments can result if line voltage settings are incorrect when power is applied Use an autotransformer if the line voltageis not within the following voltage ranges 90 to 127 V or 195 to 253 V Some of the instruments may have wider ranges as noted in their operating and service manual
380. instrument To Reassemble 6 Reversethe above procedure to install the front panel Torque all frame screws to 113 N cm 10 in Ib Torque the handle screws to 237 N cm 21 in Ib Figure 6 6 2 3 places 1 3 places 6 22 8510C On Site Service Manual Replacement Procedures 85102B Replacement Procedures Rectifier Board Replacement Tools Required Large Pozidrive screwdriver Small Pozidrive screwdriver Small flat blade screwdriver 1 4 in nut driver Insulated dip leads 2 T 15 Torx screwdriver WARNING Even with the power cords disconnected dangerous voltages may be present on the capacitors in the instrument Perform the following procedure to discharge the power supply capacitors before performing the disassembly procedure 8510C On Site Service Manual 6 23 Replacement P rocedures 85102B Replacement Procedures Capacitor Discharge Procedure 1 Disconnect the power cords and remove top and bottom covers Refer to Figure 6 7 for this portion of the procedure 2 On the bottom of the instrument remove three screws item 2 from the plastic safety cover Carefully remove the cover taking care not to touch capacitor terminals eight large Pozidrive screws item 3 3 Connect the chassis of the instrument to earth ground 4 Dischargethe capacitors one by one by attaching one end of an insulated dip lead tothe chassis and the other end of the clip lead to the capacitor terminal large Pozidrive screws i
381. ion kit The numbers are kept on record at Agilent They are used to document the traceable path of the measured kit data to NIST Below is a typical set of numbers 738 236940 86 738 234708 85 738 230170 83 731 237627 86 233661 NOTE These numbers are supplied and authorized for use by NIST They refer to device tests made by NIST The 83 85 and 86 numbers that appear after the dash arethe latest revision dates for each test Contact Agilent if you have any further questions regarding these numbers Omit Isolation Measurement for 8350B Sources If you are using an 8350B source omit the isolation measurement in the measurement calibration sequence The isolation measurement removes crosstalk but requires a large number of averages since this type of error occurs below the noise floor The software sets the 8350B to 128 averages which is not enough averages for a correct measurement of the crosstalk Unless the number of averages is 1024 or more the measurement creates a larger error than it is correcting for If 1024 or more averages are taken the measurement calibration process would take approximately 30 minutes Also the test sets do not introduce enough crosstalk that this error removal is critical 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 101 Performance Verification and Specifications Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications Parameter Step Resolution Software Configuration Menu The software configurati
382. ion plots S11 or S22 the values of the other three S parameters will be 0 linear For transmission plots 521 512 811 and 522 0 linear and 521 512 6 DUT length is assumed to be 10 cm the DUT length for the data sheet values is 0 cm 7 System instruments selected in the hardware configuration menu 8 Reflection coeffecient linear magnitude 9 Magnitude uncertainty data for each frequency band linear magnitude 10 Phase data for each frequency band degrees 8 70 8510C On Site Service Manual Example 8 15 521 Worst Case Uncertainty dB S21 Worst Case Uncertainty dB 521 Worst Case Uncertainty Performance Verification and Specifications Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts S21 Uncertainty Specifications Plots S21 MAGNITUDE UPPER WORST CASE UNCERTAINTY SPECIFICATIONS 519 HPB51 R HP83651R HPBS S6A SL HPB5133F 17 1880 12 14 Freq GHz E45 to 2 20 to 40 48 to 58 DUT Length 10 8 cm 511 2 0 512 S21 See 0 0 521 Measurement Level dB from Ref 521 MAGNITUDE LOWER WORST CASE UNCERTAINTY SPECIFICRTIONS HP8S18C HPB51 R HP83651R HPAS SGA SL HP85133F 1 Nov 1998 12 45 52 Freq GHz 2045 to 2 2 to28 28 to 40 48 to 58 DUT Length 18 8 cm Sil 0 0 12 S21 S22 0 0 S21 Measurement Level dB from Ref Sel PHRSE UPPER WORST CRSE UNCERTRINTY SPECIFICRTIONS HP8
383. is menu allows you to verify system performance If you want to verify the performance of your system follow the next procedure If you want to generate system specifications follow the procedure in How to Run the System Specifications and Uncertainties Program Using the Keyboard or Mouse for Program Control Use of the keyboard or mouse is supported in the software program The list below provides a brief overview of the different methods for controlling the cursor and modifying values Cursor Keys Use the cursor keys arrow keys to move the cursor up down left and right Done or SELECT Use either the softkey or the SELECT keyboard key to complete data entry Always press the key to retain edited data HOME Use the HOME key to page forward Combine the SHIFT key with the HOME key to return to previous pages Mouse Use the mouse to position the cursor on a spedific character or field Click the mouse select button to edit the data You may find that using the mouse is less efficient than using the cursor keys The sensitivity of the mouse makes it awkward to position TAB Use the keyboard tab key to move from one data entry field to the next or when columns are used from one column to the next Combine the SHIFT key with the TAB key for reverse tabbing In Case of Difficulty Check that the mass storage device is specified refer to step 7 Check that the BASIC revision is 3 0 or h
384. is shift does not suggest a problem with the display it is characteristic of color displays If the display becomes magnetized or if color purity is a problem cycle the power several times Leave the instrument off for at least 15 seconds before switching on the power This will trigger the automatic degaussing circuit in the display If this is insufficient to get color purity a commercially available degausser demagnetizer must be used either a CRT demagnetizer or a bulk tape eraser can be used Follow the manufacturer s instructions keeping in mind the following it is imperative when demagnetizing the display that the degausser is not placed closer than 4 inches 10 cm from the face of the CRT Generally degaussing is done with a slow rotary motion of the degausser moving it in a circle of increasing radius while simultaneously moving away form the CRT Figure 7 2 shows the motion for degaussing the display CAUTION Applying an excessively strong magnetic field to the CRT face can permanently destroy the CRT Like most displays the CRT can be sensitive to large magnetic fields generated from unshielded motors In countries that use 50 Hz some 10 Hz jitter may be observed If this problem is observed remove the device causing the magnetic field 7 12 8510C On Site Service Manual Adjustments Procedure 2 CRT Display Degaussing Demagnetizing Figure 7 2 Motion for Degaussing the Display 4 24 10cm BULK TAPE ERASER OR C
385. isplay Intefa BOSEU Coe CR RE ied i ae 4 44 Pc P I 4 46 Troubleshooting Image Problems 4 46 FAS Backliofit Inverter Boar oo otha yu s E AUR e elas asa 4 49 elt Vest Pal E REL T LT LL UP 4 51 R17 ee ee ee 4 51 Sut Tests end Other 22i aae cda woe ire RR OR X 4 52 What to Dolf an Instrument Error Occurs coss oss Eo fhe wanes PARA 4 52 What to Dolf the R L T S 8 4 2 1 LEDs Stay Lit Default Test 15 4 53 Self TESE SOMES se Lii cu eed a Rain eq saa de ord Lonoke de 4 53 Flow to dentify a Self Test FallUre cccack reer wien d ERE DRE RR Rr bead 4 55 Contents 2 Contents How to Troubleshoot a Self Test 4 58 How to Access the Test Menu and Run Self 4 58 Self Test Failures and Troubleshooting 4 60 System Disc and Service 458 5 5 4528 5 2 4 65 System Command 15 Run Main 4 65 System Command 16 Memory 4 65 System Command 17 Rerun Self 4 65 System Command 18 Repeat Test
386. itch on power to the controller last the 85101C next to last In systems without external controllers switch on power to the 85101C last Always disconnect all unnecessary peripheral instruments and non terminated GPIB cables from the system when troubleshooting Check the cables and the connections to the boards Remove the 85102 top cover and check that all snap on cables are connected properly to the boards E ach cable is labeled with a J jack number that corresponds to the J input on the board cover 4 72 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Running Error Messages Alphabetical List of Caution Running Error Messages Troubleshooting suggestions and probable causes of failure are given with thefollowing list of messages Always press the ENTRY OFF and MEASUREMENT RESTART keys to seeif the error message repeats If it does not repeat it is probably NOT a true error but rather an intermittent failure If it does repeat locate the error message below and follow the troubleshooting suggestions ADC Cal Failed The 85102 A18 A D converter assembly is calibrated by the ADC of the A17 sample hold board The 85101C CPU detects incorrect values of the measured bits and displays this message Possible cause of failure 85102 A18 ADC board 85102 A17 sample and hold board 85102 A19 ADC control board Troubleshooting e Run the 85102 service program tests the Run All mode e Run the 85
387. ity key assembly in the 85101C is removed Probable cause of failure Missing 85101C A8 security key Disc Communication Error This message occurs when an external disk drive loses communication with the 85101C A7 board assembly Probable cause of failure Missing bad GPIB cable between the 85101C and the external disk drive 85101C A71 O board Disc Hardware Problem This message occurs when attempting access to an external disk drive and indicates a hardware type problem with the drive This message does not indicate a failure with the 8510C internal disk drive Probable causes of failure Hardware failure in the external disk drive Disc Read or Write Error This message indicates an internal disk drive communication failure Probable causes of failure Bad media disk 85101C A7 I O board 85101C internal disk drive 4 74 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Running Error Messages Disc Media Wearing Out Replace Soon This indicates that further use of the disk may cause loss of data The external drive counts the number of disk revolutions and records that number on the disk When a certain number of revolutions has occurred the disk drive causes this caution error message to appear The message is not prompted by a measure of a disk s magnetic properties and is meant only to advise the user of a potential disk media failure Most probable cause of failure e Dis
388. ivers small medium and large 5 16inch open end wrench for SMA connector nuts 3 16inch and 5 16 inch hex nut drivers Non conductive and non ferrous adjustment tool Needle nose pliers Tweezers Anti static work mat with wrist strap TlOand T15 TORX drivers Miscellaneous cables adapters and other equipment as listed in Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts 1 6 8510C On Site Service Manual Service and Equipment On Site Service Manual Organization Table 1 1 Service Test Equipment Instrument Required Critical Specifications Recommended Model Use Oscilloscope 100 MHz Dual Channel Agilent 54622D A T Oscilloscope Probes 10 1 Divider Agilent 10074C A T 1000 1 Divider High Voltage N2771A Calibration Kit 3 5mm Agilent 85052B 2 4 mm Agilent 85056A Verification Kit 3 5 mm Agilent 85053B 2 4 mm Agilent 85057B Test Port Cables 3 5 mm Agilent 85131D 2 4 mm Agilent 851330 P T Computer Controller Laptop or PC running BASIC for various A P T Windows Rev 6 32 or greater under Windows 95 98 NT GPIB card for PCs National Instrument or Hewlett Packard card for Laptops National Instruments Workstation Basic 5 0 or higher and 4 M bytes 9000 Series 200 or 300 RAM and 3 0 for dual source systems Vectra 386 with an 82300 A P T BASIC language processor card UNIX based workstation with Rocky A P T Mountain BASIC RMB Photomet
389. k media in an external disk drive is old Failure Check System Bus Configuration This message refers to a failure of the 8360 series source This is an indication of incorrect power level flatness correction only Refer to the source service manual for complete troubleshooting information Failure Fault Indicator On This message refers to a failure of the 8360 series source Refer to the source service manual for complete troubleshooting information Failure Overmodulation This message refers to a failure of the 8360 series source It appears when the RF output of the source is being overmodulated Refer to the source service manual for complete troubleshooting information Failure RF Unlocked This message refers to a failure of the 8360 series source Refer to the source service manual for complete troubleshooting information Failure Self Test Failure This message refers to a failure of the 8360 series source It indicates a failure of the source CPU CPU power supply or a phaselock unlocked condition Refer to the source service manual for complete troubl eshooting i nformation IF Cal Failed The 85102 clock board provides a 100 kHz calibration signal to IF amplifiers A10 and A12 The 85101C CPU uses this signal to calibrate the 85102 IF amplifiers If the calibration error exceeds a certain limit the CPU displays this message on the display Probable cause of failure 85102 100 kHz cal signal from A6 dock
390. king for identification and the source sends back its identifying string if the communication is successful Front Panel Emulator 2 This is primarily used to access the menus resident in 836X1 sources that do not have a front panel It is used to perform diagnostics and calibration of the source This is done by using a combination of the softkeys on the 85101C and hardkeys on the 85102 A front panel overlay for the 85102 shows the location and function of the keys on the 85102 that access the menus and control the various source functions The front panel overlay is shown in the available service tools section in Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Change GPIB HP IB Address default is 19 3 This allows you to select the source within a system to be addressed by the front panel emulator This is used if the system has multiple sources i e RF and LO or an RF source at a different GPIB address than the default Make surethat the dip switches on the desired source are set the same as this selection The default address for RF source in 8510 system is 19 The default address for an LO source is 18 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 145 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Service Program This pageintentionally left blank 4 146 8510C On Site Service Manual AUXILLARY MENUS SYSTEM SYSTEM MENU DISPLAY FUNCTIONS HP 1B ADDRESSES CRT OFF FREQUENCY OFF BEEPER ON OFF RESET IF CORRECT I ON MORE
391. kit are measured The system performance verification is complete Refer to Examples 8 3 and 8 4 to interpret the printout of your measurement results 8 50 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure Comparing System Measurement Uncertainties for the Performance Verification Devices You can determine your system measurement uncertainty and compare it to the factory uncertainty for each frequency measurement of each verification device The comparison calculation can be done by following the steps below 1 Extract a factory measurement uncertainty value from the verification device data contained in the verification kit or make a printout using the software 2 Subtract the value in step 1 from the total measurement uncertainty value on the performance verification printout 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 51 Performance Verification and Specifications Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure The example below shows where the equation values are located on the device data sheet and the verification printout The example also shows how the equations can be arranged to make a table A blank table is provided for you to write the comparison equations for your system HEWLETT PACKARD DEVICE CHARACTERIZATION DATA SHEET FOR 8510 Date 3 Jul 1990 Kit 85057 Seria Item 20 dB ATTENUATOR 85057 50010 Serial 00649 Mabient conditions 23 deg C Uncertaintie
392. l 045 Power of Source dim IPs I Power Slope of Source Freq ghz dB IPsef AVeraGing fector x1 1 Loss of Attenuator dB ILal i Lose of Attenuator 2 dB 1122 Cable Flex Factor Lin ICff 1 0000 Drift in Room Temperature tdeg C IDrt 1 0000 1 Effective Dircectivity dB tEfd t 41 90 Effective Fwd Refl tracking dB IEfr e014 Effective Fud Source match dB Efs 41 40 Effective Fud Crosstalk dB Efc 1 120 56 Effective Fwd Trans tracking dB IEft 1 8453 Effective Fwd Load match dB IEf1 41 90 gt Effective Fwd Noise on Trace dB IEfnt 8009 Effective Fud Noise Floor dB iEfnf 99 31 nini LLL Effective Power Ref out port dBm 1 11 32 Effective Power maX in port2 dBm 2 5 88 Effective Power miN in port2 dBm 2 1 110 59 Effective Dyn Rng Ref min pt2 dB 1 2 99 28 Effective Dyn Rng maX min pt2 08 Edrx2 104 72 82 51 Table type specifications of residual errors error terms left after a measurement calibration The system instruments cal bration kit and calibration technique selected in the hardware configuration menu that the specifications have been generated for Conditions of the system that the specifications are based on The systematic residual errors The t
393. l Measurement E rrors Two additional categories of measurement errors are connection techniques and contact surfaces The connection techniques category includes torque limits flush setting of sliding load center conductors and handling procedures for beadless airlines The contact surfaces category includes cleaning procedures scratches worn plating and rough seating These types of errors are not accounted for in the uncertainty analysis 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 77 Performance Verification and Specifications Measurement Uncertainties Measurement Uncertainty Equations Any measurement result is the vector sum of the actual test device response plus all error terms The precise effect of each error term depends on its magnitude and phase relationship to the actual test device response When the phase of an error response is not known phase is assumed to be worst case 180 to 180 degrees Random errors such as noise and connector repeatability are generally combined in a root sum of the squares RSS manner Due to the complexity of the calculations the performance verification specifi cati ons software calculates the system measurement uncertainty The following equations are representative of the equations the performance verificati on specifi cati ons software uses to generate the system measurement uncertainty plots and tables Reflection Uncertainty Equations Total Reflection Magnitude Uncertainty Erm An
394. latethe actual total RF loss with the following equation where x 1 or 2 depending on the port used Ldxc Lfxc x frequency GHz 8 26 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Using the Software A Tutorial b Usethefollowing equation to determine the phase stability Ctmx Cpfx x frequency in GHz After allowing the software to recompute the uncertainties look at the uncertainty curves How do they compare with a system that uses Agilent 85131F cables TIP Remember to select User Parameters when generating the uncertainty curves for the non standard cables Using a Non Ideal Test Device Exercise 3d You want to determine the measurement uncertainties for a 20 dB fixed attenuator You want to usethis attenuator to make a measurement over the frequency range of 45 MHz to 26 5 GHz The attenuator has a worst case SWR of 1 25 The device length is about 3 cm Refer to Table 8 9 for the answers To determine the attenuator uncertainties use the following 3 5 mm 8510 system 8510C network analyzer 8515A test set 83631A synthesized source 85052B calibration kit choose a sliding load calibration 85131B D cables 85053B verification kit Task Generate the worst case uncertainty specifications for an S21 magnitude measurement using the lower limits L Question What are the measurement uncertainties in each frequency range for the attenuator measurement
395. ligns softkey labels with softkeys POSITION 85101C equipped with a CRT A11 DISPLAY FOCUS 1 Adjusts for optimum focus of display 85101C equipped with a CRT A11 DISPLAY DEGAUSSING 2 Demagnetizes Display 85101C equipped with a CRT A11 DISPLAY 3 Sets black level of front panel intensity BACKGROUND control of display background INTENSITY 85101C equipped with a CRT A11 DISPLAY OPERATING 3 Sets maximum limit of front panel intensity DEFAULT INTENSITY control 85101C equipped with a CRT 85102 IF Detector A5L4 X OUTPUT FILTERING 7 Minimizes higher order products from appearing at the X component output A5L5 X OUTPUT FILTERING 7 Minimizes higher order products from appearing at the X component output A5L6 Y OUTPUT FILTERING 7 Minimizes higher order products from appearing at the Y component output A5L7 Y OUTPUT FILTERING 7 Minimizes higher order products from appearing at the Y component output A6R51 CLOCK 8 Adjusts for a clock frequency of 20 MHz A7L4 X OUTPUT FILTERING 7 Minimizes higher order products from appearing at the X component output A7L5 X OUTPUT FILTERING 7 Minimizes higher order products from appearing at the X component output A7L6 Y OUTPUT FILTERING 7 Minimizes higher order products from appearing at the Y component output A7L7 Y OUTPUT FILTERING 7 Minimizes higher order products from appearing at the Y component output A9C6 20MHZ XTAL FILTER 5 Adjusts for minimum bandpass ripple A9C7 20MHZ XTAL FILTER 5 Adjusts for minimum ban
396. llowing failures refer to Control Configuration and Cabling Pre Operational Checks before going to the section that troubleshoots the failure Power Supply Failures See Power Supply Failures Performance Test Failures See Chapter 8 Specifications and Performance Verification Software Failures See Software Failures ss417c 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 7 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Troubleshooting Outline Control Configuration and Cabling Pre Operational Checks Refer to the 8510C System L evel Troubleshooting Block Diagram at the end of this section Front and Rear Panel Checks Switch off power to all instruments Switch them on in this sequence the source test set 85102 also 85101 if an early version with power switch fthedisplay is not clear try to improve it with the intensity control Source front panel switch settings are of no concern except for the line power switch because the source is under analyzer control Makesurethe power line modules on all instruments are set to the appropriate local line voltage Check the GPIB addresses of all instruments fthesourceis an 8360 make surethe language switch is set to 001 as shown DEPRESSED POSITIONS ARE DARK w 2 335333 lt fthesourceis 8340 8341 make sure the rear panel FREQUENCY STANDARD switch is set toINTERNAL Cabling Checks Makesurethe system cables are connected as show
397. lly connected to pin 1 See detail CN 2 After measuring the test points on CN 1 and CN2 match the results and perform the rework as indicated in the action column in Table 4 6 After successful troubleshooting and repair the LCD should operate normally or at least beilluminated when the instrument is turned on Table4 6 Inverter Board Troubleshooting Steps Input Output CND CN2 Action Good Good Replace the backlight lamp See LCD Assembly Details on page 6 18 Good Bad Replacethe A16 inverter See LCD Assembly Details on page 6 18 Bad Bad Replace the flat flex cable W8 or the A14 display interface board 4 50 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Self Test Failures Self Test Failures Overview The 8510 self test sequence is a series of fourteen individual diagnostic tests that constitute the major part of the test menu The test menu also contains four system commands three disk commands and two service commands This section explains all of these tests and commands beginning with the self tests The self tests sequentially test most of the buses and circuits of the 85101C display processor and a few circuits of the 85102 I F detector The self test sequence is initiated automatically at power up but can also be run manually If the 8510 passes all of the tests in the sequence it loads and runs the operating system program How to Use This Section H ow
398. loss of processor control over the VTO and sampler biasing LEVEL DETECT LIMITER green IF PRESENT INDICATOR TO PROCESSOR 08 13 POWER LEVEL 1F OUT 43 The entire sequence is monitored by the HP 85101 processor and will begin with another pretune sequence whenever a new start frequency or band crossing is reached J J2 1 qu VTO SENSE VTO DRIVE Refer to the THEORY OF OPERATION Section for a more complete descrip tion of how the HP 8510 Phase Lock System operates um s 1 43 QUT TO PROCESSOR J A23 MAIN PHASE LOCK 85102C A3 VTO SUMMING AMP HP8515A TEST SET FROM PROCESSOR ge 1 2 3 LOCK DETECT DIGITAL PHASE DETECTOR A22 PRETUNE 85102C DB 10 t Lock oetect V22 P1 28 vill VTO PRETUNE gt 2 PRETUNE PHASE LOCK SWITCH PRETUNE INTEGRATOR SAMPLE SUMMING AMP FEEDBACK PRETUNE 1 6 1 FROM 6 CLOCK DATA BUS DURING PRETUNE STEER VTO A16 REMOTE APPLICATIONS J5 gt _ lt Qu FROM PROCESSOR DATA BUS TO PROCESSOR LOCK OUT 8510C Phase Lock Block Diagram Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Troubleshooting Outline 4 36 8510C On Site Service Manual FAN J6 FANPOS 36 1 uc nw 4 10 GRA
399. ls after separation Test sets separate the signals with couplers triax bridges During the RF tolF conversion the test sets maintain the phase coherence of the measured signals so that they can be kept in ratioed pairs after calibration Most test sets for the 8510 are either sampler based or mixer based A third type is the frequency converter Sampler Based Test Sets These test sets have samplers driven by a VTO The VTO acting like a second source or LO local oscillator enables the samplers to down convert the RF signal to an IF signal according to this formula LO RF IF Note that the LO frequency must vary as the RF varies to maintain a constant IF of 20 MHz The VTO summing amp board provides the control voltages to tune the VTO to the correct LO frequency The VTO usually operates at between 50 and 300 MHz TheLO frequency is a harmonic of the VTO Should the VTO ever go out of range the processor will generate an error message VTO OVERRANGE Thesetest sets have a narrow IF bandwidth of approximately 3 MHz Mixer Based Test Sets Thesetest sets have mixers driven by two sources The second source enables the mixers to downconvert the RF signal toan IF signal according to this formula LO RF IF Note that the LO frequency must vary as the RF varies to maintain a constant IF of 20 MHz These test sets have a wider IF bandwidth than sampler test sets 8511 Frequency Converter The 8511 is a sampler based test set
400. lure where memory is lost after a lapse of time Read Locations Where Hardware Cal Data Is Stored 7 This lists the data stored in formatted pages 1 and 2 of the A6 EEPROM board and the data stored in page 1 of the timer clock peripheral RAM on the A7 1 0 board The date for the background and intensity DAC cal is also stored Show Non Volatile Memory Parameters 8 This uses the EEPROM driver firmware to find out how it has calculated certain memory parameters The EEPROM board must be initialized for the driver to have the information It returns the value for number of formatted pages and the present position of the memory pointer Reset Memory to Default Hardware Cal Data 9 This is meant for use by the factory only This test requires the user to enter a password It initializes memory and then loads pages 1 and 2 with the hardware default cal data This should be done only as a last resort when all memory is lost 4 138 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Service Program 85102 IF Detector Service Program Menu This is the primary 85102 menu It allows you to select any of the tests for the F detector NOTE Read the following instructions before using the 85102 diagnostics Hardware These tests require that the source test set and all peripherals be disconnected from the system In place of the source and test set connect the 85102 test adapter Refer to Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts
401. m that the VTO frequency is correct the pretune board divides it by N and compares it to a 50 kHz reference signal If thefrequency is not correct the VTO is retuned with an error voltage When the pretune frequency is correct a comparator on the pretune board detects lock In turn the processor reads a bit from the comparator If the pretune circuit is unable to generate correct VTO frequency the processor displays this running error message PRETUNE FAILURE For example if the start frequency entered on the front panel is 1 8 GHz the processor calculates the LO frequency required to produce a 20 MHz IF 1 8 GHz 20 MHz 1 82 GHz Since 1 82 GHz is beyond the frequency range of the VTO the actual LO frequency is a harmonic of the VTO in this case the ninth harmonic The VTO frequency is about 202 2 MHz 1 82 GHz 9 In summary the pretune phase lock sequence tunes the VTO to a fundamental sampling rate and locks the pretune loop based on the N number chosen by the processor 8510C On Site Service Manual 3 17 Theory of Operation System Phase Lock Operation Pretune IF Count Sequence This sequence consists of two or three steps an IF count an IF search routine when needed and a check step Pretune IF Count is less a count than a check It determines whether comb frequency is near the RF input frequency ThelF counter of the F detector checks the presence and frequency of the IF The processor selects the active
402. mbly 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 111 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure 85102 IF Detector Power Supply Troubleshooting 85102 IF Detector Power Supply Troubleshooting Anytime during this procedure refer to the 85102 Power Supply Detailed Block Diagram for an overview of the 85102 IF detector power supplies Disconnect the interconnect cable from the rear panel Switch on the 85102 Check to see that the amber LINE LED on the front panel is on normal If the front panel LED is off it is likely thereis a problem with the 85102 power supply continue with this troubleshooting Exception Some early models of 85102 derive the 5 V power for the front panel LED from the 85101 and the line LED in these models will therefore not light when the 85101 and 85102 are not connected Check the Green and Red LEDs on the A15 Regulator Partially slide back the top cover of the 85102 The A15 regulator is the board furthest back on the left side Check the five LEDs on A15 Normally the four green LEDs should be on and the red LED should be off If so the power supply is verified with 85 confidence To increase the confidence level to 10096 go on to Check the 45 V Test Points on A24 Interface If the A15 red LED is and one or more of the A15 green LEDs off one of the following conditions exists A thermal shutdown has occurred Thethermal protection circuit has failed The 15 V or 15 V supply has failed
403. ment and peripherals Voltage 90 to 127 195 to 253 volts ac Power 1100 VA maximum Frequency 47 5 to 66 Hertz NOTE addition to the power outlets required for operation of the 8510 system three power line outlets should be provided for service equipment 8510C On Site Service Manual 9 5 System Installation Preparing the Site Electromagnetic Interference 8510 conducted and radiated interferenceis in compliance with German essempfaenger Postverfuergung 526 527 1979 K ennzeichnung Mit F Nummer F unkschutzzei chen Non Agilent System Cabinet Requirements Using a non Agilent system cabinet may result in measurement inaccuracy and reliability problems due to overheating The following conditions must be met when a system is installed in a non Agilent cabinet Air temperature at the fan intake of each instrument must not exceed the ambient temperature specified for that instrument Minimum clearance for adequate cooling 0 5 in between stacked instruments 3 0 in between instrument side and cabinet lt lt lt 6 0 in between rear panel and instrument and cabinet Other Requirements Install a telephone next to the system in case assistance is needed 9 6 8510C On Site Service Manual System Installation Checking the Shipment and Unpacking the System Checking the Shipment and Unpacking the System Checking the Shipment Ensurethat all system components ordered have arrived by comparing
404. ments New features for millimeter systems B 04 00 8510B 85101 80078 11575C upgrade Requires two Cs Adds many new features induding 8516A operation M ay require 8340 41 to be upgraded using 11875A kit B 05 00 8510B 85101 800813 Adds pulsed RF capability and improved external triggering Induded in both the 85111A and 11575D upgrade kits B 05 14 8510B 85101 80111 This release allowed operation of the 83420 lightwave test set software It also fixed anomalies found with dual channel cal TRL cal millimeter system TRL cal and triggering in FASTCW mode Induded in both the 85111A and 11575E upgrades C 06 00 8510C 85101 800983 8510 first release Features indude a color and 4 parameter display 3 5 inch disc drive and RS 232 interface 83650 51 50 GHz compatibility B 06 00 8510B See Note 3 C 06 30 8510C 85101 80098 Released for DOS support and color paintjet support B 06 30 8510B 85101 80102 Released for 8510B support of 50 GHz 83650 51 8517 and quickstep C 06 50 8510C 85101 80113 11595G Rev C 06 00 C 06 50 to C 06 54 minor bug fixes B 06 50 8510B 85101 80109 11575F Rev B 03 00 B 05 14 to B 06 54 minor bug fixes C 06 54 8510C 85101 80113 11575G Rev C 06 00 C 06 50 to C 06 54 B 06 54 8510B 85101 80109 11575F Rev B 03 00 B 05 14 to B 06 54 C 06 58 8510C 85101 80132 Bug fix 8510 firmware problem with writing year 2000 and higher DOS file dates C 06 60 8510C 85101 80132 Bug fix 8510 firmware problem with 8360 seri
405. n 8 5 uncertainty and dynamic accuracy limits 8 104 uncertainty curve generation uncertainty equations measurement 8 78 reflection 8 79 transmission 8 80 uncertainty plot customizing 16 uncertainty plot marker control 8 15 uncertainty specifications example plots of S11 8 67 of S21 8 71 table of S11 8 68 uncorrected error model flowgraph 8 85 unpacking system cabinet 9 9 9 10 unratioed power 9 23 troubleshooting 4 88 unratioed power failures 4 6 user 1 2 3 and 4 4 85 user parameters 9 23 user defined parameters 4 85 user generated data recall 8 20 using the tutorial 8 21 V verification and calibration at 45 M Hz 8 96 failure troubleshooting 8 56 of system performance 8 5 8 13 results interpreting 8 54 Verify using softkey options 8 18 verifying system performance verifying the shipment 9 7 vertical position and focus adjustments 7 10 voltage line 9 12 voltages A10 preregulator output 4 107 A26 rectifier 4 113 A3 post regulator 4 102 fan 4 111 hazardous locations 2 4 VTO over range 4 82 w wording in verification program tables definitions 8 99 Index Index 8 Index
406. n and Specifications Measurement Uncertainties The detailed equation for each of the above terms is derived from the signal flow model in Figure 8 18 Dueto the complexity of combining these terms manually the performance verification specifications software calculates the terms for you However the software makes some ideal device assumptions For S11 and S22 uncertainties the device is one port device therefore the value of S21 and S12 dB The value of 511 or S22 is varied For S21and S12 uncertainties the device is a reciprocal two port device with perfect input output match therefore S11 and S22 are o linear and S21 S12 The value of 521 or S12 is varied Transmission Phase Uncertainty Etp Transmission phase uncertainty is calculated from a comparison of the magnitude uncertainty with the test signal magnitude The worst case phase angle is computed This result is combined with the error terms related to phase dynamic accuracy cable phase stability and thermal drift of the total system Arcsin Ert 21 2Cpflf Dpfs1f where Cpf1 Cable phase frequency port 1 Cpf2 Cable phase frequency port 2 Dps1 drift phase degree source to port 1 drift phase degree frequency source to port 1 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 81 Performance Verification and Specifications Measurement Uncertainties Generation of System Measurement Uncertainties Figure 8 17 8 82
407. n between them Therefore cleaning the outer surface of the glass filter is usually sufficient U se a soft cloth and if necessary a cleaning solution recommended for optical coated surfaces Agilent part number 8500 2163 is one such solution If after cleaning the outer surface of the glass filter the CRT appears dark or dirty or unfocused clean the inner surface of the filter and the CRT 1 Remove the softkeys cover a plastic cover through which the front panel softkeys protrude Carefully insert a thin flat screwdriver blade or your fingernail between the upper left corner of the softkeys cover and the glass filter see Figure 10 1 Be extremely careful not to scratch or break the glass Pull the cover forward and off 2 Removethe two screws that are now uncovered Figure 10 1 Removing the Glass Filter Carefully insert a small thin flat screwdriver blade or fingernail here DISPLAY BEZEL SCREW one of two behind cover 3 Remove the display bezel assembly by pulling out the end that is now free Pivot the bezel around its left edge until it is released 4 Clean the CRT surface and the inner glass filter surface gently 5 Allow the surfaces to dry and then reassemble the instrument 85101C Equipped with an LCD The LCD is covered by a protective glass and bezel assembly Clean the surface of the glass and bezel using a sort cloth and if necessary a cleaning solution recommended for optical coated sur
408. n in Figure 4 1 System Connections Makesurethe test set rear panel reference port extension cables in place See Chapter 9 System Installation for an explanation of these cables Make surethelF detector interconnect cable AND the GPIB cable are connected between the 85101 and 85102 Makesurethe source RF output cableis connected to the test set fthesourceis 8360 remove the SWEEP OUT IN connections from the 8360 and 85102 Replace with TRIGGER IN OUT Disconnec the bias port BNCs and all other BNC cables except SWEEP OUT IN or TRIGGER IN OUT for now Exception if the test set is an 8516 leavethe SOURCE CONTROL cable connected between the source and the test set to double the 20 GHz source signal 4 8 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Troubleshooting Outline Abbreviated 8510C System Service Flowchart cont CONTROL CONFIGURATION AND CABLING PRE OPERATIONAL CHECKS Front and Rear Panel Checks Instrument power on sequence source test set 85102 85101 Check power line modules for local line voltage Check GPIB addresses of all instruments For 8360 set language switch to 001 For 8340 41 set FREQUENCY STANDARD switch to INTERNAL Cabling Checks Connect cables as shown in Figure 4 1 System Connections Check all connections carefully ss418c 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 9 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Troublesh
409. nal information about some of the tests in this program For example if you have a running error message and you are referred to this section to run a test but it passes check Other Failures to see if thereis any further testing you can do Failure After Repair If a failure is detected after a board is replaced the failure may be the result of a board that is indirectly related to the failed board If this happens you should check the following boards A15 power supply A6 dock board and the A24 processor interface Those boards affect all other boards and if they are faulty they can cause most other boards to fail a test Be sure to check those boards if a replaced board still fails a test ADC Control Test A19 1 Tests the ability of the A18 ADC board to execute a complete set of conversions and generate an ADC interrupt request This test verifies that the processor can trigger the ADC state machine on the A19 ADC control board It also verifies that the state machine on A19 sequences properly and that a conversion is actually completed by the closely related A18 ADC board Also it verifies that the A19 repeat and delay counters are working properly Other causes of failure on this test may be A faulty A6 clock board Afaulty 10 MHz input tothe A19 ADC control board A faulty 800 kHz signal in to theA18 ADC board Sweep ADC Test A20 2 This test checks the following items on the A20 sweep ADC board pulse genera
410. nce in the integrity of the system 8510 Self Test Press the analyzer front panel TEST activator to run the self test sequence Observe the display for the following sequence TESTING LOADING OPERATING SYSTEM SYSTEM INITIALIZATION IN PROGRESS RECALLING INSTRUMENT STATE Preset Check Press INSTRUMENT STATE RECALL MORE FACTORY PRESET on the analyzer The display should show a trace similar to the figure below Figure 9 10 Typical Preset State Display gt MAG RY 10 0 dB 9 22 8510C On Site Service Manual System Installation Making System Connections S Parameter Test Set Check 1 Press S12 inthe PARAMETER area of theanalyzer to further confirm that the system is ready for performance verification or operation Thetrace should drop to the bottom graticule of the display 2 Press AUTO in the RESPONSE area of the analyzer The trace should reappear near the center of the display probably with a change in scale 3 Connec an RF cableto ports 1 and 2 of thetest set Thetrace should risetoward the top of the display 4 Press AUTO again Thetrace should reappear near the center of the display probably with another change scale User Parameters Unratioed Power Check Refer to U nratioed Power Failures in the troubleshooting chapter for a procedure to check the unratioed power This concludes the basic system tests To thoroughly check the performance of the system refer to
411. nd of the desired harmonic Thealgorithm initiates a second pretuneto movethelF towards 20 MHz by approximately 5 MHz If the comb frequency is on the high side the correct side the F decreases The processor begins the main phase lock sequence descri bed below If the comb lineis on the low side the wrong side the IF increases When the wrong sideband is detected the processor pretunes the IF 40 MHz higher Then it repeats the check step For example assume the first count is 23 MHz If the comb frequency is on the high side the check step count is 18 MHz it has moved toward and through 20 MHz If the comb frequency is on the low side of the RF the check step count is 28 MHz it has moved away from 20 MHz In summary if the IF is not detected if the check step fails or if the IF is not found after thelF search routine the processor displays this error message NO IF FOUND 3 18 8510C On Site Service Manual Theory of Operation System Phase Lock Operation Main Phase Lock Sequence After a successful pretune sequence the processor switches from pretune to main phase lock During the switch timing is very important Any drift in source frequency decrease in power or fluctuation in the pretune loop could prevent phase lock Figure 3 7 Simplified Main Phase Lock Loop le IF DETECTOR p TEST SET 4 RF IN THRU IF DETECTOR TO DISPLAY PROCESSOR As shown above
412. nection to the attached backlight inverter A16 which is also electrically separate Backlight Inverter A16 is a part of the A15 LCD assembly It receives a 45 V power supply and control signals from the A14 graphics processor The control signals indude backlight intensity It outputs a high voltage used to drive the backlight lamp Input Output Assemblies Disc Drive Assembly A2 is a 1 44 Mbyte double sided disc drive It can use standard or high density 3 5 inch disks 8510C On Site Service Manual 3 11 Theory of Operation 85101 Display Processor I O Assembly A7 is the main interface for the system The main processor data address and control buses are routed throughout the 85101 via the motherboard and this assembly It enables various parts of the system to communicate by supporting these components real time clock disc drive twoRS 232 ports twoGPIB ports e 85101 interrupt system 85102 interface front panel interface RPG counters NOTE 1 The RS 232 port in conjunction with 0 5 Mbyte DRAM on the processor assembly permit spooling data to printers and plotters 2 RS 232 ports share only a small part of the 0 5 Mbyte DRAM 400 K DRAM for port 1 and 100 K DRAM for port 2 Power Supply The power supply is a switching power supply Its functions are distributed between the preregulator post regulator and display assemblies Preregulator A10 steps down and rectifies the line voltage
413. nel test set extension links that are faulty dirty or damaged In addition defective calibration devices can bethe cause of degraded error term data just as careless calibration methods can Measurement Calibration Always perform a measurement calibration before doing the error term inspection If the system includes an S parameter test set do a full 2 port calibration For systems with a reflection transmission test set do a one path 2 port calibration Error Terms Inspection Procedure This procedure uses the specifications software to display and print out the system error terms It compares the raw error terms to the printout of the specifications to show whether any E terms are out of specification Equipment HP 9000 200 or 300 series controller except 9826 with 4 megabytes of available memory after loading BASIC or PC with BASIC for Windows Specifications verification software Calibration kit Compatible printer Procedure 1 Set up the system with the controller connected to the 8510 over GPIB 2 Refer to Chapter 8 Performance Verification and Specifications for instructions on running the specifications verification software 3 Within the specifications verification program use the controller softkeys to select the configuration of your system 4 Select the system specs menu then test port errors correction off to view the forward direction E terms Print out the E terms 4 152 8510C On Si
414. nel Extension Links The program will prompt you to use the long or short test set rear panel extension links depending on the test set and the cables you have selected A rule of thumb for these extension links is Reflection transmission test sets use short links S parameter test sets use long links Trim Sweep Procedure The 8510 trim sweep procedure is especially designed for use with 8350B 8340 and 8341 Sources not necessary for 8360 in ramp mode The procedure will improve the frequency accuracy of your system It does this by aligning more closely the 8510 frequencies to those of the sweeper Refer to 8350B Sweep Oscillators as System Sources in this reference section Uncertainty and Dynamic Accuracy Limits Upper or Lower The uncertainty and dynamic accuracy menu in the uncertainty portion of the software allows you to select lower or upper uncertainty limits The limits only apply to transmission measurements If you did select the upper limit for a reflection measurement its value would bethe same as the lower limit For transmission measurements the limits are the worst case values that will add to or subtract from the measurement These limits are derived from the equations Upper Limit 20 log 1 Uij Sij Lower Limit 20 log 1 Uij Sij where U is the uncertainty and S is the measured S parameter and jj is a vector number Whenever Ujj Si 1 the worst case is be times the log of 2 6 dB for the uppe
415. ng System Operation uude ssa eoa dag eden Pade caede Eo eed 9 22 LIU 9 22 ui iM PT CET 9 22 s Paroma Desk Sa C EK doa ds adt oe 9 23 User Parameters Unratioed Power Check 9 23 fisco gel stc e Cr p 9 23 Contents 10 Contents 10 Preventive Maintenance GI IEW LA ceri ica dE Eo DA 10 2 Maintain Proper Air FIOW ER RENE 10 2 and Clear Canned S dead edad ud ea 10 3 Clean the Test Set Rear Panel Extensions 10 3 Clean the Glass Filter and CRT or Clean the LCD 10 4 Degauss Demagnetize the Display CRT 10 5 mepet The Erna ei uie iu d ne FE EXER a CEES ei do dde d 10 6 11 Instrument History VION seco e Ra RACED ga m drca REA VOR a de do ul e RR o Ll eons 11 2 Contents 11 Contents Contents 12 Service and Equipment Service and Equipment Overview Overview This On Site Service M anual is a complete guide to test repair adjustment and installation of the 8510C network analyzer It was written for qualified service personnel Previous knowledge of a network analyzer system is assumed but specific knowledge of the 8510 system is not required
416. ng a TRL measurement calibration technique be extremely careful not to move the test port cables Cable movement between measurement calibration and verification may introduce enough error to cause a verification failure If the highest accuracy measurement calibration is desired Agilent recommends that you place the cables in a fixture to prevent cable movement Savethe measurement calibration in one of the analyzer registers When the measurement calibration is completed and saved press Resume If you have selected a performance verification for 45 MHz perform a full 2 port measurement calibration at 45 MHz Use only the lowband load for the loads portion of the calibration Save the measurement calibration in a different analyzer register When the measurement calibration is completed and saved press Resume 10 Press Select Standard and fill in the serial number for the verification standard listed 11 Leave the number of averages at 1024 unless you changed it for the measurement calibration The number of averages MUST the same for the measurement calibration AND the verification device measurements 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 49 Performance Verification and Specifications Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure 12 Select the appropriate register s where you saved the measurement calibration s 13 Select the 45 MHz measurement if the system operates in that frequency range and the characterization data is
417. ng the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts S11 Uncertainty Specifications Plots S11 MAGNITUDE UPPER WORST CASE UNCERTAINTY SPECIFICATIONS 518 HP8517R HP83651R HP05056 SL HP85133F 1 Nov 1998 13 39 46 Freq GHz 045 to 2 2 to 28 28 to 48 40 to 50 DUT Length 18 8 cm 521 8 512 880 522 S11 Worst Case Uncertainty Lin Sit Reflection Coefficient S11 PHASE UPPER WORST CASE UNCERTAINTY SPECIFICATIONS HPB51 C HP851 R 65 HP85 56A SL HP85133F 17 Nov 1990 12 49 19 HT epu Freq GHz 045 to 2 2 to 28 8 gt gt t s 12 20 to 48 40 to 58 PO T T T 7 9 DUT Length e 18 0 cm 4 5 521 888 x 512 800 2 S22 e 2 4 6 8 1 S11 Reflectian Coefficient Measurement parameter 11 Data format magnitude unitless measurements such as reflection coefficient magnitude or transmission coefficient magnitude or phase phase shift of data versus frequency Uncertainty limits upper or lower the limits only apply to transmission measurements Type of plot worst case uncertainties This is a field bottoms up uncertainty analysis of the HP 8510 being verified using the worst case specifications of the HP 8510 system Table type specifications or data sheet data sheet is identical to the specifications table except that
418. ng the calibration procedure can cause bad source match E term data The measurements most affected by source match errors are high reflection measurements and transmission measurements of highly reflective DU Ts Poor source match when associated with poor directivity is probably an indication of a defective coupler or bridgein the test set Poor source match alone may be caused by a mismatch in the test set the test set port connector the cable between the RF source and thetest set or theRF sourceitself Try inserting a 3 dB or 6 dB pad between the RF source cable and the test set rear panel to see if this improves the source match error If it does the problem is most likely the cable or the RF source Reflection Tracking Erf and Err Trackingis the difference between the frequency response of the reference channel and the frequency response of the test channel Large variations in the reflection tracking E terms may indicate a problem in the reference or test signal path in the test set or bad connections during the measurement calibration procedure The calibration devices used to characterize the reflection tracking error terms the short or offset short and the shielded open All reflection measurements of both high and low reflection devices are affected by the reflection tracking errors 4 154 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Error Terms Isolation Crosstalk Exf and Exr These arethe un
419. nge Program Replaceable P arts The module exchange program described here is a fast efficient economical method of keeping your instrument in service Locate the defective module using the troubleshooting procedures described in this manual Is a replacement module in stock Order a restored exchange replacement module from Agilent Technologies Refer to the replaceable parts section ofthis manual for appropriate part numbers of the restored exchange module When the replacement module is received replace the defective module with the replacement module Return the defective module to Agilent Technologies formt120 8510C On Site Service Manual Replace the defective module with the replacement module Keep the defective module for return to Agilent Technologies Order a restored exchange replacement module from Agilent Technologies Refer to the replaceable parts section of this manual for appropriate part numbers of the restored exchange module When the replacement module is received place it in your spares stock Return the defective module to Agilent Technologies Restored exchange modules are shipped individually in boxes as shown above In addition to the module the box contains an exchange assembly failure report and a return shipping label Open the box carefully so that it can be used to return the defective module to Agilent Technologies Complete the exchange assembly
420. nnector ces eaten Band Pass BSC Basic enint Bushing C Capacitance d Cable Cable trc roe neas Ceramic Chamfer a d Circuit Conductor CNTR Control Controller Connector Control Controller Converter CPU Central Processing Unit D Darlington Pair Double DEG enero Degree Detector 20005 Dual In Line Package E EEPROM Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Emulator EXT External Extension F FEM unen cents Female Flat EC Flange Filter Gu MEETS Film Front tette Front FT oa Current Gain Bandwidth F XD gua qasaqa asua Fixed G Grommet ic Grooved H HD H ead HEX Hexagonal ELI EJ Hold HND liier Handle Heat 1 Integrated Circuit Identifying Inside Diameter DE ue Intermediate Frequency N Inch INTL
421. non HP 9 6 unpacking 9 7 unpacking the cabinet 9 9 9 10 system bus address error 4 81 system bus SRQ error 4 81 system cabinet 9 14 system command 15 run main program 4 65 16 memory operations 4 65 17 rerun self test 4 65 18 repeat test loop 4 65 system components effects on performance 8 3 effects on system 8 3 substituting 8 94 system error model flowgraphs explained 8 83 of all errors with correction off 8 86 of all residual errors with correction on 8 93 system measurement sequence of 3 15 system uncertainty test procedure 8 48 systematic errors 8 4 8 76 systems specialized 3 2 T table annotation and wording verification program 8 99 table data you change 8 23 tables reviewing error terms 8 21 tape eraser bulk for use degaussing CRT 7 10 temperature checking 8 35 operating 4 107 temperature requirements 9 3 terms error term table editing 8 19 test cable considerations 8 25 test devices non ideal 8 27 test equipment required for adjustments 7 9 test menu how to access 4 58 test patterns display 4 47 test port adapters 8 97 raw channel errors example printout 8 63 8 66 test port errors example printout 8 62 test record 8 105 test set channel signal path specifications 8 104 cleaning rear panel extensions 10 3 S parameter check 9 23 test set GPIB HP IB syntax error 4 82 test set or service adapter 4 20 test sets control path 3 6 frequency c
422. nspect the test port connectors They should be dean and the center conductor pin is centered If so gage the microwave connectors gages are supplied in Agilent calibration kits Confirm that the center pin recession is correct Refer to the Specifications section in the test set manual for connector specifications Also inspect clean and gage the connectors of the calibration kit and verification kit devices Refer to the kit manuals for center pin recession specifications Clean the Test Set Rear Panel Extensions Over a period of time the test set rear extensions can affect the performance of the 8510 system unless they and the corresponding bulkhead connectors they are connected to are kept clean Use a swab and alcohol to dean the rear extensions and the bulkhead connectors Be careful not to damage the center conductors of the bulkhead connectors Notice that these bulkhead connectors provide a direct path to the samplers The appropriate static precautions as outlined in the Microwave Connector Card and test set manual should be used to prevent damage to the static sensitive samplers ATTENTION Static Sensitive Handle only at Static Safe Work Stations 8510C On Site Service Manual 10 3 Preventive Maintenance Clean the Glass Filter and CRT or Clean the LCD Clean the Glass Filter and CRT or Clean the LCD 85101C Equipped with CRT Display A gasket between the CRT and glass filter limits air dust infiltratio
423. nt 1 1 P paint touch up 5 6 parallel port adapter 9 21 parallel printers 9 21 parameters user 9 23 part numbers extender board 7 22 parts ordering information 5 2 replaceable 5 2 Performance Test Failures 4 119 4 120 performance test failures 4 6 performance test record 8 105 performance verification 8 1 criteria 8 102 if the system fails 8 56 results interpreting 8 54 software for 8 8 system 8 5 peripherals connectingtosystem 9 17 9 20 phase errors due to electrical length of devices 8 100 phase lock cydesummary 3 21 learn mode 3 20 loop theory 3 16 main sequence 3 19 monitoring 3 19 pretune sequence 3 16 running error messages 3 21 simplified pretune loop 3 19 system phase lock operation 3 16 VTO monitoring 3 20 phase lock failure 4 78 phase lock lost 4 79 phase lock sequence 3 19 pixel faulty 4 47 plotting aborting 8 97 label information 8 102 pens 8 103 traces on the controller CRT 8 103 plotting and printing 8 102 port extension cables 9 19 power cables grounding 9 19 power failures unratioed 4 85 power supply 85101C simplified block diagram 4 98 power supply capacitors replacement 6 26 power supply failures 4 6 4 97 power switch on 9 21 preconfigured systems 9 14 pre operational checks control configuration and cabling 4 8 preregulator replacement 6 13 preset check during installation 9 22 pretune failure 4 79 pretune lost failure 4
424. nt is complete press CONTINUE on the controller to return to the menu 15 If either of the following prompts is displayed check the equi pment setup for configuration errors or refer to the troubleshooting chapter AMPLIFIER OUTPUT 30 dBm TOO LOW REPAIR BOARD OR TEST SETUP or AMPLIFIER OUTPUT gt 20 dBm TOO HIGH REPAIR BOARD TEST SETUP 16 Switch off the analyzer power and return the equipment to the original configuration Be suretotighten the screws when reinstalling the board into the mainframe loose Screws can cause crosstalk in the instrument Also be sure to reconnect all the 85102 cables in the original configuration 7 24 8510C On Site Service Manual Adjustments Procedure 7 Synchronous Detector Adjustment Procedure 7 Synchronous Detector Adjustment Equipment Function generator 33250A Service board extender 85102 60030 4 ft BNC to SMB cable assembly 5062 7230 2 12 SMB cable assembly 5061 1022 2 adapter SMB M M 1250 0669 85102 service adjustments disk 08510 10024 Controller HP 9000 series 200 or 300 Description and Procedure TheA5 and A7 synchronous detector assemblies provide two voltages that are equal to the real and imaginary components of the vector representing the input signal to the sample and hold assembly The following procedure adjusts the two output filters of the synchronous detector to equalize the delay through them 1 After loading BASIC into the controller memo
425. nthe self test sequence once and stop in case of a failure or go on to run the main program normal operation Run the self test sequence in a repeating and failure logging loop How to Access the Test Menu If the operating system is running properly press the SYSTEM key Then press MORE SERVICE FUNCTIONS SERVICE MENU The self test selections should appear with other selections If theinstrument is off press and hold in any key and turn on theinstrument When the keyboard self test failure message appears release the key Press MARKER to enter the test menu With the instrument on press and hold in any key Then press and release the recessed TEST button When the keyboard self test failure message appears release the entry key Press to enter thetest menu Unless you entered the menu with the SYSTEM key test 14 binary 8 4 2 should be indicated on the front panel LEDs of the display processor If a fault occurred before test 14 the self test sequence has stopped and the LEDs indicate the test that failed Press MARKER to enter the test menu How to Run a Single Self Test Repeatedly NOTE This mode in not recommended for field use It is typically used at the factory Use this repeating mode with external test equipment to trace waveforms and signals through circuits in question and detect intermittent failures Note that if an error is found the front panel LEDs do not clear until you rerun the entire self t
426. nual 4 137 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Service Program In the 85101C there is error correction firmware that can cover up defects in EEPROM this test The usefulness of this test may therefore be limited and may best be used to check the error correction capabilities Use Write Unformatted Data to Selected Memory Locations 5 to perform pattern writes in an uncorrected mode This will destroy initialization and hardware calibration data Read Verify Test 3 Data Again 4 This test re verifies the data stored in memory from the prior test It reports the first failed page As explained in the previous test error correction is the test and will not reliably show EEPROM failures Write Unformatted Data to Selected Memory Locations 5 The board must be re initialized after this procedure This test allows the user to input the size of the memory to write to and the location and pattern It reports problems with the write if any and prompts to allow looping writes The test reads the pattern back and reports all locations where a pattern mismatch exists There is no formatting and hardware cal data may be lost Also repeated looping writes to EEPROM will reduce memory life span Read Verify Test 5 Data Again 6 This test re verifies the data stored in memory from the previous test It displays any errors exactly as the previous test would display them This re verification is useful for detecting the type of EEPROM fai
427. o 58 DUT Length 18 8 cm 521 800 512 880 S22 51 HP851 R HP83651R 5056 SL HP85133F S11 Dynamic Rccuracy Deg 8510C On Site Service Manual L L E S11 Reflection Coefficient 17 Nov 1998 13 33 34 Freq GHz 045 to 2 2 to 20 20 to 48 48 to 50 DUT Length 18 8 cm S21 808 512 800 522 8 8 8 69 Performance Verification and Specifications Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts Example 8 14 S11 Dynamic Accuracy Specifications Table 17 511 DYNAMIC ACCURACY SPECIFICATIONS 17 Nov 1890 13 10 06 S21 517 800 577 M Device Length 10 0 cm etuork Analyzer HPBS1 C Color Model lest 517 2 4mm 5 45MHz 50GHz Source HPB3651A Synthesizer 45MHz 50 06H2 Calibration Kit HP85056R 2 4mm Slotless Standard Grade Calibration Technique SL Sliding Load Cal fest Port Cables HP85133F pair short cables 2 4mm 2 4mm 2 20 40 40 50 Mog fies ea Lin Deg Mag Lin Deg Mag Lin Deg Man 900007 100 000 000029 189 000 988399 180 000 HAGA 078 693 000099 14 00021 29 90017 ales 000162 03 056 090169 097 15 MU 255 x 5 032 Q000 42 055 000225 0 WORT EE 46 2 05 7 QQgi29 054 00023 083 NU Ob 929255
428. ocedure Service Program Service Program Overview The diagnostic tests and commands contained in the 8510 service program give a relatively fast and complete check of the 8510 system When your 8510 system appears to have a failure you can use this program along with other procedures to check the instrument board assemblies The service program tests do not completely check all board assemblies but are designed to exercise the most vulnerable parts of each board If all tests pass there is a 9096 confidence level that all board assemblies tested are good After you familiarize yourself with this program you can refer to the menu map included in this section It is a map of all service program tests and the assemblies checked by each test Run the service program to identify verify a failed assembly after a self test failure identify verify a failed assembly after a running error message check board assemblies whenever a board assembly problem is suspected verify repair of a replaced board assembly Tools Required The following items are required to run all parts of the service program 85102 emulator board assembly 8510 service adapter TwoBNC cables The 85102 emulator board assembly and the 8510 service adapter are available individually Refer to Chapter 5 for Agilent part numbers and ordering information 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 129 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Service Program Running the 8510
429. odifying the verification program to include this data Contact an Agilent system engineer for more information Calibration Kit Substitution The accuracy of the 8510 when used with any calibration kit is dependent on how well the kit standards are defined The measurement specifications for the 8510 system include measurement calibration with an Agilent calibration kit Measurement calibrations made with user defined or modified calibration kits are not subject to the 8510 performance specifications although a procedure similar to the standard verification procedure may be used Contact an Agilent system engineer for more information Calibration Cycle The recommended system calibration cycle is once every year However that does not extend past thetest ports of thetest set if non Agilent cables are used test port cables test fixtures adapters etc The calibration cycle for the system is unknown with non Agilent cables and must be determined by the owner sincethe stability repeatability and aging rate characteristics of the test port cables are unknown The user of the system should determine the calibration interval based on the amount of use and the degree of cable movement 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 95 Performance Verification and Specifications Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications Theinformation listed in this se
430. of the mounting screws Ifthe LCD is to replaced the complete LCD assembly should be replaced To Reassemble 5 Reversethe order of the disassembly procedure 8510C On Site Service Manual 6 19 Replacement P rocedures 85101C Replacement Procedures This pageintentionally left blank 6 20 8510C On Site Service Manual Replacement Procedures 85102B Replacement Procedures 85102B Replacement Procedures ATTENTION Static Sensitive Handle only at Static Safe Work Stations This product contains static sensitive components When handling these components or assemblies work on an anti static surface and use a static grounding wrist strap 8510C On Site Service Manual 6 21 Replacement P rocedures 85102B Replacement Procedures Front Panel Replacement Tools Required Large Pozidrive screwdriver Small Pozidrive screwdriver T 15 Torx screwdriver Procedure The items shown in parentheses refer to the corresponding item numbers in Figure 6 6 To Disassemble 1 Disconnect the power cords 2 Remove the instrument handles Screws located under the plastic covers 3 Remove the three screws from the bottom edge of the frame item 1 4 Remove seven screws three from the top edge of the frame item 2 and two each from each side edge of the frame item 3 5 Disconnect the ribbon cable from the front panel interface board and the wires from the transformer The front panel is now free of the
431. ollowing paragraphs Caution Type Messages These messages are preceded with the word CAUTION and are accompanied by a beeping tone They usually indicate a problem with the 85102 IF detector test set source or disk drive They are the main subject of this section because they are related to hardware failures morethan the other types of messages E xcept for those caution messages that are concerned with the disk or disk drive most of these messages relate to the hardware phasel ock system For example if you disconnect the RF source power from the test set the message CAUTION NO IF FOUND Will be displayed mmediately the CPU has determined that there is insufficient IF power and reports the error on the display However because the CPU uses the information supplied by the 85102 A21 IF counter assembly it is possible that this board A21 is faulty and not the IF signal Therefore be careful in your interpretation of these error messages Remember the message indicates that a probl em has been detected on a certain assembly but the message does not always indicate where the actual problem is located Prompt Type Messages Prompts are displayed whenever the CPU wants you to act during the normal running of the instrument These messages do not indicate a failure For example if you have just finished calibrating the system and you do not have enough room to store the calibration the prompt NO SPACE FOR NEW CAL DELETE CAL SET W
432. ome replacement procedures may differ depending on the display installed In such instances each display CRT or LCD is documented separately 8510C Equipped with a CRT Display 8510C Equipped with an LCD Front panel A1 Front panel A1 Rotary pulse generator RPG Rotary pulse generator RPG Disk drive A2 Disk drive A2 CRT display A11 LCD assembly A15 Rear panel A9 Rear panel A9 Preregulator A10 Preregulator A10 Motherboard card cage assembl y Motherboard card cage assembl y Assembly differs in 8510C models with CRT and LCD displays 85102B Replacement Procedures Front panel Rectifier board A26 Power supply capacitors C1 C2 C3 and C4 Rear panel Adjustments and Performance Tests When an assembly is replaced adjustments may be necessary to assure the analyzer meets its specifications Refer to Figure 7 3 to identify the adjustment s required after replacing an assembly n addition to any necessary adjustments performance verification may be needed depending on the assembly replaced 6 2 8510C On Site Service Manual Replacement Procedures Overview WARNING ac line voltage inside the instrument can if contacted produce fatal electrical shock DISCONNECT BOTH AC POWER CORDS FOR ALL DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURES With the ac power cables connected to the instrument the ac line voltage is present on the terminals of the line power modules on the rear panels and theLINE power switch
433. omponents 8 94 SONICS 3655 3 ce Od p doe d 8 94 deh 8 94 Calibration K Xo Er uakis 8 95 a TUM 8 95 Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications 8 96 8510 System Specification Criteria 8 96 AS MHz Calibration and Verification cusa cc us ec eae eed 8 96 BODUB or 180 Degree ValgeS uuu ai ide Ros 8 96 Aborting Plots and Printouts with the 8 97 Adapters Test PEDI Pa ROS LMG URS Ree eS 8 97 Attention Messages and SCPP 5 5 2 2 2 2 2 8 97 BASIC 5 0 and HP UX Systems setting the time on your system 8 97 Error TAME uad doo susc qoo diee o oe oS o dee do odd e d di 8 97 Connections and Connector 8 98 Controller Displays and High Resolution 8 98 8350B Sweep Oscillators as System 5 8 98 6510 mc Waya Lese uode x ace ee Reda a Pd Sw
434. on menu allows you to specify how many data points will be used to generate plot traces This is called the parameter step resolution size Usingthis feature you can increase or decrease the trace resolution on plots Sincethe grid scaleis always a fixed size you can select tabular data to examine exact scale values Performance Verification Criteria A complete performance verification requires that you measure all of the devices in your kit Do not change any of the 8510 parameters or stimulus settings that the program uses for your system The averaging factor should always be 1024 for synthesizers for example 8360 8340 8341 and 128 for sweepers for example 8350B For sweepers the program always sets the 8510 sweep time to 500 milliseconds Remember that sweep ti me does not apply to synthesizers because the system is in step mode The four devices are slightly different for each configuration H owever every kit has one of the following 20 4 attenuator e 400r 50 dB attenuator Airline length varies with kit type 25 ohm mismatch airline length varies with kit type NOTE Systems with an 8350 as a source use a shorted airlineinstead of the 25 ohm mismatch airline This is because of the sweeper s phase and magnitude errors explained 8350 Sweep Oscillators as System Sources in this reference section Usethe flush short from the calibration kit Plotters and Printers The verification program requires that the
435. oning requirements depend on the amount of heat produced by the instruments Usethe BTU hour ratings from the table below to determine the total rating of your system Each VA rating is multiplied by 3 4 to determine the BTU hour rating of each instrument To convert the total BTU hour figure to tons divide the total BTU hour value by 12 000 A ton is the amount of heat required to melt a ton 907 kg of icein one hour Table 9 2 Maximum VA Ratings and BTU Hour Rating of Instruments Agilent Instrument Maximum VA Rating VA Subtotal Maximum BTU hour BTU hour Subtotal Standard Equipment 85101 Display Processor 250 850 851021F Detector 210 714 8340 Synthesized Sweeper or 500 1 700 8360 Synthesized Sweeper or 400 1 360 8350 with Plug In 375 1 275 851x RF Test Set 145 323 Standard System Total Accessory Equipment 9000 Series 300 250 850 19 inch CRT 98751A 98752A 420 1 430 98753A 98754A 16 inch CRT 98785A 98789A 200 680 Typical Hard Disk Drive 65 222 HP LaserJet 11 170 to 800 580 to 2 720 HP Paint et 20 68 HP 7440A Plotter 100 340 System Total 1 Values are based on 120 Vac supplied to each instrument at 60 Hz CAUTION This product is designed for use Installation Category 11 and Pollution Degree 2 per IEC 61010 1 and 664 respectively 8510C On Site Service Manual System Installation Preparing the Site
436. onnecting the A14 GSP display interface board to the A15 LCD If the cable is properly connected and the display is blank the most probable causeis theA15 LCD If the LCD is defective replace the complete display assembly Refer to A15 LCD Assembly Replacement on page 6 16 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 43 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure LCD Failures A14 GSP Display Interface Board Circuit Description The A14 graphics system processor GSP display interface board is the main interface between the A5 central processing unit CPU board and the A15 liquid crystal display LCD The A5 CPU board converts the formatted data into GSP commands and writes it to the A14 GSP display interface board The GSP processes the data to produce generate the necessary analog and digital video signals that are used for the following purposes Theanalog video signals are used for the VGA compatible RGB output signals which are then routed to the rear panel Thedigital video signals are translated to 3 3 volt levels and routed tothe A15 LCD 14 assembly receives 45 V from the motherboard that is used for processing and supplying power to the A16 backlight inverter board 45 V and theA15 LCD 3 3 V Diagnostic Tests Self tests and service program tests see 85101 Display Processor Service Program M enu on page 4 131 check the functionality of the A14 graphics display GSP and the A15 LCD If any of these display related tests fail
437. onverters 3 5 mixer based 3 5 sampler based 3 5 theory of operation 3 5 TESTS 5 A14 DISPLAY RAM 4 62 tests 10 A5 MULTIPLIER 4 63 11 A7 DISC CONTROLLER 4 63 Index Index 12 A6 NON VOLATILE MEMORY 4 64 13 1 F DETECTOR DATA 4 64 14 KEYBOARD TEST 4 64 1 A5 Processor EPROM 4 61 2 A5 PROCESSOR RAM 4 61 3 A7 DATA BUS 4 61 4 A14 DISPLAY PROCESSOR 4 62 4 A4 DISPLAY PROCESSOR 4 62 5 A4 DISPLAY RAM 4 62 6 A7 TIMER CLOCK RS 232 4 62 7 A7 PUBLIC GPIB HP IB 4 62 8 A7 SYSTEM BUS 4 63 9 A9 INTERRUPT SYSTEM 4 63 theory of operation 3 1 tools 7 3 disassembly 6 3 for adjustments 7 3 service available 1 5 total reflection magnitude uncertainty Erm 8 78 total system uncertainty test description 8 5 touch up paint 5 6 transmission magnitude uncertainty Etm 8 80 transmission phase uncertainty Etp 8 81 transmission uncertainty equations 8 80 trim sweep procedure 8 104 troubleshooting component level 3 2 image problems 4 46 instrument level 3 2 LCD 4 43 LCD display problems 4 46 performance verification failures 8 56 power supply summary 4 98 test set unratioed power 4 88 with the service adapter 4 86 typical measurement sequence 3 15 U unable to lock to ext 10 MHz ref 4 82 uncertainties comparison of verification devices 8 51 equations for 8 75 generation of system measurement 8 82 interpreting printouts 8 61 test procedure 8 48 total system test descriptio
438. ooting Outline Figure 4 1 System Connections DISK ORIVE ADDRESS 9 85101 DISPLAY D PROCESSOR HP 85102 IF DETECTOR ADDRESS 16 F PRESENT HP 851X TEST SET ADDRESS 20 HP 8360 RF SOURCE ADDRESS 19 HP 8340 SOURCE ADDRESS 19 TO HP 85101 8510 INTERCONNECT NOTES 1 Power cables must be connected to 85101 85102 test set source and any peripherals 2 Connect the reference port extension cables as shown in Figure 9 8 Not applicable for 85110 8516 8517 4 10 NOTE FOR HP B360 USE SHORT MUST CONNECTED TO THE HP 85102 SWEEP IN 0 10 NOTE FOR HP 8340 OR 8350 USE A BNC SHORT MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE HP 85102 TRIGGER INPUT HP 8350 TO TEST SET 3 TO HP 85101 510 INTERCONNECT For systems without controllers connect any peripherals to the 8510 interconnect on the 85101 For systems with controllers connect any peripherals and the controller to the GPIB connector on the 85101 An 8340 or 8360 requires a source interconnect cable connection when the test set used is an 8516 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Troubleshooting Outline Abbreviated 8510C System Service Flowchart cont Refer to Figure 4 1 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 11 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Troubleshooting Outline Firmware Revisions Check the 8510 operating system
439. or The Edit Parameters window will appear on the screen Usedfor menus lists dialog boxes and button boxes on a computer monitor from which you make selections using the mouse or keyboard Double click EXIT to quit the program vi Hewlett Packard to Agilent Technologies Transition This documentation supports a product that previously shipped under the Hewlett Packard company brand name The brand name has now been changed to Agilent Technologies The two products are functionally identical only our name has changed The document still includes references to Hewlett Packard products some of which have been transitioned to Agilent Technologies vii viii Contents 1 Service and Equipment EUER 1 2 On Site Service Manual Organization 1 3 Service and Equipment Overview Chapter 1 1 3 Safety Licensing Chapter 2 sees iue RR ee Ee EES Qha qaqa 1 3 Theory or Operation Chapter 3 ua l dose dado CRY XR be c d 1 3 Main Troubleshooting Procedure Chapter 4 1 3 Replaceable Parts Chapter aiu acia ub eds eek i aed a a WEGE draw n a ewe 1 4 Replacement Procedures Chapter 6 1 4 A digotienta EG NOUS TI 5 JC od PE RECO ee ee 1 4 Specifications and Performance Verification Chapter 8
440. or Local su uu a queste 8 103 Contents 9 Contents System Hang Ups or Other 8 103 Test Set Channel Signal Path Specifications al b1 a2 62 8 104 Test Set Rear Panel Extension 8 104 Trin Sweep POOGSQUP S x coss adu aa pP 8 104 Uncertainty and Dynamic Accuracy Limits Upper or Lower 8 104 Neat RECO auia esae cad Eos deed oes doen 8 105 9 System Installation OVEVIOW REGE E d 9 2 c r 9 3 Environmental Begg Ce elTe 9 3 System Heating and C OD EIE uiae reden tot Son ode dede doe del dis 9 4 Spot ROMANS sid eq bees dtd 9 5 cien D FE 9 5 Electromagnetic Inter Teremeg areis qd 9 6 Non Agilent System Cabinet 9 6 Oihe aac dabo aeg 9 6 Checking the Shipment and Unpacking the 5 5 9 7 9 7 Unpacking the 9 7 Unpacking the System Cabinets suae cales
441. ord HP85101 NON VOLATILE MEMORY BOARD A6 TESTS INITIALIZE MEMORY BOARD COMPLETE MEMORY BOARD UNFORMATTED WRITE READ TEST COMPLETE MEMORY BOARD FORMATTED WRITE READ TEST READ VERIFY TEST 3 DATA AGAIN WRITE UNFORMATTED DATA TO SELECTED MEMORY LOCATIONS READ VERIFY TEST 5 DATA AGAIN READ LOCATIONS WHERE HARDWARE CAL DATA IS STORED SHOW NON VOLATILE MEMORY PARAMETERS RESET MEMORY TO DEFAULT HARDWARE CAL DATA RETURN TO HP85101 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU For factory use only TO RETURN TO THIS MENU AFTER COMPLET ING A TEST PRESS THE MARKER KEY 8515 Be sure to hove o bockup of the operoting system O Q G N HP85101 DISPLAY PROCESSOR SERVICE CPU BOARD TESTS A5 1 0 BOARD AND FRONT PANEL TESTS 1 A2 A7 DISPLAY BOARD AND CRT TESTS A4 A11 NON VOLATILE MEMORY BOARD TESTS A6 RETURN TO HP8510 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU PROGRAM MENU HP85101 DISPLAY BOARD AND CRT TESTS A4 A11 GSP ADDRESS DECODER STIMULUS CRT LOOP GSP DATA LINE STIMULUS LOOP RAMP BACKGROUND DAC LOOP RAMP INTENSITY DAC LOOP CALIBRATE BACKGROUND AND INTENSITY RECALL BACKGROUND AND INTENSITY CALIBRATION SCREEN TEST PATTERNS SOFTKEY LABEL ALIGNMENT PATTERN RETURN TO HP85101 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU TO RETURN TO THIS MENU AFTER COMPLETING A TEST PRESS THE MARKER KEY oO O UO WN ENTRY AREA HEX KEYS N 02 9 gt JM lt
442. ormation useful in applying the 8510 system Typical characteristics are representative of most systems though not necessarily tested in each system Not tested at the customer s site Condition A condition of the measurement or calculation 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 87 Performance Verification and Specifications Measurement Uncertainties This pageintentionally left blank 8 88 8510C On Site Service Manual gt a 2 o a A nt d 1 Dms1 Dps1 Dpfs1eF eDrt Rnfo2i 10 1 20 3 Rea2i sqrt Avg 5 Pcco2 Fesa2 1 2 2 1 41 1 Lxo2 1 Rnto2 Ldvia2 Lfvio2eF 1 Ldsa2 1 0 02 0 2 d o 4 Lfso2esqrt F Dpfso2 F sDrt 2 2 sqrt Avg gt e Rnfb2c y Reb2c sqrt Avg ud 14 t ERU 1 Mpb2 14Geb2L 1 49 1 Lxb2 1 sart Avg Lavib2 Lfvib2eF 1 1 Ld2b2 Lf2b2esqrt F 8 8 at Q RES Reb2i z ay sqrt Avg Pccb2 ES ss e Ps Pssf F r Rfc Fest Ld1c Lfi cesqrt F e Ld2c Lf2cesqrt F 1 Rft 1 Ctm1 Cpfi eF eCff 1 Crt2 1 Ctm2 Cpf2eF Cff 1 Rrr o Fss1 5 5 5 Fs2b2 ia 2 r z 3 4 P E m E E E E Fea o o o 1 Rfr Ldic Lficesqrt F 1 Crt2 Ld2c Lf2cesqrt F Fstb1 1 Rrt 1 Ctm1 Cpf1eF eCff 1 Ctm2
443. ort to port 1 and port 2 This reflects power back to the b1 and b2 samplers through the coupler 4 Find the test set RF paths and example frequency response traces on this foldout Press User 1 a1 User 2 b2 User 3 a2 and User 4 b1 Each trace should be similar to the example traces on this foldout typically within 5 dB Record the results for paths 1 through 4 User 1 through User 4 in Table 4 3 3 Check RF Paths 5 and 6 These paths are b1 Thru b2 Thru RF Path 5 User 4 RF Path 6 User 2 1 Connect a cable between port 1 and port 2 2 Press PARAMETER MENU User 4 b1 REDEFINE PARAMETER DRIVE Port 2 PHASE LOCK a2 REDEFINE DONE to observe the b1 power level trace through path 5 illustrated on this foldout The trace should be similar to the example trace typically within 5 dB Record the result for path 5 good or bad under the RF path diagram 3 Press PARAMETER MENU User 2 b2 REDEFINE PARAMETER DRIVE Port 1 PHASE LOCK a1 REDEFINE DONE to observe the b2 power level trace through path 6 illustrated on this foldout The trace should be similar to the example trace typically within 5 dB Record the result for path 6 good or bad under the RF path diagram Find the Faulty Assembly Try to match the observed results recorded under the RF path diagrams with the results listed in the table of most probable failures below Out of 32 possible variations the table lists the variation
444. ory It takes approximately five seconds to complete When the test is run the message Board Initialization in Progress will be displayed When the EEPROMs have been initialized the message Initialization Completed will be displayed After the test it may be necessary to recalibrate the display and the beeper frequencies Complete Memory Board Unformatted Write R ead Test 2 This test checks the ability of non volatile memory EE PROM s to correctly store data This test takes approximately two minutes to complete Thetest writes to and reads from each EEPROM and reports where the first error occurred by giving the memory bank position including upper most significant or lower least significant bytein the bank The subtest number that failed is reported Normally a good memory will report subtest 0 Press MARKER reinitialize memory and return to the main menu of the nonvolatile memory board tests Complete Memory Board Formatted Write R ead Test 3 This test prompts the user for a hexadecimal bit pattern to write into and read from memory Then it prompts for the start and stop page numbers Normally you would start at page 0000 and stop on the last available page in memory These page numbers depend on how many 5 are loaded in the EEPROM board Running test 8 will show how many pages your EEPOM board provided the board successfully initialized 8510C On Site Service Ma
445. otherwise indicated If the test equipment recommended is not available other equipment may be used if the performance meets the critical specifications listed in thetable The test setup used for an adjustment procedure is shown on the display Adjustment Tools For safety reasons Agilent recommends that a non metallic tuning tool is used for all adjustment procedures Never try to force any adjustment control in the instrument This is especially critical when tuning variable slug tuned inductors and variable capacitors NOTE Many adjustment procedures require the use of various miscellaneous tools and accessories Adjustment procedures reference the tools and accessories Related Adjustments Table 7 3 lists any adjustments that interact with or relateto other adjustments It is important that adjustments listed in Table 7 3 are done in the order shown to insure that the instrument meets its specifications 8510C On Site Service Manual 7 3 Adjustments Safety Considerations Resealing of Components The steps to adjust a sealed component follow 1 Removethe seal to adjust the component 2 Reseal the component using a silicone rubber compound that does not contain acetic acid Loading the Controller Basic Language System Before loading the adjustments software you must load a controller language system as follows Loading Basic 2 0 1 With the controller power off insert the 98611A Basic 2 0 system disk into either the
446. ou are finished entering comments 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 17 Performance Verification and Specifications Performing System Verification Performing System Verification After configuring the system decide whether you want to choose user generated specs or software defined uncertainties Select Verify System in the Main menu In this menu you can start the 8510C system verification using either the defined system specifications or custom specifications calculated from edited error term values To choose the desired spedifications for system verification follow the steps below 1 Press Select Standard 2 Goto Verify Using 3 Select either Specifications for defined values or User Parameters to usethe customized specifications For additional information on performing system verification refer to the Total System Uncertainty Test Description later in this chapter Changing Error Term Values Before you start editing the error terms determine the characteristics of the equipment in your system that are not already defined in the software As an example you may plan to use a calibration kit that is manufactured by a company other than Agilent You need to determine the directivity of the load in this kit You may want to use custom cables if so you need to know the loss factor You also need to know which error terms to edit and what values to enter for the error terms changed Refer to the 8510 System U ncorrecte
447. ound your 8510 system If the message CAUTION Test Set Is Too Hot is displayed immediately inspect for items a piece of paper for example on the test set fan Items on top of the test set or around the system may also impede the air flow The test set will not shut down if it becomes too hot If the 85101 or 85102 overheat the system will shut down until the temperature drops to the operating range Additionally it is recommended that the source fan filter if any be inspected once a week and cleaned as necessary 10 2 8510C On Site Service Manual Preventive Maintenance Inspect and Clean Connectors Inspect and Clean Connectors WARNING To prevent electrical shock disconnect the 8510 system from the mains before cleaning Use a dry cloth or one slightly dampened with water to clean the external parts Do not clean internally For accurate and repeatable measurement results it is essential that connectors on calibration and verification devices test ports cables and other devices be cleaned and gaged regularly It is also necessary that standard devices are handled and stored properly and that all connectors are regularly inspected for signs of damage This not only ensures the best performance from the connectors but also extends their life Refer to calibration kit manual for a detailed description of microwave connector caretechniques This manual also describes proper techniques for making connections Visually i
448. ource connector type calibration method and cables System specifications for your system configuration can be generated with the performance verification specifications software E xcept for the examples in this chapter there are no system spedifications in the manual Example printouts appear under the title Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts Measurement Uncertainties later in this chapter explains the sources and types of measurement errors and how they relate to measurement uncertainties To generate system specifications follow the H ow to Load the Software and How to Run the System Specifications and Uncertainties Program procedures in this chapter 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 7 Performance Verification and Specifications Software for Performance Verification and Specifications Software for Performance Verification and Specifications Both the performance verification and the specifications use the same software The program consists of a number of menus and forms that are selected by controller hardkeys and softkeys The program softkeys are always labeled on the display and correspond to the menu selections you make When you want to change an item or move to another selection you can use the program softkeys or the controller arrow keys up down or the Next and Previous keys NOTE Using the BASIC STOP or PAUSE keyboard keys will not reset the program E ven pressing the k
449. own conversi on of the signals detects them and digitizes and multiplexes them for input to the display processor It also functions as part of the phase locked loop For the most part it is controlled by the display processor The assemblies of the I F detector can be classified in four categories signal path control phase locked loop and miscellaneous Signal Path Assemblies The signal path assemblies down convert detect digitize and multiplex the signals Figure 3 4 Signal Path Assemblies of I F Detector IF Mixers A9 A11 A13 A14 buffer filter and mix the 20 MHz signals with the 19 9 MHz LO signal down to 100 kHz The assemblies are electrically and mechanically identical 19 9 MHz Local Oscillator A8 assembly provides the LO signals for thelF mixer assemblies Test and Reference IF Amplifiers A10 A12 autorange and amplify the signals to allow the detectors to operate in their optimal range The assemblies are electrically and mechanically identical Test and Reference Synchronous Detectors A5 A7 detect the X and Y pairs test and reference that have been mixed down to 100 kHz IF The assemblies are electrically and mechanically identical Sample and Hold A17 assembly multiplexes the X and Y pairs from the synchronous detectors Analog to Digital Converter A18 assembly converts the X and Y pairs from the analog IF waveform to digital bits Processor Interface A24 assembly transmits the digital
450. pe the number indicoted then press MARKER 3 The defoult volue on doto entry is zero Copyright 9 Agilent Technologies 1987 2001 rr512c TEST SET GPIB SERVICE PROGRAM MENU PRESET TEST SET SWITCH ACTIVE LIGHT SWITCH PORT 1 2 LIGHTS ACTIVATE PORT 1 2 ATTENUATOR INCREMENT ACTIVE ATTENUATOR SELECT NEW GPIB ADDRESS WN RETURN TO 8510 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU For test sets with appropriate feature NOTES 1 To repeot o function press MARKER 2 The default Test Set GPIB address is 20 On the 85102 rear panel connect 20 MHz OUT SWEEP IN 0 10 using another BNC coble Failure to do so will result in false error messages PRESS MARKER TO CONTINUE to 431 TEST SET INTERCONNECT using the service adapter ond a BNC cable Also connect ANALOG 10V to NOTE Disconnect BNC cobles from 85102 to source when running tests Failure to do so will result in false error messages 8560 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU GPIB TEST 1 FRONT PANEL EMULATOR 2 CHANGE GPIB ADDRESS default is 19 3 RETURN TO 8510 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU 85102 IF DETECTOR SERVICE PROGRAM MENU ADC CONTROL TEST A19 SWEEP ADC TEST A20 ADC TEST A18 CAL DAC TEST A17 100 kHz IF AMPLIFIER TEST A10 A12 SYNCHRONOUS DETECTOR TEST A5 A7 20 MHz MIXER TEST A9 A11 A13 A14 PRETUNE PHASE LOCK TEST A22 MAIN PHASE LOCK TEST A23 IF COUNTER
451. peration The basic system is defined as follows e 8510C which consists of an 85101C display processor and an 85102 IF detector e 851x test set Microwave source Peripherals such as controllers plotters printers disk drives and millimeter devices may be added to the basic system Options The following options are availablefor the 8510C Option Number Description 008 Adds pulse capability 010 Adds time domain capability 908 Adds a rack flange mounting kit without front handles 910 Adds a duplicate manual set 913 Adds a rack flange mounting kit with front handles W30 Extended service warranty 2 year return to Agilent W31 Extended service warranty 2 year on site Scheduling Installation If you have ordered on site installation and verification be sure that all system components have been delivered unpacked and collected at the installation site See Checking the Shipment and Unpacking the System on page 97 Also be sure the site preparation is complete as described in this chapter Then contact the Agilent customer engineer to schedule the installation and system verification 9 2 8510C On Site Service Manual System Installation Preparing the Site Preparing the Site Environmental Requirements The environment must meet the conditions listed in the table below Table 9 1 Environmental Conditions Temperature For operation 5 to 40 C 41 F to 104 F
452. port extension 9 17 return loss 8 36 substitution 8 94 supplied 5 35 cabling pre operational checks calculated error terms 8 97 calibration and verification at 45 M Hz 8 96 cyde 8 95 kit 8 3 kit substitution 8 95 Canadian EMC requirements compliance 2 6 capacitor discharge procedure 6 26 replacement 6 26 capacitors power supply replacement 6 26 caution optional function not installed 4 74 changing table data 8 22 channel error term symbols 8 78 channel errors example printout for channel a1 8 65 for channel a2 8 66 for channel b1 8 63 for channel b2 8 64 check step sequence 3 18 check step sequence algorithm 3 18 checking firmware revisions 9 13 checking the shipment 9 7 checks operational 8 5 process 8 6 deaning and gaging of connectors 10 3 CRT 10 4 glass filter CRT 10 4 LCD 10 4 test set rear panel extensions 10 3 dearance for adequate system cooling 9 4 clock adjustment 7 28 comparing measurement uncertainties for verification devices 8 48 compatibility Source 9 13 System 9 13 component level troubleshooting components degaussing 7 12 in system and effects of 8 3 resealing 7 4 substituting 8 94 configuring the system and connecting 9 12 in a cabinet 9 14 on a bench top 9 16 connections 9 20 of HP laser printers 9 20 of system configuration 9 16 9 18 connector maintenance 8 98 repeatability of a cable 8 22 connector repeatability 8 22 cable 8 3
453. printer be connected on the controller s GPIB The plotter can be on either the 8510 system bus default state in the software configuration menu or the controller s GPIB When it is connected to the 8510 system bus plots can be made from the 8510 display or from the controller display H owever the 8510 does not have to be connected to a controller to generate specifications Therefore without an 8510 connected and running you would connect the plotter to the controller s GPIB Plot Label Information If you set the date and time when you first run the program the correct date and time when the plot is made appears in the upper right corner of the plot Plots will also be labeled with the system hardware models H owever some of the sources will not have their correct A B or C labels For example 8340B sources will be labeled as 8340A This is only on plots and does not mean that the program is faulty The program must eliminatethe slash that occurs after hardware configuration labels such as 8340AJB 8 102 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications Plotter Pens The software configuration menu lists pen numbers 4 and colors If your plotter has pen wheel the pen numbers correspond to the wheel numbers Otherwise plotters with only two pens use the first and second pens listed The color relates to color monitors and the
454. procedure with ftheA10red LED is off disconnect line power from the 85101C Plug the A4 A14 GSP board assembly into the motherboard If the LED lights replace the A4 A14 GSP assembly or the display assembly A11 A15 or A16 connected to the A4 A14 GSP board To isolate the problem check A4 A14 for loading by the display assembly A11 A15 or A16 before replacing A4 A14 Continueto plug in therest of the assemblies until the red LED lights Replace the assembly that causes the LED to light Remove A8 Motherboard Connector Cables Turn off the 85101C Oneat a time and in the order shown remove the following cables from their motherboard connectors and turn the 85101C on until the red LED goes off The cable and or its supplied assembly that causes the red LED to go out when it is removed from its motherboard connector is bad 1 keyboard cable 2 disc drive cable fthered LED is still on or flashing continue this procedure with the next paragraph Check the Operating Temperature Thetemperature sensing circuitry inside the A10 preregulator may be disabling the supply Make sure the operating environment ambient air temperature does not exceed 55 degrees 131 degrees F and that the 85101C fan is operating fthefan does not seem to be operating correctly refer to Fan Troubleshooting fthere does not appear to be a temperature problem it is likely that the A10 preregulator is bad 8510C
455. ptions The following paragraphs describe the individual error terms the devices used to characterize them in a measurement calibration the measurements they affect and explain how they relateto faults in the system Directivity Edf and Edr These are the uncorrected forward and reverse directivity errors of the system mainly of the test set These terms vary with frequency but values that are worsethan the specifications may indicate an error or mechanical malfunction in thetest set or in the devices used for the reflection calibration The calibration device used to characterize the directivity error term is usually a load This may bea lowband fixed load for frequencies below 2 GHz a broadband fixed load a sliding load for frequencies above 2 GHz or it may be an offset load for higher frequencies The measurements most affected by directivity errors are low reflection measurements high reflection measurements may appear normal Source Match Esf and Esr These arethe forward and reverse uncorrected source match terms of the driven port The source match in this case is determined primarily by the match of the test set power splitter and the main line coupler or bridge some test sets the match of the bias tees and step attenuators is also included The calibration devices used to characterize source match are the short and the shielded open or offset short for millimeter wave devices A bad connection of either of these duri
456. quency resolution to within a few hertz 8510 dedicated Agilent 836X1 synthesized sources come with 1 Hz resolution standard 1 Hz is optional on other 8360 series sources Modern synthesizers are as fast as or faster than sweep oscillators in most circumstances Older synthesizers tend to be slower but offer the same resolution A synthesizer can operate in step mode where it phase locks at each frequency point for the number of points selected At each point it takes one or more measurements depending upon the number of averages selected It can also operate in ramp mode Sweep Oscillators Sweep oscillators or sweepers are less frequency accurate than synthesizers They operate in ramp mode only A sweeper is fast but less accurate and sweeps through the frequency range as many times as the selected averaging factor 3 4 8510C On Site Service Manual Theory of Operation Test Sets Test Sets The standard test sets designed to work with the 8510 include the Agilent 8511 8514 8515 8517 85110 They differ in several respects operating frequency range dynamic range front panel test port connectors and internal RF path mechanics An identification code in ROM or configuration switches within each test set allow the 8510 to recognize each type at power up for proper operation Test sets have two main functions 1 Toseparate the RF signal into reference and test signals 2 To down convert the RF signals to 20 MHz IF signa
457. r and display processor are troubleshot to the assembly level For additional source or test set information refer to their manuals Thefinal sections of this chapter describe a typical measurement sequence and explain the system phase locked loop NOTE In this chapter RF signal and RF signal path refer to the main RF signal from the source Depending on its placein the path the RF may be RF one of two IFs or a digitized signal 3 2 8510C On Site Service Manual Theory of Operation The Base System The Base System The 8510 network analyzer base system used in this example consists of a source a test set the 85102 IF detector and the 85101 display processor instruments see Figure 3 1 Figure 3 1 Forward Transmission Test Signal Path in 8510 Base System DIGITAL SOURCE TEST SET IF DETECTOR DISPLAY PROCESSOR The source produces RF signals that allow the network analyzer to examine DUTS devices under test with a signal applied Thetest set splits the source signal into a reference signal and a test signal The test signal is transmitted through or reflected from the DUT and goes to the receiver for comparison tothe reference signal In Figure 3 1 only the transmitted signal path is shown In the 8510 system the test set also down converts the source frequency RF toan IF of 20 MHz The F detector down converts the 20 MHz IF signals from the test set to 100 kHz and then detects processes and digitizes
458. r deaning CRT 10 4 glass filter removing 10 4 GPIB HP IB IEEE standards 9 20 GPIB HP IB protocol 9 20 GPIB language switch 4 8 9 18 grounding power cables 9 19 H hang ups or other problems 8 103 hazardous instrument areas with power on 2 3 hazards locations of hazardous voltages 2 4 heating and cooling system 9 4 high resolution monitors 8 98 hooking up the system 9 12 9 17 how to order 5 2 HP UX systems 8 97 humidity requirements 9 3 identify a failure 4 55 IF amplifier adjustment 7 22 IF cal failed 4 75 IF count sequence 3 18 3 21 IF mixer adjustment 7 19 IF overload or O 4 77 IF search routine 3 18 IF detector data test 4 64 image problems 4 46 initialization failed 4 77 initialize disc 4 66 insertion loss cables 8 37 installation preparing the site for 9 3 preset check during 9 22 scheduling 9 2 system 9 2 instrument VA rating 9 4 instruments required for adjustments 7 9 intensity adjustments default 7 14 Index Index intensity display adjustments 7 14 interference electromagnetic radiated 9 6 intermittent problems 4 111 interpreting performance verification results 8 54 inverter board replacement 6 18 inverter board troubleshooting 4 50 inverter board A16 4 49 inverter test points 4 49 isolation omission for 8350 sources 8 101 K keyboard controls 8 12 keyboard keys 8 99 keyboard test 4 64 L laser p
459. r limit and 20 times the log of 0 minus infinity for the lower limit This is due to vector numbers adding in phase and subtracting out of phase For example if you were measuring a 60 dB band stop filter and the upper limit was 6 dB you could add 6 dB to the measurement 60 dB 6 dB 54 dB And if the lower limit was minus infinity the measurement of the filter could be considered 54 dB or less 8 104 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Performance Test Record Performance Test Record The complete system performance verification record includes the printout from the performance verification software this test record and a certificate of calibration Usethis sheet to record the results of the frequency tests You may wish to copy this sheet to retain it as a master Table 8 13 Performance Test Record Test Facility Report Number Date Date of Last System Calibration Tested By Customer Text Equipment U sed Model Number Trace Number Cal Due Date 1 Frequency Counter Ambient temperature lt Relative Humidity 96 Ambient temperature at measurement Ambient temperature at performance verification calibration lt 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 105 Performance Verification and Specifications Performance Test Record Table 8 14 Performance Test Record Test Description Minimum Results Maximum Measurement Specif
460. r messoges HP8360 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU TEST FRONT PANEL EMULATOR CHANGE HP 1B ADDRESS default is 19 RETURN TO HP8510 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU HP85102 IF DETECTOR SERVICE PROGRAM MENU ADC CONTROL TEST A19 SWEEP ADC TEST A20 ADC TEST A18 CAL DAC TEST A17 100 kHz IF AMPLIFIER TEST A10 A12 SYNCHRONOUS DETECTOR TEST A5 A7 20 MHz MIXER TEST A9 A11 A13 A14 PRETUNE PHASE LOCK TEST A22 MAIN PHASE LOCK TEST A23 IF COUNTER TEST A21 RUN ALL THE ABOVE TESTS HP85102 FRONT PANEL TEST RETURN TO 8510 SERVICE PROGRAM MENU NOTE Always check cables leading to ond from boards with suspected problems NOTE Moy fail tests 1 or 2 due to processor speed issue when running oll tests If tests 1 ond 2 pass individually then ossume the instrument is OK 8510C SERVICE PROGRAM MENU CRT 2 OF 2 AUXILLARY MENUS SYSTEM SYSTEM MENU DISPLAY FUNCTIONS HP IB ADDRESSES HP 18 CONF I GURE BEEPER ON OFF RESET IF CORRECT I ON MORE SYSTEM MORE MENU PULSE CONF IG EDIT MULT SRC SYSTEM PHASELOCK POWER LEVELING ANALOG OUT ON OFF SERVICE FUNCTIONS SERVICE FUNCTIONS MENU TEST ME NU SYSTEM BUS LOCAL REMOTE IF GAIN PEEK POKE LOCATION PEEK POKE SOF TWARE REVISION 511 MAIN SERVICE FUNCTIONS MENU LOOPING SELF TESTS SYSTEM COMMANDS 1 AS PROCES
461. raging may then be reduced for device measurement The residual systematic errors along with the random and drift errors continue to affect measurements after error correction adding an uncertainty to the measurement results Therefore measurement uncertainty is defined as the combination of the residual systematic repeatable random non repeatable and drift errors in the measurement system after error correction M easurement uncertainties of any analyzer system are highly dependent on the characteristics of the device under test The expected measurement uncertainty of your analyzer system when measuring the verification kit devices can be determined by using the performance verification software The expected measurement uncertainty of ideal terminations and thus may be determined by using the uncertainties portion of the software The following measurement uncertainty equations and system error models flowgraphs show the relationship of the systematic random and drift errors These are useful for predicting overall measurement performance 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 75 Performance Verification and Specifications Measurement Uncertainties Sources of Measurement Errors Sources of Systematic Errors Theresidual after measurement calibration systematic errors result from imperfections in the calibration standards the connector interface the interconnecting cables and the instrumentation All measurements are affected by
462. rate phase locked loops a pretune phase locked loop and a main phase locked loop The pretune phase locked loop is a narrow bandwidth synthesized high accuracy loop The main phase locked loop locks to 20 MHz and has enough bandwidth to track the fast sweeping ramp Pretune Phase Lock Sequence A pretune phase lock sequence precedes the beginning of every sweep and each band crossing Its main purpose is to generate an LO frequency about 20 MHz higher than the RF To dothis the processor computes the start frequency and all other necessary programming information That information indudes digital information for a DAC which drives the VTO the appropriate harmonic number of the VTO and a divide by N number 3 16 8510C On Site Service Manual Theory of Operation System Phase Lock Operation Figure 3 6 Simplified Pretune Phase Locked Loop Ie IF DETECTOR e TEST SET Ha THRU IF DETECTOR TO DISPLAY PROCESSOR As shown above during pretune the pretune assembly tunes the VTO by putting the S H sample and hold circuit into the track al ways mode In this mode the main phase locked loop is switched away from the phase detector to a DAC The processor chooses a VTO frequency such that a resulting VTO harmonic comb frequency is 20 MHz above the RF of the source The VTO summing amp assembly in the test set sums the pretune voltage and main lock voltage to tune the VTO to the desired frequency To confir
463. rce cable VTO cables from rear panel to switch splitter or input amplifier pe ww Y BONN EN T pe Port 1 connector or directional coupler Attenuator 1 bias tee 1 Attenuator 2 bias tee 2 Port 2 connector or directional coupler BIAS 2 b2 b2 TAPERED a2 RF IN SWITCH SPLITTER TUNE PRETUNE VTO SENSE al BIAS 1 COUPLER 1 Path la Opt 007 Good Bad HP 8517B OPTION 007 PORT 2 a2 RF IN TUNE PRETUNE SENSE al b1 BIAS 1 Good Bad PATH 3 b2 BIAS 2 Reflected TAPERED b2 b2 59 BIAS TAPERED TEE 2 PAD a2 SWITCH SPLITTER RF IN TUNE PRETUNE VTO SENSE 91 bi Path 2a Opt 007 COUPLER 1 BIAS 1 SWITCH SPLITTER Path 3b 1 Opt Good Bad 007 COUPLER 2 PATH b2 Reflected COUPLER BIAS 2 b2 a2 RF IN SWITCH SPLITTER TUNE VTO SENSE o1 b1 BIAS 1 COUPLER 1
464. rcuit Description The A15 LCD assembly is an 8 4 inch liquid crystal display LCD with associated drive circuitry It receives a 43 3 V power supply from the A14 graphics processor The display receives the following signals from the A14 digital horizontal sync digital vertical sync digital blanking data dock digital red video digital green video digital blue video The A15 LCD display includes the backlight lamp and inverter The lamp attaches to the LCD display frame but is electrically separate The backlight is powered by a separate connection to the attached backlight inverter A16 which is also electrically separate Backlight Inverter A16 is a part of the A15 LCD assembly It receives a 45 V power supply and control signals from the A14 graphics processor The control signals indude backlight intensity It outputs a high voltage used to drive the backlight lamp Troubleshooting Image Problems Thefollowing information assumes that the display is illuminated when theinstrument is turned on If the display remains dim dark or blank refer to the section LCD Failures Display Troubleshooting Procedure The display should be bright with annotations and the text should be readable This procedure allows you to check for non functioning pixels and other problems 1 Activate the default colors Press DISPLAY ADJUST DISPLAY DEFAULT SETTINGS 17 this does not correct the color problem proceed to step
465. rd Tests A5 Test 3 A7 Data Bus Most likely cause of failure A7 1 0 board failure 80 A5 processor board failure 20 A8 motherboard trace connector failure 1 A4 A14 A6 A7 trace problem 1 Additional troubleshooting hints Minimize the system remove the A6 EEPROM board and A4 A14 graphic signal processor board Rerun test 3 If removing A6 or A4 A14 appears to fix the problem suspect A4 A14 A6 and A7 Theinterrupt circuits on A7 may be faulty but only appear faulty with A6 and A4 A14 installed the main Service Functions menu press 2 2 ZMARKER to enter 8510 Service Program menu Select 85101 Display Processor Service Program and run thel O Board and Front Panel Tests A1 A2 A7 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 61 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Self Test Failures Test 4 A4 A14 Display Processor Most likely cause of failure A4 A14 graphics signal processor board failure 9096 A5 processor board failure 1096 A8 motherboard trace connector failure 196 Additional troubleshooting hints Inthe Service Functions test menu press 2 2 MARKER to enter the 8510 service program menu Select 85101 Display Processor Service Program and run display board and CRT tests A4 A11 or LCD tests A14 A15 Test 5 A4 A14 Display RAM Most likely cause of failure A4 A14 graphics signal processor board failure 9096 A4 A14 A6 A7 trace problem 5 85102 mot
466. rdware you are using C If you plan to make measurements with a custom test setup choose model numbers from this menu that most closely matches the capability of the equipment you are using d To calibrate a custom system new features in the software allow you to modify error term parameters e You can storethe error term changes in tables compute customized specifications from the new error terms then usethe tables for plots and system verification f If you plan to use hardware configuration values listed in the Hardware Configuration menu already follow the No path in the flowchart Figure 8 1 To create unique specifications for a custom system follow the Yes path in Figure 8 1 NOTE LIMITATION OF WARRANTY Agilent Technologies does not warrant the performance of systems that are customized by the user That is systems already customized at the factory as special systems are warranteed however if you customize the system at your facility the performance warranty cannot be applied 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 13 Performance Verification and Specifications How to Verify System Performance Figure 8 1 Flowchart for Selecting to Modify Specifications Run program and define Standard hardware configuration Configuration that most closely matches the special system Yes Run program and define the system hardware configuration Edit system specifications ile Select Recall File
467. re documented in separate sections Replacement Procedures Chapter 6 This section contains procedures for disassembling or re assembling the 8510C network analyzer after a part or assembly is replaced Procedures that differ depending on the display installed are documented separately Adjustments Chapter 7 This chapter contains adjustment procedures Specifications and Performance Verification Chapter 8 This chapter describes the following System performance System Performance verification Specifications Software for specifications and performance verification How to verify system performance Performing system verification Usingthe software A tutorial Operational check procedures Frequency test procedures Total system uncertainty test procedure How torun the system specifications Interpreting the specification and uncertainties printout Measurement uncertainties Sources of measurement errors Generation of system measurement uncertainties System error models Dynamic accuracy error model Measurement traceability 1 4 8510C On Site Service Manual Service and Equipment On Site Service Manual Organization Substitution of system components Calibration cyde Referenceinformation for performance verification and spedification Performance test record Installation Chapter 9 This chapter describes the following Site preparation Checkingthe shipment and unpacking the system
468. re sets the synthesizer to a step mode for a system using a synthesizer as the source Do not set the synthesizer to ramp sweep because the program will not correctly execute its commands in that mode However the program will switch the source back to the step mode Remote or Local Operation The program automatically sets the 8510 to local front panel operation whenever it expects you to press any keys on the 8510 For example this would happen when you are expected to make a measurement calibration Remote operation occurs whenever the program is controlling the 8510 over the GPIB bus System Hang Ups or Other Problems If the system or the controller will not respond during verification press LOCAL and PRESET on the 8510 and the program If a printer is connected to the system cycle the power to all the instruments including the printer 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 103 Performance Verification and Specifications Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications Test Set Channel Signal Path Specifications a1 b1 a2 b2 These specifications refer to the errors contributed by the test set from the test port through the coupler and onto the sampler down converter Thetables show values that are already included in the data sheet or system specifications Their use is limited to inspecting the flowgraph error terms that exist between the coupler or bridge and the sampler Test Set Rear Pa
469. remaining S parameter data fields and to enter the device length in cm Noticethat S11 and S22 arein linear units whileS21 and S12 arein dB 6 Press Done to display the DUT s system uncertainty Entering User Labels or Comments on Plots If desired usethe features in this software to enter your own titles or comments on plots The label you enter appears on the 374 or 4th line of the title at the top of the plot 1 Press System Uncert in the Main menu 2 Moveto User Label 1 and press Previous until the asterisk in the data field blinks 3 From the keyboard enter the label or title you want to appear on the output 4 If desired repeat the above two steps to enter User Label 2 5 Press Done when you are finished entering user labels to display the plot Entering User Labels or Comments System Verification Reports If desired use the features in this software to enter your own titles or comments on system verification reports The comment you enter appears on the test record for the selected verification kit device 1 Press Verify System in the Main menu 2 Press Select Standard 3 Moveto the Comment selection at the bottom of the screen 4 Press Previous until the asterisk in the data field blinks 5 From the keyboard enter a one line comment that you want to appear on the system verification report 6 If desired repeat the above two steps to enter a second comment line 7 Press Done when y
470. ress User 2 b2 REDEFINE PARAMETER DRIVE Port 2 PHASE LOCK a2 REDE FINE DONE to redefine b2 3 Connect an open or short to port 1 and port 2 This reflects power back to the b1 and b2 samplers through the triax bridge 4 Find the test set RF paths and example frequency response traces on this foldout Press User 1 a1 User 2 b2 User 3 a2 and User 4 b1 Each trace should be similar to the example traces on this foldout typically within 5 dB Record the results for paths 1 through 4 User 1 through User 4 in Table 4 3 3 Check RF Paths 5 and 6 These paths are RF Path 5 User 4 b1 Thru RF Path 6 User 2 b2 Thru 1 Connect a cable between port 1 and port 2 2 Press PARAMETER MENU User 4 b1 REDEFINE PARAMETER DRIVE Port 2 PHASE LOCK a2 REDEFINE DONE to observe the b1 power level trace through path 5 illustrated on this foldout The trace should be similar to the example trace typically within 5 dB Record the result for path 5 good or bad under the RF path diagram 3 Press PARAMETER MENU User 2 b2 REDEFINE PARAMETER DRIVE Port 1 PHASE LOCK a1 REDEFINE DONE to observe the b2 power level trace through path 6 illustrated on this foldout The trace should be similar to the example trace typically within 5 dB Record the result for path 6 good or bad under the RF path diagram Find the Faulty Assembly Try to match the observed results recorded under the RF path
471. rification S22 Measurement HP85I B PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION 10 11 47 10 Aug 1990 Verif Std 20 dB Attenuator Ser 943 01371 Origin 12 20 88 Vecif Kit HPB50538 3 Ser 00301 Origin 12 20 88 Analyzer HP85106 S N Test Set 515 S N Source HP83531 S N Calibration Kit HP85852D S N Calibration Technique B Test Port Cabl HPB51318 s s Comments m ssa l 22 MAGNITUDE 11n E 22 PHASE deg canse5so n ETTET gt Ea t Factory User Diff Total Factory User Diff Total Freq Meas d Mag Uncert Meas d Phase Uncert GHz fA 81 Bl Uf Bl s secs 1 500 1 01317 01115 00202 01224 91 87 98 53 6 72 N 58 38 2 000 e01503 01218 00284 01235 1 70 02 70 03 01 N 50 33 3 000 01791 01492 00299 01209 32 89 31 51 1 38 N 61 87 4 500 Q2306 01782 00523 01778 5 84 12 63 6 79 N 47 85 6 809 02290 01533 00756 01778 1 47 38 50 99 11 6 N 48 53 7 500 1 02100 01516 00584 01774 89 14 86 16 2 98 53 75 8 000 02056 01220 00836 01774 1 104 17 105 72 1 55 55 16 9 008 1 0188
472. rification and to run the specifications measurement uncertainties program Table 8 1 Equipment Required 8510C network analyzer and accessories test set source For PC based Performance Verification Laptop or PC running BASIC for Windows Rev 6 32 or greater under Windows 95 98 NT GPIB card for PCs National Instruments or Hewlett Packard PCMIA card for Laptops National Instruments For workstation based Performance Verification 9000 200 or 300 series controller except 9826 and 98169 with 4 megabytes of available memory after loading BASIC 1 megabyte memory boards are available for all 200 and 300 computers Other controllers include HP Vectra 386 with an HP 82300C BASIC language processor card UNIX based workstation with Rocky Mountain BASIC RMB Various workstations with BASIC 5 0 or higher drivers and language extensions disks uses approximately 0 6 megabytes of memory 8510 Specification Performance Verification software 08510 10033 Revision A 05 01 DOS and LIF formats Compatible printer or plotter Cables test port cables 2 coax 3 5 mm m to f Adapters 2 4 mm f to 3 5 mm f for 50 GHz system 3 5 mm f to BNC m 53151A Opt 001 10 Hz to 26 5 GHz frequency counter Calibration kit customer supplied Verification kit customer supplied Note It is not required to have the 8510 system connected to the computer controller when generating specifications or measurement un
473. rinter connections 9 20 LCD backlight 6 18 deaning 10 4 display assembly details 6 18 display test patterns 4 47 inverter board 6 18 replacement 6 16 troubleshooting 4 43 voltage 6 18 levels of troubleshooting 3 2 line voltage and fuses 9 12 load program disc 4 65 local operation 8 103 M magnitude and phase stability of cables 8 38 magnitude errors due to device frequency response 8 99 maintenance connections and connector 8 98 preventive 10 2 maintenance of system 10 2 manual overview of 1 2 manufacturer s code list 5 6 markers on uncertainty plots 8 15 maximum intensity adjustments 7 15 measurement calibration method 8 100 errors 8 3 8 75 additional 8 77 process 8 3 measurement uncertainties 8 75 comparing for verification devices 8 48 measurement uncertainty equations 8 75 memory operations 4 65 menu map of system uncertainty test procedure 8 48 mm wave systems 8 98 modification kit required 9 13 module exchange program 5 3 motherboard replacement 85101 6 14 display processor 6 14 N no IF found 4 77 operating system backing up 9 22 history 4 123 how to reload 4 67 operation after installation 9 22 local or remote 8 103 procedures 9 22 system disk backup 9 22 temperature requirements during 9 3 theory of 3 1 optional function not installed 4 78 options available 9 2 ordering parts 5 2 other test devices 8 27 overview service and equipme
474. rmation the VTO pretune line and the VTO tune line send voltages to the A3 summing amp The summing amp then drives the VTO to a frequency such that one of its A12 a1 SAMPLER ASSEMBLY HP8515A TEST SET TO A5 A7 851028 J3 a1 FROM 851028 A21 IF COUNTER 85102C TO PROCESSOR 08 12 VALID AND A14 VTO DRIVER harmonics will be sentto the test set frequency converter to produce a 20 MHz HP8515A INVALID COUNT IF from the RF source input In this case the A14 VTO Driver acts as the LO TEST SET NOTE The sampler s and the are CREER s M P 20 E also controlled by the operating system via E jou cisci 04098 COUNTS MAIN LOCK This sequence begins when the pretuned 20 MHz IF leaves the test set and enters the A14 IF Mixer board on the 85102 This board buffers the 20 MHz IF into the A21 IF counter board it also down converts the 20 MHz IF to 100 KHz On the IF Counter board the IF is counted and checked for power level if there is enough power and if the count is approximately 20 MHz the A23 main lock board will be switch in Then on the A23 board the phase detector will produce a pulse that will be integrated such that it will fine tune the VTO At this point the 20 MHz IF is phase locked the system bus and the test set HP IB board This is especially important for S parameter test sets that require switching between samplers Therefore any loss of IF or phase lock could be due to
475. rr1 Edrr2 Fac Comp Effective Dny Rng maX min port1 2 Edrx1 Edrx2 Fac Comp U sed in the corrected error model flowgraph to determine measurement uncertainty TRelated to specifications of calibration kit devices and measurement calibration techniques U sed in the corrected error model flowgraph to determine dynamic accuracy 8 84 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Measurement Uncertainties Table 8 11 Test Port Error Term Symbols Error Term Eterm Symbol Additional Information Drift Source Frequency Dsf Typical Raw Directivity Rfd Rrd Factory Raw Reflection Tracking Rfr Rff Typical Raw Source Match Rfs Rrs Factory Raw Crosstalk Rfc Rrc Factory Raw Transmission Tracking Rft Rrt Typical Raw Load Match Factory Low Freq Cutoff Source of port to 1 21 Fcs1 Fcs2 Fac Comp Low Freq Slope Source of port to 1 21 551 552 Loss dc Source to port to 1 24 Fcs1 F cs2 Typical Loss sqr F GHz Source to port to 1 21 551 Fss2 Typical Drift Mag deg c Src to port to 1 2t Dms1 Dms2 Fac Char Drift Ph deg c Srcto port to 1 21 Dps1 Dps2 Fac Char Drift Ph deg C F GHz Src to port to 1 2t Dpfs1 Dpsf2 Fac Char Connector Repeat Refl port 1 2 Crr1 Crr2 Fac Char Connector Repeat Trans port 1 2 Crt1 Crt2 Fac Char Loss dc port 1 2 Cablet Ld1c Ld2c Cust Site Loss sqr F GHz port 1 2 Cablet Lflc Lf2c Cust Site Cable M ag sta
476. rs This test is used together with the following test to verify that the attenuators in the S parameter test set are functioning Increment Active Attenuator 5 This tests the test set attenuator of the activated port selected by test 4 above by incrementing attenuation in 10 dB steps 0 to 90 dB You may be ableto hear the relays dicking as the values are changed The value of the sum of the ON green LEDs on the A5 attenuator switch driver board should equal the number indicated on the display 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 143 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Service Program Select New GPIB HP IB Address 6 This test changes the address that the 85101C will seek when performing future test set GPIB commands Remember it does not change the address of the actual test set DI P switches If you use this routine to change the 8510C test set address remember to change the switches on the test set to match the changes you make 4 144 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Service Program 8360 Service Program Menu This menu accesses the menus and corresponding functions resident in the 8360 series sources This is done by communicating with the source over the GPI B sending commands to and receiving responses from the source HP IB Test 1 This tests the communication between the 85101C GPIB interface and the 8360 source GPIB interface The 85101C sends a command to the 8360 source as
477. rvice Manual E Sb 2 gt 2 M Z JI _ 2 places Replaceable P arts 85102B Replaceable Parts E7Z EB ES E10 s J2 w55 59999 6 OO COCO 5 39 Replaceable P arts 85102B Replaceable Parts Table 5 15 85102 Cable Locations Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number W1 85102 60131 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A8J 3 A11J 3 28480 85102 60131 W2 85102 60132 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A8J 2 A9J 3 28480 85102 60132 W3 85102 60133 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A8 5 A14J 28480 85102 60133 W4 85102 60134 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A8 4 13 3 28480 85102 60134 w5 NOT ASSIGNED W6 85102 60136 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A6J 6 A5J 4 28480 85102 60136 7 85102 60137 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 5 7 4 28480 85102 60137 ws 85102 60138 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 11 2 A10J 4 28480 85102 60138 w9 85102 60139 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY AQ 1 10 3 28480 85102 60139 W10 85102 60140 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A13J 1 A10J 2 28480 85102 60140 W11 85102 60141 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 2 10 1 28480 85102 60141 W12 85102 60142 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 11 1 12 4 28480 85102 60142 W13 85102 60143 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 14 1 A12 3 28480 85102 60143 W14 85102 60144 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A13J 2 A12J 2 28480 85102 60144 W15 85102 60145 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A6J 1 A12J 1 28480 85102 60145 W16 85102 60146 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY A6J 11 A23J 2 28480 85102 60146 W17 85102 60147 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 21 3 A23J 3 2848
478. ry insert the 85102 service adjustments software disk into the controller disk drive Refer to the beginning of the chapter for a procedure on how to load BASIC Type LOAD ADJ 85102 EXECUTE When the program is loaded press RUN Pressthe softkey that selects the synchronous detector adjustment N The following prompt is displayed Adjustment on which SYNC DET module Select a softkey Press the appropriate softkey 7 Switch off the analyzer power Remove the board A5 or A7 from the 85102 and install it on the extender board Reconnect the cables as the controller display shows using adapters and extra cables provided in the service kit It is necessary only to reconnect the cables that are noted in the setup on the display 8 Switch on the analyzer power but switch on the display processor last to avoid system lockup 9 When a graticule appears on the analyzer display the instrument has finished initializing Press CONTINUE on the controller 8510C On Site Service Manual 7 25 Adjustments Procedure 7 Synchronous Detector Adjustment Figure 7 9 Location of Synchronous Detector Adjustments AA qu TAEA or fo TEST SYNCHRONOUS DETECTOR 515 ASL7 ASLU ASL6 AS5J3 A7L5 717 A7LU 6 A7J3 10 The following prompt is displayed CENTER THE CORES IN L4 amp L5 USING THE 8510 DISPLAY ADJUST L6 amp L7 FOR MINIMUM
479. s WARNING Death by electrocution is possible if both the common terminal of an autotransformer and the protective earth terminals of the 8510 system instruments are not connected to earth ground CAUTION Always use the three prong ac power cord supplied with this product Failure to ensure adequate earth grounding by not using this cord may cause product damage Verify the value of the line voltage fuses in all instruments of the system The correct fuse values are listed on the rear panel of each instrument 9 12 8510C On Site Service Manual System Installation Configuring and Connecting the System Source Compatibility Requirements If you are installing a source that is not the newest version available it must have the modification or firmware revision or both noted in thetable below for 8510 compatibility Table 9 4 Source Compatibility and Modification Kits Instrument Firmware Revision Number Modification Kit or Higher 8360 series synthesized sweeper all unnecessary 8340A synthesized sweeper all unnecessary 8340B synthesized sweeper all unnecessary 8341A synthesized sweeper all unnecessary 8341B synthesized sweeper all unnecessary 8350A sweep oscillator 6 08350 60100 8350B sweep oscillator 6 08350 60101 83522A RF plug in 6 83525 60074 83525A B RF plug in 6 83525 60074 83540A B RF plug in 6 83525 60074 83545A RF plug in 6 83525 60074 83550A RF plug in 6 83550 60041 83570A RF plug in 6 83525 60074 83572A
480. s Previous until the asterisk blinks Typein S11 0 11 thelinear value from SWR 1 25 Goto 521 press Previous until the asterisk blinks Type in 20 dB for S21 f GotoS12 press Previous until the asterisk blinks Typein S12 20 dB g Goto S22 press Previous until the asterisk blinks 522 0 11 the linear value h Enter the device length as 3 cm i Press Done to display the uncertainty plot Use the marker to read the uncertainty values when 521 is 20 dB Using the marker what arethe at 0 045 GHz to 2 GHz 0 065 dB uncertainty uncertainty values when 521 is 20 dB for the different frequency at 2 0 GHz to 8 0 GHz 0 077 dB uncertainty ranges at 8 0 GHz to 20 GHz 0 111 dB uncertainty at 20 GHz to 26 5 GHz 0 129 dB uncertainty 8 34 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Operational Check Procedures Operational Check Procedures The following operational checks are highly recommended but not required The assessment of the system operating environment and the functional operation of the system components help identify faulty equipment CAUTION Use antistatic work surface and wrist strap to lessen the chance of electrostatic discharge Environment and Device Temperature Check 1 Measure the temperature and humidity of the environment and write the values on the test record located at the end of this chapter The
481. s that result from 12 of the most probable failures ifthe observed results match a group of results in the table investigate the most probable cause given in the table f all the paths are good then the test set is probably working properly Return to the Main Troubleshooting Procedure to continue troubleshooting the system If the observed results do not match any of those given in the table re evaluate and possibly re measure your observed data If the data is valid troubleshoot using the RF path diagram s given in this foldout for the bad signal traces Most Probable Failure 55222215 Source source cable VTO cables from rear panel to switch splitter 3 BENE DES emm Port 1 connector or directional coupler Port 2 connector or directional coupler B Bad REF 21 0 leg MAG 10 0 dB V a2 229 hp MARKER 0 0 L GHz START STOP 045000000 GHz 0 200000 GHz b2 a2 RF IN TUNE PRETUNE VTO SENSE al TAPERED PAD al 59 X COUPLER SWITCH SPLITTER COUPLER X b1 Good Bad HP 8514B OPT 002 003 hg 2 MARKER 1 GHz i
482. s for Factory Test System PORT IDENTIFICATION With the device label Port 1 is on FREQ MAG GHz db 045 19 722 1 000 19 715 2 000 19 724 4 000 19 751 9 000 19 812 10 000 19 852 12 000 19 904 16 000 20 018 18 000 20 087 20 000 20 159 22 000 20 237 26 000 20 408 30 000 20 575 34 000 20 737 36 000 20 820 38 000 20 884 40 000 20 918 FREQ GHz lin C 045 5 00476 1 006 5 00425 2 0007 00370 4 000 09705 8 000 00915 10 000 01207 12 000 01532 16 000 01269 18 000 00936 20 000 00900 22 000 01771 26 000 03423 30 000 03759 34 000 01749 36 000 00621 38 000 01084 40 000 01603 521 deg 140 71 49 043 27 54 043 54 92 043 109 56 071 140 86 072 86 23 070 31 62 970 77 59 070 132 07 136 47 49 180 5 89 T j eee dec UNC ANG deg 174 44 166 41 00378 5 145 19 00378 107 29 00759 15 01 00760 121 83 00761 56 81 00760 133 19 00759 164 95 00758 62 63 00768 6 69 00797 78 00 00797 150 38 00786 137 40 00781 70 85 00802 767 46 00814 29 87 1 No 2803A00356 facing the user 82 149 133 93 18 88 Note Uncertainties for frequency data points below 500 Mhz do not apply when used with 8512 or 8514 test sets 62 100 00 92 180 00 57 180 00 85 180 00 76 180 00 05 59 94 82 45 14 21 52 00 61 190 00 13 180 00 31 42 11 85 20 55 69 19 28 5 38 45 46 100 00 23 180 00 02 180 00
483. s will verify it to a 9596 confidence level Run all thetests in the 85101 Display Processor Service Program M enu on page 4 131 If a service program test fails follow the instructions in the Service Program section If all the tests pass the problem is almost certainly in one of the remaining instruments the 85102 I F detector the source or the test set or their interfaces Verify the 85102 I F Detector Next run the all the 85102 IF Detector tests in the service program This verifies the IF detector to 80 confidence level 4 20 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Troubleshooting Outline Abbreviated 8510C System Service Flowchart cont NO OBVIOUS FAILURE TYPE Verify the 85101C Display Processor Disconnect all peripherals and their cables Leave only the network analyzer test set and source connected Run all the service program tests in the 85101 Display Processor Service Program Menu If all the service programs pass the problem is almost certainly in the 85102 IF Detector the source or the test set or interfaces Verify the 85102B IF Detector Run all the 85102 IF Detector tests in the service program ss422c 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 21 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Troubleshooting Outline Hardware Emulator Tools Now that you know with a high degree of confidence that both halves of the network analyzer are working the next step is to
484. se 8 100 random 8 4 running error messages 4 6 4 69 sources of additional measurement 8 77 drift 8 4 8 77 measurement 8 76 random 8 76 systematic 8 76 systematic 8 4 test port example printout 8 62 what to do 4 52 Etm 8 80 Etp 8 81 exchange assemblies 5 2 extender board part number 7 22 extension cables for rear panel 9 17 extension cables for the rear panel 8 104 extension files for semi automatedadjustments 7 4 failure A14 GSP 4 44 A15 LCD 4 43 performance test 4 6 power supply 4 6 4 97 self test 4 4 software 4 6 4 121 unratioed power 4 6 failure during adjustment 7 2 failure check system bus configuration 4 75 failure fault indicator on 4 75 failure overmodulation 4 75 failure RF locked 4 75 failure self test failure 4 75 fan voltages 4 111 faulty display 4 47 faulty pixel 4 47 files needed for adjustments 7 4 firmware revisions 4 12 4 122 of source 9 13 flange attachments to analyzer 9 14 flowgraphs corrected error model 8 93 dynamic accuracy 8 93 system uncorrected error model 8 86 focus adjustment 7 10 frequency converter test sets 3 5 frequency test description 8 5 procedures 8 42 front panel local operation 8 103 front panel checks 4 8 FTZ German emissions requirements 2 6 fuses 5 8 9 12 A26 rectifier fuse locations 4 113 A3 post regulator 4 109 removing line fuse 4 103 G gain adjustment for sweep ADC 7 16 glass filte
485. service program tests 8 A22 and 9 A23 Check test set line power and fuses Check IF test set interconnect cable Refer to U nratioed Power Failures to check operation of the test set Pulse Cal Failure On Test R eference Channel s or Both Channels This error message reports a failure detected in the pulsed RF circuitry Probable cause of failure 85102 A6 clock board for both channels only 85102 A2 multiplexer board 85102 4 A14 test and reference channel detector boards 85102 A16 sample and hold board Source GPIB HP IB Syntax Error The source does not respond to a known good GPIB command Probable cause of failure Source GPIB assembly 85101 A71 O assembly GPIB portion GPIB cable between the source and 85101C Troubleshooting Run 85101C service program test 2 A7 1 tests Source Sweep Sync Error The 8510C is not synchronized with the source Specifically the 85102 A20 sweep ADC is not properly tracking the 0 to 10 volt ramp from the source Probable cause of failure 85102 A20 sweep ADC Stop sweep or sweep output cables not connected Defective source Troubleshooting Run 85102 service program tests in the Run All mode Run 85102 service program test 2 A20 Check all cabling Refer to Chapter 9 System Installation particularly noting the stop sweep and sweep in out connections Refer to Unratioed Power Failures to check source operation Usethetr
486. shows the difference between step and ramp sweep modes An example of a full band measurement at 1MHz per division is shown in the figure below 13 Measurethe trace variation with the 1 MHz per division scale Record the results on the test record located at the end of this chapter 8 13 Typical Ramp Sweep Frequency Accuracy For 8340 41 Series Synthesizers 14 On the synthesizer press CAL MORE TRIM SWEEP and adjust the front panel knob to position the highest frequency bandswitch transition point on the reference line Refer to the figure below Record the maximum trace variation on the test record located at the end of this chapter Figure 8 14 Typical Trace Variation for 8340 41 Swept Frequency Accuracy ORST SWEPT FREQUENCY ACCURACY rz MHz HERE START 9 0450009009 GHz STOP 25 500000900 GHz In Case of Difficulty If the measured values do not meet the specifications listed on the test record refer tothe source manual for adjustment and troubleshooting instructions 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 47 Performance Verification and Specifications Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure Thefigure below shows a menu map of the performance verification program Step by step instructions follow Figure 8 15 START LOAD BASIC LOAD SPECS 8510 RUN PROGRAM ENTER DATE AND TIME HARDWARE CONFIGURATION MENU SELECT
487. splay Then release the ZMARKER key Press and release the key again and the Test Menu will appear Disc Command 19 Load Program Disc can now be used to reload the operating system If it does not solve the problem contact an Agilent customer engineer for assistance 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 67 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Self Test Failures This pageintentionally left blank 4 68 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Running Error Messages Running Error Messages Running Error Messages as Built In Diagnostics Running error messages appear on the 8510C display whenever the 85101C CPU detects an error during normal operation As a built in diagnostic test the CPU is constantly monitoring the overall system operation especially that of the phaselock between the 85102 IF detector the test set and the source Internal firmware routines are constantly checking power levels phase relationships frequency changes operator commands and so forth A message is displayed on the LCD CRT whenever the CPU detects a fault other words running error messages inform you of any detected faults whilethe system is running When an error is detected and a running error message is displayed the system will usually continue running making measurements At this time the system has already passed the power on self test diagnostics Therefore it is unlikely that a running error message in
488. stematic error terms without measurement calibration including the drift connector and cable error terms The symbol for the error terms that is used in the system error model located later in this chapter Refer to the system error model later in this chapter for the association of the error terms with the system error flow graph 8510C On Site Service Manual Example 8 7 Performance Verification and Specifications Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts Raw B1Channel Errors System Specifications Channel Errors Correction OFF Network Analyzer Test Set Source Calibration Kit Calibration Technique Test Port Cables HP8510B Enhanced Model 85168003 2 4mm S Parameter 4SMHz 4 GHz HPB3GX016 836X amp 8516 Synth 10MHz 40GHz HPBS SBA 2 4mm Slotless Standard Grade SL Sliding Load Cal HP851330 pair short cables 2 4mm 2 4mm NOTES tEterm Frequency GHz Description Of Error Tern Symbl 045 2 2 20 29 35 40 low Freq Cutoff portl to GHz 350 358 low Frey Slope port to dB Fslbl 6 00 6 00 EE S uqaqa EE Drift Mag deg c port to BI dB iDmtb 0402 0402 0493 0403 deg 0p b 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 e 0000 9 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Drift Ph deg c port to BI Drift Ph deg c F ghz nt B Loss Ne morti to convertor Bl 1 Loss sqr F
489. stics and troubleshooting Refer to Display Test Patterns on page 4 47 in the LCD Failures section for more information Softkey Label Alignment Pattern 8 This is a screen test pattern used to vertically align the display to the softkey positions This test is for CRT displays only and does not apply to LCDs 4 136 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Service Program 85101 Nonvolatile Memory Board A6 Tests CAUTION These tests require initialization of the EEPROMs on the A6 EEPROM board This procedure erases parts of the operating system The operating system MUST be reloaded after thesetests are completed Do not run these tests unless you are sure they are required for service and unless you can reload your operating system from disk when finished Password Entry When the A6 EEPROM board test menu is selected from the 85101 Display P rocessor Service Program menu a message is displayed that requires a password to allow access to these tests The password is 8515 The purpose of the password is to ensure that these destructive tests are not run by accident Initialize Memory Board 1 This routine is used to initialize a new or repaired A6 EEPROM board prior to loading the operating system It must be done at least once to an A6 board or the assembly will not function This test should not be used for any other reason because it will erase the operating system code in that area of mem
490. sts in the Run All mode 2 If the Sync Detector test fails the following message will appear on the display Failed SYNC DETECTOR TEST Sample and hold line has no output Check sample and hold A17 Check output amplifier on sync detector board A7 If this message appears as is or if it indicates the A5 board instead of A7 continue with the steps below another test failed with another message refer to the information in Service Program for that test If no tests fail do not continue with this test 3 Run the 85102 Service Program test 4 cal DAC test A17 and the LCD CRT should display Passed If it does not indicate Passed you should suspect the A17 cal DAC assembly and not the A5 or A7 boards 4 To determine which board is defective sync detector A5 and A7 or Cal Dac 17 reverse the inputs to A17 as follows Swap cables 1 and J 3 Swap cables J 2 and J 4 This exchange of cables means that the A5 or A7 board inputs to A17 are exchanged Remember that the A5 and A7 boards are electrically and mechanically the same 5 Run 85102 service program test 6 Synchronous Detector Test A5 A7 If the display prompt indicates the same sync detector board A5 or A7 that was in the first failure message it means that the A17 board is defective If the display prompt indicates that the other sync detector board is the problem it means that the first sync detector is defective 4 76 8510C On Site Service M
491. system measurements Therefore when your analyzer system is verified through the performance of the Total System Uncertainty Test Procedure a measurement traceability path is established Figure 8 19 shows the traceability path for the calibration and verification standards 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 93 Performance Verification and Specifications Measurement Uncertainties Figure 8 19 National Institute of Standards Technology Traceability Path for 8510 System Calibration and Verification Standards MICROWAVE NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF THEORY STANDARDS TECHNOLOGY NIST MECHANICAL STANDARD GAGES RESISTOR DC RESISTANCE HEWLETT PACKARD STANDARDS LAB SELECTED VERIFICATION DEVICES PRODUCTION SERVICE CENTER PROCESS CONTROL VERIFICATION KIT TEST SYSTEM VERIFICATION CALIBRATION KITS KITS Substitution of System Components All Agilent components that are specified for an 8510 system provide a top quality system product that ensures good measurements The performance verification can be performed with 8510 system components other than those manufactured by Agilent However when the components used are not part of a specified 8510 system the measurement integrity can be compromised Source Substitution Sources other than those listed in the source compatibility table in the System Installation chapter are not compatible with the 8510 system communication Therefore there c
492. t A10W1 Refer to Figure 4 15 Turn off the 85101C and disconnect cable A10W1 from the post regulator Turn on the 85101C fthered LED goes out after removing A10W1 the 5 V digital supply in 10 is verified The problem is probably in the A3 post regulator or one of the assemblies obtaining power from it Refer to Check the A10 Preregulator and Related Assemblies to verify that the inputs to A3 and associated assemblies are correct fthered LED is still on or flashing after removing A10WT1 the problem is probably the A10 preregulator or the 5 V digital supply Replace the A10 preregulator NOTE An 85101 with an LCD does not have W1 or 4 A10 A10W1 A10W2 are the same both CRT and LCD designs See Figure 5 12 on page 5 25 for a top view of an 85101C equipped with an LCD Figure 4 15 Location of 85101C Cables and Board Assemblies CRT Only A10 PREREGULATOR A10W2 A10W1 W1 A3 POST REGULATOR GSP 5 CPU EEPROM A7 1 0 1 4 104 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure 85101C Display Processor Power Supply Troubleshooting Check the A10 Preregulator and Related Assemblies Thefollowing paragraphs systematically check the assemblies to find the bad one Measure the voltages on A10W1 and at 1 Turn off the 85101 and put the post regulator on an extender board See Figure 4 16
493. t display two cycles of the 20 Hz sine wave then suspect the 85102 A17 A18 or A19 boards Perform all of the possible tests for these boards to isolate the failure Source Emulator Tripler Test This test uses a source emulator in place of the source to verify system operation when the source is suspected of having a fault A 60 MHz signal is injected into the test set to emulate the source The tripler is a 60 MHz bandpass filter specially designed for the 8510 It operates by passing the third harmonic of the 85102 20 MHz output signal tothe test set However almost any source that has a 60 MHz signal can be used The 60 MHz bandpass filter is listed in Chapter 5 Replaceable Parts Procedure 1 Connect the 60 MHz bandpass filter to the 85102 20 MHz out BNC connector Then connect a flexible RF cable from the filter to the test set rear panel RF input connector Press INSTRUMENT STATE RECALL MORE FACTORY PRESET After the system has done a factory preset change the source GPIB address to 31 Press AUXILIARY MENUS SYSTEM HP IB ADDRESSES SOURCE 1 Then press 31 x1 2 Press INSTRUMENT STATE RECALL MORE FACTORY PRESET MENUS MARKER STIMULUS CENTER 60 M u STIMULUS SPAN 100 k m STIMULUS MENU STEP to set the displayed frequency to 60 MHz Press PARAMETER MENU USER 1 a1 RESPONSE SCALE 20 x1 to observe the user a1 parameter TheLCD CRT should display a trace at the marker value of approximately
494. t is capable of generating a 1 5 V p p sine wave at approximately 20 Hz Running error messages displayed when these boards fail are included below ADC Cal Failed ADC Not Responding IF Cal Failed Sweep Time Too Fast Procedure 1 Remove the 85102 IF detector top cover Then remove all four snap on RF cables from 17 1 2 3 and J 4 2 Use an external signal generator to inject an approximate 1 5 V 20 Hz sine wave into 17 1 You can also use 50 60 Hz if your signal generator is not capable of producing 20 Hz 3 On the 8510 press INSTRUMENT STATE RECALL MORE FACTORY PRESET Set both start and stop frequencies to 500 MHz 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 125 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Other Failures 4 Set one of the A17 assembly multiplex inputs by pressing the following keys PARAMETER MENU and then select the appropriate USER 1 4 keys as follows beginning with User 1 USER 1 a1 softkey for A17 or J 4 USER 2 b2 softkey for A17 1 or J 2 USER 3 a2 softkey for A17 10r J 2 USER 4 b1 softkey for A17 1 or J 2 Press FORMAT MENU and select one of the following REAL softkey for A17 2 or J 4 IMAGINARY softkey for A17 1 or J 5 Press STIMULUS MENU MORE SINGLE 6 Press RESPONSE AUTO 7 The 8510C LCD CRT should display two cydes of the 20 Hz sine wave 8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 of the procedure for each of the A17 inputs J 2 J and J 4 Ifthe LCD CRT does no
495. t the cable end must be significantly higher in performance than the cable under test See Figure 8 7 for an example of a return loss measurement Refer to the cable manual to see if the cable meets the return loss specification 8 36 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Operational Check Procedures Figure 8 7 Return Loss Measurement of Cables EL START 124598275 GHz 43 999993478 STOP Ghz Good Cable Bad Cable Insertion Loss of Cables 1 Replace the load with a short 2 To measure the insertion loss of the cable over the entire specified band press MARKER turn the front panel knob and look for the worst case measurement Power holes 20 5 dB indicate a bad cable See Figure 8 8 for example insertion loss measurements of a good and a bad cable Refer tothe cable manual to seeif the cable you are measuring meets its insertion loss specification In this S11 measurement the displayed trace results from energy being propagated down the cable and reflected back from the short Therefore the correct insertion loss is approximately the measured value divided by 2 one way path loss of the cable NOTE It is normal for the data trace to have a roll off toward the high end of the frequency range Figure 8 8 Insertion Loss Measurements of Cables log MAG s log MAG e a 1 Re 5 9563 CINSERTION LOSS Div
496. te Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Error Terms 5 Select the reverse direction E terms and print them out 6 Perform the appropriate measurement calibration 2 port for a system with an S parameter test set one path 2 port for a transmission reflection test set 7 Select the verification program with the vERIFY SYSTEM selection Select DISPLAY ETERM to display the error terms 8 On the printouts you made in steps 4 and 5 find the column of raw error terms Use these raw error term figures to compare to the displayed E terms 9 Select each E term and compare the display trace to the raw specifications in the corresponding printouts Use the 8510 marker to read the trace values If thetrace values are close to or better than the specified values this is a normal situation If the trace value is significantly worse than the specified value first suspect the calibration Recalibrate and display the E terms again If this does not solve the problem the fault is in the cables or calibration devices the test set or the source Try substituting cables and calibration devices If the problem still exists after another recalibration refer tothe section Unratioed Power Failures on page 4 85 NOTE If you cannot solve the problem save the results of this entire procedure and contact an Agilent customer engineer 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 153 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Error Terms Error Term Descri
497. tem 3 Do this to every capacitor terminal Figure 6 7 3 placesX8 places 00 0000 O o o o o Oo ej 6 24 8510C On Site Service Manual Replacement Procedures 85102B Replacement Procedures To Disassemble Refer to Figure 6 8 for this portion of the procedure 1 From the side of the rectifier board remove the two clear plastic safety covers Pull the top one off using the black handle Remove the four plastic screws to remove the lower cover 2 Disconnec the wire harness from the rectifier board 3 Using a 1 4 in nut driver remove the eight hex nuts from the rectifier board item 1 Refer to Figure 6 7 for the rest of this procedure 4 Turn the instrument over Remove the eight rectifier board screws item 1 from the motherboard The rectifier board can now be removed from the instrument To Reassemble 5 Reverse steps 1 through 4 Hand tighten the plastic screws in step 1 Torque all other screws to 79 N cm 7 in Ib Figure 6 8 RA pe oes PALE wa V TESI dor DERE 15174 Ba Pi aS rome 17 VUES a NN UN x sumi A 8510C On Site Service Manual 6 25 Replacement P rocedures 85102B Replacement Procedures Power Supply Capacitor Replacement C1 C2 C3 and C4 Tools Required Large Pozidrive screwdriver Insulated clip leads 2 T 15 Torx screwdri ver WARNING Even with th
498. tem add uncertainty to the measured results This uncertainty defines how accurately a device under test DUT can be measured Network analysis measurement errors can be separated into two types raw and residual raw error terms are the errors associated with the uncorrected system that are called systematic repeatable random non repeatable and drift errors The residual error terms are the errors that remain after a measurement calibration The error correction procedure also called measurement calibration measures a set of calibration devices with known characteristics It uses the measurement results to effectively remove systematic errors using the vector math capabilities of the analyzer residual systematic errors remain after error correction primarily due to the limitations of how accurately the electrical characteristics of the calibration devices can be defined and determined The random non repeatable and drift errors cannot be corrected because they cannot be quantified and measured during the measurement calibration and device measurement H owever the effects of random errors can be reduced through averaging Random errors that occur during a measurement calibration are part of the error correction and become systematic errors when the calibration is turned on For this reason it is best to use a large number of averages during measurement calibration to reduce tothe effect of the random errors The ave
499. test for thetest set A4 board Check the cabling and the addresses on all instruments Check the 8510C addresses Press AUXILIARY MENUS SYSTEM HP IB ADDRESSES System Bus SRQ Error The 8510C system bus SRQ line is stuck and is not responding Probable cause of failure Test set A4 GPIB assembly Source GPIB assembly 85101C A71 O assembly GPIB circuitry of any peripheral on the bus Bad GPIB cable or connector 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 81 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Running Error Messages Troubleshooting Run 8510C Service program test 2 A7 Run the service program test for the test set A4 GPIB board Check all GPIB cables and all addresses Test Set GPIB HP IB Syntax Error Thetest set does not respond to a known good GPIB command Probable cause of failure Test set A4 GPIB assembly e 85101 A71 O assembly GPIB portion GPIB cable between the test set and the 85101C Troubleshooting Run 85101C service program test 2 A7 e Run the service program test for the test set A4 GPIB board Check all cables Unable to Lock to Ext 10 MHz Ref The 10 MHz external input to the 85102 A6 clock assembly is more than 4500 Hz off frequency Thelevel should be gt 0 dBm If the external input is off frequency or is less than 0 dBm the A6 assembly sets the LIF SRQ low alerting the CPU tothe unlocked condition This message is not applicable unless you arelocking to an external source such as in an
500. th diagram s given in this foldout for the bad signal traces Most Probable Failure Test set is not the problem Source source cable VTO doubler cables from rear panel to switch splitter Switch splitter Switch splitter Port 1 connector or directional coupler Port 2 connector or directional coupler leg MAG REF 30 0 dB 10 0 dB hg REFERENCE VALUE 30 0 dB START 0 045020900 GHz STOP 40 000000000 GHz PATH 1 al b2 TAPERED PAD 2 X Ad COUPLER a2 RF IN SWITCH SPLITTER TUNE PRETUNE VTO SENSE at COUPLER b1 Good Bad EH tag MAG REF 30 0 dB 10 0 dB 7 REFERENCE VALLE 40 0 dB leg MAG REF 30 0 dB 10 0 dB HP 8516A 002 003 REF 30 0 dB 10 8 log MAG START 0 045000000 GHz 40 000000900 GHz PATH 2 a2 b2 TAPERED PAD a2 DOUBLER RF i LI TUNE VTO SENSE al COUPLER SWITCH SPUTTER COUPLER b1 Good Bad Fr REFERENCE VALLE Ferries PACE TER ane is START 9 045000000 GHz START 0 0450
501. th traces supplied in this section As each of the six RF signal paths are checked you will record the results in a table The most probable cause of failure is listed according to which RF signal path or paths are incorrect Definition of Terms The following terms are explained in greater detail in the Operating and Programming Manual included with the 8510C documentation User 1 2 3 and 4 These are user defined parameters and allow measurement of unratioed power at the first frequency converter inputs for each of the reference and test signal paths Therefore the displayed frequency response of a user parameter is the combined test set sampler IF output response of 1 the source RF signal at the first converter input and 2 the test set VTO local oscillator signal The paths are initially defined as follows and will be redefined during this procedure User 1 al User 2 b2 User a2 User 4 1 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 85 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Unratioed Power Failures RF Signal Paths There are only four user parameters However in this procedure you will redefine parameters to display thelF frequency responses from six possible RF signal paths in the test set Table 4 8 shows the relationship between the RF signal path path definition and redefined user parameter as used in this procedure Table4 8 RF Signal Paths and User Parameters RF Path Path Description Redefined User Parameter Drive Phas
502. the IF bandwidth High level noise or jitter of the trace data is due to the noise floor and the phase noise of the LO source inside the test set Connector repeatability is the random variation encountered when connecting a pair of RF connectors Variations in both reflection and transmission can be observed 8 76 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Measurement Uncertainties Thelisting below shows the abbreviations used for random errors in the error models and uncertainty equations Rnt raw noise on trace rms Rnf raw noise on floor rms e Crrl port 1 connector reflection repeatability error e port 1 connector transmission repeatability error Crr2 port 2 connector reflection repeatability error e Crt2 port 2 connector transmission repeatability error Sources of Drift Errors Drift has two categories frequency drift of the signal source and instrumentation drift Instrumentation drift affects the magnitude and phase of both reflection and transmission measurements The primary causes for instrumentation drift are the thermal expansion characteristics of the interconnecting cables within the test set and the conversion stability of the microwave frequency converter Thelist below shows the drift errors in the error models and uncertainty equations Dmxbx Dmsax drift magnitude Dpxbx Dpsax drift phase Dpfxbx Dpfsax drift phase f Sources of Additiona
503. the analyzer and put the source into step mode On the network analyz er press INSTRUMENT STATE MORE FACTORY PRESET STIMULUS MENU STEP To examine the four sampler IF signals it is necessary to redefine what port and sampler the analyzer uses for phaselock Press PARAMETER MENU User 3 a2 REDEFINE PARAMETER DRIVE Port 2 PHASE LOCK a2 REDEFINE DONE to redefine a2 Press User 2 b2 REDEFINE PARAMETER DRIVE Port 2 PHASE LOCK a2 REDE FINE DONE to redefine b2 Connect an open or short to port 1 and port 2 This reflects power back to the b1 and b2 samplers through the coupler Find the test set RF paths and example frequency response traces on this foldout Press User 1 a1 User 2 b2 User 3 a2 and User 4 b1 Each trace should be similar to the example traces on this foldout typically within 5 dB Record the results for paths 1 through 4 User 1 through User 4 in Table 4 3 3 Check RF Paths 5 and 6 These paths are RF Path 5 RF Path 6 1 2 User 4 b1 Thru User 2 b2 Thru Connect a cable between port 1 and port 2 Press PARAMETER User 4 b1 REDEFINE PARAMETER DRIVE Port 2 PHASE LOCK a2 REDEFINE DONE to observe the b1 power level trace through path 5 illustrated on this foldout The trace should be similar to the example trace typically within 5 dB Record the result for path 5 good or bad under the RF path diagram Press PARAMETER MENU
504. the cable stability errors and system drift errors are excluded System instruments selected in the hardware configuration menu Time and date the plot was made Data trace patterns for each frequency band DUT length is assumed to be 10 cm the DUT length for the data sheet values and for systems using sweepers is cm For reflection plots 11 or 522 the values of the other three S parameters will be 0 linear For transmission plots S21 or 512 11 and 522 0 linear and 521 512 8 67 Performance Verification and Specifications Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts Example 8 12 511 Uncertainty Specifications Table BRA 511 UPPER WORST CASE UNCERTAINTY SPECIFICATIONS 17 Nov 1990 13 13 58 800 512 800 522 0 9 Device Length 10 0 LU HP8510C Calor Model Test Set HPBSI7A 2 4mm S Parameter 45 2 506 2 Seurce HPB3BSI Synthesizer 45 50 06 2 Calibration Kit 505 2 4mm 5lotless Standard Grade Calibration Technique SL Sliding Load Cal Test Port Cables HP8S133F pair short cables 2 4an 2 4mm Ref i 045 2 2 20 20 40 40 50 Lin Mag Lin Deg Mag Lin Deg Mag Lin Mag Lin Deg 6 060 008554 190 000 010070 180 008 015344 180 000 022174 180 008 008598 10 025 010172 12 6 0 016531 20 899 022424 28 656 100 898709 113 010354 812 016851 11 292 022848 15 216 5 6 4150 0
505. the following cautions are displayed on the analyzer CAUTION SYSTEM BUS ADDRESS ERROR and CAUTION VTO FAILURE Both error messages may be safely ignored The 85102 IF detector adjustments are independent of one another You only need to do the adjustment procedure associated with the module that has been replaced 7 2 8510C On Site Service Manual Adjustments Safety Considerations Safety Considerations This instrument is designed according to international safety standards However this manual contains information cautions and warnings that must followed to insure safe operation Service and adjustments should be done only by qualified service personnel WARNING Adjustments in this chapter are done with power supplied to the instrument and protective covers removed There are voltages at many points in the instrument that can if contacted cause personal injury Adjustments should be done only by trained service personnel WARNING Before removing or installing any assembly or printed circuit board in the 85101C or 85102 remove the power cord from the rear panel WARNING Capacitors inside the instrument may still contain a charge even if the instrument is disconnected from its source of supply Use a non metallic adjustment tool whenever possible Equipment Required Table 7 4 lists the equipment required for the adjustment procedures All recommended equipment refers to Agilent model or part numbers unless
506. the power supply voltages are at their required levels the PWON low to high signal transition resets the processor the GPIB chip and a data latch on the A3 summing amp board Resetting the processor initiates a test set self test program that checks the integrity of the ROM and RAM located on the A4 board Resetting this data latch turns on all of the samplers in the test set The general effect of PWON is to put the test set in a default state at the time of power on This allows the test set to function even if the A4 GPIB board is defective or if there is no communication between the 85101 and the test set Test Set Typical RF Path TheRF signal from the source enters the test set through the RF IN connector on the rear panel seeFigure 3 3 TheRF is then applied tothe switch splitter a combination of two power splitters and a solid state switch This switch selects the power splitter to be used and thereby selects the port that will receive incident RF power 3 6 8510C On Site Service Manual Theory of Operation Test Sets Figure 3 3 RF Signal Path Thru Sampler Test Set for Forward Transmission Measurement S21 BIAS 2 ego 4 gue ees a2 0 60dB ATTEN SWITCH SPLITTER RF IN TUNE 60dB PRETUNE ATTEN VIO SENSE m COUPLER 1 b1 BIAS 1 For the forward transmission measurement S21 b2 a1 the RF signal path is as follows Thesource RF signal is input tothetest set and separated by the switch splitter
507. the shipping forms tothe original system purchase order Keep the shipping containers in one area and do not unpack them until all the instruments are delivered As you unpack the system components compare the serial numbers on the shipping forms to the serial numbers on the instruments Unpacking the System If any container or instrument is damaged or incomplete save the packing materials and notify both the carrier and Agilent See Contacting Agilent on page iii WARNING Some of the instruments are heavy and can cause injury Unpack them on the floor and handle them carefully When you unpack the 8510 check that you have received the accessories illustrated in Figure 9 1 8510C On Site Service Manual 9 7 System Installation Checking the Shipment and Unpacking the System Figure 9 1 Accessories Supplied O 0 TEST SETS ON SITE amp ACCESSORIES SERVICE MANUAL OPERATING AND KEYWORD PROGRAMMING DICTIONARY MANUAL ss444c 1 GPIB Cable 9 85102 Adjustments Software Disk 2 IF Display Interconnect Cable 10 Specifications and Performance Verification Disk 3 Power Cables 2 11 Software Toolkit Disk 4 BNC Cables 2 12 Operating and Programming M anual 5 RS 232 Cable 13 Keyword Dictionary 6 External Display Cable for CRT only 14 Test Sets and Accessories Binder 7 Operating System Disk 15 On Site Service Manual 8 Master Calibration Data Disk 16 Pocket Q
508. the specifications performance verification software calculates the total measurement uncertainty of different systems This allows you to print out the specifications for your system configuration Refer to How to Run the System Specifications and Uncertainties Program in this chapter to determine the system performance of your 8510 system To verify this calculated system performance refer to How to Verify System Performance Systematic Errors These errors result from imperfections in the calibration standards connector standards and interface interconnecting cables and instrumentation M easurement calibration can reduce systematic errors Random Errors These non repeatable errors are due to trace noise noise floor cable repeatability and connector repeatability They affect both transmission and reflection measurements Measurement calibration does not correct random errors Drift Errors These errors result from frequency drift and instrumentation drift They affect both transmission and reflection measurements Instrumentation drift is primarily temperature rel ated Measurement calibration does not correct drift errors 8 4 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications System Performance Verification System Performance Verification Performance verification is a process that verifies that the overall system is making measurements within the expected total measurement uncertainties The
509. the specified frequency G n 7 Place a marker on the largest deflection that goes above and below the reference line and is within the specified frequency range See Figure 8 9 for example plots of this measurement Press MARKER MARKER 2 turn the front panel knob In this S11 measurement the displayed trace results from energy being propagated down the cable and reflected back from the short Therefore the measured deflection value must be divided in half to reach the correct value Refer to the cable manual to see if the cable meets the magnitude and phase stability specifications 8 38 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verification and Specifications Operational Check Procedures Figure 8 9 Cable Magnitude and Phase Stability S14 log MAG S REF 0 0 REF 1 0 02 24 75 INCH 5 V 0 0109 9 1592 GORE 5 GHZ TEST PORT CABLE gt CHP PNX85133 F MS MAG PHASE STABILITY 92 DEG BEND C A MARKER 1 5 49 625934644 GHz Cable Connector Repeatability 1 To measure the cable connector repeatability connect a broadband termination at the end of the cable NOTE The connector repeatability specification that the specifications performance verification software computes is not related to this check It is determined from the same connector type as the calibration kit devices 2 Press the following keys on the analyzer CHANNEL 1 DISPLAY SINGLE CHANNEL DATA
510. them The display processor compares the transmitted or reflected signal tothe reference signal It performs all of the math operations on the digitized signals and displays them The display processor also coordinates the actions of the system instruments It is the system controller 8510C On Site Service Manual 3 3 Theory of Operation Sources 7 Sources The system source provides an RF stimulus over the desired frequency range and power level as set by the 8510 Most sources cover their full frequency range in several bands because the individual oscillators are limited in frequency range Low frequency and higher frequency osdillators are used alone and mixed to produce the entire frequency range In the figure below the source uses two oscillators for a frequency range of 10 MHz to 7 5 GHz Oscillators with different frequency ranges and multipliers are also used to cover different frequency ranges Figure 3 2 Source Covering Frequency Range in Two Bands LOW BAND 10MHz TO 24GHz RT 10MHz to 2 1GHz HIGH BAND d 2GHz TO 7 5GHz ae a The source lets the 8510 know its frequency over digital interconnect lines It starts and stops its frequency sweeps in response to commands from the 8510 As explained below the system can use a synthesized sweeper a sweep oscillator or both as a source Synthesized Sweepers Synthesized sweepers or synthesizers achieve fre
511. this error accompanied by a Source Sweep Sync error message Troubleshooting Check the RF source to test set cable Run the 85102 service program in the Run All mode Run 85101C service program test 1 CPU A5 and the 85102 tests 2 A20 and A A21 Perform the unratioed power test in Unratioed Power Failures to see if the samplers are working e Check thelF test set interconnect cable If the test set is an 8514A or 8515A compare the S11 and S22 traces If one looks bad and the other looks good the 85102 and 85101C are probably working Therefore suspect a problem with the test set or the IF test set interconnect cable If both S11 and S22 look bad first suspect a problem with the 85102 or the source NOTE This check does not work for 8512A and 8513A test sets H owever you can compare the al and b1 channels for unratioed power levels Refer to Unratioed Power Failures Optional Function Not Installed This messageis prompted by attempting to use an option that has not been installed in the 8510C Most probable failure Attempted use of an option that has not been installed time domain or pulse for example PhaseLock Failure Because pretune is accomplished the IF is detected by the time you see this message it usually means that the A22 pretune samplers A14 VTO and A21 IF counter are functioning When a phaselock failure occurs only after a successful pretune and the main phase lock is switched in
512. ti pped swabs Dry the connectors with dry foam ti pped swabs 3 Gage all devices cables and test port connectors The procedures for correct use of gages in the calibration kit manuals Cable Check The following series of cable tests return loss insertion loss magnitude stability phase stability and connector repeatability can be done to check the stability of a test port cable This check is recommended to avoid spending a considerable amount of time on the verification only to have a failure caused by the cables Return Loss of Cables 1 Press STIMULUS MENU STEP 2 Perform an S11 1 port measurement calibration at test port 1 Use a lowband load and a sliding load for the loads portion of the calibration If your calibration kit is an economy grade use the broadband load only If necessary refer to the operating manual for a detailed measurement calibration procedure NOTE If the fixed load in your calibration kit is labeled BROADBAND you can usethis load in thelowband portion of the measurement calibration 3 Connect thetest port cableto PORT 1 and tighten tothe specified torque for the connector type 4 Connect a broadband termination to the end of the cable 5 To measure S11 of the cable and load combination press Parameter S11 6 Tomeasurethe return loss over the entire specified band press MARKER turn the front panel knob and look for the worst case S11 measurement NOTE Thetermination used a
513. ties Some controllers do not have enough screen memory to allow you to scroll through a display of a table This is especially true for high resolution monitors Agilent recommends that you always print out the specifications DUT Length N cm and Default S Parameter Values A default DUT length and the values of the other three S parameters will always appear on uncertainty and dynamic accuracy plots This length is based on a 10 cm airline The DUT length for data sheet values is 0 cm For the reflection plots 511 or S22 the values of the other three S parameters will be 20 linear For transmission plots 621 and 512 S11 and S22 0 linear and S21 S12 Explanation of the Wording on Tables Origin date the verification kit was certified Factory verification kit disc data Field uncertainty calculated by the program Magnitude Errors Due to Device Frequency Response When measuring high frequency selective devices 8350B frequency errors can cause additional magnitude uncertainty As shown in the following filter measurement frequency errors cause a shift in the measured data resulting in a difference between the measured data and the actual data Also the measurement data shows increased noise due to the residual FM of the sweeper 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 99 Performance Verification and Specifications Reference Information for Performance Verification and Specifications Figure 8 20 START 12 590000000 G
514. tional documentation it will be located in this section The original HP 85101C display processor incorporated a cathode ray tube CRT The current design incorporates a liquid crystal display LCD In this manual references to either CRT or LCD apply to both display designs unless otherwise noted 11 2 8510C On Site Service Manual Index Numerics 8340 synthesized sweeper connecting to system 4 8 source compatibility using 4 14 system compatibility using 4 8 9 13 8350B omit isolation measurement for 8 101 sweep oscillator as system source 8 98 8360 source front panel 5 6 8360 series synthesized sweepers front panel emulator description 4 22 8510 system definition of 1 5 85101 bottom internal with CRT 5 14 bottom internal with LCD 5 26 cabinet parts 5 21 5 33 disk drive 6 9 display processor assemblies front panel external with CRT 5 15 front panel internal with CRT 5 17 front panel internal with LCD 5 28 mother board card cage 6 14 power supply troubleshooting 4 101 power supply simplified block diagram 4 98 replacement procedures 6 2 6 5 RPG rotary pulse generator 8 sides 5 20 5 32 top internal with CRT 5 12 top internal with LCD 5 24 troubleshooting power supply 4 97 85101 display processor 4 20 85102 adjustments software part number 7 16 board locations 5 36 bottom internal 5 42 C2 C3 and capacitors 6 26 cabinet parts
515. to produce thetest signal and the reference signal The test signal first passes through the DU T and port 2 coupler It is then applied tothe b2 sampler for down conversion to 20 M Hz before being sent to the 85102 IF detector The reference signal is simultaneously applied to sampler a1 where it is down converted to a 20 MHz IF and also sent to the 85102 In the case of an S11 forward reflection measurement b1 a1 the main difference from the 521 path operation is that the test signal is reflected from port 1 and coupled to the b1 sampler There it is down converted to the 20 MHz IF and sent to the 85102 S12 reverse transmission RF paths b1 a2 and S22 reverse reflection RF paths b2 a2 are similar to the transmission and reflection paths explained above The differences are that the switch splitter is switched to the reverse path position and that the a2 sampler is used in the reference signal path A similar process occurs during reverse measurements when RF power is applied to port 2 of the test set The LO signal generated by the VT O driver is phase locked to the source so that the desired VTO harmonic is 20 MHz greater than the source frequency The phase locked loop process is described in the System Phase Lock Operation section of this chapter 8510C On Site Service Manual 3 7 Theory of Operation 85102 IF Detector 85102 IF Detector ThelF detector is the first half of the 8510 network analyzer It performs a second d
516. tor trigger generator Sweep counter input buffer sweep crossing detector staircase generator It alsotests the analog output DAC programmability of the A211F counter board The A6 dock board must be working properly for this test to pass 4 140 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Service Program ADC Test A18 3 Thistest verifies that the board can be operated in calibration mode It also verifies proper operation of the offset current source 12 bit ADC and all data RAMS Failure messages may indicate which data bits are faulty Thesetypes of messages are only useful for factory repair technicians Other causes of failure of this test may be Themultiplexer of the A17 sample and hold board is injecting a signal into the A18 ADC board If it does fail remove the W24 cable that connects A17 sample and hold to A18 ADC If it passes after that the A17 sample and hold board is probably faulty Cal DAC Test A17 4 This test verifies that the CAL DAC on the A17 sample and hold board can properly calibrate the eight bit DAC on the A18 ADC board The ADC test should be run prior to this test Additionally the running error message ADC CAL FAILED can be the result of a faulty A17 sample and hold board Other causes of failure of this test may be Afaulty A18 ADC board primarily the 10 volt reference 100 kHz IF Amplifier Test A10 A12 5 This test verifies the ability of the test and
517. tude uncertainty The equation contains all of the first order terms and some of the significant second order terms Theterms under the radical are random in character and are combined on an RSS basis Theterms in the systematic error group are combined on a worst case basis all cases the error terms are treated as linear absolute magnitudes Transmission magnitude uncertainty forward direction 2 2 Ert Systematic Random Drift amp Stability Systematic Ef EfsS11 EflS22 EfsEfIS21812 Ab2 S21 Random decry Rt No Ct S21 dcm Ctm2 1811 2 Crm2822 2 Rt S21 Crt2 2 Crr1S11 2 Crr2S22 Nt 21 2 Drift amp Stability Dm2b2S21 where Crt2 Connector repeatability transmission port 2 Crr2 Connector repeatability reflection port 2 Efnt effective noise on trace Efnf effective noise floor 1 connector repeatability reflection Crt1 connector repeatability transmission Ctm1 cable 1 transmission magnitude stability Crm1 cable 1 reflection magnitude stability Ctm2 cable 2 transmission magnitude stability Crm2 cable 2 reflection magnitude stability Dms1 drift magnitude C source to port Efs effective source match error Eft effective transmission tracking error effective load match error Efc effective crosstalk error 8 80 8510C On Site Service Manual Performance Verificatio
518. tures sri dea RAE RR RT A C A 8 15 Using Markers on Uncertainty Plebs assa pote x RR Eoo a RR RC ua 8 15 Choosing User Generated Error e n 8 16 Generating Customized System Uncertainty Plots 8 16 Using User Generated Specifications in System Verification 8 16 Entering S parameters ar the DUT u u sk LIx4 esee xk due RARE gene RA 8 16 Entering User Labels or Comments on Plats 8 17 Entering User Labels or Comments System Verification Reports 8 17 Performing System Verilficeti ofi ius sua nsus oor sek EA RO HORROR GE RR Ro RR RU XR Rn 8 18 Contents 7 Contents Changing Error Term Values cisci sua gk ERR dee pe wed Pee es Rees RA GA P ER 8 18 Handling Customized Error Tert 8 18 Using the Error Term Table ER RR ee ee ER n 8 19 Saving Edited Error Term Values ides ded ieee y dd na ue ER hd ag 8 20 Recalling a Custom Error liue sime erm RERO ERR ERE RR qaq 8 20 A Tutorial adi cases ebore shaq qaa CRY ra HERE Rd eda 8 21 Selecting the Hardware for 8510SX System 8 21 Examining Error Term Tables Exercis 1 2
519. tware A Tutorial S21 Magnitude Upper Case Uncertainty User Parameters amp for Special Test Set S21 MAGNITUDE LOWER WORST CRSE UNCERTAINTY USER PARAMETERS S21 Worst Case Uncertainty dB 521 Figure 8 4 18 10 008 S21 Measurement Level dB from Ref HP8510C HP8511R NOSOURCE NOCRLKIT BL NOCRBLES 16 Dec 1992 16 59 33 Freq GHz 845 to 8 8 to 28 20 to 26 5 DUT Length 10 cm 511 8 512 S21 522 351 S21 Magnitude Lower Case Uncertainty User Parameters amp for Special Test Set Sel MAGNITUDE LOWER WORST CASE UNCERTAINTY USER PARAMETERS S21 Worst Case Uncertainty dB 8510C On Site Service Manual 2 1 05 02 01 dB from Ref 892 20 26 5 248 S21 Measurement Level S21 40 000 045 2 HP8510C HPBSISR HP83631H HP85052C TL NOCRBLES 16 Dec 1992 17 16 21 Freq GHz 2045 to 2 0 B to 20 20 to 26 5 DUT Length 18 cm 511 S12 521 522 9 98 8 31 Performance Verification and Specifications Using the Software A Tutorial Table 8 7 Using Non Standard Test Cables Exercise 3c Answers Questions Answers Assuming you have specified No Cables in the Hardware Configuration menu which error terms do you need to degrade to account for these cables What is the calculated worst case loss of the custom cables Which reflection and transmission test should you perform to determine the st
520. ty Refer to Chapter 4 Main Troubleshooting Procedure NOTE Theintensity level is read without a display bezel installed The glass filter transmits 6096 of the display light therefore 100 NITs would be 60 NITs with the bezel installed 8510C On Site Service Manual 7 15 Adjustments Procedure 4 Sweep ADC Gain Adjustment Procedure 4 Sweep ADC Gain Adjustment NOTE This procedure does not work with an 8360 series source You must use an 8340 41 A B Equipment 12 SMB assembly 5061 1022 M F M SMB tee 1250 1391 85102 service adjustments disk 08510 10024 Controller HP 9000 series 200 or 300 Description and Procedure When the 8510 system is making swept frequency measurement it must sample the data at points equally spaced between the start and stop frequencies The sweep analog to digital converter ADC controls when to trigger the sample and hold amplifiers so that the data will betaken at the correct frequencies The A20 sweep ADC board generates a staircase waveform that tracks the sweep voltage from the source This procedure adjusts the sweep ADC gain to compensate for component tolerance in the staircase generation circuit 1 After loading BASIC intothe controller memory insert the 85102 Service adjustments software disk into the controller disk drive Refer to the beginning of the chapter for a procedure on how to load BASIC TypeLOAD ADJ 85102 EXECUTE When the program is loaded press RUN Pressthe
521. uations is obtained from the following error model Example plots of generated dynamic accuracy curves are located earlier in this chapter Figure 8 18 Dynamic Accuracy Error Model Flowgraph b1 Path Ldvib1 Lfvib1xF 1 1 Geb1 1 4 1 Mpb1 Geb1 IF autorange gain error Pccb1 compression error Mpb1 error of magnitude versus phase shift Lbx1 crystal filter linearity error Rebli Reblc IF residuals signal error Ldvib1 Lfvib1 Loss of converter Where all the terms are expressed in linear format Dynamic Accuracy A which is used in the corrected error model flow graph to determine measurement uncertainty ss437c Measurement Traceability To establish a measurement traceability path to a national standard for a network analyzer system the overall system performance is verified through the measurement of device characteristics that have a traceability path This is accomplished by electrically measuring devices in an Agilent verification kit Refer to H ow to Verify System Performance for the system performance verification procedure The measurement of the verification kit device characteristics has a traceable path because the factory system that characterizes the devices is calibrated and verified by measuring standards that have a traceable path to the National Institute of Standards Technology NIST This chain of measurements defines how the verification process brings NIST traceability to the 8510
522. ubleshooting Disconnect the 85101 IF display interconnect cable at the 85101C display processor rear panel f an error message appears on the display refer to Running Error Messages fthefan is not working refer to Fan Troubleshooting near the end of this section Check the Green and Red LEDs on the A10 Preregulator Turn on the 85101C display processor and look at the rear panel of the analyzer Check the two power supply diagnostic LEDs on the A10 preregulator casting by looking through the holes located tothe left of the line voltage selector switch see Figure 4 12 Normally the bottom green LED is on and thetop red LED is off fthese LEDs are normal then A10 is 9596 verified Continuethis procedure at Check the Green LEDs on the A3 Post Regulator fthered LED is on or flashing then refer Determine Why the Red LED on 10 15 On or Flashing fthegreen LED is not on steadily then the line voltage is missing or is insufficient to power the 85101C Continue this procedure at Determine Why the Green LED on A10 Is Not On Steadily in this section Figure 4 12 Location of A10 Preregulator Diagnostic LEDs Line Voltage Selector Switch Red LED Green LED Normally Off Normally On Check the Green LEDs on the A3 Post Regulator Turn off the 85101C Remove the 85101C display processor top cover and make sure that all board assemblies are firmly seated in their connectors Turn the 85101C on Locat
523. ues to develop outputs equal to the real X and imaginary Y parts of the signal 8 ThelF detector digitizes the X and Y sample pairs 9 Thedisplay processor reads the sample pairs processes them and displays them on the CRT LCD 8510C On Site Service Manual 3 15 Theory of Operation System Phase Lock Operation System Phase Lock Operation Components of the phase lock system are in each of the 8510 system instruments the source the test set the F detector and the display processor Therefore a malfunction or bad connection in any of the instruments can cause a phase lock problem and generate running error message Running error messages indicatethat a fault was detected at a particular step in the phase lock sequence not at a particular physical location Running error messages allow the system to keep running Until cleared the messages remain on display even if the problem has ended Four main assemblies constitute the phase lock system Pretune assembly in the IF detector VTO summing amp assembly in the test set IF counter assembly in the IF detector Main phase lock assembly in the I F detector Additionally the display processor memory and processor assemblies are involved in controlling and monitoring the phase lock system The F detector IF mixer assemblies are part of the main phase locked loop but they are less important in determining loop operation The 8510 uses two sepa
524. uick Reference 9 8 8510C On Site Service Manual System Installation Checking the Shipment and Unpacking the System Unpacking the System Cabinet CAUTION The cabinet packaging is designed for the system cabinet standing upright on a pallet Do not store or install instruments in the cabinet when it is on its side or back Major damage to the instruments and to the cabinet can occur 8510C On Site Service Manual 9 9 System Installation Checking the Shipment and Unpacking the System Figure 9 2 Unpacking the System 1 Cut the wrapping bands on the crate Snap off the retaining clips on the sides of the crate Remove the cardboard cover 2 out the ramp The cardboard spacer below it can be discarded as can the plastic foam around the cabinet 3 Remove the wooden spacer at the lower end in back of the cabinet Slide the ramp over the short rear panel at the bottom Atleast two people are required to control the system cabinet in the next step Theloaded cabinet weighs approximately 600 pounds DO NOT attempt to lift the cabinet Do not allow anyone in front of the cabinet when it is being rolled down the ramp 4 Have at least two people roll the cabinet down the ramp carefully Hold back on the front edges of the cabinet with a person staninding on either side of it to avoid getting in the way of the heavy rolling cabinet 9 10 8510C On Site Service Manual System Installation Checking the Shipment and Unpack
525. uipped with a CRT display A5 CPU Board 1 3 85101C equipped with a CRT display A6 EEPROM Board 1 3 85101C equipped with a CRT display A7 Input Output Board none A8 Security K ey Board none A9 Rear Panel none A10 Preregulator none A11 Display 1 3 85101C equipped with a CRT display A14 Graphic System Processor LCD none 85101C equipped with a LCD display A15 LCD Assembly none 85101C equipped with a LCD display A16 Backlight Inverter Board none 85101C equipped with a LCD display 85102 IF Detector A1 Front Panel none A1A1 Front Panel Interface none 2 4 Pulse Option only A5 Test Synchronous Detector 7 A6 Clock 8 A7 Reference Synchronous Detector 7 A8 19 9 MHzLO none A9 B2 IF Mixer 5 A10 Test IF Amplifier 6 A11 B1IF Mixer 5 A12 Reference IF Amplifier 6 A13 A2 IF Mixer 5 A14 Al IF Mixer 5 A15 Regulator none A16 Remote Applications none A17 Sample and Hold none A18 ADC none A19 ADC Control none A20 Sweep ADC 4 A21 IF Counter none A22 Pretune none A23 Main Phase L ock none A24 Interface none A25 Motherboard none A26 Rectifier none 7 8 8510C On Site Service Manual Adjustments Safety Considerations Table 7 4 Test Equipment for 8510 Adjustments Instrument Recommended Model Critical Specifications Controller HP 9000 series 200 or 300 No substitute Photometer Tektronix J 16 Option 2 No substitute Photometer Probe Tektronix J 6503 Option 2 No substitute Light Occluder Tektronix
526. uments in one of the configurations in Figure 9 5 Different configurations are possible including single stack and equal stack 2x2 styles Figure 9 5 Typical Bench Top Configurations DO NOT REMOVE INSTRUMENT FEET on any of the system components DAMAGE WILL OCCUR to the instruments if ventilation is restricted CONFIGURATION A CONFIGURATION Model Width Height Depth Approximate Weight 85101C with a CRT display 41 875 cm 17 5 am 21 25 in 22 3 kg 16 75 in 7 in 53 125 cm 49 Ib 85101C with an LCD 41 875 cm 17 5 cm 21 25 13 2 9 16 75 7 in 53 125 cm 331b 85102B 41 875 cm 13 126 cm 2125 20 5 kg 16 75 in 5 25 in 53 125 am 45 Ib 9 16 8510C On Site Service Manual System Installation Making System Connections Making System Connections The 8510 system requires that several types of cables be connected see Figure 9 6 Figure 9 6 System Connections HP 85102 KEN IF DETECTOR B g E 2 FOR HP 8360 USE A ONC DORESS 16 SS Q m SHORT MUST CONNECTED THE HP 05102 SWEEP O 10V F PRESENT HP 851X FXF TEST SET T CA FOR HP 8340 OR 5360 USE ADORESS 20 om BNC SHORT MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE HP 86102 TRIGGER INPUT For systems without controllers connect any 1 Power cables must be connected to HP 85101 peripherals to the 8510 interconnect on the HP 85102 test set source and any peripherals HP 85101 For systems with controllers con 2 Connect
527. upply Failures If the analyzer appears dead or the display is dark or the fan is not operating properly or the front panel LEDs are either not functioning or all remain lit goto Control Configuration and Cabling Pre Operational Checks on page 4 8 and then to Power Supply Failures on page 4 97 Performance Test Failures f you have performed the verification procedures in Chapter 8 and any part of the tests resulted in a failure goto Control Configuration and Cabling Pre Operational Checks on page 4 8 and then to Performance Test Failures on page 4 119 Software Failures If you havetrouble running the operating system or if there are problems controlling the system over GPIB goto Control Configuration and Cabling Pre Operational Checks on page 4 8 and then to Software Failures on page 4 121 4 6 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Troubleshooting Outline Abbreviated 8510C System Service Flowchart cont Running Error Messages If a running error appears press EENTRY OFF MEASUREMENT RESTART If the message repeats refer to Control Configuration and Cabling Pre Operational Checks If necessary see Running Error Messages Unratioed Power Failures If you suspect an unratioed power failure refer to Control Configuration and Cabling Pre Operational Checks If necessary see Unratioed Power Failures Other Obvious Failure Types With each of the fo
528. ure to balance the test port signal path with the reference signal path Part numbers of the long and short rpecs are listed in thetest set manuals Recommended When Using Ramp Mode Figure 9 8 Reference Port Extension Cables Symmetrical Test Setup ATTENTION b One Long Extension Two Equal Length Cobles DUT Connected to Port 1 Static Sensitive Handle only at Static Safe 8510C On Site Service Manual 9 19 System Installation Making System Connections General Purpose Interface Bus GPIB Cables GPIB allows either the system display processor or an external controller to operate the various instruments of the system GPIB interface operates according to IEEE 488 1978 and IEC 625 standards and IEEE 728 1982 recommended practices References to GPIB and HP IB refer to the same protocol NOTE Always turn off power to instruments when connecting GPIB cables As many as fifteen instruments can be connected in parallel on GPIB but proper voltage levels and timing relationships must be maintained Observe the following limitations 2meters 6 feet is the maximum cable length to each instrument 20 meters 65 feet is the maximum total cable length between all units The following GPIB cables are available 10833C 4 m 13 feet 10833B 2 m 6 feet 10833A 1 m 3 feet 10833D 0 5 m 1 5 feet Serial Printer Setup 1 SeeFigure 9 9 Connec the desired 8510C serial input tothe laser printer serial input and turn
529. ureit is consistent and repeatable Press ENTRY OFF to remove the message from the screen then press MEASUREMENT RESTART to initiate another sweep Many times a message such as PHASE LOCK LOST is only a momentary loss of lock that be corrected on the next sweep If the message disappears there is real problem If the message repeats go to Control Configuration and Cabling Pre Operational Checks and then if necessary to Running Error M essages Unratioed Power Failures A standard analyzer measurement is a ratio of two signals For troubleshooting purposes the frequency response of one signal only is checked in an unratioed absolute power mode through each of the signal paths Observed problems can then be isolated to the components in the faulty signal path Goto Control Configuration and Cabling Pre Operational Checks and then follow the procedures in Unratioed Power Failures on page 4 85 Other Obvious Failure Types Sometimes the nature of a failure may be obvious to a trained Agilent 8510 repair person and you can go straight to the troubleshooting section for that type of failure Obvious failuretypes in addition to self test failures running errors and unratioed power failures are power supply failures performance test failures and software failures These failures may or may not seem obvious It is not important to be ableto recognize them the total troubleshooting sequence will isolate them Power S
530. uts from the display processor 465 V power supply Digital TTL horizontal and vertical sync signals RGB red green and blue video signals Background and intensity signals Display Assemblies LCD Graphics Processor A14 is the main interface between the A5 central processing unit CPU and the A15 liquid crystal display LCD The CPU converts the formatted data into GSP commands and writes it to the A14 graphics processor GSP The GSP processes the data to generate analog and digital video signals that are used for Theanalog video signals generated are VGA compatible RGB video signals which are buffered and routed to the real panel Thedigital videosignals generated aretranslated to 3 3 volt levels buffered and routed totheA15 LCD The A14 assembly receives the 5 V power from the motherboard that is used for processing and supplying power to the LCD 43 3 V and backlight inverter 5 V LCD Assembly A15 is an 8 4 inch liquid crystal display LCD with associated drive circuitry t receives a 43 3 V power supply from the A14 graphics processor The display receives the following signals from the A14 digital horizontal sync digital vertical sync digital blanking data dock digital red video digital green video digital blue video TheA15LCD display includes the backlight lamp and inverter The lamp attaches to the LCD display frame but is electrically separate The backlight is powered by a separate con
531. ve A6 and all GPIB cables Rerun self test number 8 If it does not pass check the control lines Inthemain Service Functions test menu press 2 2 MARKER to enter 8510 Service Program menu Select 85101 Display Processor Service Program and run thel O Board and Front Panel Tests Al A2 A7 Test 9 A9 Interrupt System Most likely cause of failure A71 O board failure 90 A5 processor board failure 1096 A8 motherboard trace connector failure 196 Additional troubleshooting hints In the main Service Functions test menu press 2 2 MARKER to enter the 8510 Service Program menu Select 85101 Display Processor Service Program and run the CPU Board Tests A5 Test 10 A5 Multiplier Most likely cause of failure Ab processor board failure 100 Additional troubleshooting hints n the main Service Functions test menu press 2 2 to enter the 8510 Service Program menu Select 85101 Display Processor Service Program and run the CPU Board Tests A5 Test 11 A7 Disc Controller Most likely cause of failure A71 O board failure 50 1 1 disk drive 50 Additional troubleshooting hints Check the power supply to the disk drive If out of tolerance check the supplies on the power supply board Inthemain Service Functions test menu press 2 2 MARKER to enter 8510 Service Program menu Select 85101 Display Processor Service Program and run thel O Board and Front Pan
532. ved remove the device causing the magnetic field Figure 10 2 Motion for Degaussing the Display ve 2 A E 24 10cm BULK TAPE ERASER CRT DEMAGNITIZER 8510C On Site Service Manual 10 5 Preventive Maintenance Inspect the Error Terms Inspect the Error Terms Error terms E terms or calibration coefficients are an indication of the condition of the instrument its calibration kits and cables When tracked over a period of time error terms can signal and identify system component and performance degradation Error term comparisons are best made with data generated periodically by the same instrument and calibration kit the kit normally used with the analyzer For this reason generating error terms at the time of installation and at regular intervals thereafter is recommended A log book can be a helpful to store the error term plots Error term plots are generated by performing the verification procedure Refer to the operating manual for information how to perform a full 2 port or TRL 2 port microwave calibration To inspect the error terms or compare them to typical values refer to Error Terms in Chapter 4 Main Troubleshooting Procedure 10 6 8510C On Site Service Manual 11 Instrument History Instrument History Overview Overview This manual applies directly to analyzers with serial prefix numbers indicated on the title page If your analyzer has a lower serial prefix and you need addi
533. ved results do not match any of those given in the table re evaluate and possibly 1 Doa factory preset of the analyzer and put the source into step mode On the network analyz re measure your observed data If the data is valid troubleshoot using the RF path diagram s er press INSTRUMENT STATE MORE FACTORY PRESET STIMULUS MENU given in this foldout for the bad signal traces STEP START 0 045000000 GHz START 0 045000000 GHz START 0 045000000 GHz START 0 045000000 GHz START 0 045000000 GHz STOP 20 000000000 GHz STOP 20 000000000 GHz STOP 20 000000000 GHz STOP 20 000000000 GHz STOP 20 000000000 GHz RF Path 3 User 4 b1 Reflected If all the paths are good then the test set is probably working properly Return to the Main RF Path 4 User 2 b2 Reflected Troubleshooting Procedure to continue troubleshooting the system c 2 examine the four sampler IF signals it is necessary to redefine what port and sampler the analyzer uses for phaselock Press PARAMETER MENU User 3 a2 REDEFINE PARAMETER DRIVE Port 2 PHASE LOCK a2 REDEFINE DONE to redefine a2 P User 2 b2 REDEFINE PARAMETER DRIVE Port 2 PHASE LOCK a2 sd seil i c s ss ress User ort REDE an
534. want and press the Print softkey to print them out 5 Press Prior Menu to return to the main menu 6 Toprint or plot dynamic accuracy or total uncertainty for the system configuration specified press System Uncert These specifications are available as plots or tables based on data sheet or system specification values with upper or lower limits explained in Reference I nformation for Performance Verification and Specifications later in this chapter Dynamic accuracy errors are a function of signal power level and are calculated and included as a component of the total uncertainty calculation They can be described as follows the down converted RF signal passes through the 85102 IF detector and is either attenuated or amplified in order to be further down converted and processed for display Because of this the signal has some magnitude and phase inaccuracies that vary with signal levels By plotting the dynamic accuracy specifications of your system you can see how dynamic accuracy changes with power level 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 59 Performance Verification and Specifications How to Run the System Specifications and Uncertainties Program Dynamic accuracy or total system uncertainty values with correction ON are calculated using equations derived from a flowgraph model of the measurement system Therefore total uncertainty can be described as a computation of all the residual errors that affect your measurement NOT
535. with LCD 8510C On Site Service Manual 5 31 Replaceable P arts Replaceable Parts for an 85101C Equipped with an LCD 85101C Left and Right Sides with LCD Display Figure 5 17 Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number 1 0515 2086 19 MACH SCREW M4 0 7MM TX 28480 0515 2086 2 0515 1382 1 MACH SCREW M3 5 8MM TX 28480 0515 1382 3 0515 1402 2 SCREW MACH M3 5 8 PCPNTX 28480 0515 1402 5 32 8510C On Site Service Manual Replaceable P arts Replaceable Parts for an 85101 Equipped with an LCD Table 5 12 85101C Cabinet Parts with LCD Ref Agilent Part Qty Description Mfr Mfr Part Desig Number Code Number 1 5062 3735 2 TOP AND BOTTOM COVER 28480 5062 3735 2 5021 5837 4 CORNER STRUT 28480 5021 5837 3 5041 8802 1 TRIM STRIP 28480 5041 8802 4 5062 3817 1 COVER SIDE PERFORATED 28480 5062 3817 5 5021 8405 1 FRONT FRAME 28480 5021 8405 6 5062 3800 1 HANDLE ASSEMBLY 28480 5062 3800 7 0515 0896 8 MACH SCREW M4 0 10MM FL PD 28480 0515 0896 8 5021 8497 2 TRIM FRONT HANDLE 28480 5021 8497 9 5041 8821 1 STRAP HANDLE CAP FRONT 28480 5041 8821 10 0515 1132 2 MACH SCREW M5 0 10MM FL PD 28480 0515 1132 11 5041 8820 1 STRAP HANDLE CAP REAR 28480 5041 8820 12 5062 3704 1 STRAP HANDLE 28480 5062 3704 13 5062 3842 1 COVER SIDE HANDLE 28480 5062 3842 14 5061 5806 1 REAR FRAME 28480 5061 5806 15 0515 2086 16 MACH SCREW M4 0 7MM FLP TX 28480 0515 2086 NOTE corner struts are part of moth
536. x is the maximum power that can be applied to port 2 before 0 1 dB compression 8 28 8510C On Site Service Manual Table 8 3 Performance Verification and Specifications Using the Software A Tutorial Computing Uncertainty Curves Exercise 2 Answers Questions Answers 1 Onthe S11 magnitude uncertainty curve at 26 5 GHz what is the estimated effective directivity How does the estimated value compare with the data sheet value The value is 0 004 linear which is equivalent to 48 dB To estimate the effective directivity look for the uncertainty when S11 0 a perfect load 48 dB is dose to the data sheet value of 50 dB 2 Onthe S21 magnitude uncertainty curve at 26 5 GHz what is the estimated system dynamic range Does the value correspond with the data sheet The estimated value is around 68 dB or 70 dB depending upon how you read the graph To estimate the dynamic range look on the 521 uncertainty curve The curve shows S21 in dB from reference power Find wherethe uncertainty becomes too large Too large can be considered to be gt 6 dB uncertainty esti mated dynamic range about 68 dB wherethe noise power equals the signal power gt 10 dB uncertainty which is off the graph corresponding to 70 dB dynamic range The data sheet value of 74 dB corresponds with the estimated value 3 Compare the 511 and S21 phase uncertainty curves with the data sheet Why are th
537. y It consists of multiple alternating white and black vertical stripes E ach stripe should be dearly visible A limited bandwidth would smear these lines together This is used to test the quality of the external monitor Test Pat 12 Displays a repeating gray scale for troubleshooting using an oscilloscope It is similar to the 16 step gray scale but is repeated 20 times across the screen Each of the 3 outputs of the video palette will then show 20 ramps instead of one staircase between each horizontal sync pulse This pattern is used to troubleshoot the pixel processing drcuit of the A14 display interface board Test Pat 13 Displays a convergence pattern for measuring the accuracy of the color convergence of the external monitor Test Pat 14 15 Displays crosshatch and inverse crosshatch patterns for testing color convergence linearization alignment This is useful when aligning the LCD in the bezel 4 48 8510C On Site Service Manual Main Troubleshooting P rocedure LCD Failures A16 Backlight Inverter Board Circuit Description The A16 inverter assembly supplies the ac voltage for the backlight lamp in the A15 LCD assembly This assembly takes the 45 Vdc from the A14 GSP and converts it to approximately 680 Vac steady state At start up the voltage can reach up to 1 5 kVac There are two control lines digital ON OFF analog brightness 100 intensity is V 50 intensity is 4 5 V WARNIN
538. y Accuracy Setup 8510 0000 0000 SYNTHESIZED SWEEPER 00 B D B 55439 2 To preset the system instruments press INSTRUMENT STATE RECALL MORE FACTORY PRESET For 83621 31 51 Synthesizers 3 Run the front panel emulation software On the analyzer press AUXILIARY MENUS SYSTEM MORE SERVICE FUNCTIONS TEST MENU 1 9 LOAD PROGRAM DISC MARKER 4 LOAD FILE 2 FRONT PANEL EMULATOR MARKER Put the keypad overlay on the analyzer front panel The overlay part of the front panel emulator kit 4 Toinitiate a synthesizer full user cal that includes auto track and sweep span cal press USER CAL k0 Full Usr Cal k0 proceed The user cal takes a few minutes to complete NOTE Auto track is not an adjustment it must be done to ensure the source specifications are met Agilent recommends you do an auto track every time you do a measurement calibration 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 45 Performance Verification and Specifications Frequency Test Procedures 5 Follow the instructions on the analyzer display to exit the front panel emulator software Continue with step 6 For All Other 8360 Series Synthesizers 3 Toinitiate an auto track press the following keys on the synthesizer PRESET USER CAL FREQ CAL MENU ONCE 4 To initiate a sweep span cal press the following keys on the synthesizer PRESET USER CAL F
539. ypical reference power at port 1 maximum power at port 2 minimum power at port 2 and dynamic range The symbol for the error terms that is used in the system error model located later in this chapter The specifications are generated for each frequency band 8510C On Site Service Manual 8 61 Performance Verification and Specifications Interpreting the Specification and Uncertainties Printouts Example 8 6 NOTES 1 2 3 4 NOTE 8 62 Raw Test Port Errors System Specifications Test Port Errors Correction OFF ersten c Test Port Errors Correction OE HP8510B Enhanced Model 5 188063 2 4mm 5 45MHz 406Hz 8516 Synth 10MHz 40GHz 505 2 4mm Slotless Standard Grade SL Sliding Load Cal HP85133D pair short cables 2 4mm 2 4wm Netuork finalyzer Test Set Source Calibration Kit Calibration Technique Test Port Cables tEterm Frequency Description Of Error iSymbl 045 2 2 20 20 36 36 40 Drift Source Frequency GHz Dsf 0 00 2 008 0 000 0 002 Rau Fud Directivity dB Rfd i 14 00 7 00 7 06 7 00 Raw Fwd Reflection tracking dB 27 9000 8 0000 11 0000 19 0002 Fud Source match dB Rfs 10 00 13 30 7 00 6 50 Raw Fud Crosstalk dB Rfc 85 20 85 00 72 00 65 00 Raw Fwd Transmission tracking dB Rft 19 0000 16
540. zation Failed This message occurs when a disk will not initialize in the 85101C disk drive Most probable failure 85101C disk drive disk media No IF Found This error is detected by the level detector and the 85102 A21 IF counter board This is done using an algorithm in the 85101C math CPU to calculate the IF frequency The A21 counter and the CPU check if thelF is within range and has enough power If not the CPU initiates a search mode that attempts to relocate the test set harmonic to re establish the 20 MHz IF This message is displayed if the IF is not found or is not within range Probable cause of failure RF source signal may be absent low in power or at an incorrect frequency e 85102 A21 IF counter board Test set samplers Be sure that the test set summing amplifier assembly has not biased the samplers off M easurethe voltage on the sampler control pin to each sampler 8510C On Site Service Manual 4 77 Main Troubleshooting P rocedure Running Error Messages to verify TTL levels O volts turns the sampler on and approximately 3 volts or greater turns it off You can press the S parameter front panel keys to toggle the samplers Defective cable in the IF signal path Test set component failure A weak V TO bad power amplifier step recovery diode or 4 way power splitter in the VT O 85101C A5 math CPU 85102 stop sweep cable not connected Occasionally the 85102 A20 sweep ADC can cause

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Marmitek GB843  Dealing with Evidence: The Programatica Certificate Abstraction  OCR Document - AEG  Fortinet FortiVoice-24  BoConcept Model 19 Assembly Instruction  On-stie troubleshooting of microbial issues  Philips Remote control CRP608  Cooler Master CM 690 III  Spreadsheet Manual - Motor Data Solutions  CREATING A REQUISITION  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file